Uploaded by gus1302

07 Honda Fit SM manual tecnico

advertisement
INTRODUCTION
G e n e r a l Information
• How to Use This Manual
This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
reference system.
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
° Parts disassembly sequence.
• Bolt torques and thread sizes.
• Page references to descriptions in text
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
\
i
Specifications
• • i j
Eft
Maintenance
i
* E n g i n e Electrical
+
flflH
SINE
I
H I
i
Engine Mechanical
•1J\^?--|T.,V
j
Engine Cooling
- Safety Messages
^
i
^—•—
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
• Safety Labels — on the vehicle.
• Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol J j ^ and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
^ M r a ^
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
• Instructions — how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s
*Transaxle
^Steering
Suspension
|
Brakes
(Including A B S )
:
i
I
*Body
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures, and tables.
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a | NOTICE [ symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
mI f f * !
* H e a t i n g , Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning
* B o d y Electrical
•
*Audio
-
BODY
As sections with * include SRS components;
special precautions are r e q u i r e d when s e r v i c i n g .
•
j
!
!
HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
First Edition 04/2006
S e r v i c e Publication Office
All Rights Reserved
Specifications apply to U.S.A. and Canada
!
^Restraints
f
2007 Honda Fit
9 H
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS)
The Fit SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the
glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, driver's seat belt outer lap tensioner in the driver's seat
belt lower anchor, front passenger's seat belt outer lap tensioners in the front passenger's seat belt lower anchor, side
curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service
the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are
located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and
tools, and should be done only by an authorized Honda dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors w h e n the ignition switch is ON (II),
or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the
airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
1-2
Identification Number Locations
1-3
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-4
Under-hood Emission Control Label
1-6
Lift and Support Points
1-7
Towing
1-8
Parts Marking
1-10
Chassis and Paint Codes
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
L15A1
JHM GD3 8 4 * 7
b
cdef
S
- 1100001
000001
b
g
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle
J H M : HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
HONDA passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
GD3: FIT/L15A1
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
7: 4-door Hatchback/5-speed Manual
8: 4-door Hatchback/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
USA Models
Canada Models
4: Fit
2: DX
6: Fit Sport
4: LX
6: Sport
Check Digit
Model Year
7:2007
Factory Code
S: Suzuka Factory in Japan
Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : USA Models
800001—: Canada Models
a. Engine Type
L 1 5 A 1 : 1.5 L SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
S M M A - 1000001
a. Transmission Type
S M J M : 5-speed Manual
S M M A : 5-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
Paint Coc e
Code
Color
NH-578
NH-642M
B-92P
B-520P
Taffeta White
Storm Silver Metallic
Nighthawk Black Pearl
Vivid Blue Pearl
Lunar Mist Metallic
Milano Red
Blaze Orange Metallic
Alabaster Silver Metallic
B-528M
R-81
YR-552M
NH-700M
~
USA
Models
O
o
Canada
Models
o
o
~
0
1
o
•:.
COLOR
Vehicle Identification N u m b e r
and Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety S t a n d a r dCertification.
Vehicle Identification N u m b e r
and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety S t a n d a r dCertification.
1-2
O
LABEL
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification N u m b e r (VIN)
Engine Number
Transmission N u m b e r (Manual)
Vehicle Identification N u m b e r
(Automatic)
(VIN)
General information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Front Passenger's Compartment:
NOTE: FRONT PASSENGER (CHILD SEAT) AIRBAG WARNING TAG is installed on the glove box in the USA models.
S R S
FRONT
INFORMATION
P A S S E N G E R
M O D U L E
D A N G E R
S R S WARNING
INFORMATION
SIDE AIRBAG M O D U L E
DANGER
FRONT SEAT BELT
TENSIONER WARNING
STEERING
C O L U M N NOTICE
MONITOR
\
NOTICE
OUTER LAP TENSIONER
Steering
WARNING
Rear Passenger's
Wheel:
Compartment:
ROOF SIDE M O D U L E DANGER
DRIVER M O D U L E DANGER
CABLE REEL
1-4
CAUTION
RADIATOR CAP
DANGER
1
General information
Under-hood Emission Control Label
Emission Group Identification
Test Group and Evaporative Family
Example:
Test Group:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
7 HNX V 01.5
YKC
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN S REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS AND
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YAER NEW
LEV II LEV PASSENGER CARS.
c
d
CATALYST
e
TWC, A/F SENSOR, H02S, EGR, SFI
VALVE LASH IN: 0.17±0.02 mm
(COLD)
EX: 0.28±0.02 mm
NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.
EX H AU S T E M18810N8.. 8T A HP A R P S
ARB: LEV II LEV g.
"
.". "" i
EPA: TIER 2 BIN 5 ICE RTI Fl C A T IO N AND 1N-USEI
OS)
HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD.
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV II LEV PASSENGER CARS.
a. Model Year
7: 2007
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
d. Displacement Group
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
7 HNX R 0098
a b
BBA
cd
a. Model Year
7: 2007
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
1-6
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components
such as the suspension or the fuel tank f r o m the rear of
the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle w i t h tall
safety stands. W h e n substantial weight is removed
f r o m the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can
change causing the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist.
Frame Hoist
Floor Jack
1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
brake. W h e n lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
shift lever in reverse for manual transmission, or in
the P position for automatic transmission.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A) under the vehicle's'
front support points (B) and rear support points (C).
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center
the jacking bracket in the jack lift platform (C), and
jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety
stands under it.
A
C
B
C
2. Raise the hoist a f e w inches, and rock the vehicle
gently to be sure it is f i r m l y supported.
3. Raise the hoist to its full height, and inspect the lift
points for solid contact w i t h the lift blocks.
Safety Stands
B
C
4. Position the safety stands under the support points,
and adjust t h e m so the vehicle is level.
5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points (B and C) as for a frame hoist. Always
use safety stands w h e n working on or under any
vehicle that is supported only by a jack.
1-7
General Information
Towing
If the vehicle needs t o be t o w e d , call a professional
t o w i n g service. Never t o w the vehicle behind another
vehicle w i t h a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of t o w i n g a vehicle.
Flat-bed Equipment — The operator loads the vehicle
on the back of a truck. This is the best way of
transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is
equipped w i t h a front t o w i n g hook (A), front tie d o w n
hook slots (B), rear t o w i n g hook (C), and rear tie d o w n
hook slots (D).
The t o w i n g hook can be used w i t h a winch to pull the
vehicle onto the truck, and the tie d o w n hook slots can
be used to secure the vehicle to the truck.
Front:
B
1-8
Rear:
Front Towing Hook Installation
1. Remove the cover (A) f r o m the front bumper.
Wheel Lift Equipment — The t o w truck uses t w o
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
lift t h e m off the ground. The other t w o wheels remain
on the ground. This is an acceptable w a y of towing the
vehicle.
Sling-type Equipment — The t o w truck uses metal
cables w i t h hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this
method of t o w i n g is attempted.
If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed, it
should be t o w e d w i t h the front wheels off the ground. If
the vehicle is damaged, the vehicle must be t o w e d w i t h
the front wheels on the ground.
2. Remove the t o w i n g hook (B) f r o m the tool kit.
3. Screw the t o w i n g hook into the bolt hole (C) in the
bumper and tighten it securely by hand.
Manual Transmission
• Release the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission to neutral.
• Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESORY (I)
position so the steering wheel does not lock.
Automatic Transmission
• Release the parking brake.
° Start the engine.
• Shift to the D position, then to the N position.
• Turn off the engine.
• Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESORY (I)
position so the steering wheel does not lock.
It is best to t o w the vehicle no farther than 50 miles
(80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
NOTlCEl
• Improper t o w i n g preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine
(automatic transmission), the vehicle must be
transported on a flat-bed.
• Trying to lift or t o w the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's w e i g h t
General Information
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked w i t h the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These labels should not be
removed. The original engine or transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the replacement engine or
transmission.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
1-10
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits
E n g i n e Electrical
.
Engine A s s e m b l y C y l i n d e r Head
Engine Block
Engine L u b r i c a t i o n
...
Cooling S y s t e m
Fuel and E m i s s i o n s
Clutch
.............
M a n u a l T r a n s m i s s i o n a n d M/T Differential
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n and A / T Differential
Steering
Suspension
Brakes
Air Conditioning
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-9
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
Design Specifications
Dimensions
Weight
Engine
Starter
Clutch
Manual T r a n s m i s s i o n
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n ..............................................
Steering
Suspension
Tires
Brakes
Air Conditioning
Electrical Ratings
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
Body Specifications
Illustration
2-19
Standards and Service Limits
Engine Electrical
Item
Qualification
Measurement
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Ignition coil
Rated voltage
12 V
Firing order
1 - 3 — 4 - 2
Spark
Type
plug
NGK:
|
Service Limit
IZFR6K13
DENSO:SKJ20DR-M13
Gap
Ignition timing
1 . 2 - 1 . 3 m m ( 0 . 0 4 2 - 0 . 0 5 1 in.)
A t idle
C h e c k t h e red
mark
M / T (in neutral)
8±2°BTDC
A / T (in N o r P
8±2°BTDC
position)
Drive belt
D e f l e c t i o n w i t h 9 8 N {10 kgf, 22 Ibf)
NOTE: At engine
applied mid w a y between
With A/C
U s e d belt: 5 . 5 — 8 . 5 m m ( 0 . 2 2 — 0 . 3 3 in.)
pulleys
cold condition
N e w belt: 3 . 5 — 5 . 0 m m ( 0 . 1 4 — 0 . 2 0 in.)
Without
A/C
U s e d belt: 7 . 5 - 1 0 . 5 m m ( 0 . 3 0 - 0 . 4 1 in.)
N e w belt: 4 . 5 — 6 . 0 m m ( 0 . 1 8 — 0 . 2 4 in.)
Alternator
Tension (measured w i t h belt tension
U s e d belt: 4 4 1 - 5 8 8 N ( 4 5 - 6 0 kgf, 9 9 - 1 3 2
gauge)
N e w belt: 9 8 0 - 1 , 0 7 8 N ( 1 0 0 - 1 1 0 kgf, 2 2 0 - 2 4 2
Output
A t 13.5 V
normal
and
Ibf)
Ibf)
90 A
engine
temperature
Coil (rotor)
Slip
ring
Brush
resistance
A t 6 8 °F ( 2 0 °C)
O.D.
length
Brush spring tension
Starter
1.84-2.10
21.2 m m (0.83 in.)
19.0 m m (0.75 in.)
5.0 m m (0.20 in.)
3 . 3 - 4 . 1 N ( 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 2 kgf, 0 . 7 5 - 0 . 9 3 Ibf)
Output
1.0
Commutator mica
Q
22.7 m m (0.89 in.)
depth
kW
0 . 5 0 - 0 . 8 0 m m ( 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 3 1 in.)
0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
Commutator
runout
0.02 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .
Commutator
O.D.
28.0 m m (1.10 in.)
27.0 m m (1.06 in.)
1 4 . 0 - 1 4 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 5 - 0 . 5 7 in.)
9.0 m m (0.35 in.)
Brush
length
Brush spring tension
1 3 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 4 0 - 1 . 8 0 kgf, 3 . 0 9 - 3 . 9 7 Ibf)
Engine Assembly
Item
Compression
2-2
Measurement
Pressure
Qualification
Standard or
2
Minimum
9 8 0 kPa (10.0 k g f / c m , 142 psi)
Check the engine w i t h the starter
Maximum
2 0 0 kPa (2.0 k g f / c m , 2 8 psi)
cranking
variation
2
New
Cylinder Head
Measurement
Item
Qualification
Height
Camshaft
Standard or
119.9-120.1
m m
(4.720-4.728
in.)
0.05—0.25
End play
C a m s h a f t - t o - h o l d e r oil c l e a r a n c e
m m
in.)
0.045—0.084
m m
height
0.100 m m (0.004 in.)
in.)
0.03 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .
runout
C a m lobe
Service Limit
0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
0.5 m m (0.02 in.)
(0.002-0.010
(0.0018-0.0033
Total
New
0.07 m m (0.0028 in.)
Warpage
Head
Intake, p r i m a r y
35.3799 m m (1.39291 in.)
Intake,
30.5291 m m (1.20193 in.)
0.04 m m (0.002 in >
secondary
Exhaust
Valve
Clearance (cold)
S t e m O.D.
35.3877 m m (1.39321 in.)
Intake
0 . 1 7 ± 0 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 7 ± 0 . 0 0 0 8 in.)
Exhaust
0 . 2 8 ± 0 . 0 2 m m (0.011 ± 0 . 0 0 0 8 in.)
Intake
5.48—5.49
m m
(0.2157-0.2161
Exhaust
5.45—5.46
m m
(0.2146-0.2150
Stem-to-guide
clearance
Intake
5.45 m m (0.215 in.)
in.)
0.020—0.050
5.42 m m (0.213 in.)
in.)
m m
0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 2 0 in.)
Exhaust
0.050—0.080
m m
(0.0020-0.0031
Valve seat
Intake
Width
0.850—1.150
0.11 m m (0.004 in.)
in.)
m m
1.60 m m ( 0 . 0 6 3 in.)
( 0 . 0 3 3 5 - 0 . 0 4 5 3 in.)
Exhaust
1.250-1.550
m m
2.00 m m (0.079 in.)
( 0 . 0 4 9 2 - 0 . 0 6 1 0 in.)
S t e m installed
height
Intake
46.1-46.5
m m
46.8 m m (1.843 in.)
( 1 . 8 1 5 - 1 . 8 3 1 in.)
Exhaust
46.2—46.6
m m
46.9 m m (1.846 in.)
( 1 . 8 1 9 - 1 . 8 3 5 in.)
Valve
Valve
spring
guide
Free length
I.D.
Intake
50.52 m m (1.989 in.)
Exhaust
57.37 m m (2.259 in.)
Intake
5.51—5.53
m m
5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
( 0 . 2 1 7 - 0 . 2 1 8 in.)
Exhaust
5.51—5.53
m m
5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
( 0 . 2 1 7 - 0 . 2 1 8 in.)
Installed
height
Intake
15.85—16.35
m m
( 0 . 6 2 4 - 0 . 6 4 4 in.)
Exhaust
15.85—16.35
m m
( 0 . 6 2 4 - 0 . 6 4 4 in.)
Rocker
arm
Arm-to-shaft
clearance
Intake
0.019—0.058
m m
0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 0 7 - 0 . 0 0 2 3 in.)
Exhaust
0.019—0.058
m m
0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 0 7 - 0 . 0 0 2 3 in.)
2-3
Standards and Service Limits
Engine Block
Measurement
Stem
Block
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or
New
0.07 m m (0.003 in.) m a x .
0.10 m m (0.004 in.)
Bore
7 3 . 0 0 - 7 3 . 0 2 m m ( 2 . 8 7 4 0 - 2 . 8 7 4 8 in.)
7 3 . 0 7 m m (2.8767 in.)
diameter
0.05 m m (0.002 in )
Bore taper
Reboring
Piston
Service Limit
W a r p a g e of deck
0.25 m m (0.01 in.)
limit
S k i r t O . D . at 16 m m (0.6 in.) f r o m
7 2 . 9 8 - 7 2 . 9 9 m m ( 2 . 8 7 3 2 - 2 . 8 7 3 6 in.)
72.97 m m (2.8728 in.)
0.010—0.040
0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
b o t t o m of skirt
Clearance in c y l i n d e r
m m
( 0 . 0 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 1 6 in.)
Ring groove
width
Top
1.050—1.060
m m
1.08 m m ( 0 . 0 4 3 in.)
( 0 . 0 4 1 3 — 0 . 0 4 1 7 in.)
Second
1.220-1.230
m m
1.250 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 2 in)
( 0 . 0 4 8 1 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.)
Oil
2.005-2.020
m m
2.050 m m
(0.0807 in.)
( 0 . 0 7 8 9 - 0 . 0 7 9 5 in.)
Piston ring
Ring-to-groove
clearance
Top
0.065—0.090
m m
0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 0 3 5 in.)
Second
0.030—0.055
m m
0.13 m m (0.005 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 1 2 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.)
Ring end gap
Piston pin
O.D.
Pin-to-piston
0.60 m m (0.024 in )
Top
0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.)
Second
0 . 3 5 - 0 . 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.)
0.65 m m (0.026 in.)
Oil
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.)
0.80 m m (0.031 in.)
17.996-18.000
m m
(0.7085-0.7087
in.)
clearance
0.010—0.018
interferemce
0.020—0.036
m m
( 0 . 0 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 0 7 in.)
Connecting
rod
Pin-to-rod
m m
( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 1 4 in.)
Small-end bore
diameter
17.964-17.977
m m
( 0 . 7 0 7 - 0 . 7 0 8 in.)
Large-end bore
diameter
End play installed o n
Crankshaft
Main journal
crankshaft
diameter
43.0 m m (1.69 in.)
0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.)
49.976-50.000
0.40 m m (0.016 in.)
m m
( 1 . 9 6 7 6 - 1 . 9 6 8 5 in.)
Rod journal
diameter
39.976—40.000
m m
( 1 . 5 7 3 9 - 1 . 5 7 4 8 in.)
Rod/main journal taper
0.005 m m (0.0002 in.)
0.010
m m
(0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal
out-of-round
0.005 m m (0.0002 in.)
0.010
m m
(0.0004 in.)
Crankshaft
End play
0 . 1 0 — 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 — 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
0.45 m m (0.018 in.)
Runout
0.03 m m (0.0012 in.) m a x .
0.04 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 6 in.)
M a i n bearing-to-journal oil clearance
0.018—0.036
0.050
bearing
Rod bearing clearance
m m
(0.0020 in.)
0.020—0.038
0.050
m m
( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 1 5 in.)
2-4
m m
( 0 . 0 0 0 7 - 0 . 0 0 1 4 in.)
m m
(0.0020 in.)
DC
Engine Lubrication
Item
Engine oil
Measurement
Qualification
Engine
Capacity
overhaul
Oil c h a n g e
Standard or
New
Service
Limit
4.2 L (4.4 U S qt)
3.6 L (3.8 U S qt)
including oil
filter
Oil c h a n g e
3.4 L (3.6 U S qt)
w i t h o u t oil filter
Oil
pump
Inner rotor-to-outer rotor clearance
0 . 0 2 - 0 . 1 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
0.20 m m
(0.008 in.)
P u m p housing-to-outer rotor clearance
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 1 8 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.)
0.20 m m
(0.008 in.)
0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
0.15 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
P u m p housing-to-rotor axial clearance
Relief valve
2
Relief valve, oil p r e s s u r e w i t h oil
A t idle
7 0 kPa (0.7 k g f / c m , 1 0 psi) m i n .
t e m p e r a t u r e at 176°F
A t 3,000 r p m
3 4 0 kPa (3.5 k g f / c m , 5 0 psi) m i n .
( 8 0 0
2
Cooling System
Item
Radiator
Measurement
Qualification
Coolant capacities (Including engine,
MfT:
heater, hoses, a n d
overhaul
reservoir)
engine
U s e H o n d a L o n g Life Antifreeze/
MfT:
Coolant Type2
change
coolant
A/T: engine
S t a n d a r d or
New
5.4 L (5.7 U S qt)
3.8 L (4.0 U S qt)
5.3 L (5.6 U S qt)
overhaul
A/T: coolant
3.7 L (3.9 U S qt)
change
Reservoir
Coolant capacity
0.4 L (0.11 U S q t )
Radiator cap
Opening
pressure
9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 1 8
Thermostat
Opening
temperature
2
Begins to
Fully o p e n
V a l v e lift a t f u l l y o p e n
open
1 7 6 - 1 8 3 °F ( 8 0 — 8 4
2 0 3 °F ( 9 5
psi)
°C)
°C)
8.0 m m (0.31 in.) m i n .
2-5
Standards and Service Limits
Fuel and Emissions
Item
Fuel
pressure
regulator
connected
Fuel tank
Capacity
Engine idle
Idle s p e e d w i t h o u t
(USA
Qualification
Measurement
Pressure with fuel pressure
S t a n d a r d or
2
gauge
New
3 2 0 - 3 7 0 kPa ( 3 . 3 - 3 . 8 kgf/cm , 4 7 - 5 4
psi)
41 L (10.8 U S gal)
M / T (in neutral),
load
750±50
rpm
850±50
rpm
850±50
rpm
850±50
rpm
A / T (in N o r P
models)
position)
Idle s p e e d w i t h high electrical
(in neutral),
A / T (in N o r P
M a x Cool, b l o w e r fan o n High, rear
position)
on high
(Canada
MfT
(A/C switch O N , t e m p e r a t u r e set to
w i n d o w defogger ON, and
Engine idle
load
headlights
beam)
Idle s p e e d w i t h o u t
M / T (in neutral),
load
A / T (in N o r P
models)
position)
Idle s p e e d w i t h h i g h electrical
load
M / T (in n e u t r a l ) ,
(A/C switch O N , t e m p e r a t u r e set to
A / T (in N o r P
M a x Cool, b l o w e r fan o n High, rear
position)
w i n d o w defogger ON, and
on high
headlights
beam)
Clutch
Measurement
Item
Clutch
pedal
Height from
Qualification
floor
S t a n d a r d or
New
Service Limit
163 m m (6.42 in.)
Stroke
1 3 0 - 1 4 0 m m ( 5 . 1 - 5 . 5 in.)
Play
6 - 2 0 m m ( 0 . 2 4 - 0 . 7 9 in.)
Disengagement height from the floor
7 2 m m (2.83 in.)
Flywheel
Runout o n clutch mating
0.05 m m (0.002 in.) m a x .
0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
Clutch disc
Rivet head depth
1 . 1 - 1 . 6 m m ( 0 . 0 4 3 - 0 . 0 6 3 in.)
0.2 m m (0.08 in.)
Thickness
7 . 2 5 - 7 . 9 5 m m ( 0 . 2 8 5 - 0 . 3 1 3 in.)
5.0 m m (0.20 in.)
Warpage
0.03 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .
0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
0.8 m m (0.03 in.) m a x .
1.0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 i n . )
Pressure plate
surface
Height of diaphragm spring fingers
Measure
with
feeler g a u g e
special tool
2-6
and
Manual Transmission and M/T Differential
Measurement
Item
Manual
Capacity
transmission
Use Honda
MTF
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Fluid c h a n g e
1.5L(1.6USqt)
Overhaul
1.6 L ( 1 . 7 U S q t )
i
Service Limit
fluid
Mainshaft
End play
0 . 1 1 — 0 . 1 8 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.)
Adjust
D i a m e t e r of ball bearing contact area
2 5 . 9 8 7 - 2 6 . 0 0 0 m m (1.0231 - 1 . 0 2 3 6 in.)
25.93 m m (1.021 in.)
2 8 . 9 9 2 — 2 9 . 0 0 5 m m ( 1 . 1 4 1 4 — 1 . 1 4 1 9 in.)
28.93 m m (1.139 in.)
3 4 . 9 8 4 - 3 5 . 0 0 0 m m ( 1 . 3 7 7 3 - 1 . 3 7 8 0 in.)
34.93 m m (1.375 in.)
2 5 . 9 7 7 - 2 5 . 9 9 0 m m ( 1 . 0 2 2 7 - 1 . 0 2 3 2 in.)
25.92 m m (1.021 in.)
(clutch housing side)
Diameter of distance collar contact
area
Diameter of needle bearing contact
area
D i a m e t e r of ball bearing contact area
(transmission h o u s i n g side)
Mainshaft
3rd
Diameter of pilot bearing contact area
1 4 . 8 7 0 - 1 4 . 8 9 0 m m ( 0 . 5 8 5 4 - 0 . 5 8 6 2 in.)
Runout
0.02 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .
I.D.
3 9 . 0 0 9 - 3 9 . 0 2 5 m m ( 1 . 5 3 5 8 - 1 . 5 3 6 4 in.)
39.07 m m
3rd gear
0 . 0 6 - 0 . 2 1 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 8 in.)
0.33 m m (0.013 in )
End
and 4th gears
play
Thickness
I.D.
Mainshaft 5th
gear
(1.538 in.)
4th gear
0 . 0 6 - 0 . 1 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.)
0.31 m m (0.012 in )
3rd gear
2 7 . 9 2 - 2 7 . 9 7 m m ( 1 . 0 9 9 - 1 . 1 0 1 in.)
27.85 m m (1.096 in.)
4th gear
2 7 . 0 2 - 2 7 . 0 7 m m ( 1 . 0 6 4 - 1 . 0 6 6 in.)
26.95 m m
3 9 . 0 0 9 - 3 9 . 0 2 5 m m ( 1 . 5 3 5 8 - 1 . 5 3 6 4 in.)
39.07 m m (1.538 in.)
(1.061 in.)
0 . 0 6 — 0 . 1 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 — 0 . 0 0 7 in.)
0.31 m m
Thickness
2 8 . 9 2 - 2 8 . 9 7 m m ( 1 . 1 3 9 - 1 . 1 4 1 in.)
28.85 m m (1.136 in.)
Diameter of needle bearing contact
3 4 . 0 0 0 - 3 4 . 0 1 5 m m ( 1 . 3 3 8 6 — 1 . 3 3 9 2 in.) 33.95 m m (1.337 in.)
End
Countershaft
0.05 m m (0.002 in )
play
(0.012 i n )
area (clutch h o u s i n g side)
D i a m e t e r of ball b e a r i n g contact area
2 4 . 9 8 0 - 2 4 . 9 9 3 m m ( 0 . 9 8 3 5 - 0 . 9 8 4 0 in.)
24.93 m m (0.981 in.)
(transmission h o u s i n g side)
D i a m e t e r o f 1 st g e a r c o n t a c t a r e a
3 7 . 9 8 4 - 3 8 . 0 0 0 m m ( 1 . 4 9 5 4 — 1 . 4 9 6 1 in.)
3 7 . 9 3 4 m m (1.493 in.)
Runout
0.02 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .
0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
I.D.
4 3 . 0 0 9 — 4 3 . 0 2 5 m m (1.6933—1.6939 in.)
4 3 . 0 7 0 m m (1.6957 in.)
End play
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
0.24 m m (0.009 in.)
Thickness
2 6 . 8 9 - 2 6 . 9 4 m m ( 1 . 0 5 9 - 1 . 0 6 1 in.)
26.86 m m (1.057 in.)
I.D
4 5 . 0 0 9 - 4 5 . 0 2 5 m m ( 1 . 7 7 2 0 - 1 . 7 7 2 6 in.)
45.07 m m (1.774 in.)
End play
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
0.24 m m (0.009 in.)
Thickness
2 7 . 4 1 - 2 7 . 4 6 m m ( 1 . 0 7 9 - 1 . 0 8 1 in.)
2 7 . 3 6 m m (1.077 in.)
I.D.
3 4 . 0 0 0 — 3 4 . 0 1 0 m m ( 1 . 3 3 8 6 — 1 . 3 3 9 0 in.)
3 4 . 0 4 m m (1.340 in.)
gear distance
O.D.
3 9 . 9 8 9 - 4 0 . 0 0 0 m m ( 1 . 5 7 4 4 - 1 . 5 7 4 8 in.)
39.93 m m (1.572 in.)
collar
Length
2 7 . 5 3 - 2 7 . 5 6 m m ( 1 . 0 8 4 - 1 . 0 8 5 in.)
27.51 m m (1.083 in.)
Countershaft
1st
gear
Countershaft
2nd
gear
Countershaft
2nd
(cont'd)
2-7
Standards and Service Limits
Manuai Transmission and M/T Differential (cont'd)
Measurement
Item
Mainshaft
4th
Qualification
I.D.
a n d 5th gears
O.D.
distance collar
Length
S t a n d a r d or
New
Service Limit
2 9 . 0 1 4 - 2 9 . 0 2 4 m m ( 1 . 1 4 2 3 - 1 . 1 4 2 7 in.)
2 9 . 0 6 m m (1.144 in.)
3 4 . 9 8 9 - 3 5 . 0 0 0 m m ( 1 . 3 7 7 5 - 1 . 3 7 8 0 in.)
34.93 m m (1.375 in.)
A
5 1 . 9 7 - 5 2 . 0 3 m m ( 2 . 0 4 6 - 2 . 0 4 8 in.)
B
2 4 . 0 3 - 2 4 . 0 6 m m ( 0 . 9 4 6 - 0 . 9 4 7 in.)
A
1 B
t
i
^
'A
•
Y
I.D.
2 6 . 0 2 - 2 6 . 1 7 m m ( 1 . 0 2 4 - 1 . 0 3 0 in.)
distance collar
Length
1 2 . 0 0 - 1 2 . 0 5 m m ( 0 . 4 7 2 - 0 . 4 7 4 in.)
Reverse idler
I.D.
15.016-15.043 m m (0.5912-0.5922
gear
Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance
0 . 0 3 2 - 0 . 0 7 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 0 in.)
0.14 m m (0.006 in.)
0 . 8 5 - 1 . 1 0 m m ( 0 . 0 3 3 - 0 . 0 4 3 in.)
0.4 m m (0.02 in.)
Mainshaft
Synchro
MBS
ring
Ring-to-gear
clearance
Ring
pushed
in.)
15.08 m m (0.594 in.)
against gear
Shift fork
1st-2nd and
Finger thickness
7 . 4 - 7 . 6 m m ( 0 . 2 9 - 0 . 3 0 in.)
3rd-4th forks
5th fork
6 . 7 - 6 . 9 m m ( 0 . 2 6 - 0 . 2 7 in.)
Fork-to-synchro sleeve clearance
0 . 3 5 - 0 . 6 5 m m ( 0 . 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 6 in.)
Reverse shift
Pawl groove
1 3 . 5 - 1 3 . 8 m m ( 0 . 5 3 1 - 0 . 5 4 3 in.)
fork
Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance
1 . 3 0 - 1 . 9 0 m m ( 0 . 0 5 1 - 0 . 0 7 5 in.)
I.D.
1 3 . 9 7 3 - 1 4 . 0 0 0 m m ( 0 . 5 5 0 1 - 0 . 5 5 1 2 in.)
Shift
arm
width
S h i f t f o r k d i a m e t e r at c o n t a c t area
1 2 . 9 - 1 3 . 0 m m ( 0 . 5 0 8 - 0 . 5 1 2 in.)
Shift arm-to-shaft lever clearance
0 . 2 - 0 . 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.)
Select lever
Finger
1 2 . 8 0 - 1 2 . 9 5 m m ( 0 . 5 0 4 - 0 . 5 1 0 in.)
Shift lever
Shaft-to-select lever clearance
0 . 0 5 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
G r o o v e (to select lever)
1 3 . 0 0 - 1 3 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 2 - 0 . 5 1 8 in.)
Shaft-to-shift a r m
0 . 0 1 3 - 0 . 0 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 5 - 0 . 0 0 2 8 in.)
M/T
differential
carrier
M/T
differential
pinion gear
80 m m
shim
width
clearance
P i n i o n s h a f t c o n t a c t a r e a I.D.
1 8 . 0 1 0 - 1 8 . 0 2 8 m m ( 0 . 7 0 9 1 - 0 . 7 0 9 8 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance
0 . 0 2 3 - 0 . 0 5 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 9 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.)
D r i v e s h a f t c o n t a c t a r e a I.D.
2 6 . 0 2 5 - 2 6 . 0 4 5 m m ( 1 . 0 2 4 6 - 1 . 0 2 5 4 in.)
Backlash
0 . 0 5 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
2.5 m m (0.098 in.)
0.62 m m (0.024 in.)
0.55 m m (0.022 in.)
0.1 m m (0.004 in.)
0.1 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 in.)
I.D.
1 8 . 0 4 2 - 1 8 . 0 6 6 m m ( 0 . 7 1 0 3 - 0 . 7 1 1 3 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance
0 . 0 5 5 - 0 . 0 9 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 7 in.)
0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
80 m m shim-to-bearing outer
0 — 0 . 1 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 0 4 in.)
Adjust
clearance in t r a n s m i s s i o n
2-8
1.0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 i n . )
race
housing
Automatic
ransmission and A / T Differential
Measurement
Item
Automatic
Capacity
transmission
Use Honda
Qualification
ATF-Z1
S t a n d a r d or
Fluid change
2.4 L (2.5 U S qt)
Overhaul
6.0 L (6.3 U S qt)
New
Service Limit
fluid
Pressure
A t 2,000 r p m in
Line pressure
N
1st c l u t c h
pressure
Por
position
900-960
kPa
8 5 0 kPa
2
(9.2-9.8 kgf/cm , 1 3 0 - 1 4 0
A t 2,000 r p m in 1st
890-970
Fit S p o r t
gear in S position
(9.1-9.9 kgf/cm ,130-140
Except
A t 2,000 r p m in 1
Sport
Sport
and
and
psi)
kPa
2
(8.7 k g f / c m , 120 psi)
8 4 0 kPa
2
psi)
2
(8.6 k g f / c m , 120 psi)
position
Fit S p o r t
2nd clutch
pressure
A t 2,000 r p m in 2 n d
890-970
Fit S p o r t
gear in S position
(9.1-9.9 kgf/cm , 1 3 0 - 1 4 0
Except
A t 2,000 r p m in 2
Sport and
position
Sport
and
kPa
8 4 0 kPa
2
psi)
2
(8.6 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 psi)
Fit S p o r t
3rd clutch
pressure
A t 2,000 r p m in 3rd
890-970
Fit S p o r t
g e a r in S position
( 9 . 1 - 9 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 3 0 — 1 4 0 psi)
(8.6 k g f / c m , 120 psi)
Except
A t 2,000 r p m in 3rd
Sport and
gear in D3 position
A t 2,000 r p m in 4th
890-970
840 kPa
g e a r in D position
(9.1-9.9 kgf/cm , 1 3 0 - 1 4 0
A t 2,000 r p m in 5th
890-970
g e a r in D p o s i t i o n
(9.1-9.9 kgf/cm , 1 3 0 - 1 4 0
Sport
and
kPa
840 kPa
2
2
Fit S p o r t
4th clutch
5th clutch
Torque converter
pressure
pressure
2
psi)
kPa
2
(8.6 k g f / c m , 120 psi)
840 kPa
2
2,600
Stall s p e e d
kPa
psi)
rpm
2
(8.6 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 psi)
2,450-2,750
rpm
Check w i t h vehicle o n level
ground
Clutch
Clutch end
plate-to-top-disc
1.62—1.82
1st
m m
( 0 . 0 6 4 - 0 . 0 7 2 in.)
clearance
0.5—0.7
2nd
m m
( 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.)
0.73—0.93
3rd and 5th
m m
(0.029-0.037
4th
0.7—0.9
in.)
m m
( 0 . 0 2 8 - 0 . 0 3 5 in.)
Clutch return spring free
length
Clutch disc thickness
Clutch plate thickness
1st
35.2 m m (1.39 in.)
34.5 m m (1.36 in.)
2nd and 4th
39.5 m m (1.56 in.)
3 7 . 4 m m (1.47 in.)
3rd and 5th
45.15 m m (1.778 in.)
43.0 m m (1.69 in.)
1st, 3 r d , a n d 5 t h
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 in.)
2nd and 4th
1.96 m m ( 0 . 0 7 7 in.)
1st a n d 4 t h
1.6 m m ( 0 . 0 6 3 i n . )
When
discolored
2nd
2.3 m m (0.091 in.]
When
discolored
3rd and 5th
2.0 m m (0.079 in.)
When
discolored
0 . 0 7 - 0 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 8 in.)
0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
C l u t c h w a v e d - p l a t e h e i g h t 1st, 3 r d ,
a n d 5th clutches
1st, 3 r d , a n d 5 t h c l u t c h
thickness
end-plate
Markl
2.1 m m ( 0 . 0 8 3 in.)
When
Mark 2
2.2 m m (0.087 in.)
When
discolored
Mark 3
2.3 m m (0.091 in.)
When
discolored
Mark 4
2.4 m m (0.094 in.)
When
discolored
Mark 5
2.5 m m (0.098 in.)
When
discolored
Mark 6
2.6 m m (0.102 in.)
When
discolored
Mark 7
2.7 m m ( 0 . 1 0 6 in.)
When
discolored
Mark 8
2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
When
discolored
Mark 9
2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
When
discolored
discolored
(cont'd)
2-9
Standards and Service Limits
Automatic Transmission arid A / T Differential (cont'd)
Measurement
Stem
Clutch (cont'd)
ATF
2 n d a n d 4th clutch end-plate thickness
Qualification
ATF p u m p gear-to-body
Stator shaft
clearance
New
Service Limit
A M
2.1 m m (0.083 in.)
When
discolored
Mark A D or
AN
2.2 m m (0.087 in.)
When
discolored
Mark AE or A P
2.3 m m (0.091 in.)
When
discolored
Mark AF or
2.4 m m
(0.094 in.)
When
discolored
M a r k A G or AR
2.5 m m (0.098 in.)
When
discolored
M a r k A H or
2.6 m m (0.102 in.)
When
discolored
M a r k A J or A T
2.7 m m (0.106 in.)
When
discolored
M a r k A K or
AU
2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
When
discolored
MarkALor
AV
2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
When
discolored
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 0 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
0.07 m m (0.003 in.)
AG
AS
ATF p u m p thrust clearance
pump
Standard or
Mark AC or
Drive gear
0 . 2 1 0 - 0 . 2 6 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 0 in.)
Driven gear
0 . 0 7 0 - 0 . 1 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
A T F p u m p d r i v e n g e a r I.D.
1 4 . 0 1 6 - 1 4 . 0 3 4 m m ( 0 . 5 5 1 8 - 0 . 5 5 2 5 in.)
A T F p u m p driven gear shaft O.D.
1 3 . 9 8 0 - 1 3 . 9 9 0 m m ( 0 . 5 5 0 4 - 0 . 5 5 0 8 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
N e e d l e b e a r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
Torque
converter
2 7 . 0 0 0 - 2 7 . 0 2 1 m m ( 1 . 0 6 3 - 1 . 0 6 4 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
side
ATF pump
Reverse shift
side
2 9 . 0 0 0 - 2 9 . 0 2 1 m m ( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 6 in.)
Sealing ring contact area LD.
2 9 . 0 0 0 - 2 9 . 0 2 1 m m ( 1 . 1 4 1 7 — 1 . 1 4 2 6 in.]
29.05 m m (1.144 in.)
Fork finger thickness
5 . 9 0 - 6 . 0 0 m m ( 0 . 2 3 2 - 0 . 2 3 6 in.)
5.40 m m (0.213 in.)
fork
Park gear
and
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
pawl
Servo
body
Regulator valve
1 4 . 0 0 0 - 1 4 . 0 1 0 m m ( 0 . 5 5 1 2 - 0 . 5 5 2 6 in.
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
S h i f t f o r k s h a f t v a l v e b o r e I.D.
3 7 . 0 0 0 - 3 7 . 0 3 9 m m ( 1 . 4 5 6 7 - 1 . 4 5 8 2 in.)
3 7 . 0 4 5 m m ( 1 . 4 5 8 5 in.)
S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
2 9 . 0 0 0 - 2 9 . 0 2 1 m m ( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 6 in.)
29.05 m m (1.144 in.)
Shift fork shaft bore
I.D.
body
Mainshaft
Diameter of needle bearing contact
At stator shaft
2 2 . 9 8 4 - 2 3 . 0 0 0 m m ( 0 . 9 0 4 9 - 0 . 9 0 5 5 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
area
A t 5th gear collar
3 2 . 9 7 5 - 3 2 . 9 9 1 m m ( 1 . 2 9 8 2 - 1 . 2 9 8 9 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
I.D. o f g e a r s
End
play
40 x 63 m m thrust w a s h e r thickness
4 6 . 9 8 6 - 4 6 . 9 9 9 m m ( 1 . 8 4 9 8 - 1 . 8 5 0 3 in.)
5th gear
3 7 . 0 0 0 - 3 7 . 0 1 6 m m ( 1 . 4 5 6 7 - 1 . 4 5 7 3 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
3rd gear
5 2 . 0 0 0 - 5 2 . 0 1 3 m m ( 2 . 0 4 7 2 - 2 . 0 4 7 8 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
5th gear
0 1 5 - 0 . 2 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 1 0 6 in.]
3rd gear
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 4 in.)
No. 1
3.750 m m (0.1476 in.)
No. 2
3.775 m m (0.1486 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 3
3.800 m m (0.1496 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 4
3.825 m m (0.1506 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 5
3.850 m m (0.1516 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 6
3.875 m m (0.1526 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 7
3 . 9 0 0 m m ( 0 . 1 5 3 4 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 8
3.925 m m (0.1545 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 9
3.950 m m (0.1555 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 10
3 . 9 7 5 m m ( 0 . 1 5 6 5 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 11
4.000 m m (0.1575 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
5th gear collar length
6 0 . 4 - 6 0 . 5 m m ( 2 . 3 8 0 — 2 . 3 8 1 in.)
5th gear collar flange thickness
3 . 7 0 - 3 . 8 5 m m ( 0 . 1 4 6 - 0 . 1 5 2 in.)
Sealing ring thickness
1 . 9 1 - 1 . 9 7 m m ( 0 . 0 7 5 2 - 0 . 0 7 7 6 in.)
1.86 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 2 in.]
2.025-2.060 m m (0.0797-0.0811
2.080 m m (0.0819 in.)
W i d t h of sealing ring
2-10
At 3rd gear
groove
W h e n w o r n or damaged
in.)
3rd clutch feed pipe O.D.
7 . 9 7 - 7 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 3 1 3 8 - 0 . 3 1 4 2 in.)
7.95 m m ( 0 . 3 1 3 in.)
Feed pipe bushing
8 . 0 0 0 - 8 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 1 5 0 - 0 . 3 1 5 6 in.]
8.030 m m (0.3161 in.)
I.D.
Item
Qualification
Measurement
Countershaft
Diameter of needle bearing
contact
At torque
S t a n d a r d or
New
Service Limit
3 3 . 5 0 4 - 3 3 . 5 1 7 m m ( 1 . 3 1 9 1 - 1 . 3 1 9 6 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
converter
area
housing
A t 5th gear
3 2 . 9 8 6 - 3 2 . 9 9 9 m m ( 1 . 2 9 8 7 - 1 . 2 9 9 1 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
Reverse selector
3 5 . 9 8 3 - 3 5 . 9 9 9 m m ( 1 . 4 1 6 7 - 1 . 4 1 7 3 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
5th gear
3 9 . 0 0 0 - 3 9 . 0 1 6 m m ( 1 . 5 3 5 4 - 1 . 5 3 6 1 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
Reverse gear
4 2 . 0 0 0 - 4 2 . 0 1 6 m m ( 1 . 6 5 3 5 - 1 . 6 5 4 2 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
hub
I.D. o f g e a r s
End play
Reverse selector h u b
5th gear
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 2 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 1 1 in.)
Reverse gear
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 0 in.)
2 9 . 2 5 - 2 9 . 4 5 m m ( 1 . 1 5 2 - 1 . 1 6 0 in.)
width
Collar, 33.2 x 40 x 26 m m
2 5 . 9 5 - 2 6 . 0 0 m m ( 1 . 0 2 2 - 1 . 0 2 4 in.)
length
Reverse selector h u b O.D.
Secondary
shaft
Diameter of needle bearing
contact
area
I.D. o f g e a r s
End
play
31 x 54 m m thrust w a s h e r thickness
43 x 54.5 m m thrust w a s h e r
thickness
1st g e a r
5 1 . 8 7 - 5 1 . 9 0 m m ( 2 . 0 4 2 - 2 . 0 4 3 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
3 0 . 9 8 6 - 3 0 . 9 9 9 m m ( 1 . 2 1 9 9 - 1 . 2 2 0 4 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
2nd gear
4 2 . 9 8 6 - 4 2 . 9 9 9 m m ( 1 . 6 9 2 4 - 1 . 6 9 2 9 i n . ) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
4th gear collar
3 4 . 9 7 5 - 3 4 . 9 9 1 m m ( 1 . 3 7 7 0 - 1 . 3 7 7 6 in.)
1st g e a r
38.000-38.016 m m (1.4961-1.4967
in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
2nd gear
4 9 . 0 0 0 - 4 9 . 0 1 6 m m (1.9291 — 1 . 9 2 9 8 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
4th gear
4 1 . 0 0 0 - 4 1 . 0 1 6 m m ( 1 . 6 1 4 2 - 1 . 6 1 4 8 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
1st g e a r
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
2nd gear
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
4th gear
0.10-0.22 m m (0.004-0.009
No. 1
3.925 m m (0.1545 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 2
3 . 9 5 0 m m (0.1555 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 3
3.975 m m (0.1565 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 4
4.000 m m (0.1575 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 5
4 . 0 2 5 m m (0.1585 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 6
4.050 m m (0.1594 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 7
4 . 0 7 5 m m (0.1604 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 8
4.100 m m (0.1614 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 9
4 . 1 2 5 m m (0.1624 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 10
4.150 m m
When worn or damaged
N o . 11
4.175 m m (0.1644 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 12
4.200 m m
( 0 . 1 6 5 4 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 13
4 . 2 2 5 m m (0.1663 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 14
4 . 2 5 0 m m (0.1673 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 15
4 . 2 7 5 m m (0.1683 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
N o . 16
4.300 m m (0.1693 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
N o . 17
4.325 m m (0.1703 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 1
2.900 m m
(0.114 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 2
2.925 m m (0.115 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 3
2.950 m m (0.116 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 4
2.975 m m (0.117 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 5
3.000 m m (0.118 in.)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
No. 6
3.025 m m (0.119 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 7
3.050 m m (0.120 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 8
3.075 m m (0.121 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
No. 9
3.100 m m (0.122 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
N o . 10
3.125 m m (0.123 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
N o . 11
3.150 m m (0.124 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
N o . 12
3.175 m m (0.125 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
N o . 13
3.200 m m (0.126 in.)
W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
(0.1634 in.)
in.)
(cont'd)
2-11
Standards and Service Limits
Automatic Transmission and A / T Differential (cont'd)
Qualification
Measurement
Item
Secondary
shaft
(cont'd)
4th gear collar
Standard or
New
Service Limit
3 2 . 9 - 3 3 . 0 m m ( 1 . 2 9 5 - 1 . 2 9 9 in.)
length
4th gear collar flange thickness
3 . 7 5 - 3 . 9 0 m m ( 0 . 1 4 8 - 0 . 1 5 4 in.)
Sealing ring thickness
1 . 8 7 - 1 . 9 7 m m ( 0 . 0 7 4 - 0 . 0 7 8 in.)
1.82 m m ( 0 . 0 7 2 i n . )
2 . 0 2 5 - 2 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 7 - 0 . 0 8 1 1 in.)
2.080 m m (0.0819 in.)
6 . 9 7 - 6 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 2 7 4 4 - 0 . 2 7 4 8 in.)
6.95 m m (0.2736 in.)
W i d t h of sealing ring
groove
2nd
Clutch feed pipe O.D.
Clutch feed pipe bushing
O.D.
clutch
4th clutch
1 1 . 4 7 - 1 1 . 4 8 m m ( 0 . 4 5 1 6 - 0 . 4 5 2 0 in.)
11.45 m m (0.4508 in.)
2nd
7 . 0 1 8 - 7 . 0 3 0 m m ( 0 . 2 7 6 3 - 0 . 2 7 6 8 in.)
7.045 m m (0.2774 in.)
clutch
4th clutch
A T F g u i d e c o l l a r I.D. a t s e a l i n g
W h e n w o r n or damaged
ring
1 1 . 5 0 0 - 1 1 . 5 1 8 m m ( 0 . 4 5 2 8 - 0 . 4 5 5 3 in.)
11.530 m m (0.4539 in.)
2 1 . 2 0 0 - 2 1 . 2 2 1 m m ( 0 . 8 3 4 6 - 0 . 8 3 5 5 in.)
21.25 m m (0.8366 in.)
contact area
End cover bearing contact area
3 0 . 0 0 3 - 3 0 . 0 1 3 m m ( 1 . 1 8 1 2 - 1 . 1 8 1 6 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
Cotters thickness
1 . 3 9 - 1 . 4 2 m m ( 0 . 0 5 5 - 0 . 0 5 6 in.]
Reverse idler
Reverse idler gear shaft O.D. at needle
1 4 . 9 9 - 1 5 . 0 0 m m ( 0 . 5 9 0 - 0 . 5 9 1 in.)
gear
bearing contact area
Idler gear shaft
2 0 . 0 0 1 - 2 0 . 0 1 4 m m ( 0 . 7 8 7 4 - 0 . 7 8 8 0 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
I.D.
1 4 . 8 0 0 - 1 4 . 8 1 8 m m ( 0 . 5 8 2 7 - 0 . 5 8 3 4 in.)
I.D. o f r e v e r s e i d l e r g e a r s h a f t c o n t a c t
area on transmission
housing
I.D. o f r e v e r s e i d l e r g e a r s h a f t
14.800-14.824 m m
holder
( 0 . 5 8 2 7 - 0 . 5 8 3 6 in.) W h e n w o r n or d a m a g e d
Qualification
Measurement
Item
S t a n d a r d or
Wire Diameter
Main valve
body
(0.031 in.)
(0.290 in.)
(1.074 in.)
Shift valve A
0.8
7.1
23.7
Shift valve C spring
Relief valve
spring
Lock-up control valve
spring
Cooler check valve spring
Shift valve D spring
Servo control valve
Regulator valve
body
spring
Stator reaction spring
Regulator valve spring
A
Regulator valve spring B
Torque converter check valve
Lock-up shift valve
spring
spring
A
7.1
23.7
m m
spring
m m
(0.280 in.)
(0.933 in.)
1.0
9.6
34.1
m m
m m
m m
(0.039 in.)
(0.378 in.)
(1.343 in.)
0.6
7.1
29.6
m m
m m
m m
(0.024 in.)
(0.280 in.)
(1.165 in.)
0.85
6.6
27.0
m m
m m
m m
(0.033 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.063 in.)
0.8
5.6
28.1
m m
m m
m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.220 in.)
(1.106 in.)
0.8
9.9
27.3
m m
m m
m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.290 in.)
(1.075 in.)
4.5
35.4
30.3
m m
m m
m m
m m
(1.394 in.)
(1.193 in.)
14.7
80.6
m m
m m
(0.075 in.)
(0.579 in.)
(3.173 in.)
1.6
9.2
44.0
m m
m m
m m
(0.063 in.)
(0.362 in.)
(1.732 in.)
1.2
8.6
33.8
m m
m m
m m
(0.047 in.)
(0.339 in.)
(1.331 in.)
1.0
6.6
35.5
m m
2.4
m m
2.4
m m
2.5
m m
(0.098 in.)
2 - 1 2
m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.094 in.)
4th accumulator
m m
0.8
(0.094 in.)
1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g
m m
(0.933 in.)
(0.039 in.)
1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g B
m m
27.3
(0.280 in.)
1.9
14-302)
m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.177 in.)
spring
(see p a g e
m m
9.9
New
Free Length
0.8
spring
m m
O.D.
Cut B valve spring
s p r i n g (see p a g e
14-300)
W h e n w o r n or damaged
m m
m m
(0.260 in.)
(1.398 in.)
12.2
35.0
m m
m m
(0.480 in.)
(1.378 in.)
18.6
50.1
m m
m m
(0.732 in.)
(1.972 in.)
14.6
29.9
m m
(0.575 in.)
m m
(1.177 in.)
N o . of C o i l
8.0
9.7
9.7
10.2
11.2
11.3
15.9
8.0
1.92
16.1
12.5
12.2
18.2
7.7
6.7
4.9
Measurement
Item
Qualification
Standard or
Wire
Servo
body
9.9
m m
0.9
(0.035 in.)
(0.390 in.)
(0.878 in.)
Shift valve B spring
0.8
7.1
23.7
m m
(0.031 in.)
5th accumulator spring
A
2.5
m m
(0.098 in.)
5th accumulator spring B
1.9
m m
(0.075 in.)
2nd accumulator spring
A
1.8
2nd accumulator spring B
m m
3rd accumulator spring
A
Measurement
Pinion shaft contact area
Qualification
(0.933 in.)
16.6
46.9
m m
m m
(0.654 in.)
(1.846 in.)
10.0
38.5
m m
(1.516 in.)
14.6
43.8
m m
m m
9.4
32.5
m m
m m
m m
m m
(0.370 in.)
(1.280 in.)
14.6
43.8
m m
m m
(0.071 in.)
(0.575 in.)
(1.724 in.)
1.85
9.4
32.5
m m
m m
(0.370 in.)
Standard or
New
N o . of C o i l
6.9
9.7
7.8
m m
(0.394 in.)
1.85
18.010-18.028
I.D.
m m
(0.280 in.)
(1.724 in.)
(0.073 in.)
Item
m m
(0.575 in.)
1.8
3rd accumulator spring B
m m
22.3
(0.071 in.)
(0.073 in.)
A / T differential
m m
New
Free Length
Cut A valve spring
s p r i n g (see p a g e
14-303)
O.D.
Diameter
m m
10.6
7.9
8.7
7.9
8.7
(1.280 in.)
Service
Limit
m m
( 0 . 7 0 9 1 - 0 . 7 0 9 8 in.)
carrier
0.023—0.057
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance
m m
0.1 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 0 9 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.)
26.025-26.045
D r i v e s h a f t c o n t a c t a r e a I.D.
m m
( 1 . 0 2 4 6 - 1 . 0 2 5 4 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft
0.045-0.086
clearance
m m
0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 1 8 - 0 . 0 0 3 3 in.)
Final driven gear
backlash
(References)
0.085—0.142
m m
0.2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 3 3 - 0 . 0 0 5 6 in.)
A / T differential
Backlash
0.05—0.15
m m
( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
pinion gear
I.D.
18.042-18.066
m m
( 0 . 7 1 0 3 - 0 . 7 1 1 3 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance
0.055—0.095
m m
0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 7 in.)
2-13
Standards and Service Limits
Steering
Measurement
Item
Steering
wheel
Qualification
R o t a t i o n a l p l a y m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e
edge with engine
Gearbox
3 4 N (3.5 k g f , 7.7 Ibf)
running
A n g l e of rack guide screw
f r o m locked
New
running
S t a r t i n g l o a d m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e
edge with engine
S t a n d a r d or
0 — 1 0 m m ( 0 — 0 . 3 9 in.)
loosened
7 ° ± 3 °
position
Suspension
Item
Wheel
alignment
Rear
- 1
Front
3 ° 4 5 ' ± 1
Total Toe-in
Front
0±3mm(0±0.12in.)
Rear
2 . 5 ± 2 . 5 m m ( 0 . 1 0 ± 0 . 1 0 in.)
Front wheel turning angle
2-14
equipped
Service Limit
°
° 3 0 ' ± 1
'
°
Inward
3 8 ° 0 0 ' ± 2 °
Outward
32 ° 0 0 '
Inward
3 8 ° 0 0 ' ± 2 °
(Reference)
w i t h P195/55R15 84H tire
Outward
32 ° 0 0 '
Steel w h e e l
Axial
0 — 1 . 0 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 4 in.)
Radial
0 — 1 . 0 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 4 in.)
1.5 m m ( 0 . 0 6 i n . )
Axial
0 — 0 . 7 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 3 in.)
2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
1.5 m m ( 0 . 0 6 i n . )
runout
Aluminum wheel
bearing
equipped
81Stire
0 ° 0 0 ' ± 1
New
Caster
Front wheel turning angle
Wheel
S t a n d a r d or
Front
with P175/65R14
Wheel
Qualification
Measurement
Camber
End
play
runout
(Reference)
Radial
0 — 0 . 7 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 3 in.)
Front
0 — 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Rear
0 — 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
Brakes
Measurement
Item
Parking
brake
lever
w i t h 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibf) of f o r c e
Brake pedal
Pedal height (Carpet
removed)
M/T
cylinder
Service
Limit
1 4 1 m m (5 9 / 1 6 i n . )
model
1 4 5 m m (5 1 1 / 1 6 in.)
model
1—5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 — 0 . 2 0 in.)
Free play
Master
I
6 t o 8 clicks
A/T
Brake disc
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Qualification
Distance traveled w h e n lever pulled
Piston-to-pushrod
0 — 0 . 4 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 2 in.)
clearance
21.0 m m (0.83 in.)
Thickness
19.0 m m (0.75 in.)
0.10 m m (0.004 in.)
Runout
0.015 m m (0.0006 in.)
Parallelism
Brake pad
Pad thickness
9 . 5 - 1 0 . 2 m m ( 0 . 3 7 - 0 . 4 0 in.)
1.6 m m
Rear brake
Brake d r u m
1 9 9 . 9 - 2 0 0 m m ( 7 . 8 7 0 - 7 . 8 7 4 in )
201 m m (7.91 in.)
4.5 m m (0.18 in.)
2.0 m m (0.79 in.)
I.D.
Brake shoe lining thickness
(0.06 in.)
\ i r Conditioning
Measurement
Item
Standard or
Qualification
New
Refrigerant
Type
HFC-134a(R-134a)
Capacity of system
4 0 0 - 4 5 0 g ( 1 4 . 1 - 1 5 . 9 oz)
Refrigerant oil
Type
SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-003, 38898-P13-003,
38899-P13-A01)
Capacity of
Compressor
Field coil
components
resistance
Pulley-to-armature plate clearance
Condenser
2 5 m L ( 5 / 6 fl-oz)
Evaporator
3 5 m L ( 1 1/6 f l - o z )
Each line a n d hose
1 0 m L ( 1 / 3 fl-oz)
Compressor
8 0 - 9 0 m L (2 1 / 3 — 3
A t 6 8 °F ( 2 0
°C)
3.15-3.45
fl-oz)
Q
0.35—0.65 m m
( 0 . 0 1 4 — 0 . 0 2 6 in.)
2-15
Design Specifications
Item
DIMENSIONS
Qualification
Measurement
(157.4 in.)
length
Overall
width
1,682 m m (66.2 in.)
Overall
height
1,524 m m (60.0 in.)
2,450 m m
Wheelbase
Track
Rear
Gross Vehicle Weight
(96.5 in.)
1,456 m m (57.3 in.)
Front
1,451 m m (57.1 in.)
f i v e (5)
Seating capacity
WEIGHT
Specification
3.999 m m
Overall
Rating
1,563 k g (3,446 lbs)
(GVWR)
ENGINE
Type
Water-cooled, 4-stroke S O H C VTEC engine
Cylinder
arrangement
Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke
73.0 x 89.4 m m (2.87 x 3.52 in.)
Displacement
1,496 c m
Compression
ratio
Oil p u m p
Chain drive, S O H C VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
system
Forced, wet sump, with trochoid
displacement
Water pump
Fuel
(91 c u in.)
10.4
Valve train
Lubrication
3
At 6,300 r p m
displacement
required
A t 6,000
rpm
44.6 L (47.1
pump
USqt)
1 2 0 L O 2 7 U S qt)
U N L E A D E D gasoline with 87 P u m p Octane N u m b e r
higher
STARTER
Type
Gear
Normal
Hour
rating
Rotation
CLUTCH
C l o c k w i s e as v i e w e d f r o m g e a r e n d
Clutch type
area
reduction
kW
30 seconds
direction
Clutch friction material
2-16
1.0
output
Single plate dry, d i a p h r a g m
surface
143 c m
2
(22.1 s q in.)
spring
or
TRANSMISSION
Type
Synchronized, 5-speed f o r w a r d , 1 reverse
Primary
AUTOMATIC
Direct
reduction
Gear ratio
Final
reduction
1st
3.461
2nd
1.869
3rd
1.321
4th
0.969
5th
0.805
Reverse
3.230
4.111
Type
Single helical gear
Electronically controlled automatic, 5-speed forward, 1
Type
reverse, 3-element torque converter with lock-up clutch
Primary
Final
reduction
2.333
2nd
1.307
3rd
1.066
4th
0.589
5th
0.555
1:1
Reverse
1.956
Final
4.562
Type
Single helical gear
Rack a n d pinion w i t h electrical
2.41
Steering wheel
3 7 0 m m (14.6 in.)
diameter
Type
absorber
Size of f r o n t a n d rear tires
Size of s p a r e tires
T y p e of service
T y p e of parking
power-assisted
12.80
ratio
Turns, lock-to-lock
Shock
BRAKES
1st
Type
Overall
TIRES
Direct
reduction
Gear ratio
SUSPENSION
1:1
Final
TRANSMISSION
STEERING
Specification
Qualification
Measurement
Stem
MANUAL
brake
Front
I n d e p e n d e n t strut w i t h stabilizer, coil spring
Rear
T o r s i o n b e a m , coil s p r i n g
Front
Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen
Rear
Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
Except Sport
P175/65R1481S
Sport
P195/55R15 84H
E x c e p t S p o r t a n d Fit S p o r t
T115/70D14
88M
S p o r t a n d Fit S p o r t
T125/70D14
93M
Front
Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear
Power-assisted self-adjusting solid
Shoe friction surface area
drum
M e c h a n i c a l actuating, rear w h e e l s
brake
Pad friction surface area
gas-filled
Front
Rear
44.0 c m
2
(6.82 s q in.) x 2
67.2 c m
2
(10.4 s q in.) x 2
(cont'd)
2-17
Design Specifications
Measurement
Item
AIR
Qualification
Specification
Type
Compressor
Scroll
Capacity
CONDITIONING
77 1 m L (4.7 c u i n . ) / r e v .
Maximum
speed
12,000
rpm
Lubricant capacity
8 0 m L (2 2 / 3 f l - o z )
Lubricant type
SP-10
Condenser
Type
Corrugated fin
Evaporator
Type
Corrugated fin
Blower
Type
Radial
Motor
type
165W/12 V
Speed
control
4-speed
Maximum
Temperature
Compressor
clutch
6 8 °F ( 2 0
Battery
RATINGS
Fuses
Light
bulbs
(13,400 cu ft)/h
Dry, single plate, Poly V-belt drive
Type
42 W m a x i m u m at 12 V
power
consumption
ELECTRICAL
3
Air-mix type
control
Electrical
Refrigerant
380 m
capacity
at
°C)
Type
HFC-134a(R-134a)
Capacity
4 0 0 - 4 5 0 g ( 1 4 . 1 - 1 5 . 9 oz)
12 V - 4 0 A h / 2 0 H R (12 V - 3 2 A h / 5 H R )
Under-hood fuse/relay
box
8 0 A , 6 0 A , 5 0 A , 4 0 A , 3 0 A , 2 0 A , 15 A , 10 A
Under-dash fuse/relay
box
3 0 A , 2 0 A , 15 A , 10 A , 7.5 A
Headlight high
Headlight low
Front side
beam
beam
marker/parking
12
V - 6 0 W
12
V - 5 5 W
12 V — 5 W A m b e r
color
lights
Front turn signal
Rear turn signal
12 V - 2 1 W A m b e r
color
12 V - 2 1 W A m b e r
color
Brake/Taillights
12 V - 2 1 / 5 W ( t w o f i l a m e n t s )
Rear side marker/tail lights
12
High m o u n t brake light
12 V - 2 1
W
Back-up lights
12 V - 2 1
W
License plate lights
12
Ceiling light
12
V - 8 W
Cargo area lights
12
V - 5 W
Gauge
12 V — L E D
lights
Indicator
2-18
lights
lights
lights
V - 5 W
V - 5 W
(non-replaceable)
12 V - L E D , 1 4 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0 . 8 4
W
Body Specifications
Illustration
219
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Maintenance Main Items
Maintenance S u b Items
Lubricants arid Fluids
For details of lubrication points a n d t y p e of lubricants t o be applied, refer t o the illustrated i n d e x a n d various w o r k p r o c e d u r e s {such as
A s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y , R e p l a c e m e n t , O v e r h a u l , Installation, e t c ) c o n t a i n e d in each section.
Lubrication
A
Points
Lubricant
Engine
H o n d a M o t o r Oil:
A m e r i c a n H o n d a P/N 0 8 7 9 8 - 9 0 2 3 ( 5 W - 2 0 ) ,
H o n d a C a n a d a P/N C A 6 6 8 0 6 ( 5 W - 2 0 )
L o o k f o r t h e A P I c e r t i f i c a t i o n s e a l o n t h e o i l c o n t a i n e r . M a k e s u r e it s a y s " F o r
Gasoline Engines." SAE viscosity: See chart.
B
Manual
transmission
H o n d a M a n u a l T r a n s m i s s i o n F l u i d ( M T F ) : P/N
08798-9016
A l w a y s u s e H o n d a M T F . U s i n g m o t o r o i l c a n c a u s e s t i f f e r s h i f t i n g b e c a u s e it
does not contain the proper
Automatic
transmission
additives.
H o n d a A u t o m a t i c Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):
A m e r i c a n H o n d a P/N 0 8 2 0 0 - 9 0 0 1 ,
H o n d a C a n a d a P/N
CA66689
A l w a y s use H o n d a A T F - Z 1 . U s i n g a n o n - H o n d a A T F can affect shift quality.
C
Brake system (including A B S
line)
H o n d a D O T 3 Brake Fluid: P/N
08798-9008
A l w a y s use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can
c a u s e c o r r o s i o n a n d d e c r e a s e t h e life o f t h e s y s t e m .
D
Clutch line ( m a n u a l t r a n s m i s s i o n )
H o n d a D O T 3 Brake Fluid: P/N
08798-9008
A l w a y s use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can
c a u s e c o r r o s i o n a n d d e c r e a s e t h e life o f t h e s y s t e m .
E
Brake booster clevis
F
Clutch master cylinder clevis (manual transmission)
G
Release fork (manual
H
Shift lever (manual
1
Battery terminals
J
Fuel fill d o o r
Multipurpose
Grease
transmission)
transmission)
K
Hood hinges and hood
L
Tailgate hinges a n d tailgate latch
M
Rear brake shoe
N
Brake caliper piston seals
0
p
Shift cable ends (manual
Q
Air conditioning
latch
linkage
Rubber
transmission)
Caliper piston boots, caliper pins, and
compressor
Grease
H o n d a S i l i c o n e G r e a s e : P/N
08C30-B0234M
boots
C o m p r e s s o r oil: KEIHIN SP-10 (P/N 38897-P13-A01AH, 38898-P13-003, or
38899-P13-A01) for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
3-2
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Maintenance Display
The Maintenance Minder is an important feature of the information display. The Fit's onboard computer (ECM/PCM)
calculates the remaining engine oil life and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the code for
other scheduled maintenance items needing service.
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
INFORMATION DISPLAY
3-4
Service Information
1. The remaining engine oil life on the engine oil
indicator (A) is displayed as a percentage on the
information display. To see the current engine oil
life, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position,
then push and release the Select/Reset Knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed.
on
OIL LIFE
2. When the remaining engine oil life is 6 % to 15 %,
the engine oil life indicator will be displayed w h e n
the ignition switch is in the ON(II) position.
The maintenance minder indicator (A) will also
come o n , and the maintenance item code(s) for
other scheduled maintenance items needing
service will appear in the information display.
• Complete
(see page
• Complete
(see page
3. When the remaining engine oil life is 1 % to 5 %,
the maintenance message " S E R V I C E " (A) appears
along with the same maintenance item code(s),
when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.
OIL LIFE
SERVICE ,
A
I
C
4. When the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the
engine oil life indicator blinks.
This display comes on w h e n the ignition switch is
in the ON (II) position. At this point, the indicated
maintenance must be performed as soon as
possible.
OIL LIFE
SERVICE i
A
I
n
u%
list of maintenance main items (B)
3-7).
list of maintenance sub items (C)
3-8).
OIL LIFE
AB
I
<C D
I
13
L
B
(cont'd)
3-5
Maintenance Minder
General Information (cont'd!
5. If the Indicated maintenance is not performed, the
engine oil life indicator shows a negative mileage,
for example " — 1 0 , " blinking on the display..
A negative mileage will display after the vehicle is
driven 10 miles (for USA models) or 10 km (for
Canada models) after the display begins t o blink.
This means that the indicated maintenance item
should have been performed 10 miles (for USA
models) or 10 km (for Canada models) ago.
I
SERVICE |
A
in
IU
Resetting the Maintenance Information
Display
NOTE;
• The vehicle must be stopped to reset
• If the required service is performed and the display is
not reset, or if the display is reset w i t h o u t performing
the service, the system will not show the proper
maintenance t i m i n g . This can lead to serious
mechanical problems because there will be no record
of w h e n maintenance is needed.
• The engine oil life and the maintenance items may be
reset independently only w i t h the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. If oil life is more than 15 %, press the Select/Reset
Knob repeatedly until the engine oil life is
displayed.
3. Press the Select/Reset- Knob for about 10 seconds.
The engine oil life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
NOTE: If you are resetting the display w h e n the oil
life is more than 15 %, make sure the maintenance
items requiring service have been performed
before resetting this display.
4. Press the Select/Reset Knob for another 5 seconds.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and
the engine oil life will reset to " 1 0 0 . "
OIL LIFE
3-6
inn
M J U
%
Maintenance Mam
Items
If the message "SERVICE" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every
year.
NOTE;
• Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3, only if they are noisy.
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil (see page 8-5)
Engine oil capacity w i t h o u t engine oil filter; 3.4 L (3.6 US qt).
Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-6)
B
Engine oil capacity w i t h engine oil filter; 3.6 L (3.8 US qt).
Inspect front and rear brakes (see page 19-3)
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8)
Check the number of clicks (6 to 8) w h e n the parking brake lever is pulled w i t h 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibf)
of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-5)
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3)
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4)
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including ABS (see page 19-29)
Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator-control unit for damage or leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and for leaks.
• Engine coolant (see page 10-6)
• Manual transmission fluid (MTF) (see page 13-3)
• Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (see page 14-226)
• Clutch fluid (see step 13 on page 12-6)
• Brake fluid (see page 19-9)
• Windshield washer fluid
Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-8)
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines and connections* (see page 11-284)
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts.
NOTE; According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) w i l l
not void the customer's emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at
the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
Symbol
A
3-7
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance S u b Items
Number
1
2
3
4
5
3-8
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition,
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-307)
Replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km), if the vehicle is driven primarily in dusty conditions.
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-42)
• Replace the filter at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) intervals if the vehicle is driven primarily in urban areas
that have high concentrations of soot in the air f r o m industry and diesel-powered vehicles.
• Replace the filter whenever airflow f r o m the heating and cooling system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-32)
• Check for cracks, damage.
• Check deflection and tension.
Replace manual transmission fluid (see page 13-3)
Capacity: 1.5 L (1.6 US qt); use Honda MTF.
Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-227)
Capacity; 2.4 L (2.5 US qt); use Honda ATF-Z1.
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission.fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
at 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).
Replace spark plugs (see page 4-23)
Use IZFR6K13 (NGK) or SKJ20DR-M13 (DENSO).
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-8)
Intake: 0.17±0.02 m m (0.007±0.0008 in.), Exhaust: 0.28±0.02 m m (0.011 ± 0 . 0 0 0 8 in.).
Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6)
Capacity (including reservoir): M/T model: 3.8 L (4.0 US qt), A/T model 3.7 L (3.9 US qt); use Honda
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
The Fit SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the
glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, driver's seat belt outer lap tensioner in the driver's seat
belt lower anchor, front passenger's seat belt outer lap tensioners in the front passenger's seat belt lower anchor, side
curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service
the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are
located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and
tools, and should be done only by an authorized Honda dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors w h e n the ignition switch is ON (II),
or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the
airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the steering
c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special T o o l s
4-2
Starting System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index .... 4-3
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Index
4-4
Circuit Diagram
4-5
Starter Circuit
Troubleshooting
4-6
Clutch Interlock Switch T e s t ... 4-8
Starter Solenoid Test
4-8
Starter Performance T e s t
4-9
Starter R e m o v a l and
Installation
4-10
Starter Overhaul
4-12
Ignition System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Ignition Timing Inspection
Ignition Coil R e m o v a l /
Installation
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit
Troubleshooting
Spark Plug Inspection
.... 4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-23
Charging System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index .... 4-24
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Index
4-25
Circuit Diagram
Charging S y s t e m Indicator
Circuit Troubleshooting .......
Alternator and Regulator
Circuit Troubleshooting
Alternator Control
Circuit Troubleshooting
Drive Belt R e p l a c e m e n t ...........
Drive Belt Inspection and
Adjustment
Alternator R e m o v a l a n d
Installation
Alternator Overhaul
4-26
4-27
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-34
4-36
Cruise Control
C o m p o n e n t Location Index ....
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Index
Circuit Diagram
Cruise Control Input T e s t
* Cruise Control Combination
S w i t c h T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t ....
Clutch Pedal Position S w i t c h
Test
4-41
4-42
4-44
4-45
4-47
4-48
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Number
®
©
(D
4-2
Tool Number
07JGG-0010100
07746-0010400
07749-0010000
Description
Belt Tension Gauge
Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m
Handle Driver
Qty
1
1
1
Starting System
Component Location index
P e r f o r m a n c e t e s t p a g e 4-9
Removal and Installation, page
O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-12
4-10
4-
Starting System
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
Engine does not start
(does not crank)
Engine cranks, but does
not start
Engine is hard to start
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Engine cranks slowly
4-4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Diagnostic procedure
Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-52).
Check the starter (see page 4-6).
Check the starter cut relay (see page 22-53).
Check the transmission range switch (A/T) (see page
14-254).
Check the clutch interlock switch (M/T) (see page 4-8).
Check the ignition switch or w i r e (see page 22-55).
Check for PGM-Fi DTCs (see page 11-3).
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-283).
Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-284).
Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-299).
Check the throttle body (see page 11-305).
Check for low engine compression (see page 6-6).
Check for a damaged or broken cam chain.
Check for PG M-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-283).
Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-284).
Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-299).
Check for a restricted three w a y catalytic converter
( T W O or exhaust system.
Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-52).
Check the starter for binding (see page 4-12).
Check for excessive drag in the engine.
Also check for
Poor ground at G101
(A/T) or G403 (M/T)
Fuel level in tank
.. r~\.
-4.
ENGME
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
ST HOT in
START {III)
BLK/WHT
BLK/RED
4-5
Starting System
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
• Air temperature must be between 59 and 100 °F
(15 and 38 °C) during this procedure.
• After this inspection, y o u must reset engine control
module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM),
otherwise the ECM/PCM will continue t o stop the fuel
injectors f r o m functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset
using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) (see page
11-3).
• The battery must be in good condition and fully
charged.
1. Hook up the following equipment:
• A m m e t e r , 0—400 A
• Voltmeter, 0—20 V (accurate w i t h i n 0.1 V)
6. Set the park brake, then w i t h the shift lever in the N
or P position (A/T) or the clutch pedal pressed (M/T),
turn the ignition switch to START (III).
Does the starter
crank the engine
normally?
Y E S — T h e starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
NO—Goto step7.
7. Check the battery condition (see page 22-52). Check
electrical connections at the battery, the negative
battery cable to body, the engine ground cables,
and the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then
try cranking the engine again.
Does the starter
crank the
engine?
YES—Repairing the loose connection corrected the
problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
NO—Check the f o l l o w i n g :
• If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to
step 8.
• If it cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go
to step 10.
• If it does not disengage f r o m the flywheel or
torque converter ring gear w h e n y o u release the
key, replace the starter, or remove and
disassemble it, and check for the f o l l o w i n g :
- Starter solenoid malfunction
- Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning
clutch
2. Connect the HDS t o the data link connector (DLC)
(see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the ECM/PCM. If it does not, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
5. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS
OFF on the HDS.
4-6
+
ENGINE
8. Make sure the transmission is in N or P position
(A/T) or neutral (M/T) and set the park brake.
Disconnect the connector f r o m the starter solenoid
S terminal. Connect a jumper wire f r o m the battery
positive terminal t o the solenoid S terminal.
9. Check the f o l l o w i n g items in the order listed until
you find the open circuit: •
• The BLK/WHT wire and connectors between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the ignition switch.
• The BLK/RED and BLK/WHT wire and connectors
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
starter.
• The ignition switch (see page 22-55).
• The transmission range switch and connector
(A/T) or the clutch interlock switch and connector
(M/T).
• The starter cut relay.
10. While cranking the engine, check the cranking
voltage and the current draw.
Is the cranking voltage greater than or equal to
8.0 V and is the current draw less than or equal to
200 A?
Does the starter
crank the
engine?
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—Remove the starter, and repair or replace as
necessary. H
Y E S — G o t o step 11.
NO—-Replace the starter, or remove and
disassemble it, and check for the f o l l o w i n g : •
• Drag in the starter armature
• Shorted armature w i n d i n g
• Excessive drag in the engine
11. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed
above 100 rpm?
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
NO—Replace the starter, or remove and
disassemble it, and check for the f o l l o w i n g : •
• Open circuit in the starter armature commutator
segments
• Excessively w o r n starter brushes
• Open circuit in the commutator brushes
• Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
• Faulty drive gear clutch
12. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and
the flywheel or torque converter ring gear for
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
13. Select ECM/PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel
ALL INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
4-7
Starting System
Starter Solenoid Test
Clutch Interlock S w i t c h Test
MfT
model
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio unit, then write d o w n the audio presets.
1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector
(A).
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery first,
then disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the starter cable terminal (A), BLK/WHT
w i r e connector (B), and motor cable (C).
4. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the
S terminal and the armature housing (ground).
There should be continuity.
2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals
according to the table.
• If there is continuity, go to step 5.
• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
• If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
clutch interlock switch.
• If OK, install the clutch interlock switch, and
adjust the pedal height (see page 12-4).
\^
Terminal
1
Clutch Interlock S w i t c h
P R E S S E D
R E L E A S E D
2
5. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the
S terminal and the M terminal. There should be
continuity.
• If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
\
o
— o
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, and
then connect the negative cable.
8. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio unit, then
enter the audio presets.
9. Set the clock.
4-8
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wires f r o m the M terminal.
5. Disconnect the battery f r o m the starter body. If the
pinion retracts immediately, it is w o r k i n g properly.
2, Make the connections as described below using the
thickest (gauge) wire possible (preferably the same
gauge as used on the vehicle).
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave
the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
BODY
(GROUND)
6. Firmly clamp the starter in a vise.
7. Reconnect the w i r e to the M terminal.
BODY
^
(GROUND)
8. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and
confirm that the motor turns and keeps rotating.
3. Connect the battery as shown. Make sure you
disconnect the starter motor w i r e f r o m the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working
properly.
4. Disconnect the battery f r o m the M terminal. If the
pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the
solenoid is working properly.
BODY
(GROUND)
9. If the electric current meets the specifications w h e n
the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is
w o r k i n g properly.
BODY
"
(GROUND)
Specifications
Electric Current: 90 A or less
4-
Starting System
Starter Removal and Installation
Removal
6. Disconnect the starter cable (A) f r o m the B terminal,
then disconnect connector (B) f r o m the S terminal.
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the
audio unit, then write d o w n the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery first,
then disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the dipstick (A) and the dipstick tube (B).
A
A
7. Remove the water hose clamp (C).
8. Remove the upper mounting bolt (D) and the lower
mounting bolt (E), then remove the starter.
4. Raise the vehicle on the hoist, and make sure it is
supported securely.
5. Remove the splash shield (see step 24 on page 5-6).
4-10
Installation
1. Install the starter, then loosely install the upper
mounting bolt (A) and the lower mounting bolt (B).
5. Install the splash shield (see step 34 on page 5-17).
6. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
7. Install the dipstick tube (A) and the dipstick (B).
2. Tighten the upper mounting bolt and the lower
mounting bolt.
8. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then
connect the negative cable.
3. Install the water hose clamp (C).
4. Install the starter cable (D) by aligning the tab o n
the terminal (E) and the groove (F) of the terminal
holder, then install the connector (G).
9. Start the engine to make sure the starter works
properly.
10. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio unit, then
enter the audio presets.
11. Set the clock.
4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul
Exploded V i e w
STARTER SOLENOID
(Apply molybdenum disulfide.)
4-12
Armature Inspection and Test
5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10).
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 28.0 mm (1.10 in.)
Service Limit:
27.0 mm (1.06 in.)
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage f r o m
contact w i t h the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
6. Measure the commutator (A) runout.
4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is
dirty or burnt, resurface w i t h emery cloth or a lathe
within the following specifications, or recondition
with # 5 0 0 or # 6 0 0 sandpaper (B).
• If the commutator runout is w i t h i n the service
limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments.
• If the commutator runout is not w i t h i n the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
(cont'd)
4-13
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
7 . Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B),
undercut the mica w i t h a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
the commutator segments. The undercut should
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
the armature.
Commutator Mica Depth
Standard (Mem): 0.50—0.80 mm (0.020—0.031 in.)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
D
8. Check for continuity between the segments of the
commutator. If there is an open circuit between any
of the segments, replace the armature.
4-14
10. Check for continuity w i t h an ohmmeter between
the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and
between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If
there is continuity, replace the armature.
Starter Brush Inspection
Starter Brush Holder Test
11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly or
the armature housing.
14. Check for continuity between the ( + ) brush holder
(A) and (—) brush holder (B). If there is continuity,
replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
Standard (New); 14.0—14.5 mm (0.55—0.57 In.)
Service Limit:
S.O mm (0.35 in.)
B
Brush Spring Inspection
Starter Field Winding Test
12. Check for continuity between the brushes (A) and
the motor wire (B). If there is no continuity, replace
the armature housing (C).
15. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact w i t h the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off
the brush. If it is not w i t h i n the standard, replace
the brush holder assembly.
Spring Tension
Standard (New): 13.7-17.7 N
(1.40-1.80 kgf, 3.09-3.97 Ibf)
B
13. Check for continuity between each brush and the
armature housing. If there is continuity, replace the
armature housing.
4-15
Starting System
Starter Overhaul fcont'd)
Overrunning Clutch Inspection
Starter Reassembly
1 6 . Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft.
Replace i t if it does not slide smoothly.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during
this procedure.
20. Install the planetary gear assembly (A) to the gear
housing (B) by aligning the reference marks (C).
A
1 7 . Hold the drive gear (B), and turn the overrunning
clutch in the direction shown to make sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the overrunning clutch locks
in the opposite direction. If it does not lock, replace
the overrunning clutch assembly.
18. If the starter drive gear is w o r n or damaged,
replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the flywheel or torque
converter ring gear. Replace it if the starter drive
gear teeth are damaged.
Planetary Gear Inspection
19. Check the planetary gears (A) and internal gear (B).
Replace them if they are w o r n or damaged.
4-16
21. W h e n you replace the brush holder or the armature
housing, you need to seat the new brushes. Slip a
strip of # 500 or # 6 0 0 sandpaper, w i t h the grit side
up, between the commutator and each brush, and
smoothly turn the armature. The contact surface of
the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as
the commutator.
22. Pry back the brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then
position the brush on the brush holder about
halfway out of its holder. Release the spring to hold
it in place.
23. Pry back the brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then
position the brush on the armature housing (A)
about halfway out of brush holder (B). Release the
spring to hold it in place.
25. Push each brush d o w n until it seats against the
commutator, then release the spring against the
end of the brush.
26. Install the end cover (A) by aligning the reference
marks (B).
24. Install the armature housing (A) and armature (B)
by aligning the slotted point (C) to the projection (D).
B
27. Install the starter solenoid.
4-17
Ignition System
Component Location Index
SPARK
PLUG
Inspection, page
4-18
4-23
ENGINE
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
SUBFUSE BOX
G101
ICM: ignition Control Module
4-19
ignition System
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM). If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
8. A i m the light toward the pointer (A) on the cam
chain case. Check the ignition t i m i n g under a no
load condition (headlights, blower fan, rear w i n d o w
defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
Ignition Timing
M/T: 8 ° ± 2 ° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in
Neutral
A/T: 8 ° ± 2 ° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in P or N
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000
rpm w i t h no load (in P or N) until the radiator fan
comes o n , then let it idle.
5. Check the idle speed (see page 11-267).
6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Connect the t i m i n g light to the No. 1 ignition coil
harness.
9. If the ignition t i m i n g differs f r o m the specification,
check the cam t i m i n g . If the cam t i m i n g is OK,
update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
system works properly, and the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198).
10. Disconnect the HDS and the t i m i n g light.
4-20
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit
Troubleshooting
1 . Remove the MAP sensor connector (A), then
remove the harness holder (B) f r o m the brackets.
1. Check the No. 33 (15 A) fuse in the subfuse box.
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 2.
NO—Replace the fuse. If the fuse continues to blow,
locate and repair the short in the circuit between
the subfuse box and the ignition coils. •
2. Remove the ignition coil relay f r o m the under-dash
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-53).
Is the relay OK ?
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connector, then remove
the ignition coils.
NO—Replace the ignition coil relay. •
3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P
socket terminal No. 1 and body ground, then
terminal No. 4 and body ground.
IGNITION
COIL RELAY 4P S O C K E T
1
2
4
3
Terminal side of female
terminals
3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of
removal.
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o to step 4.
NO—Replace the under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
(cont'd)
4-21
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
socket terminal No. 2 and the No. 1 ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 3.
IGNITION
10. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
IGNITION
COIL RELAY 4P S O C K E T
COIL RELAY 4P SOCKET
1
Terminal side of
female terminals
2
4
3
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of female
terminals
No. 1 IGNITION COIL 3P C O N N E C T O R
Is there
Is there
continuity?
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
YES—Repair a short in the wire between ignition
coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/
PCM (E7).B
NO—Repair an open in the wire between ignition
coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and ignition coil
3P connector terminal No. 3 . B
N O — G o t o step 11.
5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
11. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
socket terminal No. 3 and ECM/PCM connector
terminal E7.
IGNITION COIL R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM). If it does not, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, then t u r n the
ignition switch OFF.
Terminal side of
female terminals
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E( 3 1 P )
1
2 3
11 12
22 / 24
/
NOTE: This step must be done t o protect the ECM/
PCM f r o m damage.
/
4 5 (6) 7
8 9
14 (15) (16) 17 (18) 19 20 21
25 26
27 (2ffl 29 30
Wire side of female
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
Is there
MRLY
/
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — T h e system is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections at the ignition coil relay
and the ECM/PCM (E7). •
NO—Repair an open in the wire between ignition
coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/
PCM (E7).B
4-22
Spark Plug Inspection.
1. Inspect the electrodes and the ceramic insulator.
• Burned or w o r n electrodes may be caused by:
- Advanced ignition t i m i n g
- Loose spark plug
- Plug heat range too hot
- Insufficient cooling
• Fouled plugs may be caused by:
- Retarded ignition t i m i n g
- Oil in combustion chamber
- Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
Replace the plug at the specified interval, if the
center electrode is rounded (A), or if the spark plug
gap is out of specification. Use only the listed spark
plugs.
NOTE: Do not adjust the gap (B) of iridium tip plugs.
Spark Plugs
NGK:
IZFR6K13
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13
Electrode Gap
Standard (New): 1 . 2 - 1 . 3 mm (0.042-0.051 in.)
W o r n or d e f o r m e d
electrodes
Damaged
gasket
Improper gap
Oil-fouling
Carbon deposits
• Cracked center
electrode insulator
Cracked
insulator
4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize c o m p o u n d to
the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head, finger-tight. Then torque t h e m to
1 8 N - m ( 1 . 8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft).
2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,
clean the electrode with a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
• Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this w i l l damage the electrode.
• W h e n using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.
4-23
Charging System
Component Location Index
4-24
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
Charging system
indicator does not come
on with the ignition
switch ON (11)
Charging system
indicator stays on
Battery discharged
Diagnostic procedure
Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
(see page 4-27).
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Battery overcharged
5.
6.
1.
2.
Also check for
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
(see page 4-27).
Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-32).
Check the drive belt tension (see page 4-32).
Check for any electrical equipment (including OEM
options) that use parasitic electrical current draw w h e n
the ignition switch is off.
Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-32).
Check the drive belt tension (see page 4-32).
Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-29).
Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
Test the battery (see page 22-52).
Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-29).
Test the battery (see page 22-52).
4-25
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
4-26
Charging S y s t e m Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the charging
system
indicator
come on?
8. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) t o the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
YES—Goto step 2.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
IMO—Goto step 14.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
2,000 rpm for 1 minute.
Does the charging
system
indicator
10. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM). If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
go off?
YES—Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go
to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4 - 2 9 ) . •
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM/
PCM f r o m damage.
N O — G o t o step 3.
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-142).
Does the charging
system
indicator
13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B10 and body ground.
flash?
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-161).•
/ \
2j3
I
[4
5
i _ Z I l J21l
10
12
17 18
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ALTL
(WHT/BLU)
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Wire side of female
terminals
NOTE: The charging system indicator may come on
and then go off.
Is there
Does the charging
system
indicator
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or
repair the alternator (see page 4-36). •
NO—Goto step7.
continuity?
go off?
YES—Repair a short in the wire between the
alternator and the ECM/PCM. •
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-8), then
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away w i t h
a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/
PCM (see page 11-198). •
(cont'd)
4-27
Charging System
Charging S y s t e m Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-142).
Does the charging
system
indicator
flash?
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
NO—Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-161 ) . •
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2 1 . Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
22. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 and
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
ALTERNATOR 4P
19. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) t o the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
CONNECTOR
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM/
PCM f r o m damage.
23. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P), and the
alternator connector (4P).
24. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B10 and the alternator 4P connector
terminal No. 3.
(2)
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P)
(WHT/BLU)
3 4 5
8
10 11 12 13
17 1 8 , /
1 / 21
JUMPER WIRE
6
/ /
/
16
/
ALTL
Wire side of female
terminals
(WHT/BLU)
(2)
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the charging
system
indicator
ALTERNATOR
4 P CONNECTOR
(WHT/BLU)
come on?
Wire side of female
terminals
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or
repair the alternator (see page 4-36). •
Is there
continuity?
N O — G o t o step 19.
Y E S — U p d a t e the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-8), then
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away w i t h
a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/
PCM (see page 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . •
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the
alternator and the ECM/PCM. H
4-28
, 1 ENGINE
•
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Make sure the battery connections are good and
the battery is sufficiently charged.
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
idle.
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn
the selector switch to position 1 (starting).
6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the
selector switch t o position 2 (charging).
FIELD
LOAD A D J U S T E R
FULL
( C A R B O N PILE)
LEAD (BLU)
TESTER
VOLTMETER
NEGATIVE
7. Remove the inductive pickup, and zero the
ammeter.
LEAD (BLK)
|
•
X
^AMPOTS
V O L T
SELECTOR
to
X >
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
©flxBsTER °U)AD LIGHT
LEAD
(RED)
VAT-40
^VOLTS^
S
8. Place the inductive pickup over the B terminal w i r e
of the alternator so the arrow points away f r o m the
alternator.
9. Raise the engine speed t o 2,000 r p m , and hold it
there.
—'
Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
FIELD
SELECTOR
TEST
SELECTOR
Y E S — G o to alternator control circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4 - 3 0 ) . •
SWITCH
NEGATIVE
TERMINAL
N O - G o t o step 10.
C A B L E (BLK)
POSITIVE
TERMINAL
10. Apply a load w i t h the VAT-40 until the battery
voltage drops w i t h i n 12—13.5 V.
C A B L E (RED)
Is the amperage
87.5 A or more?
INDUCTIVE
PICKUP
INDUCTIVE
PICKUP
B
(GRN)
TERMINAL
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000
r p m , w i t h no load until the radiator fan comes o n ,
then let it idle.
Y E S — T h e charging system is OK m
NOTE: If the charging system indicator is still on,
replace the alternator (see page 4-34).
NO—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or
repair the alternator (see page 4-36). •
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 r p m , and hold it
there.
Is the voltage
over 15.1 V?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or
rear housing assembly (see page 4 - 3 6 ) . •
N O — G o t o step 5.
4-29
Charging System
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting
9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B18 and body ground.
USA models
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B (24P)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2 3 4 5
10 11 12 13
8
17 18
21
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM). If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
/
6. Measure the voltage between the ECM/PCM
connector B (24P) terminal No. 18 and the positive
terminal of the battery.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
/
/
16
/
(WHT/GRN)
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
diagnose and repair the cause before continuing
w i t h this test.
5. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high
beam.
/
ALTC
6
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the
alternator and the ECM/PCM. H
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-8), then
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away w i t h
a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/
PCM (see page 11-198). •
10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done t o protect the ECM/
PCM f r o m damage.
Wire side of female
terminals
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P) and the
alternator connector (4P).
Is there 1 V or
less?
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
N O — G o t o step 7.
7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done t o protect the ECM/
PCM f r o m damage.
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P) and the
alternator connector (4P).
4-30
•~ ENGINE
Drive Belt Replacement
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B18 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No. 2.
1. Loosen the lock bolt (A), the mounting bolt (B), and
the adjusting bolt (C),then remove the drive belt (D).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P)
2 3 4 5
10 11 12 13
8
17 18
21
ALTC
(WHT/GRN)
/
/
/
6
/
/
16
//
(WHT/GRN)
ALTERNATOR
4 P CONNECTOR
Wire side o f female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or
repair the alternator (see page 4-36). •
2. Install the drive belt in the reverse order of removal.
3. Adjust the drive belt tension (see page 4-32)
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the
alternator and the ECM/PCM. •
4-31
Charging System
Drive Belt Inspection and Adjustment
Special Tools Required
Belt tension gauge 07JGG-0010100
Adjustment
2. Loosen the lock bolt (A) and the mounting bolt (B).
Belt Tension Gauge Method
Inspection
A
8x1.25 mm
24 N m
(2.4 k g f - m , 17 ibf-ft)
C
B
10 m 1.25 mm
44 N m
(4.5 k g f - m , 33 Ibf-ft)
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and
measure the tension. Follow the gauge
manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is w o r n or
damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment,
go to step 2.
Tension
Used Beit:
New Belt:
4 4 1 - 5 8 8 N ( 4 5 - 6 0 kgf, 9 9 - 1 3 2 ibf)
980-1,078 N
( 1 0 0 - 1 1 0 kgf, 2 2 0 - 2 4 2 Ibf)
With A / C
3. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt
tension, then retighten the lock bolt and the
mounting bolt.
4. Recheck the belt tension.
5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5
minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specification.
4-32
Deflection Method
inspection
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibf), and measure
the deflection at the m i d point (A) between the A/C
compressor (alternator for w i t h o u t A/C
compressor) and crankshaft pulley. If the belt is
w o r n or damaged, replace i t If the belt needs
adjustment, go to step 2.
Adjustment
2. Loosen the lock bolt (A) and the mounting bolt (B).
A
8x1.25 mm
24 N m
(2.4
k g f m , 17
B
10x1.25 mm
44 I M m
Ibfft)
C
(4.5 k g f m , 3 3
Ibfft)
Deflection
With A / C :
Used Beit: 5 . 5 - 8 . 5 mm (0.22—0.33 In.)
New Belt: 3.5—5.0 mm (0.14—0.20 in.)
Without A / C :
Used Beit: 7 . 5 - 1 0 . 5 mm (0.30-0.41 in.)
New Beit:
4.5—6.0 mm (0.18—0.24 In.)
With A / C
3. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt
tension, then retighten the lock bolt and the
mounting bolt.
4. Recheck the belt tension.
5. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5
minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specification.
4-33
Charging System
Alternator Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio unit, then write d o w n the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery.
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
4. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
5. Disconnect the alternator connector (A), the BLK
w i r e (B) and the harness clamp (C) f r o m the
alternator.
4-34
6. Remove the lock bolt (A) and the mounting bolt (B),
then remove the alternator.
Installation
1. Install the alternator, then loosely install the lock
bolt (A) and the mounting bolt (B).
4. Connect the alternator connector (A) and the BLK
wire (B) by aligning the tab on the terminal (C) and
the groove (D) of the terminal insulator, then install
the harness clamp (E).
B
1 0 x 1.25 mm
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibf-ft)
2. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
5. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
3. Adjust the drive belt tension (see page 4-32).
6. Connect the negative cable to the battery.
7. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio unit, then
enter the audio presets.
8. Set the clock.
4-35
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded V i e w
BEARING RETAINER
ROTOR
4-36
Special Tools Required
• Handle driver 07749-0010000
• Driver attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during
this procedure.
5. Separate the rear housing f r o m the drive-end
housing by inserting a flat tip screwdriver into the
openings and prying t h e m apart.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the stator w i t h the
tip of the screwdriver.
1. Test the alternator and the regulator before you
remove them (see page 4-29).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-34).
3. Remove the four through bolts.
6. Separate the rear housing (A) and the drive-end
housing (B) w i t h the stator (C) attached to the rear
housing.
4. Heat the rear bearing seat w i t h a 1,000 W heat gun
for about 5 minutes (129—140 °F, 50 —60 °C).
(cont'd)
4-37
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul {cont'd)
7. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or
rear bearing, go to step 15. Clamp the rotor in a
soft-jawed vise, then remove the pulley locknut.
1 0 . Remove the rear bearing using the puller as s h o w n .
1 1 . Use a hand press to install the new rear bearing.
Apply pressure only on the inner race to avoid
damaging the bearing.
8. Remove the rotor using a puller as s h o w n .
0
HP
fit
9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the
bearing journal surface in the drive-end housing for
seizure marks.
• If either the rotor or drive-end housing is
damaged, replace the alternator.
• If both the rotor and the drive-end housing are
OK, go to step 10.
4-38
12. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
14. With a h a m m e r and the special tools, install a new
front bearing in the drive-end housing.
07749-0010000
(i
07746-0010400
13. Support the drive-end housing in a vise, and drive
out the front bearing w i t h a brass drift (A) and a
hammer.
Alternator Brush Inspection
15. Measure the length of both brushes with a vernier
caliper.
• If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the rear housing assembly.
• If brush length is OK, go t o step 16.
Alternator Brush Length
Standard (New): 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
Service Limit:
5.0 mm (0.20 in.)
(cont'd)
4-39
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
Rotor Slip Ring Test
2 1 . Heat the rear bearing seat w i t h a 1,000 W heat gun
for about 5 minutes (129—140 °F, 50 —60 *€).
16. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
• If there is continuity, go to step 17.
• If there is no continuity, replace the rotor
assembly.
22. Put the rear housing assembly (A) and drive-end
housing/rotor assembly (B) together, tighten the
four through bolts (C) and pull out the pin (D).
17. Check that there is no continuity between each slip
ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
• If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
assembly, go to step 18.
• If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
23. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by
hand to make sure the rotor rotates smoothly and
w i t h o u t noise.
Alternator Reassembly
18. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the driveend housing, then tighten its locknut to 110 N-m
(11.2 kgf-m,81 Ibf-ft).
19. Remove any grease or any oil f r o m the slip rings.
20. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit
(B) (about 1.8 m m (0.77 in.) diameter) to hold t h e m
in place.
4-40
24. Install the alternator, and adjust its belt tension
(see page 4-35).
Cruise Control
Component Location Index
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
(Built into gauge control module)
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH {M/T)
Test, page 4-48
Clutch Pedal Adjustment, page 12-4
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(Built Into gauge control module)
Pedal Height A d j u s t m e n t , page 19-6
7
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (A/T)
Test, page 14-254
Replacement, page 14-256
4-41
Cruise Control
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
Cruise control cannot be
set
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cruise control can be set,
but the cruise main
indicator does not come
on
Cruise control can be set,
but the cruise control
indicator does not come
on
Vehicle does not
decelerate or accelerate
accordingly w h e n the set/
decel or resume/accel
switch is pressed
Set speed does not
cancel w h e n the brake
pedal is pressed
Set speed does not
cancel (engine rpm stays
high) w h e n the clutch
pedal is pressed (M/T)
Set speed does not
cancel w h e n the cruise
control main switch is
pressed
4-42
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Diagnostic procedure
Check for PG M-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Check the No. 16 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, and the No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-47).
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-142).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-142).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the cruise control indicator signal input.
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the set/decel, resume/accel switch signal input.
Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-47).
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page 22-98).
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the clutch pedal position switch signal input.
Do the clutch pedal position switch test (see page 4-48).
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-47).
Also check for
Poor ground GIG'l
(A/T) or G402 (M/T)
Faulty gauge control
module
Faulty gauge control
module
Open circuit, loose or
disconnected
terminals:
LT GRN/BLK or
GRY/RED wire
° Snort to power in the
BLU wire
• Faulty brake pedal
position switch
Short to ground in the
LT BLU wire
Short to ground in the
PUR wire
.V
Symptom
Set speed does not
cancel when the cancel
switch is pressed
1.
2.
3.
Set speed will not
resume when the
resume/accel switch is
pressed (with the cruise
control main switch
turned on, and set speed
temporarily canceled by
pressing the brake pedal)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set speed will not
resume w h e n the
resume/accel switch is
pressed (with the cruise
control main switch
turned on, and set speed
temporarily canceled by
pressing the clutch pedal)
(M/T)
W i t h the ignition switch
ON (II), and the lighting
switch turned on, the
cruise control
combination switch
illumination does not
come on
1.
2.
3.
4.
Diagnostic procedure
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the cancel switch signal input.
Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-47).
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment
(see page 19-6).
Check the No. 16(15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, and the No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the resume/accel switch signal input.
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-47).
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Check the clutch pedal position switch adjustment
(see page 12-4).
Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-45).
Test the resume/accel switch signal input.
Test the clutch pedal position switch signal input.
Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-47).
ENGINE
Also check for
Open circuit, loose or
disconnected
terminals:
LT GRN/BLK or
GRY/RED wire
• Open circuit, loose or
disconnected
terminals:
LT GRN/BLK wire
• Faulty brake pedal
position switch
• Open circuit, loose or
disconnected
terminals:
LT GRN/BLK w i r e
• Faulty clutch pedal
position switch
Replace the cruise control combination switch (see page
4-47).
4-43
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY r——
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL MODULE
4-44
Cruise Control Input Test
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-174).
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs.
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs,
flex their circuits, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be tested
Brake switch
signal
Test condition
Brake pedal pressed,
then released
Parameter: Desired result
CRUISE BRAKE SW
should indicate OFF
w h e n the brake pedal is
pressed and ON w h e n
the brake pedal is
released.
Clutch pedal
position
switch signal
(M/T)
Clutch pedal pressed,
then released
SHIFT/CLUTCH SW
should indicate OFF
w h e n the clutch pedal
is pressed and ON
w h e n the clutch pedal
is released.
Transmission
range switch
signal (A/T)
Shift lever in D and S
SHIFT/CLUTCH SW
should indicate ON in P,
R and N and OFF in D
and S.
Cruise control
main switch
signal
Cruise control main
switch ON and OFF
CRUISE CONTROL
MAIN SW should
indicate ON w h e n the
cruise control main
switch is turned ON
and OFF w h e n the
cruise control main
switch is turned OFF.
Possible cause if result is not obtained
•» Faulty brake pedal position switch
- Blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the underdash fuse/relay box
• An open in the wire between the engine
control module (ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM) and the brake
pedal position switch
• A w i r e shorted to ground between the
ECM/PCM and the brake pedal position
switch
• Faulty clutch pedal position switch
* An open in the wire between the ECM
and the clutch pedal position switch
* A w i r e shorted to ground between the
ECM and the clutch pedal position
switch
• Poor ground G402
• Faulty transmission range switch
• An open in the wire between the PCM
and the transmission range switch
• A wire shorted to g r o u n d between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
• Poor ground G101
• Faulty cruise control main switch
• An open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the cruise control
main switch
• A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control main switch
• An open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and ground
(cont'd)
Cruise Controi
Cruise Control Input Test (cont'd)
4-46
Signal to be tested
Set switch
signal
Test condition
Set/decel switch
pressed and released
Parameter: Desired result
CRUISE CONTROL SET
SW should indicate ON
w h e n the set/decel
switch is pressed and
OFF w h e n the set/decel
switch is released.
Resume
switch signal
Resume/accel switch
pressed and released
Cancel switch
signal
Cancel switch
pressed and released
Cruise control
indicator
signal
Start the engine, turn
the cruise control
main switch on, and
drive the vehicle to
speeds over 25 m p h
(40 km/h). Set and
cancel the cruise
control.
CRUISE CONTROL
RESUME SW should
indicate ON w h e n the
resume/accel switch is
pressed and OFF w h e n
the resume/accel
switch is released.
CRUISE CONTROL
CANCEL SW should
indicate ON w h e n the
cancel switch is
pressed and OFF w h e n
the cancel switch is
released.
CRUISE INDICATOR
should indicate ON
w h e n the cruise control
is set and OFF w h e n
the cruise control is
canceled.
Possible cause of [result is not obtained
• Faulty cruise control combination switch
• A n open in the wire between the gauge
control module and the cruise control
combination switch
• A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
• Faulty cruise control combination switch
• A n open in the w i r e between the gauge
control module and the cruise control
combination switch
• A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
Faulty cruise control combination switch
Faulty gauge control module
Cruise Control Combination S w i t c h Test/Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-17) and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-19) before
performing repairs or service.
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-167).
2. Remove the three screws, then disconnect the
connector (A), and remove the cruise control
combination switch (B).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table.
• If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
switch failure occurred on the cruise control
input test, check and repair the wire harness on
the switch circuit.
• If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
\
Terminal
Position
1
2
5
1
6
\
Cruise
main
control
(ON)
Cruise
main
control
(OFF)
C H
-o
o-
Set/decel
(PRESSED)
Resumel/accel
(PRESSED)
CANCEL
-O
r\
Oo -
11 o
4-47
Cruise Control
Clutch Pedal Position S w i t c h T e s t
SVI/T model
1. Disconnect the 2P connector f r o m the clutch pedal
position switch.
2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals
according to the table.
• If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
clutch pedal position switch.
• If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch and
adjust the pedal height (see page 12-4).
\
Terminal
Clutch Pedal
Position S w i t c h
\
1
2
r\
r\
\
PRESSED
RELEASED
4-48
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Special T o o l s
Engine R e m o v a l
Engine Installation ...
Engine Mount Replacement
Side Engine Mount Replacement
5-2
5-3
5-12
5-21
5-23
Cylinder Head
8-1
Engine Block
7-1
Engine Lubrication
8-1
Intake iVfanifold/Exhaust System
.. 9-1
Engine Assembly
Special Tools
Ref. No.
®
5-2
Tool Number
07AAK-SNAA120
Description
Universal Eyelet
Qty
Engine Removal
Special Tools Required
- Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 *
• Fit engine hanger adapter, VSB02C000026 *
* : These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857
8. Remove the Passenger's dashboard undercover,
then Disconnect the engine control module (ECM)/
powertrain control module (PCM) connectors (A),
dashboard w i r e harness connector (B), and throttle
actuator control module connector (C).
NOTE:
* Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces,
* To avoid damaging wire and terminals, unplug the
wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
• Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio unit, then write d o w n the audio presets.
2. Secure the hood in the w i d e open position (support
rod in the lower hole).
3. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-280).
9. Loosen the blower unit mounting nuts (A).
4. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery first,
then disconnect the positive cable.
5. Remove the battery.
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
7. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the
battery base (B).
A
(cont'd)
5-3
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove the harness clamps (A) and g r o m m e t (B),
then pull the engine w i r e harness through the
bulkhead.
13. Remove the engine cover.
11. Remove the starter cable (A) and engine
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness connector (B).
14. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A),
harness holder (B) and manifold absolute pressure
(MAP) sensor connector (C).
12. Remove the battery cable (C) f r o m the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then remove the cable clamp (D).
5-4
15. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve connector (A), throttle body connector
{B), water bypass hoses (C) and purge hose (D).
17. M/T model: Remove the change wires (A). Take
care not to bend the cables w h e n removing t h e m .
Always replace any kinked cable with a new one.
16. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then
disconnect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-290).
18. M/T model: Remove the breather tube (A) f r o m the
clamp (B), clutch slave cylinder (C) and clutch line
bracket m o u n t i n g bolt (D). Do not operate the
clutch pedal once the slave cylinder has been
removed.
B
(cont'd)
5-5
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
19. Disconnect the secondary heated oxygen sensor
(H02S) connector (A).
25. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator to drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
26. Drain the transmission fluid:
• Manual transmission (see page 13-3)
• Automatic transmission (see page 14-227)
27. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-5).
28. Remove the three w a y catalytic converter ( T W O
(A).
20. W i t h A/C: Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
2 1 . Remove the radiator cap.
22. Remove the front wheels.
23. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height.
24. Remove the splash shield.
5-6
29. A/T model: Remove the shift cable cover (A).
32. Disconnect the stabilizer links (see page 18-19).
33. Disconnect the suspension lower a r m ball joints
(see page 18-11).
34. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all
precision finished surfaces w i t h new engine oil. Tie
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
35. A/T model: Remove the intermediate shaft f r o m the
differential (see page 16-27). Coat all precision
finished surfaces w i t h new engine oil. Tie plastic
bag over the intermediate shaft end.
36. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
37. With A/C: Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud
(see page 10-10).
38. Remove the radiator fan shroud (see page 10-10).
30. A/T model: Remove the shift cable holder <B), then
remove the control lever (C) f r o m the selector
control shaft (D).
39. A/T model: Remove the automatic transmission
fluid (ATF) cooler hoses, then plug the ATF cooler
hoses and lines.
3 1 . With A/C: Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch
connector (A), then remove the A/C compressor (B)
without disconnecting the A/C hoses.
(cont'd)
5-7
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd!
40. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and the lower
radiator hose (B).
42. Install the first universal eyelet (07AAK-SNAA120)
to the air cleaner housing bracket.
41. Remove the heater hoses.
44. Install the front leg assemblys (A), hook (B), and
w i n g nut (C) onto the engine support hanger.
Carefully position the engine support hanger on the
vehicle, and attach the hook to the slotted hole in
the universal eyelet. Tighten the w i n g nut by hand
to lift and support the engine/transmission.
5-8
45. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height.
48. Remove the rear m o u n t mounting bolts.
46. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolts, then
remove the steering gearbox bracket
(cont'd)
5-
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
50. Attach a nylon strap or rope to the body and around
the steering gearbox to support it on both sides.
51. Support the front subframe with a jack.
53. Lower the vehicle on the h o i s t
54. Remove the bolt (A) f r o m the chain case cover,
then install the second universal eyelet
(07AAK-SNAA120) to the engine.
07AAK-SNAA120
52. Remove the front subframe.
55. Attach the chain hoist to the engine as shown.
Replace.
56. Remove the engine support hanger (A).
5-10
57. Remove the headlight harness cover.
59. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount/bracket assembly (B).
58. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the
transmission mount bracket (B).
M/T model
B
60. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
electrical w i r i n g .
61. Slowly lower the engine/transmission abut 150 m m
(6 in.). Check once again that all hoses and
electrical w i r i n g are disconnected and free f r o m the
engine/transmission, then lower it all the way.
62. Remove the chain hoist f r o m the engine/
transmission.
63. Raise the vehicle all the way.
NOTE: Carefully position the A/C compressor and
steering gearbox.
64. Remove the engine/transmission f r o m under the
vehicle.
5-11
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation
1. Raise the vehicle on the h o i s t
2. Position the engine/transmission under the vehicle.
Be sure that they are properly aligned. Carefully
lower the vehicle until the engine and transmission
are properly positioned in the engine compartment.
Make sure the vehicle is not resting on any part of
the engine or transmission. Lift and support the
engine w i t h a chain hoist and carefully raise the
engine/transmission into place.
4. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly (A),
then tighten the mounting bolts and support nuts in
the'numbered sequence shown.
0
10 x 1.25
mm
59 N m 16.0 k g f m , 43 ibf-ft)
Replace.
1.0 mm
N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 i b f f t )
6 x
9.8
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in
the sequence given in the following steps. Failure
to f o l l o w this sequence m a y cause excessive noise
and vibration, and reduce engine m o u n t life.
07AAK-SNAA120
©
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f m , 4 0 Ibfft)
Replace.
5. Install the ground cable (B).
07AAK-SNAA120
Install the first universal eyelet (A) to the air cleaner
housing bracket (B), then install the second
universal eyelet (C) to the chain case cover (D).
5-12
0 1 0 x 1 . 2 5
m m
59 N m
(6.0 k g f m , 4 3 Ibfft)
Replace.
6. Install the transmission mount bracket (A), then
tighten the support bolt/nuts and mounting bolt in
the numbered sequence s h o w n ,
9. Install the fit engine hanger adapter
(VSB02C000026) to the A and Reds engine support
hanger (AAR-T-12566).
M/T model
© 10 x 1,25 mm
49 N m
(5.0
k g f m , 36
Ibfft)
Replace.
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
A / T model
© 12 x 1.25 mm
49 N-m
10. Install the front leg assemblys (A), hook (B), and
w i n g nut (C) onto the engine support hanger.
Carefully position the engine support hanger on the
vehicle, and attach the hook to the slotted hole in
the universal eyelet. Tighten the w i n g nut by hand
to lift and support the engine/transmission.
© 12 x 1.25 mm
49 N-m
(5.0
k g f m , 36 Ibfft)
11. Remove the chain hoist, then raise the vehicle on
the hoist to full height.
12. Using the jack, raise the front subframe up to body.
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 3 3 Ibfft)
Replace.
7. Install the ground cable (B).
8. Install the headlight harness cover.
(cont'd)
5-13
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
13. Install the front subframe (see page 20-147).
15. Install the rear mount mounting bolts.
NOTE: When installing, align both installation
reference holes in the subframe w i t h both
reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or
tapered punch as a guide.
10 x 1.25 m m
5 8 N m (5.9 k g f m , 4 3 Ibfft)
Replace.
16. Install the steering gearbox bracket, then tighten
the steering gearbox mounting bolts.
14 x 1.5 m m
93 N m (9.5 k g f m , 6 9 Ibfft)
Replace.
14. M/T model: Install the left front transmission mount
/bracket assembly.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 9 N m (4.0 k g f m , 2 9 Ibfft)
5-14
17. Install the steering gearbox stiffened then tighten
the steering gearbox mounting bolts and stiffener
bolts.
2 1 . Install the upper radiator hose (A) and the lower
radiator hose (B).
10 x 1.25 mm
4 9 N m (5.0 k g f m , 3 6
Replace.
Ibfft)
18. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
19. Remove the engine support hanger and universal
eyelets.
20. Install the heater hoses.
23. Install the radiator fan shroud (see page 10-10).
24. W i t h A/C: Install the A/C condenser fan shroud
(see page 10-10).
25. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height.
(cont'd)
5-15
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
26. A/T model: Install the control lever (A) to the
selector control shaft (B), then install the shift cable
holder (C).
^6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
29. A/T model: Install the new set ring to the
intermediate shaft, then install the intermediate
shaft (see page 16-31).
30. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft,
then install the driveshafts. Make sure each ring
" c l i c k s " into place in the differential.
D
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m
(1.4 k g f m , 10 Ibfft)
31. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints
(see page 18-11).
32. Connect the stabilizer links (see page 18-19).
33. Install the three w a y catalytic converter ( T W O (A);
use new gaskets (B), new self-locking nuts (C) and
new bolts (D).
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in steps, alternating sideto-side.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 3 N m (3.4 k g f m , 2 5 Ibfft)
Replace
27. Install the shift cable cover (D).
28. With A/C: Install the A/C compressor (A), then
connect the A/C compressor clutch connector (B).
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
5-16
34. Install the splash shield.
38. M/T model: Install the change wires (A) using the
plastic washers (B), washers (C), and n e w cotter
pins (D).
35. Lower the vehicle on the h o i s t
36. Install the front wheels.
37. Connect the secondary heated oxygen sensor
(H02S) connector (A).
39. M/T model: Install the clutch slave cylinder (A) and
clutch line bracket mounting bolt (B).
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N-m
B
6x1.0 mm
40. Align the reference mark (C) on the breather tube
(D) w i t h the clamp (E) and install the tube in the
clamp.
(cont'd)
5-17
Engine Assembiy
Engine Installation (cont'd)
41. Connect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-293), then
install the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
purg valve connector (A), throttle body connector
(B), water bypass hoses (C) and purg hose (D).
5-18
43. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A), harness
holder (B) and manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor connector (C).
44. Install the engine cover.
45. Install the starter cable (A) and engine
compartment w i r e harness connector (B).
49. Tighten the blower unit mounting nuts (A).
50. Connect the engine control module (ECM)/
powertiain control module (PCM) connectors (A),
dashboard w i r e harness connector (B), and throttle
actuator control module connector (C).
46. Install the battery cable (C) to the under-hood fuse/
relay box, then install the cable clamp (D).
47. Push the engine control module <ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM) connectors through the
bulkhead, then install the g r o m m e t (A).
B
51. Install the passenger's dashboard undercover.
48. Install the harness clamps (B).
(cont'd)
5-19
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
52. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness
clamps (B).
8 x
1.25
22
Nm
mm
56. Refill the engine w i t h engine oil (see page 8-5).
57. Refill the transmission w i t h fluid:
* Manual transmission (see page 13-3)
• Automatic transmission (see page 14-227)
58. M/T model: Check that the transmission shifts into
gear smoothly.
59. A/T m o d e l : Move the shift lever to each gear, and
verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows
the transmission range switch.
60. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON
(II) (do not operate the starter) so that the fuel p u m p
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation t w o or three times, then
check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
6 1 . Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve
open (see page 10-6).
53. Install air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
54. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals, then assemble t h e m , and apply
grease to prevent corrosion.
55. W i t h A/C: Install the drive belt and adjust it
(see page 4-32).
62. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
63. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-267).
64. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20).
65. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
66. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio unit, then
enter the audio presets.
67. Set the clock.
5-20
Engine Mount Replacement
M/T model
REAR MOUNT
mm
10 x 1.25
N m
(7.0 k g f m , 51
69
LEFT FRONT TRANSMISSION
MOUNT/BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Ibfft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N m
(5.5
k g f m , 40
Ibfft)
Replace.
TRANSMISSION MOUNT
SIDE ENGINE MOUNT/
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
5-21
Engine Assembly
Engine mount Replacement (cont'd)
A / T model
TRANSMISSION MOUNT
SIDE ENGINE MOUNT/
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
5-22
Side Engine Mount Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the side engine mount/bracket assembly
(A).
Installation
1. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly (A),
then tighten the m o u n t i n g bolts and nuts in the
numbered sequence s h o w n .
© 1 0 x 1 . 2 5 m m
5 9 N m (6.0 k g f m , 4 3 Ibfft)
Replace.
A
® 10x1.25 m m
54 N m (5.5 k g f m , 4 0 Ibfft)
Replace.
2. W i t h the nut (A) loosened, move the upper bracket
(B) to the side engine m o u n t (C) until the upper
bracket contacts the stud bolt, then tighten the nut.
Check mount-to-bracket clearance. They should be
6 m m (0.2 in.) and more. If the clearance out of
tolerance, adjust the clearance.
5-23
Engine Mechanical
C f Under Head
Special T o o l s ..........................................
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Engine C o m p r e s s i o n Inspection
V T E C Rocker A r m T e s t
Valve C l e a r a n c e Adjustment
Crankshaft Pulley R e m o v a l and Installation
C a m Chain R e m o v a l
C a m C h a i n Installation
Chain C a s e Oil S e a l Installation
C K P Pulse Plate R e p l a c e m e n t
Cylinder Head C o v e r R e m o v a l
Cylinder Head C o v e r Installation
Cylinder Head R e m o v a l
C M P Pulse Plate R e m o v a l and Installation
C a m s h a f t Sprocket R e m o v a l
C a m s h a f t Sprocket Installation
Cylinder Head Inspection for W a r p a g e
Rocker A r m A s s e m b l y R e m o v a l
Rocker A r m a n d Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly
Rocker A r m and Shaft Inspection
Camshaft Removal
C a m s h a f t Inspection
Valve, S p r i n g , and Valve S e a l R e m o v a l
Valve Inspection
Valve Stem-to-Guide C l e a r a n c e Inspection
Valve G u i d e R e p l a c e m e n t
Valve S e a t Reconditioning
V a l v e , S p r i n g , and Valve S e a l Installation
C a m s h a f t Installation
Rocker A r m A s s e m b l y Installation
Cylinder Head Installation
6-2
6-3
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-10
6-12
6-15
6-19
6-19
6-21
6-21
6-23
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-35
6-37
6-38
6-38
6-39
6-41
6-43
6-44
6-44
6-45
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref. No.
©
®
©
®
®
®
©
®
®
®
©
©
Tool Number
07AAJ-PNAA101
07AAK-RMEEA100
07AAK-RMEA200
07HAH-PJ7A100
07JAA-001020A
07JAB-001020A
07PAD-0010000
070AB-RJA0100
07742-0010100
07746-0010400
07749-0010000
07757-PJ1010A
®
6-2
Description
Air Pressure Regulator
VTEC Air Adapter
VTEC Air Stopper
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m
Socket, 19 m m
Holder Handle
Stem Seal Driver
Crankshaft Pulley Holder
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 m m
Attachment, 52 x 55 m m
Driver
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment
©
®
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
®
Component Location index
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Removal/Installation, page 6-10
IDLER PULLER
(With A/C COMPRESSOR)
(cont'd)
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
6-4
VALVE KEEPERS
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
Removal, page 6-32
Inspection, page 6-34
Installation, page 6-44
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) PULSE PLATE
Replacement, page 6-27
CAMSHAhT
T H R U S T
COVER
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE
SEAL
VALVE SPRING
SEAT
INTAKE VALVE
SPRING
INTAKE VALVE SEAL
Removal, page 6-37
Installation, page 6-43
CAMSHAFT
Removal, page 6-35
Inspection, page 6-35
Installation, page 6-44
VALVE GUIDE
Replacement, page 6-39
INTAKE
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE
Replacement, page 11-258
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL
VALVE FILTER
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-23
Inspection f o r W a r p a g e , page 6-31
Installation, page 6-45
INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-37
Installation, page 6-43
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-37
Installation, page 6-43
6-
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After this Inspection, you must reset the engine
control module (ECM)/ powertrain control module
(PCM), otherwise the ECM/PCM will continue to stop
the injectors f r o m functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset
using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) (see page
11-4).
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
10. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine w i t h
the starter motor and measure the compression.
Compression Pressure:
Above 980 kPa (10.0 kgf/cm ,142 psi)-250 rpm
2
11, Measure the compression on the remaining
cylinders.
Maximum variation:
Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,28 psi)
2
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(see step 2 on page 11-3).
12, If the compression is not w i t h i n specifications,
check the following items, then remeasure the
compression.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
5. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
and the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS
OFF function on the HDS.
7. Remove the four ignition coils (see page 4-21).
8. Remove the four spark plugs.
9. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug
hole.
NOTE: Use a compression gauge of which
connecting length (between the edge and the
flange) is less than 23 m m (0.9 in.).
6-6
•
•
•
•
Damaged
Damaged
Damaged
Damaged
or w o r n
cylinder
or w o r n
or w o r n
valves and seats
head gasket
piston rings
piston and cylinder bore
13 Select ECM/PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel the
ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS.
V T E C Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required
- A i r Pressure Regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101
•VTEC air adapter 07AAK-RMEA100
•VTEC air stopper 07AAK-RMEA200
6. Remove the No. 3 rocker shaft mounting bolt, then
install the VTEC air adapter (A) w i t h a washer
(thickness about 1.5 m m (0.06 in.)).
1. W a r m up the engine for 5 minutes.
2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
3. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and visually check
all the primary rocker arms and secondary rocker
arms moves freely.
• If the primary rocker arm and secondary rocker
arm moves together, remove the primary and
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and
check that the pistons in the primary and
secondary rocker arms move smoothly. If any
rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary
and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and
test.
• If all the primary rocker arms and secondary
rocker arms moves freely, go to step 4.
4. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa
(4 kgf/cm , 57 psi).
2
7. Remove the No. 5 rocker shaft mounting bolt, then
install VTEC air stopper (B).
8. Connect the air pressure regulator (D).
9. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the
specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
340 kPa (3.5 kgf/m ,50 psi)
2
5. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
10. W i t h the specified air pressure applied, rotate the
crankshaft clockwise, and visually check all the
primary rocker arms and secondary rocker arms
should move together.
• If the primary rocker arm and secondary rocker
arm moves freely and independently of each
other, remove the primary and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons
in the primary and secondary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing,
replace the primary and secondary rocker arms
as an assembly, and test.
11. Remove the special tools.
12. Apply new engine oil t o the bolt threads and flange
of the rocker shaft mounting bolts, then tighten the
bolts to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibfft)
13. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
6-
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Valves should be adjusted only w h e n the
cylinder head temperature is less than 100 °F (38 °C).
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The
" U P " mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be
at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft
sprocket should line up w i t h the top edge of the
head.
3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the
valves you're going to check.
Intake:
Exhaust:
0 . 1 5 - 0 . 1 9 mm (0.006-0.007 in.)
0.26—0.30 mm (0.010-0.012 in.)
E X H A U S T
No.
1
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No.
4
No. 2
No. 3
No.
4
INTAKE
B
6-8
4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
screw and the end of the valve stem and slide it
back and f o r t h ; you should feel a slight amount of
drag.
—T
5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is c o r r e c t
14 N m
(1.4 k g f m ,
9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 4
piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket
w i t h the top edge of the head.
10 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 3
piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket
w i t h the top edge of the head.
8. Check and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 3 cylinder.
10. Check and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 4 cylinder.
11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 2
piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket
w i t h the top edge of the head.
12. Check and if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 2 cylinder.
13. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
6-9
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required
• Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
• Crankshaft pulley holder 070AB-RJA0100
•Socket w r e n c h , 19 m m 07JAA-001020A
Removal
Installation
1. Clean the crankshaft pulley (A), crankshaft (B), bolt
(C), and washer (D). Lubricate as shown below.
O:
®:
Clean
Lubricate •
1. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 24 on page 5-6).
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
4. Hold the pulley w i t h handle (A) and holder
attachment (B).
2. Install the crankshaft pulley.
07JAA-001020A
5. Remove the bolt with a 19 m m socket (C) and
breaker bar.
6-10
3. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Do not use an
impact wrench,
4. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
5. Install the splash shield (see step 34 on page 5-17).
-1 Hold the pulley w i t h the holder handle (A) and
pulley holder attachment (B), then tighten the
bolt to 37 N-m (3.8 k g f m , 27 Ibfft) w i t h a
torque wrench and a heavy duty 19 m m socket
(C). If the pulley bolt or crankshaft are new,
tighten the bolt to 177 N-m (18.0 kgf-m,
130 Ibf-ft), then remove the bolt and tighten it
to 37 N-m (3.8 kgf-m, 27 Ibfft).
6. Install front wheels.
1
Cylinder Head
C a m Chain Removal
NOTE; Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
1. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 24 on page 5-6).
7. Set the No. 1 piston at t o p dead center (TDC). The
" U P " mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be
at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft
sprocket should line up w i t h the top edge of the
head.
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
4. Remove the alternator bracket m o u n t i n g bolts (A)
and loosen the alternator mounting bolt (B).
B
8. Check for the TDC mark (A) lines up w i t h the
pointer (B).
5. With A/C: Remove the idler pulley.
6. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
6-12
9. Remove the water pump pulley (see page 10-5),
10. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).
15. Keep alternator away of the chain case. Remove
the chain case (A), then remove the CKP pulse plate
<B).
11. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
12. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
connector (A), then remove the harness clamps (B).
16. Measure the cam chain separation. If the distance
is less than the service limit, replace the cam chain
and cam chain tensioner.
13. Support the engine with a jack and w o o d block
under the engine block.
Standard Distance:
Service Limit:
19 mm (0.75 in.)
15 mm (0.59 in.)
NOTE; Do not hit the oil strainer w h e n placing the
jack on the edge of the engine block.
14. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount/bracket assembly (B).
B
(cont'd)
6-13
Cylinder Head
C a m Chain Removal (cont'd)
1 7 . A p p l y new engine oil to the sliding surface of the
cam chain tensioner slider (A).
20. Remove the cam chain tensioner (A) and cam chain
guide (B).
2 1 . Remove the cam chain.
18. Hold the cam chain tensioner slider w i t h the
screwdriver, then remove the bolt (B), and loosen
the bolt (C).
19. Remove the cam chain tensioner slider.
6-14
C a m Chain Installation
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
1 . Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align
the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
2. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The " U P " mark (A) on
the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the
TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should
line up w i t h the top edge of the head.
3. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket
w i t h the colored piece (A) aligned w i t h the TDC
mark (B) on the crankshaft sprocket.
4. Install the cam chain on the camshaft sprocket w i t h
the pointers (A) aligned w i t h the three colored
pieces (B) as shown.
B
(cont'd)
6-15
Cylinder Head
C a m Chain Installation (cont'd)
5. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the cam
chain tensioner m o u n t i n g bolt (A).
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2
k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
8. A p p l y n e w engine oil t o the sliding surface of the
cam chain tensioner slider (A).
^ 6 x 1 . 0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2
k g f m , 8.7
Ibfft)
6. Install the cam chain tensioner (B) and cam chain
guide (C).
7. Install the cam chain tensioner slider, and tighten
the bolt loosely.
9. Rotate the cam chain tensioner slider clockwise to
compress the cam chain tensioner, and Install the
remaining bolt, then tighten the bolts.
10. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil
seal Is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal
(see page 6-19).
11. Remove old liquid gasket f r o m the chain case
mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
12. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
13. Install the CKP pulse plate (A) on the crankshaft (B).
6™1 S
14. Apply liquid gasket P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, to the
cylinder head and engine block mating surface of
the chain case.
15. Install the chain case (A).
NOTE:
• Apply a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of liquid gasket along
the broken lines (A).
• Apply a 3.0 m m wide bead of liquid gasket to the
engine block upper surface contact areas (B) on
the chain case.
• Do not install components if t o o much time has
passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N
08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all
others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove
the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket
8 x
1.25 m m
\
31 N m
6x1.0
m m
(3.2 k g f m , 2 3 Ibfft)
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
16. Install the harness clamps (A), and connect the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector (B).
(cont'd)
6-17
Cylinder Head
C a m Chain Installation (cont'd)
17. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly (A),
then tighten the mounting bolts and support nuts in
the numbered sequence s h o w n .
0 1 0 x 1 . 2 5 m m
5 9 N - m (6.0 k g f m , 4 3 Ibfft)
Replace.
23. With A/C: Install the idler pulley.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
• 8 x 1.25 m m
24 N-m
(2.4 k g f m , 17 Ibfft)
24. Install the alternator bracket mounting bolts.
) 10 x 1.25 m m
54 N-m
(5.5 k g f m , 4 0 Ibfft)
©
Replace.
10
x 1.25 m m
59 N m
(6.0 k g f m , 4 3 Ibfft)
Replace.
18. Install the ground cable (B).
19. Install the oil pan (see page 7-28).
20. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).
2 1 . Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
22. Install the water p u m p pulley (see page 10-5).
8 x 1.25 m m
24 N-m
(2.4 k g f m , 17 Ibfft)
25. Install the drive belt and adjust it (see page 4-31).
26. Install the splash shield (see step 34 on page 5-17).
27. Install the front wheels.
28. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
6-18
Chain Case Oil Seal installation
Special Tools Required
•Driver 07749-0010000
•Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
1. Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal
squarely into the chain case to the specified
installed h e i g h t
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement
1. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 24 on page 5-6).
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
4. Remove the alternator bracket mounting bolts and
loosen the alternator mounting bolt (see step 4 on
page 6-12).
5. With A/C;. Remove the ideler pulley (see step 5 on
page 6-12).
6. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center
(TDC) mark lines up w i t h the pointer (see step 8 on
page 6-12).
7. Remove the water p u m p pulley (see step 3 on page
10-5).
8. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
9. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).
10. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
2. Measure the distance between the chain case
surface and oil seal.
Oil Seal installed Height;
3 4 . 5 - 3 5 . 2 mm (1.36-1.39 in.)
11. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
connector, then remove the harness clamps (see
step 12 on page 6-13).
12. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block
under the engine block.
NOTE: Do not hit the oil strainer w h e n placing the
jack on the edge of the engine block.
13. Remove the ground cable, then remove the side
engine mount/bracket assembly (see step 14 on
page 6-13).
h—
"H
34.5—35.2 m m
(1.36-1.39 In.)
(cont'd)
6-19
Cylinder Head
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement (cont'd)
14. Remove the chain case (see step 15 on page 6-13).
15. Remove the CKP pulse plate (A).
22. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly,
then install the ground cable (see step 17 on page
6-18).
23. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.
24. Connect the CKP sensor connector, then install the
harness clamps (see step 16 on page 6-17).
25. Install the oil pan (see page 7-28).
26. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).
27. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
28. Install the water p u m p pulley (see page 10-5).
29. With A/C: Install the idler pulley (see step 23 on
page 6-18).
16. Install the CKP pulse plate.
30. Install the alternator bracket mounting bolts (see
step 24 on page 6-18).
17. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil
seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal
(see page 6-19).
3 1 . Install the drive belt and adjust it (see page 4-31).
18. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the chain
case mating surfaces, bolt, and bolt holes.
33. Install the front wheels.
19. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
20. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0002, 08718-0003 or 08718-0009, evenly to
the engine block mating surface of the chain case
(see step 14 on page 6-17).
2 1 . Install the chain case (see step 15 on page 6-17).
NOTE: Do not install components if too much t i m e
has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N
08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others,
no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old
residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
6-20
32. Install the splash shield (see step 34 on page 5-17).
34. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
C f Under Head Cower Removal
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
C f Under Head Cover installation
1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove.
2. Remove the ignition coils (see page 4-21).
3. Remove the harness bracket mounting bolt (A) and
breather hose (B).
2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of
the cylinder head cover (B).
B
4. Remove the cylinder head cover.
3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.
4. Apply a 3.0 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket, P/N
08717- 0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003,
or 08718-0009, on the chain case mating areas (A).
NOTE: Do not install components if too much time
has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N
08718- 0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others,
no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old
residue and reapply the liquid gasket
A
(cont'd)
6-21
Cylinder Head
C f Under Head Cover Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the cylinder head cover (A) on the cylinder
head, slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat
the head cover gasket.
8. Install the harness bracket mounting bolt (A) and
breather hose (B).
Ibfft)
9. Install the four ignition coils (see page 4-21).
10. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
11. Check that all tubes, hoses, and connectors are
Installed correctly.
6. Inspect the cover washer (B). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
7. Tighten the bolts in t w o or three steps. In the final
step tighten all bolts, in sequence, 12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft).
6-22
12. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before
filling the engine w i t h oil.
C f Under Head Removal
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• To avoid damaging the wire and terminals, unplug
the w i r i n g connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
• To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100 °F
(38 °C) before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
• Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere w i t h other parts.
• Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
5. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and the lower
radiator hose (B).
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-280).
2. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
3. Remove air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
4. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve connector (A), throttle body connector
(B), water bypass hoses (C) and purge hose (D).
(cont'd)
6-23
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
13. Remove the connecting pipe (A) and water bypass
hose (B).
8. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
9. Remove the exhaust manifold (see page 9-7).
10. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
wire harness clamps f r o m the cylinder head.
•
°
•
•
•
Rocker a r m oil control solenoid connector
Rocker a r m oil pressure switch connector
EGR valve/EGR valve position sensor connector
Four injector connector
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector
11. Remove the fuel rail (see page 11-190).
14. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
12. Remove the harness holder (A), ground cable (B),
harness clamps (C), water bypass hose (D) and
engine J/C connector clamp (E).
15. Remove the alternator bracket mounting bolts and
loosen the alternator mounting bolt (see step 4 on
page 6-12).
16. With A/C: Remove the idler pulley (see step 5 on
page 6-12).
17. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The
" U P " mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be
at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft
sprocket should line up with the top edge of the
head.
6-24
18. Check for the TDC mark lines up w i t h the pointer
(see step 8 on page 6-12).
25. Make a reference mark (A) across the camshaft
sprocket and cam chain.
19. Remove the water p u m p pulley (see page 10-5).
20. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).
2 1 . Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
connector, then remove the harness clamps (see
step 12 on page 6-13).
22. Support the engine w i t h a w o o d block and jack
under the oil pan.
NOTE: Do not place the jack in the center of the oil
pan to avoid damaging the oil pan.
23. Remove the ground cable, then remove the side
engine mount/bracket assembly (see step 14 on
page 6-13).
24. Keep alternator away of the chain case. Remove
the chain case.
26. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley.
27. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the
cam chain tensioner slider through the oil return
hole in the cylinder head.
(cont'd)
6-25
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
28. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket
wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
B
29. Turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam
chain tensioner, then install the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt (B)
in the bolt hole (C) on the engine block through the
cam chain tensioner (D).
3 1 . Remove a bolt securing the cam chain guide.
32. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a t i m e ; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
©
©
©
(D
®
®
®
©
©
NOTE:
• Turning torque should not exceed 56 N-m
(5.7 k g f m , 41 Ibf-ft), w h e n turning the camshaft.
• Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
30. Hold the camshaft w i t h a 27 m m open-end wrench,
then remove the camshaft sprocket.
(To)
33. Remove the cylinder head.
6-26
CMP
Pulse Plate Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
2. Remove the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-28).
3. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32).
4. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor
connector, then remove the CMP sensor (see page
11-195).
Installation
1. Install the CMP pulse plate (A) and CMP pulse plate
mounting bolt (B) on both camshaft. Wipe t h e m
clean and lubricate the mounting bolt threads w i t h
new engine oil. Torque the bolt to 34 N-m
(3.5 k g f m , 25 i b f f t ) .
B
34 Nm
(3.5 kgfm, 25 Ibfft)
5. Remove the camshaft thrust cover, then pull out
the camshaft (see page 6-35).
6. Remove the CMP pulse plate mounting bolt (A) and
CMP pulse plate (B) on both camshaft.
2. Install the camshaft in to the cylinder head, then
Install the camshaft thrust cover w i t h new O-ring
(see page 6-44).
3. Install the CMP sensor w i t h new O-ring, then
connect the CMP sensor connector (see page
11-195).
4. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-44).
5. Install the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-29).
6. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
6-27
Cy Under Head
Camshaft Sprocket Removal
NOTE; Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
4. Remove the cylinder head plug.
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
2. Make a reference mark (A) across the camshaft
sprocket and cam chain.
5. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket
wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
3. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the
cam chain tensioner slider through the oil return
hole in the cylinder head.
Remove the maintenance bolt (B), and turn the
camshaft clockwise to compress the cam chain
tensioner, then install the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt (C) in the
bolt hole (D) on the engine block through the
maintenance hole and cam chain tensioner (E).
NOTE:
• Turning torque should not exceed 56 N-m
(5.7 kgf-m, 41 Ibf-ft), w h e n turning the camshaft.
• Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
6-28
Camshaft Sprocket Installation
7. Hold the camshaft with a 27 m m open-end wrench,
then remove the camshaft sprocket.
NOTE: Hang the cam chain w i t h a wire.
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields,
1. Install the cam chain to the camshaft sprocket by
alignment the reference mark (A), then install the
camshaft sprocket on the camshaft.
Specified torque:
56 N m (5.7 k g f m , 41 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
6-29
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Sprocket Installation (cont'd)
3. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the
cam chain tensioner slider through the oil return
hole in the cylinder head.
7. Install the new cylinder head plug.
8. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
4. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket
wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
12 x 1.25 mm
20 N-m (2.0 k g f m , 14 Ibfft)
5. Turn the camshaft clockwise t o compress the cam
chain tensioner, then remove the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt
(B).
NOTE;
• Turning torque should not exceed 56 N-m
(5.7 kgf-m, 41 Ibf-ft), w h e n turning the camshaft.
• Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
6. Install the maintenance bolt (C) w i t h a new washer
(D).
6-30
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-21),
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-35).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure
along the edges, and three ways across the center.
Warpage
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
0.07 mm (0.0028 in.)
0.08 mm (0.0031 in.)
• If warpage Is less than 0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.08 m m (0.003 in.) and
0.2 m m (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
• M a x i m u m resurface limit is 0.2 m m (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 120 m m (4.72 in.).
Cylinder Head Height
Standard mew}:
119.9-120.1 mm
(4.720-4.728 in.)
PRECISION STRAIGHT
EDGE
Cylinder Head
Rocker A r m A s s e m b l y Removal
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
4. Remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts, then
remove the rocker arm assembly (A).
2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A).
NOTE: W h e n disassembling the rocker arms,
remove the dowel pin (B), then remove the rocker
arm f r o m cam chain side on the rocker shaft.
A
A
3. Bundle the intake rocker arms w i t h rubber bands
(A) to keep t h e m together as a set. Unscrew the
rocker shaft mounting bolts t w o turns at a t i m e , in
sequence below.
A
6-32
A
A
A
l o c k e r Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE;
• Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original location.
• W h e n disassembling or reassembling the rocker arms, remove or install the rocker arm f r o m cam chain side on the
rocker shaft.
• Inspect the rocker arm shaft and rocker arms (see page 6-34).
• If reused the rocker arms must be installed in the same positions.
• Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply lubricant to any contact points.
EXHAUST ROCKER ARM i
EXHAUST ROCKER ARM A
L e t t e r "B"
stamped
on the rocker a r m .
L e t t e r "A"
stamped
on the rocker arm.
WASHER
PRIMARY
ROCKER ARM
O
SECONDARY
ROCKER ARM
o
joi
rO]
ROCKER SHAFT
6-33
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft inspection
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32).
2. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.
4. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New):
0.019—0.058 mm
(0.0007-0.0023 in.)
Service Limit:
0.08 min (0.003 in.J
5. Repeat for all rocker arms and shaft. If the
clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any VTEC
rocker arm needs replacement, replace the rocker
arms (primary and secondary) as a set.
6. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push each
piston manually.
If It does not move smoothly, replace the rocker
arm set.
NOTE: Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling.
8-34
Camshaft inspection
Camshaft Removal
1. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
1. Remove the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-28).
2. Remove the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-28).
2. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32).
3. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32).
3. Put the rocker shaft on the cylinder head, then
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
4. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket, ground
cable and harness clamps, then remove the
harness holder from the bracket (see step 12 on
page 6-24).
Specified torque:
29 N-m (3.0 k g f m , 22 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flange
5. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor
connector, then remove the CMP sensor (see page
11-195).
6. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out
the camshaft (B).
^ _
B
4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
5. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck.
If it is still beyond the service limit replace the
camshaft.
Camshaft End Play
Standard (New); 0.05—0.25 mm
, 10.002-0.010 in.)
Service Limit:
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
(cont'd)
6-35
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
6. Remove the camshaft (see page 6-35).
7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift
ramps. Replace the camshaft it any lobes are pitted,
scored or excessively w o r n .
8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
10. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder
head. Measure the inside diameter of each
camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-ofround condition.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, go to step 12.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 11.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance
Standard (New):
0.045—0.084 mm
(0.0018-0.0033 in.)
Service Limit:
0.100 mm (0.004 in.)
9. Zero the gauge (A) to the journal diameter.
6-36
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal
Removal
11. Check the total runout w i t h the camshaft supported
on V-blocks.
• If the total runout of the camshaft is w i t h i n the
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
• If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaftto-holder oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still
beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder
head.
Camshaft Total Runout
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.04 m m (0.002 in.)
Special Tools Required
Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are
removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-23).
2. Remove the camshaft (see page 6-35).
3. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve keepers.
12. Measure cam lobe height.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New)
EXHAUST
INTAKE
35.3877 m m
PRI
35.3799 m m
(1.39321 in.)
(1.39291 in.)
SEC
30.5291 m m
(1.20193 in.)
PRI: Primary
SEC: Secondary
C/C: Cam Chain
4. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring,
and remove the valve keepers.
07757-PJ1010A
SEC
PRI
\
C/C
EX
IN
EX
6-37
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-37).
2. Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 27.35—27.65 mm
(1.077—1.089 In.)
B Standard (New): 118.05—118.65 mm
(4.648-4.671 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.48—5.49 mm
(0.2157-0.2161 in.)
C Service Limit:
5.45 m m (0.215 in.)
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 22.85—23.15 mm
(0.900-0.911 in.)
B Standard (New): 117.25—117.85 mm
(4.616-4.640 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.45—5.46 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit:
5.42 mm (0.213 in.)
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-37).
2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 m m , then
measure the guide-to-stem clearance w i t h a dial
indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of
normal thrust (wobble method).
• If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
recheck it using a new valve.
• If the measurement is now within the service
limit, reassemble using a new valve.
• If the measurement w i t h a new valve still
exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Standard (New): 0.04—0.10 mm
(0.002-0.004 in.)
Service Limit:
0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Standard (New): 0.10—0.16 mm
(0.004-0.006 in.)
Service Limit:
0.22 mm (0.009 in.)
3. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured w i t h
a micrometer, f r o m the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured w i t h an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Standard (New): 0.020—0.050 mm
(0.0008-0.0020 in.)
Service Limit:
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Standard (New): 0.050—0.080 mm
(0.0020-0.0031 in.)
Service Limit:
0.11 mm (0.004 in.)
6-38
VaSve Guide Replacement
Special Tools Required
• Valve guide driver, 5.5 m m 07742-0010100
•Valve guide reamer, 5.5 m m 07HAH-PJ7A100
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page
6-38).
2. As illustrated below, use a commercially available
air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
5. Working f r o m the camshaft side, use the driver and
an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 m m
(0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
easier. Hold the air h a m m e r directly in line w i t h the
valve guide to prevent damaging the driver.
6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out t o w a r d
the camshaft side of the head.
5.3 mm
(0.21 In.)
/
i
87
I
(3.43
m m
in.]
57
m m
(2.24 in.)
10.8 mm
(0.42 in.)
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill
t h e m in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300 T (150 °C). Monitor the temperature
w i t h a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 T (150 °C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
07742-0010100
7. If a valve guide w o n ' t move, drill it out w i t h a 8 m m
(5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
8. Remove the new guide(s) f r o m the freezer, one at a
t i m e , as you need t h e m .
(cont'd)
6-39
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of
the new valve guide. Install the guide from the
camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to
drive the guide in to the specified Installed height
(A) of the guide (B). If you have all 16 guides to do,
you may have to reheat the head.
10. Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil.
11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
valve guide bore.
Valve Guide Installed Height;
15.85~16.35 mm (0.624-0.644 in.)
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while
removing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water
to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearances with a valve (see page 6-38).
Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without exerting pressure.
6-40
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page
6-38). If the valve guides are w o r n , replace t h e m
(see page 6-39) before cutting the valve seats.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
valve seat cutter.
5. Make one more very light pass w i t h the 45 °cutter
to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Valve Seat Width
Intake:
Standard (New): 0.850—1.150 mm
(0.0335-0.0453 in.)
Service Limit:
1.60 mm
(0.063 in.)
Exhaust:
Standard (New): 1.250—1.550 mm
(0.0492-0.0610 in.)
Service Limit:
2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve
seating: Apply Prussian Blue c o m p o u n d (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
3. Carefully cut a 45 ° seat, removing only enough
material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper and lower edges at the angles
shown in the illustration.
Check the w i d t h of the seat and adjust accordingly.
7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the blue c o m p o u n d , should be centered on the seat.
• If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), y o u
must make a second cut w i t h the 67.5 ° cutter
(intake) or 60 °cutter (exhaust) to move it d o w n ,
then one more cut w i t h the 45 ° cutter to restore
seat w i d t h .
• If it is too low (close to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut w i t h the 30 ° cutter to move it
up, then make one more cut with the 45 ° cutter
to restore seat w i d t h .
NOTE: The final cut should always be made w i t h
the 45 ° cutter.
(cont'd)
6-41
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,
and measure valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve S t e m Installed Height
S t a n d a r d ( N e w ) : 48.1—46.5 m m
1 1 . 8 1 5 - 1 . 8 3 1 in.)
Service L i m i t :
4 6 . 8 m m (1.843 in.)
Exhaust V a l v e S t e m Installed H e i g h t
Standard ( N e w ) : 46.2—46.6 m m
Service L i m i t :
( 1 . 8 1 9 - 1 . 8 3 5 in.)
46.9 m m (1.846 in.)
9. If valve stem installed height is over the service
limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
6-42
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Special Tools Required
• S t e m sea! driver 07PAD-0010000
Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A
9
1. Coat the valve stems w i t h new engine oil. Install
the valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and d o w n smoothly.
5. Install the valve spring. Place the end of the valve
spring w i t h closely w o u n d coils t o w a r d the cylinder
head.
6. Install the valve retainer.
7. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the
spring, and install the valve keepers.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (B).
NOTE: The exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring
(D), and the intake valve seal (E) has a white spring
(F). They are not interchangeable.
F
D
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem t w o or three
times w i t h a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend
the stem.
6-43
Cylinder Head
Camshaft installation
1. Install the camshaft (A) into the cylinder head, then
install the camshaft thrust cover (B) w i t h new
O-ring (C).
l o c k e r A r m Assembly Installation
1. Install the rocker arm assembly (A) w i t h dowel pin
(B).
NOTE; W h e n reassembling the rocker arms, Install
the rocker arm f r o m cam chain side on the rocker
shaft.
2. Install the camshaft position (CMP) sensor w i t h
new O-ring, then connect the CMP sensor
connector (see page 11-195).
3. Install the harness holder, then install harness
clamps, ground cable and air cleaner housing
bracket (see step 33 on page 6-49).
4. Install the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-29).
5. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-44).
2. Tighten each bolts t w o turns at a time in sequence
below.
Specified torque:
29 N-m (3 J k g f m , 22 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flange
6. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
A
A
A
A
3. Remove the rubber bands (A) f r o m the Intake
rocker arms.
4. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
5. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
8-44
Cylinder Head Installation
7. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the
bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
Install the cylinder head in the reverse order of
removal;
1. Clean the cylinder head and block surface.
2. Install the new cylinder head gasket (A) and dowel
pins (B) on the engine block. Always use a new
cylinder head gasket
8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to
29 N-m (3.0 k g f m , 22 Ibfft). Use a beam-type
torque wrench. When using a preset-type torque
w r e n c h , be sure to tighten slowly and do not
overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise while you are
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it f r o m the
first step.
©
®
®
®
®
©
®
®
®
®
9. Tighten all cylinder head bolts an additional 130 °.
3. Check that the crankshaft keyway is facing up.
NOTE; Remove the cylinder head bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 5 of the procedure.
4. Install the cylinder head on the engine block.
5. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
point A and point B.
B 5 0
mm (2.0 in.)
j<*
•);
A 45 m m
i
i
M
(1.8 in.)
H
6. If either diameter is less than 8.6 m m (0.34 in.),
replace the cylinder head bolt.
(cont'd)
6-45
C f Under Head
Cylinder Head installation (cont'd!
10. Install the cam chain guide m o u n t i n g bolt.
12. Hold the camshaft w i t h a 27 m m open-end wrench,
then tighten the bolt.
Specified torque:
56 N-m (5.7 k g f m , 41 ibfft)
11. Install the cam chain to the camshaft sprocket by
alignment the reference mark (A), then install the
camshaft sprocket on the camshaft.
13. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley.
14. Apply new engine oil to the slider surface of the
cam chain tensioner slider through the oil return
hole in the cylinder head.
6-46
15. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket
wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
20. A p p l y liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, to the
cylinder head and engine block mating surface of
the chain case.
NOTE:
• Apply a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of the liquid gasket
along the broken line (A).
• Apply a 3.0 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket to
the engine block upper surface contact areas (B)
on the chain case.
16. Turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam
chain tensioner, then remove the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt
(B)
NOTE;
• Turning torque should not exceed 56 N-m
(5.7 kgf-m, 41 I b f f t ) , w h e n turning the camshaft.
• Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
17. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil
seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal
(see page 6-19).
18. Remove old liquid gasket f r o m the chain case
mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
19. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
21. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001, 08718-0002,
or 08718-0009, to the oil pan mating surface of the
chain case.
NOTE:
• A p p l y a 1.5 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket
along the broken line (A).
• A p p l y a 5.0 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket to
the shaded area (B).
• Do not install components if too much time has
passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N
08718-0002, no more then 4 minutes, for all
others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove
the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket
(cont'd)
6-47
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
22. Set the edge of the chain case (A) to the edge of the
oil pan (B), then install the chain case on the engine
block (C).
NOTE: W h e n installing the chain case, do not slide
the bottom surface on the oil pan mounting surface.
23. Install the harness clamps (A), and connect the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector (see
step 16 on page 6-17).
24. Install the side engine mount/bracket assembly,
then install the ground cable (see step 17 on page
6-18).
25. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-10).
26. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-21).
27. Install the water p u m p pulley (see page 10-5).
28. With A/C: Install the idler pulley (see step 23 on
page 6-18).
29. Install the alternator bracket mounting bolts (see
step 24 on page 6-18).
30. Install the drive belt and adjust it (see page 4-31).
3 1 . Install the connecting pipe (A), using a new O-ring
6x
1.0
9.8 N m
mm
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2
32. Install the water bypass hose (C).
6-48
Ibfft)
33. Install the harness holder (A), ground cable (B),
harness clamps (C), water bypass hose (D) and
engine J/C connector clamp (E).
9.8
38. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and the lower
radiator hose (B).
N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2
Ibfft)
34. Install the fuel rail (see page 11-190).
39. Install the purge hose (A), water bypass hoses (B),
throttle body connector (C) and evaporative
emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector (D).
35. Install the exhaust manifold (see page 9-7).
36. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
37. Install the heater hoses.
(cont'd)
6-49
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
40. Install air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
41. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
42. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are installed correctly.
•
•
•
•
•
Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
EGR valve/EGR valve position sensor connector
Four injector connector
Engine coolant temperature (ETC) sensor 1
connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor connector
43. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch
ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so that the fuel
pump runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the
fuel line. Repeat this operation t w o or three times,
then check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel
line.
44. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve
open (see page 10-6).
45. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
46. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-267).
47. Inspect the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-20).
6-50
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
7-2
7-3
C o n n e c t i n g Rod a n d C r a n k s h a f t E n d Play
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
C o n n e c t i n g Rod B e a r i n g R e p l a c e m e n t
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
P i s t o n , P i n , a n d C o n n e c t i n g Rod R e p l a c e m e n t
C o n n e c t i n g Rod B o l t I n s p e c t i o n
7-5
..... 7-6
..... 7-8
7-11
7-13
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-19
....
7-22
7-24
7-25
7-25
..... 7-28
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref. No.
®
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
©
@
Tool Number
07PAF-0010400
07PAF-0010500
07ZAD-PNA0100
07749-0010000
07973-6570201
07973-6570500
07973-6570600
07973-6890200
07973-6890300
07973-6890400
Description
Piston Base Head
Piston Base Head Insert (2)
Oil Seal Driver Attachment
Driver
Adjustable Piston Pin Driver Head
Piston Base
Piston Base Spring
Adjustable Piston Pin Driver Shaft
Pilot Collar
Piston Pin Base Insert
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
§1 )
©
OUT
®
7-2
©
Component Location Index
(cont'd)
Engine Block
Component Location index (cont'd!
PISTON
RINGS
Replacement, page 7 - 2 2
PISTON
Removal, page 7 - 1 3
Measurement, page 7 - 1 6
CONNECTING R O D
E n d p l a y , p a g e 7-5
S m a l l e n d m e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-20
PISTON PIN
Removal, page 7 - 1 9
Inspection, page 7 - 2 0
Installation, page 7 - 2 1
ENGINE
BLOCK
Cylinder bore inspection, page 7 - 1 6
Warpage inspection, page 7 - 1 6
Cylinder bore honing, page 7 - 1 8
Ridge removal, step 4 on page 7 - 1 3
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING C A P
CONNECTING
CONNECTING ROD
BOLT
Inspection, page 7 - 2 5
7-4
BEARINGS
Oil clearance, page 7 - 8
Selection, page 7 - 9
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft E n d Play Inspection
1, Remove the oil p u m p (see page 8-9).
2. Measure the connecting rod end play w i t h a feeler
gauge between the connecting rod and the
crankshaft.
Connecting Rod End Play
Standard (New): 0.15—0.30 mm
(0.006-0.012 in.)
Service Limit:
0.40 mm (0.016 in.)
3. If the connecting rod end play Is out-of-tolerance,
install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If It is
still out-of-tolerance; replace the crankshaft
(see page 7-13).
4. Push the crankshaft f i r m l y away f r o m the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft f i r m l y back
t o w a r d the indicator; the dial reading should not
exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play
Standard (New): 0.10—0.35 mm
(0.004-0,014 in.)
Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
5. If the end play Is out-of-tolerance, replace the thrust
washers and recheck, If It Is still out-of-tolerance,
replace the crankshaft.
7-5
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
M a i n Bearing C l e a r a n c e Inspection
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
remove the bearing cap bridge and bearing halves
(see page 7-13).
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i t h a
clean shop t o w e l .
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
4. Reinstall the bearings and bearing cap bridge, then
torque the bolts to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
+40°.
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during
inspection.
5. Remove the bearing cap bridge and bearings again,
and measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
Standard (New); 0.018—0.036 mm
(0.0007-0.0014 in.)
Service Limit:
0.050 mm (0.0020 In.)
7-6
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with
the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance.
Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps
to adjust clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
replace the crankshaft and start over.
M a i n Bearing S e l e c t i o n
Main Journal Code Location
Crankshaft Bore Code Location
2. The main journal codes are stamped on the
crankshaft.
1. Letters have been stamped on the end of the block
as a code for the size of each of the five main
journal bores. Write d o w n the crank bore codes.
If you can't read the codes because of accumulated
dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m w i t h a wire brush
or scraper. Clean t h e m only w i t h solvent or
detergent.
No. 5 JOURNAL
(TRANSMISSION END)
No. 1 JOURNAL
(PULLEY END)
No. 5 JOURNAL
No. 1 JOURNAL
(cont'd)
7-7
Engine Block
C o n n e c t i n g Rod Bearing
Replacement
Crankshaft M a i n Bearing
Replacement (cont'd)
3. Use the crank bore codes and crank journal codes
to select the appropriate replacement bearings
f r o m the f o l l o w i n g table.
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. To check rod bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
remove the bearing cap bridge (see page 7-13).
NOTE: Color code is on the edge of the bearing.
2. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.
Crank
bore
code
Larger crank
B
A
Main
Journal
code
- •
C
Smaller bearing
bore
D
3. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
w i t h a clean shop t o w e l .
(Thicker)
4. Place plastigage across the rod journal.
Smaller
main
journal
White
Red
Pink
Yellow
Red
Pink
Yellow
Green
Pink
Yellow
Green
Brown
Yellow
Green
Brown
Black
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
5. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the
bolts to 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft) + 9 0 °.
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during
inspection.
6. Remove the rod cap and bearing half, and measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
Standard (New):
0.020—0.038 mm
(0.0008-0.0015 in.)
Service Limit:
0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
7-8
7. If the plastigage measures too w i d e or too narrow,
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
complete bearing with the same color code(s), and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape
the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
Rod Bearing Selection
1. Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat
damage.
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations
8. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
bearing, replace the crankshaft and start over.
2. Each rod falls Into one of four tolerance ranges
(from 0 to 0.024 m m (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 m m
(0.0002 In.) Increments) depending on the size of its
big end bore. It's then stamped w i t h a number or
bar (1, 2, 3, or 4) Indicating the range. You may find
any combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4 In any engine.
If the codes are Indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m
w i t h a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only w i t h
solvent or detergent.
Normal Bore Size: 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
(cont'd)
7-
Engine Block
C o n n e c t i n g Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location
3. The connecting rod journal codes are stamped on
the crankshaft.
4. Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes
to select appropriate replacement bearings f r o m
the following table.
NOTE: Color code is on the edge of the bearing.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location (Letters)
Big
end
•
L a r g e r b i g rod
bore
bore
code
Rod
Journal
code
- •
Red
Pink
Yellow
Green
B
Pink
Yellow
Green
Brown
C
Yellow
Green
Brown
Black
Green
Brown
Black
Blue
1
Smaller
rod
journal
7-10
J O U R N A L
No.
1
J O U R N A L
(Thicker)
A
D
No. 4
Smaller bearing
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Oil Pan Removal
1. M/T model: Remove the heat shield (see step 8 on
page 16-5).
2. Remove the dipstick tube.
3. Remove the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A),
and remove the bolts (B) securing the transmission.
M/T model
B
(cont'd)
7-11
Engine Block
Oil Pan Remowal (cont'd)
4. Remove the bolts/nuts securing the oil pan.
5. Set the flat blade screwdriver as s h o w n , and
separate the oil pan f r o m the engine block.
6. Remove the oil pan.
7-12
Crankshaft and Piston Remowal
1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-12).
2. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-23).
3. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil
pump (B).
5. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To .prevent warpage,
unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time:
repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
©
®
®
T6
©
®
11
ll ]
6. Remove the bearing cap bridge.
7. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/
bearings in order.
4. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon
around the top of each cylinder, remove it w i t h a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the pistons as they are pushed out.
8. Lift crankshaft out of the engine block, bearing
careful not to damage the journals.
9. Remove the upper bearing halves f r o m the
connecting rods, and set them aside w i t h their
respective caps.
(cont'd)
7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont'd)
10. Use the w o o d e n handle of a hammer (A) to drive
out the pistons (B).
11. Reinstall the bearing cap bridge and bearings on
the engine block.
12. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps
after removing each piston/connecting rod
assembly.
13. To avoid m i x u p on reassembly, mark each piston/
connecting rod assembly w i t h its cylinder number.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod
does not indicate its position in the engine block, it
indicates the rod bore size.
7-14
Crankshaft Inspection
Straight-ess
1. Remove the crankshaft f r o m the engine block
(see page 7-13).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages w i t h pipe
cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Check the keyway and thread; repair or replace it if
necessary.
Out-of-Round and Taper
6. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod
and main journal in t w o places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round
Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
4. Support the crankshaft w i t h V-blocks.
5. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure
the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft t w o
complete revolutions. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Indicator Runout
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
1
f
7. Measure taper at the edge of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper
Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
7-15
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection
1. Remove the crankshaft and the pistons (see page
7-13).
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
3. Measure the piston diameter (A) at a point 16 m m
(0.6 in.) f r o m the bottom of the skirt.
Piston Diameter
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
72.98—72.99 mm
(2.8732-2.8736 in.)
72.97 mm
(2.8728 in.)
Oversize Piston Diameter
0.25: 73.23-73.24 mm (2.8831 - 2 . 8 8 3 5 in.)
4. Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at
three levels in each cylinder as shown. If
measurements in any cylinder are beyond the
Oversize Bore Service Limit, replace the engine
block. If the engine block is to be rebored, refer to
step 7 after reboring.
Cylinder Bore Size
Standard (New): 73.00—73.02 mm
(2.8740-2.8748 in.)
Service Limit:
73.07 mm (2.8767 in.)
Oversize
0.25: 73.25-73.27 mm (2.8839-2.8846 in.)
Reboring limit:
0.25 mm (0.01 in.) max.
Bore Taper
mm
16
(0.6 in.)
Limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
6 m m
(0.2 in.)
j_
First
Measurement
I
I
I
Third
Measurement
T
6 m m
7-16
Second
Measurement
(0.2
in.)
5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed.
6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Engine Block Warpage
Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance
is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the
piston and engine block for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance
Standard (New): 0.010—0.040 mm
(0.0004—0.0016 in.)
Service Limit:
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
7-17
Engine Block
Cylinder Bore Honing
Only a scored or scratched cylinder bore must be honed.
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-16).
If the engine block is to be reused, hone the
cylinders and remeasure the bores.
2. Hone the cylinder bores w i t h honing oil and a fine
(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern
(A). Use only a rigid hone w i t h 400 grit or finer
stone such as Sunnen, A m m c o , or equivalent. Do
not use stones that are w o r n or broken.
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the
engine block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores w i t h hot soapy water, then dry and
oil t h e m immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the
cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the engine block. Some light vertical scoring
and scratching is acceptable If it is not deep enough
to catch your fingernail and does not run the full
length of the bore.
7-18
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Special Tools Required
• Piston base 07973-6570500
• Piston base spring 07973-6570600
• Piston pin base insert 07973-6890400
• Piston base head 07PAF-0010400
• Pilot collar 07973-6890300
•Adjustable piston pin driver shaft 07973-6890200
•Adjustable piston pin driver head 07973-6570201
• Piston base head insert (2) 07PAF-0010500
3. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin
driver head and shaft to 57 m m (2.2 in.).
57 m m
(2.2
in.)
Disassembly
07973-6570201
1. Assemble the special tool as shown.
07PAF-0010400
07973-6890400
07973-6890200
4. W i t h the arrow on top of the piston pointing up,
place the piston assembly (A) on the special tool (B).
Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the
piston against the piston base head inserts (C) as
shown.
07973-6570500
07973-6570600
Temporarily install the pilot collar over the piston
pin base insert (A), and adjust the piston base head
inserts as shown, then tighten the screws (B).
Remove the pilot collar.
07973-6890300
07PAF-0010500
5. Press the pin (D) out w i t h the pin driver (E), the pilot
collar (F), and a hydraulic press.
(cont'd)
7-19
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
NOTE; Inspect the piston, piston pin, and
connecting rod when they are at room temperature.
3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and the piston pin hole diameter on the
piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
Standard (New); 0.010—0.018 mm
(0.0004-0.0007 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter
Standard (New); 17.996—18.000 mm
(0.7085-0.7087 in.)
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
4. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and the connecting rod small end
diameter.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference
Standard (New): 0.020—0.036 mm
(0.0008-0.0014 in.)
7-20
3. With the arrow on top of the piston and the
embossed mark on the connecting rod facing up,
place the piston assembly (B) on the special tool (C).
Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the
piston against the piston base head inserts (D) as
shown.
4. Press the pin (E) in w i t h the pin driver (F) and a
hydraulic press.
7-21
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove the piston f r o m the engine block (see page
7-13).
4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
cylinder bore 15—20 m m (0.6—0.8 in.) f r o m the
bottom.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (B).
A
B
15—20 mm
(0.6—0.8
In.)
5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) w i t h a feeler
gauge:
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly w i t h a
squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner
w i t h a blade to fit the piston grooves. File d o w n the
blade, if necessary. The top ring grooves are
1.0 m m (0.04 in.) w i d e , the second ring groove is
1.2 m m (0.05 in.) w i d e , and the oil ring groove is
2.0 m m (0.08 in.) w i d e . Do not use a w i r e brush to
clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves
deeper w i t h the cleaning tool.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated f r o m the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
7-22
• If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
the proper rings for your engine.
• If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-16).
If the bore is over the service limit, the engine
block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap
Top Ring:
Standard (New): 0.15—0.30 mm
(0.006-0.012 in.)
Service Limit:
0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second Ring:
Standard (New): 0.35—0.S0 mm
(0.014-0.020 in.)
Service Limit:
0.65 mm (0.026 in.)
Oil Ring:
Standard (New): 0.20—0.70 mm
(0.008-0.028 in.)
Service Limit:
0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
6, Install the top ring and second ring as shown. The
top ring (A) has a R1 mark and the second ring (B)
has a R mark. The manufacturing marks (C) must
be facing upward.
8. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
About 90 °
PISTON
PIN
9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
ring-to-groove clearances:
Top Ring Clearance
Standard (New): 0.065—0.090 mm
(0.0026-0.0035 in.)
Service Limit:
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Second Ring Clearance
Standard (New): 0.030—0.055 mm
(0.0012-0.0022 in.)
Service Limit:
0.13 m m (0.005 in.)
Piston Ring Dimensions:
I
~f
B
I
4
A
J
*
Top Ring (Standard):
A : 2.3 m m (0.09 in.)
B: 1.0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 in.)
Second Ring (Standard):
A : 3.0 m m (1.2 in.)
B 1 2 m m (0.05 in.)
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
do not bind.
7-23
Engine Block
Piston Installation
If t h e crankshaft is already installed
1. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for
each cylinder.
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
securely in place.
If the crankshaft is not installed
1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
securely in place.
2. Position the arrow (A) facing the t i m i n g chain side
of the engine.
3. Position the arrow (A) facing the t i m i n g chain side
of the engine.
4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in
using the w o o d e n handle of a h a m m e r (A).
Maintain d o w n w a r d force on the ring compressor
(B) to prevent the rings f r o m expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
3. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in
using the w o o d e n handle of a hammer (A).
Maintain d o w n w a r d force on the ring compressor
(B) to prevent the rings f r o m expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
4. Position ail pistons at top dead center.
5. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and
check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
6. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h
plastigage (see page 7-8).
7. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-25).
8. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads, then
install the rod caps w i t h bearings. Torque the bolts
to 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) + 9 0 °.
7-24
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B w i t h a micrometer.
30 m
m
(1.18
In.)
Crankshaft Installation
Special Tools Required
•Driver 07749-0010000
•Oil seal driver attachment 07ZAD-PNA0100
:
1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h
plastigage (see page 7-8).
2. Check the main bearing clearance w i t h plastigage
(see page 7-6).
3. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-25).
~^$—
15 m m
———•
(0.59 in.)
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point
A and point B.
Point A—Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter;
Specification; 0—0.05 mm {0—0.002 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,
replace the connecting rod bolt.
4. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and
connecting rods.
5. Apply a coat of new engine oil to the main bearings
and rod bearings.
6. Hold the crankshaft so rod journal No. 2 and rod
journal No. 3 are straight up, and lower the
crankshaft into the engine block.
7. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 4 journal of
the engine block.
8. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of
the connecting rod bolts.
9. Seating the rod journals into connecting rod No. 1
and connecting rod No. 4. Line up the mark (B) on
the connecting rod and cap, then install the caps
and bolts finger-tight.
10. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the
journals into connecting rod No. 2 and connecting
rod No. 3. Line up the mark on the connecting rod
and cap, then install the caps and bolts finger-tight
(cont'd)
7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft installation (cont'd)
11. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,7.2 Ibfft).
16. Put the bearing cap bridge on the engine block.
12. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 °.
17. A p p l y new engine oil to the threads and flange of
the bearing cap bolts.
13. Remove old liquid gasket f r o m the bearing cap
bridge mating surfaces.
18. Tighten the bearing cap bolts in sequence to
25 N-m (2.5 k g f m , 18 Ibf-ft).
14. Clean and dry the bearing cap bridge mating
surfaces.
15. Apply a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of the liquid gasket, P/N
08717- 0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003,
or 08718-0009, along the broken lines (A).
NOTE: Do not install components if too much t i m e
has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N
08718- 0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others,
no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old
residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
©
®
0
19. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 40 °.
20. Clean the excess liquid gasket off the engine block.
7-26
23. Install the dowel pins (A) and new O-ring (B) on the
oil pump (C), then align the inner rotor with
crankshaft, and install the oil pump.
2 1 . Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal
squarely into the engine block to the specified
installed height.
1.0
6 x
m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
07749-0010000
07ZAD-PNA0100
22. Measure the distance between the crankshaft and
oil seal.
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
24. Install the oil screen (D) with new gasket (E).
Oil Seal Installed Height;
7 - 8 m m ( 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 1 In.)
25. Install the cylinder head (see page 6-45).
7 — 8 m m
(0.28-0.31
in.)
26. Install the cam chain (see page 6-15).
7-27
Engine Block
Oil Pan Installation
1. Remove old liquid gasket f r o m the oil pan mating
surfaces, bolts and bolt holes.
5. Install the oil pan (A) w i t h dowel pin (B) and new
O-ring (C).
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
3. Install the new oil pan gasket on the oil pan.
6. Tighten the bolts in t w o or three steps.
Specified torque
4. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001, 08718-0002,
or 08718-0009, to the engine block mating surface
of the oil pan.
NOTE:
• Apply a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of the liquid gasket
along the broken line (A).
• Apply a 5.0 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket to
the shaded area (B).
• Do not install components if too much t i m e has
passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N
08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all
others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove
the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
7-28
©:
®[email protected]:
©
24 N m (2.4 k g f m , 17 Ibfft)
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
©
®
©
Install the clutch cover/torque converter cover (A),
and tighten the bolts (B) securing the transmission.
8. Install the dipstick tube (A) w i t h new O-ring (B).
M/T model
B
mm
12 x 1.25
64 N-m
(6.5
k g f m , 47
Ibfft)
9. M/T model: Install the heat shield (see step 7 on
page 16-24).
10. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before
filling the engine with o i l .
6 x 1.0
mm
12 N-m
(1.2
k g f m , 8.7
Ibfft)
A / T model
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf.in, 8.7
Ibfft)
7-29
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special T o o l s
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Oil Pressure S w i t c h T e s t
Oi! Pressure S w i t c h R e p l a c e m e n t
Oil Pressure T e s t
E n g i n e Oil R e p l a c e m e n t
E n g i n e Oil Filter R e p l a c e m e n t
Oil Filter Feed Pipe R e p l a c e m e n t
Oil P u m p O v e r h a u l
Oil/Air Separator Installation
8-2
................... 8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-11
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No.
®
©
(D
Tool Number
07HAA-PJ70101
07406-0030000
07506-3000001
©
8-2
Description
Oil Filter Wrench
Oil Pressure Gauge Attachment
Oil Pressure Gauge
1
1
1
Component Location Index
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Circuit Diagram, page 22-145
Switch Test, page 8-4
Oil Pressure test page 8-5
Replacement, page 8-4
8-3
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure S w i t c h Test
1. Remove the oil pressure switch connector (A) f r o m
the engine oil pressure switch (B).
Oil Pressure S w i t c h Replacement
1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A),
then remove the oil pressure switch (B).
18
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal
(C) and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity w i t h the engine stopped. There should
be no continuity w i t h the engine running.
3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil
level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine
oil pressure. If the oil pressure Is OK, replace the oil
pressure switch.
8-4
N-m
( 1 . 8 k g f m , 13
Ibfft)
2. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch
threads, then install the oil pressure switch.
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause
liquid gasket to enter the oil passage, or to plug the
end of the new oil pressure switch.
Engine Oil Replacement
Oil Pressure Test
Special Tools Required
•Oil pressure gauge attachment 07406-0030000
• Oil pressure gauge 07506-3000001
1. W a r m up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
A
If the low oil pressure indicator stays on w i t h the engine
running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
correct:
39 N m
(4.0 k g f m , 2 9
Ibfft)
Do not overtighten.
1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install
the special tools.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt w i t h a new washer (B).
4. Refill w i t h the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the
gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
At oil change:
3.4 L (3.6 U S qt)
At oil change including filter: 3.6 L (3.8 U S qt)
After engine overhaul:
4.2 L (4.4 U S qt)
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
3. A l l o w the engine to reach operating temperature
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
Engine Oil Temperature:
176 °F (80 °C)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle:
70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,10 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm:
340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm , 50 psi) min.
2
2
4. If the oil pressure is NOT within specification,
inspect these items.
• Check the oil screen for clogging.
• Check the oil p u m p (see page 8-8).
8-5
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Special Tools Required
Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70101
1. Remove the oil filter w i t h the special oil filter
wrench.
2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Wipe off the seat on the oil pan, then
apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal. Use
only filters w i t h a built-in bypass system.
5. If 4 numbers or marks (1 to 4 or • to WWWW)
are
printed around the outside of the filter, use the
f o l l o w i n g procedure to tighten the filter.
• Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
the oil pan, and note which number or mark is at
the bottom.
• Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 3
numbers or marks f r o m the one you noted. For
example, if number 2 is at the bottom w h e n the
seal is seated, tighten the filter until the number 1
comes around the bottom.
3. Install the oil filter by hand.
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise w i t h the special tool.
Tighten:
Tightening t o r q u e :
3/4 t u r n clockwise.
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
Number when rubber
s e a l is s e a t e d .
N u m b e r after tightening,
Number or
Mark w h e n
rubber seal
is seated
1
or
Number or
Mark after
tightening
4
or
1
or
• • • •
•
2
or
3
or
4
or
• • •
• • • •
2
or
3
or
6. After installation, fill the engine w i t h oil up to the
specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
07HAA-PJ70101
8-6
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-6),
2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.
3. Install the t w o 20 x 1.5 m m nuts (A) onto the new oil
filter feed pipe. Hold the nut w i t h a wrench, then
tighten the other n u t
4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m,
54 Ibf-ft), then remove the nuts f r o m the oil filter
feed pipe.
5. Install the oil filter (see page 8-6).
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
O-RING
SEALING BOLT
39 N-m
(4.0
8-8
k g f m , 29
Ibfft)
Oil Pump Removal
Oil Pump Inspection
1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-12).
1. Remove the p u m p cover.
2. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil
pump (B).
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If
the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the oil p u m p .
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.02—0.14 mm
(0.001-0.006 in.)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.08 in.)
3. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between
the rotor (A) and p u m p housing (B). If the housingto-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.02—0.06 mm
(0.001-0.002 in.)
Service Limit:
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(cont'd)
8-9
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
4. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the outer rotor (A) and p u m p housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
exceeds the service limit, replace the oil p u m p .
Oil Pump Installation
1. Install the dowel pins (A) and new O-ring (B) on the
oil p u m p (C), then align the inner rotor w i t h
crankshaft, and install the oil pump.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.10—0.18 mm
(0.004-0.007 in.)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9 . 8 N m ( 1 . 0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
5. Inspect both rotors and the p u m p housing for
scoring or other damage. Replace parts if
necessary.
2. Install the oil screen (D) w i t h new gasket (E).
6. Install the oil pump cover.
3. Install the cam chain (see page 6-15).
8-10
Oil/Air Separator Installation
1. Clean and dry the oil/air separator mating surfaces,
bolts and bolt holes.
2. A p p l y a 1.5 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket, P/N
08717- 0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003,
or 08718-0009, along the broken line (A).
NOTE; Do not install components if too much time
has passed after applying the liquid gasket (for P/N
08718- 0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others,
no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old
residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
3. Install the oil/air separator.
8-11
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake M a n i f o l d R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n
Exhaust M a n i f o l d Removal and Installation
E x h a u s t Pipe a n d M u f f l e r R e p l a c e m e n t .....
intake EVIanifoid and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
1 . 0 mm
12 N-m ( 1 . 2
6x
INTAKE J V i A ^ i F G L D
9-2
kgfm,
8.7
Ibfft)
Removal
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
5. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve connector (A), throttle body connector
(B), water bypass hoses (C) and purge hose (D).
2. Remove the engine cover.
6. W h e n replacing the intake manifold, remove the
throttle body.
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
4. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A),
harness holder (B), manifold absolute pressure
(MAP) sensor connector (C) and bolt (D).
(cont'd)
9-3
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the harness holder (A), PCV hose (B), and
dipstick (C).
9-4
Installation
4. Install the throttle body (A) w i t h a new O-ring (B), if
it was removed.
1. Install a new intake manifold gasket (A).
5. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve connector (A), throttle body connector
(B), water bypass hoses (C) and purge hose (D).
2. Install the intake manifold (B) and tighten the bolts/
nuts in a crisscross pattern in t w o or three steps,
beginning w i t h the inner bolt.
3. Install the dipstick (A), PCV hose (B) and harness
holder (C).
(cont'd)
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Remowal and installation (cont'd)
6. Install the brake booster v a c u u m hose (A), harness
holder (B), manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor connector (C) and bolt (D).
D
S x 1 . 0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m , 8 . 7 Ibf.ft)
7. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
8. Install the engine cover.
f
/ 6 x 1 . 0 mm
/ 9.8 N-m
/
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
9. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are installed correctly.
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve
open (see page 10-6).
9-6
Exhaust Manifold Removal and installation
1, Remove the cover and exhaust manifold bracket, then remove the exhaust manifold.
8 M 1.25 mm
22
N-m
(2.2
k g f m , 16
Ibfft)
Replace.
Tighten the bolt in step,
alternating side-to-side
2. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten the bolts/nuts in a crisscross pattern in t w o or three steps, beginning w i t h
the inner bolt.
3. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts w h e n reassembling.
RIVET
Outer diameter:
4.8 mm (1.89 in.)
DRILL
RIVET
TOOL
Center punch
the rivet.
8 M 1 . 2 5 mm
2 2 N-m
( 2 . 2 k g f m , 16
Ibfft)
Replace.
Tighten the bolts in steps,
alternating side-to-side
SECONDARY HEATED
S E N S O R
H02S)
OXYGEN
(SECONDARY
44 N-m
(4.5
k g f m , 33
Ibfft)
GASKET
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
1 0 x 1 . 2 5 mm
33 N-m
/\^
(3.4 k g f m , 25 I b f f t ) / )))
Replace.
V (//
6 x 1 . 0 mm
9.8 N-m
( 1 . 0 k g f m , 7.2
Ibfft)
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER(TWC)
HEAT SHIELD
G A S K E T
Replace.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
Replace.
T i g h t e n t h e bolts in steps,
alternating side-to-side
9-8
Engine Cooling
Cooling S f stem
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
R a d i a t o r Cap Test
Radiator Test
.«
Fan M o t o r T e s t
Thermostat Test
Water P u m p Inspection
Water Pump Replacement
C o o l a n t Check
Coolant Replacement
Thermostat Replacement
EGR Passage I n s t a l l a t i o n
R a d i a t o r a n d Fan R e p l a c e m e n t
.
10-2
.. 10-3
10-3
10-4
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-8
10-9
10-10
Fan Controls
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
Circuit D i a g r a m
Radiator Fan Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
Cooling System
Component Location Index
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY
Replacement, page 1 0 - 1 0
Fan Motor Test, page 10-4
10-2
Radiator Cap Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), w e t its seal with
engine c o o l a n t then install it on a commercially
available pressure tester (B).
Radiator Test
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap and fill the radiator w i t h engine
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach commercially available pressure tester (A)
to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93—123 kPa
(0.95—1.25 kgf/cm , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
2
2. Apply a pressure of 93— 123 kPa
2
(0.95-1.25 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in
pressure.
4. Remove the tester, and reinstall the radiator cap.
10-3
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors f r o m the radiator fan
motor and condenser fan motor.
Thermostat Test
Replace the thermostat if it is open at room
temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
_^-B
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the
No. 2 terminal and ground to the No. 1 terminal.
3. If either motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,
replace it.
2. Heat the water and check the temperature w i t h a
thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat w h e n it is
fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height:
Above 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Starts Opening: 1 7 6 - 1 8 3 °F ( 8 0 - 8 4 °C)
Fully Open:
203 °F (95 °C)
10-4
Water Pump Inspection
Water Pump Replacement
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Remove the water p u m p pulley and idler pulley.
2. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
3. Remove the water p u m p pulley and idler pulley.
8 x 1 . 2 5 min
24 N m
(2.4 k g f m , 17 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1 . 0 mm
14 N-m
(1.4 k g f m , 10 Ibfft)
8x1.;
24N(2.4
3. Turn the water pump counterclockwise. Check that
it turns freely. If doesn't turn smoothly, replace the
water p u m p (see page 10-5).
k g f m , 17
6 x 1 . 0 mm
14 N-m
Ibfft)
(1.4 k g f m , 1 0 I b f f t )
4. Remove the five bolts securing the water p u m p ,
then remove the water p u m p (A).
NOTE: W h e n y o u check the water p u m p , y o u may
see a small amount of " w e e p i n g " f r o m the bleed
holes (A). This is normal.
Sx 1 . 0 mm
12 N-m
( 1 . 2 k g f m , 8.7
Ibfft)
5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and mating
surface w i t h the engine block.
4. Install the water pump pulley and idler pulley.
6. Install the water pump w i t h new O-ring (B) in the
reverse order of removal.
5. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
7. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
8. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed
air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater valve
open (see page 10-6).
10-5
Cooling System
Coolant Check
1. Look at the coolant level in the reserve tank. Make
sure it is between the M A X mark (A) and MIN mark
(B).
Coolant Replacement
1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
dial to m a x i m u m heat, then turn off the ignition
switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool
to the touch.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
2. If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below
the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to the M A X
mark. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
4. Remove the drain bolt (A) f r o m the front side of the
engine block.
5. After the coolant has drained, reinstall the drain
bolt w i t h a new washer.
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
10-6
7. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX mark (A) w i t h
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Engine Coolant Capacities
tank capacity of 0.4 L (0.11
M/T:
At Coolant Change:
3.8
After Engine Overhaul: 5.4
A/T:
At Coolant Change:
3.7
After Engine Overhaul: 5.3
(Including the reserve
U S gal, 0.09 Imp gal))
L (1.03 U S gal)
L (1.45 U S gal)
L (1.00 U S gal)
L (1.43 U S gal)
8. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
• Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
• Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do
not add water.
9. Install the radiator cap loosely.
10. Start the engine and let it run until it w a r m s up (the
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator
and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
if needed.
NOTE: Removing the radiator cap while the engine
is hot can cause the coolant to spray out. Always let
the engine and radiator cool before removing the
cap.
12. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
again and check for leaks.
13. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
10-7
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
Installation
Remowal
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
1. Remove old liquid gasket from the thermostat
housing mating surfaces, bolts and bolt holes.
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
3. Remove the radiator hoses (see step 40 on page
5-8).
4. Remove the harness holder (A), ground cable (B),
harness clamps (C) water bypass hose (D) and
engine J/C connector clamp (E).
r
5. Remove the thermostat housing (A), then remove
the thermostat (B).
2. Apply a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of the liquid gasket on
the water passage, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, along the
broken lines (A).
NOTE: Do not install components if too much time
has passed after applying the liquid gasket, (for P/N
08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all others,
no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old
residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
3. Install the rubber seal (A) on the thermostat (B),
then install the thermostat w i t h the pin (C) up.
x
6
1.0 m m
12
N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7
4. Install the thermostat housing (D).
10-8
Ibfft)
E G R Passage Removal and
Installation
5. Install the harness holder (A), ground cable (B),
harness clamps (C), water bypass hose (D) and
engine J/C connector clamp (E).
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Remove the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
passage (A).
A
C
6. Install the radiator hoses (see step 21 on page 5-15).
7. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
NOTE: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes
befare filling engine w i t h coolant.
3. Be sure the mounting surface is completely clean,
then install the EGR passage, using the new gasket
(B).
10-9
Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the
audio unit, then write d o w n the audio presets.
8. Remove the hood latch cover (A) and connector (B).
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery,
then disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the battery.
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
5. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-113).
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
7. Remove the air cleaner housing bracket (A) and
reserve tank (B).
9. Remove the front bulkhead center bracket (A).
6 x 1.0
m m
12 N m
(1.2
nn
8.7
kgf-m,
Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
10-10
k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
10. With A/C: Remove the A/C condenser upper brakets
(A) and clip (B).
12. Remove the air guide plate (A).
12 N-m
( 1 . 2 k g f m , 8.7 ibf-ft)
11. Remove the radiator upper brackets (A).
13. Remove the radiator upper hose (A) and the lower
radiator hose (B).
14. Remove the splash shield (see step 24 on page 5-6).
(cont'd)
10-11
Cooling System
R a d i a t o r a n d F a n R e p l a c e m e n t
( c o n t ' d )
15. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ETC)
sensor 2 connector (A).
18. Without A/C: Disconnect the radiator fan motor
connector (A).
With A/C: Disconnect the radiator fan motor
connector (A) and A/C condenser fan motor
connector (B).
16. A/T m o d e l : Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)
cooler hoses (B).
17. With A/C: Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch
connector (C), then loosen the A/C condenser fan
shroud mounting bolt (D).
19. Without A/C: Remove the radiator fan shroud (C).
With A/C: Remove the radiator fan shroud (C), then
remove the A/C condenser fan shroud (D).
NOTE: Move the A/C condenser fan shroud toward
the left side of the vehicle to allow for enough
space to lift it up and away f r o m the A/C condenser
fan assembly.
10-12
20. Move the A/C condenser towards the front of the vehicle to allow for removal of the radiator.
Then carefully pull the radiator forward and upward until it is competely removed.
21. Remove the remaining fan shroud components and hardware f r o m the radiator.
5.4 N - m
(0.6 k g f m , 4.0 Ibfft)
22. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removel. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set securely.
23. Install the bulkhead in the reverse order of removal. Apply body paint to the bulkhead mounting bolts.
24. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air (see step 1 on page 10-6).
10-
Fan Controls
Component Location Index
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR 2
10-14
CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY
(With A/C model)
Motor test page 10-4
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
Engine overheats
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
The radiator fan does not run at all
The radiator fan does not run for
engine cooling, but it runs w i t h
the A/C on
The A/C condenser fan does not
run at all (but the radiator fan runs
with the A/C on)
Both the radiator fan and the A/C
condenser fan do not run w i t h the
A/C on (but the A/C compressor
runs w i t h the A/C on)
11.
12.
13.
14
1.
2.
Diagnostic procedure
Inspect the water pump (see page 10-5).
Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-32).
Check the drive belt tension (see page 4-32).
Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
Check for any engine coolant leakage (from
gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on radiator
and A/C condenser.
Check for a damaged or deformed fan shroud.
Check for a plugged or deteriorated radiator
hoses.
Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan
relays (see page 22-46).
Check for plugged heater core or hoses.
Check the coolant level.
Check for deteriorated coolant.
Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Radiator fan circuit troubleshooting (see page
10-17).
1.
2.
Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
Radiator fan circuit troubleshooting (see page
10-17).
A/C condenser fan circuit troubleshooting (see page
21-30).
Radiator and A/C condenser fan c o m m o n circuit
troubleshooting (see page 21-32).
Also check for
• PGM-FI DTCs
(see page 11-3).
• Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
Cleanliness and
tightness of all
connectors
10-15
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 3 (50 A)
No. 1(80 A)
BAT
OH
IG2
No. 10 (30 A)
No. 11 (30 A)
— c r \ j 3 —
• YEL/BLK
IG2 HOT in
ON (II)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 10 (7.5 A)
BLK/YEL
r
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
BLU/BLK
BLU/YEL
E12
ECM/PCM
NOISE
SUPPRESSOR
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
CONDENSER
FAN
MOTOR
Rr
SG4 E4
BLK
BLK
PNK
CZ03
11
LTBLU
BLU
I
G301
10-16
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 2
G301
I
J
(With A/C)
crx_x>—•
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
5. Connect the radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
1. Check for the PGM-FI DTCs.
Is DTC P2183, P2184, and/or
P2185
indicated?
RADIATOR F A NR E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
Y E S — D o the appropriate troubleshooting, then
recheck. •
1
N O — G o t o step 2.
J U M P E R
?
2. Check the No. 10 (30 A), No. 1 (80 A), and No. 3
(50 A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
Are the fuses
4
OK ?
WIRE
3
Terminal side of female
terminals
YES—Goto step 3.
Does the radiator
fan
run?
NO—Replace the fuse(s) and recheck. •
Y E S - G o t o step 9.
3. Remove the radiator fan relay f r o m the main underhood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-53).
NO—Go to step 6.
Is the relay OK ?
6. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
7. Check for continuity between the radiator fan relay
4P socket terminal No. 1 and the radiator fan motor
2P connector terminal No. 2.
NO—Replace the radiator fan relay. •
4. Measure the voltage between the radiator fan relay
4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.
RADIATOR F A NR E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
1
RADIATOR F A NRELAY 4P S O C K E T
Terminal side of
female terminals
I
2
4
3
Wire side of
female terminals
1
BLU/BLK
2
RADIATOR F A NM O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Terminal side of female
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Replace the main under-hood fuse/relay
box.H
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No. 2. •
(cont'd)
10-17
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Check for continuity between the radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
10. Check for continuity between the radiator fan relay
4P socket terminal No. 3 and the ECM/PCM
connector terminal E12.
R A D I A T O R F A NR E L A Y 4 P S O C K E T
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2 P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
female terminals
BLIC
Wire side of
female terminals
2 3 4 5 (6) 7
8 9
11 12 / 14 (15) (16) 17 (18) 19 20 21
22
27 (2BD29 30
25 26
\
1
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
/
continuity?
/
/
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
YES—Replace the radiator fan motor. •
Is there
NO—-Repair an open in the wire between radiator
fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground. If the w i r e is OK, check for a poor ground at
G301.B
Y E S — U p d a t e the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-8), then
recheck . If the s y m p t o m goes away w i t h a known
good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . •
9. Disconnect the jumper, and turn the ignition switch
ON (II). Check for voltage between the radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and body ground.
R A D I A T O R F A NR E L A Y 4 P S O C K E T
Terminal side of female
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and under-dash fuse/
relay box. •
10-18
continuity?
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM connector terminal E12 and the under-hood
fuse/relay b o x . H
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel S u p p l y S y s t e m
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s Systems
Special Tools
G e n e r a l Troubleshooting Information
•• 1 1 - 2
11-3
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
11-10
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
S y s t e m Description
How to Set R e a d i n e s s Codes
11-14
11-16
11-53
?GM-FI S y s t e m
Component Location Index
11-56
DTC Troubleshooting
11-58
F - C A N Circuit Troubleshooting
11-167
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
11-173
DLC C i r c u i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
11-174
Injector R e p l a c e m e n t
11-190
MAP Sensor Replacement
11-192
IAT Sensor R e p l a c e m e n t
11-192
ECT S e n s o r 1 R e p l a c e m e n t ........................... 1 1 - 1 9 3
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
11-193
A/F Sensor Replacement
11-194
S e c o n d a r y H02S R e p l a c e m e n t
11-194
CMP Sensor Replacement
11-195
CKP S e n s o r R e p l a c e m e n t ..............................
11-195
V S S Replacement
- 11-196
Knock S e n s o r Replacement
11-196
ELD R e p l a c e m e n t
11-197
ECM/PCM Replacement
11-198
Electronic Throttle Control System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
APP S e n s o r Signal Inspection
11-200
11-201
11-245
Accelerator Pedal Module
Removal/Installation
Throttle Actuator Control Module
Replacement
11-246
11-246
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC Troubleshooting
Fuel P u m p Circuit Troubleshooting
Fuel
Fuel
Fuel
Fuel
..............
Pressure Relieving
Pressure Test
Tank Draining
Line Inspection
11-269
11-270
11-276
11-280
11-283
11-283
11-284
Breather Line a n d Suction Line
Inspection
Fuel L i n e / Q u i c k - C o n n e c t Fitting
Precautions
Fuel L i n e / Q u i c k - C o n n e c t Fitting
Removal
Fuel L i n e / Q u i c k - C o n n e c t Fitting
Installation
F u e l T a n k U n i t R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n ............
Fuel Pulsation D a m p e r R e p l a c e m e n t
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
11-293
11-296
11-298
11-298
Fuel Filter R e p l a c e m e n t
11-299
Fuel P u m p / F u e l G a u g e S e n d i n g Unit
Replacement
Fuel Tank Replacement
Fuel Filler Pipe R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
Fuel G a u g e S e n d i n g Unit T e s t
L o w Fuel Indicator T e s t
11-299
11-300
11-301
11-302
11-303
11-286
11-288
11-290
Intake Air S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ...........................
Throttle B o d y T e s t
Throttle B o d y Cleaning
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation
Air Cleaner Element
Inspection/Replacement
Throttle B o d y Removal/Installation
Throttle B o d y D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
11-304
11-305
11-306
11-306
11-307
11-308
11-309
Catalytic Converter S y s t e m
VTEC
Component Location Index
11-247
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Rocker A r m Oil Control Valve
Inspection
Rocker A r m Oil Control Valve
Removal/Installation
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure S w i t c h
Removal/Installation
11-248
DTC Troubleshooting
...........................
Catalytic Converter Removal/Installation
-
11-258
11-258
11-259
11-310
11-311
....
11-313
EGR S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
11-314
DTC Troubleshooting
11-315
EGR Valve Replacement
11-328
PCV System
Idle Control S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
11-260
11-261
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC Troubleshooting
11-330
A / C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
11-264
PCV Valve Inspection
11-331
PCV Valve Replacement
11-331
A l t e r n a t o r FR S i g n a l C i r c u i t
Troubleshooting
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting
••
I d l e Speed I n s p e c t i o n
ECM/PCM Idle L e a r n P r o c e d u r e
11-265
11-266
11-267
11-268
11-329
EVAP S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
DTC Troubleshooting
E V A P Canister Replacement
FTP Sensor Replacement
E V A P Canister Purge Valve
Replacement
E V A P Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement
E V A P C a n i s t e r Filter R e p l a c e m e n t
11-332
11-333
11-361
11-362
11-362
11-363
11-363
j
r
| L
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools
Ref. No.
©
©
©
®
®
®-1
©-2
®-3
®-4
®
®
Tool N u m b e r
07AAA-S0XA100
07AAJ-S6MA150
07JAZ-001000B
07NAJ-P07010A
07ZAJ-S5A0200
07406-0020201
07406-0070300
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07406-004000B
07SAZ-001000A
®
11-2
Description
Fuel Sender Wrench
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0—4 in.Hg
Pressure Gauge Adapter
Oil Pressure Hose
A/T Pressure Hose
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m
A/T Pressure Hose, Adapter
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Backprobe Set
(D
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Genera! Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures
The term "intermittent f a i l u r e " means a system may
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose pins at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then w e n t out,
the original problem may have been intermittent.
2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side
of the dashboard.
Opens and Shorts
" O p e n " and " s h o r t " are c o m m o n electrical terms. An
open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something w o n ' t work at all. With complex electronics
(such as ECMs or PCMs) this can sometimes mean
something works, but not the w a y it's supposed to.
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic
System)
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on, do
this:
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board
snapshot data, and download any data found. Then
refer to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and
begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A).
NOTE; If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for
15—20 seconds (see page 11-53).
NOTE:
• Freeze data indicates the engine conditions w h e n
the first malfunction, misfire, or fuel t r i m
malfunction was detected.
• The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
snapshot, current data, and other engine control
module (ECM) or powertrain control module
(PCM) data.
• For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came w i t h the HDS.
5. If no DTCs are f o u n d , go to MIL troubleshooting
(see page 11-173).
If the MIL did not stay on
If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability
problem, do the s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
If you can't duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the
ECM/PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and y o u can't duplicate the code, do not
continue through the procedure. To do so will only
result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced
ECM/PCM.
(cont'd)
11-3
Fuel and Emissions Systems
GeneraS Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
HDS Clear Command
The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the
system even if there is no electrical power such as
when the battery negative terminal or No. 14 IGP (15 A)
fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed
parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR
C O M M A N D " of the HDS, if parts are replaced.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet
this purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM reset, and
CKP pattern clear. DTC clear c o m m a n d erases all stored
DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and
readiness codes. This must be done w i t h the HDS after
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The ECM/PCM reset c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC
codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes,
and all specific data to correct the system except CKP
pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was
cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
The CKP pattern clear c o m m a n d erases only CKP
pattern data. This c o m m a n d is for repair of a misfire or
the CKP sensor.
ECM/PCM Reset
1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine
is stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS f r o m the DLC.
5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Crank (CKPJ Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP)
Pattern Learn
Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS)
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
Scan Tool Clear Command
If you are using a generic scan tool to clear c o m m a n d s ,
be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the
ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same t i m e
(CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze
data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
commands, you then need to do these procedures, in
this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268); CKP pattern learn procedure;
Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete (see page
11-53).
DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS f r o m the DLC.
11-4
A
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-174).
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT
MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING w i t h the HDS,
and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
Learn Procedure (without the HDS)
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on.
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) f r o m an engine speed
of 2,500 rpm d o w n to 1,000 rpm w i t h the A/T in
2 position, or MfT in 1st gear.
3. Repeat step 2 several times.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds. The CKP pattern learn procedure is
complete.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer
system. If y o u replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a
different immobilizer code. In order for the engine
to start, y o u must rewrite the immobilizer code w i t h
the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-5
Fuel and Emissions Systems
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the E C M /
PCM
Special Tools Required
• Digital multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a
commercially available digital multimeter
• Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector
or the w i r e side is sealed (A), disconnect the
connector and probe the terminals (B) f r o m the
terminal side. Do not force the probe into the
connector.
I NOTICE I
1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital
multimeter (C).
Do not puncture the insulation on a w i r e .
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
B
C
2. Using the w i r e insulation as a guide for the
contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide
the tip into the connector f r o m the w i r e side until it
touches the end of the wire terminal.
1-6
ECM/PCM Updating and Substitution for
Testing
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine.
Special Tools Required
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) TDSGDS2200 *
• Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570 *
°HDS pocket tester TDSS3557011401
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
Use this procedure w h e n y o u have to substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM or update the ECM/PCM in a
troubleshooting procedure.
Updating the ECM/PCM
NOTE:
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
• Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the
battery in the vehicle is fully changed.
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem w i t h the update, leave the
ignition switch ON.
• To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate
anything electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes,
A/C, power w i n d o w s , door locks, etc.) during the
update.
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/
PCM update whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or
replaced.
• You cannot update an ECM/PCM with a program it
already has. It will only accept a new program.
• If y o u need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red ( # 3 ) lamp came on or
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position w h e n you disconnect the
HIM f r o m the data link connector (DLC). This will
prevent ECM/PCM damage.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-174). If you are
returning f r o m the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip
steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after
updating the ECM/PCM (see page 11-306).
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and f o l l o w the screen prompts w i t h the
HDS.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue this procedure.
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the
update mode, and f o l l o w the screen prompts to
update the ECM/PCM.
(cont'd)
11-7
Fuel and Emissions Systems
General Troubleshooting Informatic
7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest
disconnect the HDS/HIM f r o m the DLC, and go back
to the procedure that you were doing. If the
software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, f o l l o w
the instructions on the screen. If prompted to
choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make
sure you update both.
NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires y o u
to cool the ECM/PCM, f o l l o w the screen prompts. If
you run into a problem (programming takes over
15 minutes, status bar goes over 100 %, D4 or
immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes,
etc.) during the update procedure, f o l l o w these
steps to minimize the chance of damaging the
ECM/PCM:
• Leave the ignition switch in the " O N (II)" position.
• Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
• Shut d o w n the HDS.
• Disconnect the HDS f r o m the HDS.
• Reboot the HDS.
• Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.
8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean
the throttle body (see page 11-306).
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
(cont'd!
Substituting the ECM/PCM
NOTE: Use this procedure w h e n substituting a knowngood ECM/PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-174). If you are
returning f r o m DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip
steps 4 thru 8, then clean the throttle body after
substituting the ECM/PCM (see page 11-306).
10. Do the CKP learn procedure.
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. - Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue this procedure.
6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
11-8
7, Remove the passenger's dashboard under cover
(see page 20-78), the side kick panel (see page
20-52), and the glove box (see page 20-77).
8. Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the
bolts (B), then remove the ECM/PCM (C).
/ l 2 N m
/
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: DTC P0630 " V I N Not Programmed or
M i s m a t c h " may be stored because the VIN has not
been p r o g r a m m e d into the ECM/PCM; ignore it,
and continue this procedure.
11. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM w i t h the
HDS.
12. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software.
13. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
14. Enter the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM
replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
15. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
16. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean
the throttle body (see page 11-306).
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
18. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
OBD Status
9. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of
removal.
The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the repair was successfully completed.
The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed
as:
• PASSED: On board diagnosis is successfully finished.
• FAILED: On board diagnosis has finished but failed.
• EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
• OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of
the enable conditions for the DTC.
11-9
Fuel and Emissions Systems
DTC Troubleshooting Index
T w o Drive Cycle
DTC
1
(MIL i n d i c a t i o n )
Detection Item
MIL
P 0 1 0 7 (3)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit L o w
P 0 1 0 8 (3)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High
P0111 (10)
Note
Detection
O
Intake Air T e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) S e n s o r Circuit
Voltage
Voltage
Range/Performance
ON
(see p a g e
ON
(see p a g e 11-60)
ON
(see p a g e 11-63)
11-58)
Problem
P0112
Intake Air T e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) S e n s o r Circuit L o w
00)
P0113(10)
P0116(86)
o
Voltage
ON
(see p a g e
11-64)
Intake Air T e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) S e n s o r Circuit H i g h V o l t a g e
ON
(see p a g e
11-66)
E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 Circuit R a n g e /
ON
(see p a g e 11-68)
ON
(see p a g e 11-69)
Performance
Problem
P 0 1 1 7 (6)
E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 Circuit L o w
P0118(6)
E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 Circuit H i g h V o l t a g e
ON
P 0 1 2 2 (7)
T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r A Circuit L o w
ON
(see p a g e
11-201)
P 0 1 2 3 (7)
T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r A Circuit H i g h V o l t a g e
ON
(see p a g e
11-204)
E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 M a l f u n c t i o n / S l o w
ON
P 0 1 2 5 (86)
P 0 1 2 8 (87)
P 0 1 3 3 (61)
P0134(41)
P0135(41)
o
o
o
o
P0137 (63)
Voltage
Cooling System
Malfunction
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) M a l f u n c t i o n / S l o w
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) H e a t e r S y s t e m
Response
Malfunction
(see p a g e 11-74)
(see p a g e 11-76)
ON
(see p a g e
(see p a g e 11-78)
S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
ON
(see p a g e 11-84)
ON
(see p a g e 11-86)
ON
(see p a g e 11-88)
ON
(see p a g e 11-89)
Voltage
S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
Slow
11-77)
Voltage
Response
S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
P 0 1 4 1 (65)
ON
ON
ON
Circuit High
o
(see p a g e 11-73)
Malfunction
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) H e a t e r C i r c u i t
S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
P0138(63)
(see p a g e 11-71)
Response
Circuit L o w
P0139(63)
Voltage
Heater Circuit
Malfunction
P0171 (45)
Fuel S y s t e m T o o
Lean
ON
(see p a g e
11-93)
P 0 1 7 2 (45)
Fuel S y s t e m T o o
Rich
ON
(see p a g e
11-93)
P 0 2 2 2 (7)
T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r B C i r c u i t L o w
T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r B Circuit H i g h
P 0 2 2 3 (7)
P 0 3 0 0 (75)
any
combination
Voltage
o
R a n d o m Misfire
o
o
o
o
No. 1 Cylinder Misfire
Voltage
Detected
ON
(see p a g e 11-207)
ON
(see p a g e
11-210)
ON
(see p a g e 11-94)
(see p a g e 11-97)
of the following
P0301(71)
P0302(72)
P 0 3 0 3 (73)
P 0 3 0 4 (74)
P0301(71)
P0302(72)
P0303(73)
P 0 3 0 4 (74)
P 0 3 2 5 (23)
Detected
ON
No. 2 Cylinder Misfire
Detected
ON
(see p a g e
11-97)
No. 3 Cylinder Misfire
Detected
ON
(see p a g e
11-97)
Detected
ON
No. 4 Cylinder Misfire
Knock Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
ON
P0335(4)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor N o
P0339(4)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) S e n s o r Circuit Intermittent
P0365(8)
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor No
P0369(8)
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent
P0401(80)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient
P0404(12)
o
P0406(12)
Signal
Interruption
Signal
Interruption
Flow
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Circuit
Range/Performance
(see p a g e
(see p a g e
11-97)
11-106)
ON
(see p a g e
11-108)
ON
(see p a g e
11-111)
ON
(see p a g e 11-112)
ON
(see p a g e
ON
(see p a g e
11-315)
ON
(see p a g e
11-317)
ON
(see p a g e
11-321)
ON
(see p a g e
11-311)
11-115)
Problem
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position S e n s o r Circuit High
Voltage
P0420(67)
o
Catalyst S y s t e m Efficiency Below
Threshold
N O T E : T h e a b o v e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d w h e n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m is s e l e c t e d i n t h e H D S .
S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n D T C s c a u s e t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L i s o n a n d n o D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d i n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m , s e l e c t t h e A / T
system, and check for automatic transmission
DTCs.
* 1: T h e s e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e S C S l i n e is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .
11-10
DTC
Detection Item
T w o Drive Cycle
1
(MIL I n d i c a t i o n * )
MIL
Note
Defection
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit
P 0 4 4 3 (92)
ON
(see page
11-333)
Malfunction
o
P 0 4 5 1 (91)
P 0 4 5 2 (91)
ON
(see page 11-337)
ON
(see page
11-338)
ON
(see page
11-341)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) S y s t e m Large Leak Detected
ON
(see page
11-344)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) S y s t e m Very Small Leak Detected
ON
(see page
11-344)
E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n ( E V A P ) S y s t e m L e a k D e t e c t e d / F u e l Fill C a p
ON
(see page 11-347)
OFF
(see p a g e
11-270)
11-271)
Fuel T a n k P r e s s u r e (FTP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t R a n q e / P e r f o r m a n c e
Fuel T a n k P r e s s u r e (FTP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t L o w
Fuel T a n k P r e s s u r e (FTP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t H i g h
P 0 4 5 3 (91)
o
o
o
P 0 4 5 5 (90)
P 0 4 5 6 (90)
P 0 4 5 7 (90)
Loose or
Problem
Voltage
Voltage
Missing
Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e S e n d i n g Unit) Circuit R a n g e /
P0461 (121)
Performance
Problem
P0462O21)
Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e S e n d i n g Unit) Circuit L o w
OFF
(see page
P0463(121)
Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e S e n d i n g Unit) Circuit H i g h V o l t a g e
OFF
(see page 11-273)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) S y s t e m High Purge
ON
(see page 11-349)
ON
(see p a g e
11-350)
Low
ON
(see page
11-353)
High
ON
(see page
11-355)
ON
(see p a g e
11-116)
ON
(see p a g e
11-261)
ON
(see p a g e
11-263)
OFF
(see p a g e
11-120)
(PCM)
OFF
(see p a g e
11-121)
(PCM)
ON
(see page
11-124)
(PCM)
ON
(see p a g e
11-124)
(PCM)
ON
(see p a g e
11-125)
ON
(see p a g e 11-126)
(PCM)
ON
(see p a g e
(see p a g e 11-128)
o
o
P 0 4 9 6 (92)
P 0 4 9 7 (90)
P0498 0 1 7 )
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) S y s t e m L o w Purge
Voltage
Flow
Flow
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit
Voltage
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit
P0499 (117)
Voltage
P0500(17)*
Vehicle S p e e d Sensor (VSS) Circuit
5
o
o
P0506(14)
P0507 (14)
P 0 5 6 2 (34)
Malfunction
Idle Control S y s t e m R P M L o w e r T h a n
Idle C o n t r o l S y s t e m R P M Higher T h a n
Charging System Low
Expected
Expected
Voltage
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module
P0563(34)
Power Source Circuit Unexpected
Voltage
Engine Control Module (ECMVPowertrain Control Module
P0602(196)
Programming
Error
Engine Control Module (ECMVPowertrain Control Module
P0603(131)
Internal Control M o d u l e Keep Alive M e m o r y ( K A M )
Error
Engine Control Module (ECMVPowertrain Control Module
P0606(0)
Processor
Malfunction
VIN Not P r o g r a m m e d or
P0630(139)
o
P0685(135)
Mismatch
Engine Control Module (ECMVPowertrain Control Module
Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit
11-127)
Malfunction
P0700 (70)*
3
Automatic Transaxle Control System
Malfunction
ON
P0700 (70)*
2
Automatic Transaxle Control System
Malfunction
OFF
(see p a g e
11-128)
ON
(see p a g e
11-128)
ON
(see p a g e
11-129)
Than
ON
(see p a g e
11-131)
Than
ON
(see p a g e
11-132)
P1109
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range
03)
P1116(86)
P 1 1 2 8 (5)
P 1 1 2 9 (5)
o
o
o
E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 Circuit
High
Performance
Problem
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower
Expected
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher
Expected
N O T E : T h e a b o v e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d w h e n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m is s e l e c t e d in t h e H D S .
S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n D T C s c a u s e t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L i s o n a n d n o D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d i n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m , s e l e c t t h e A / T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
* 1 : T h e s e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e S C S l i n e is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .
*2:A/T
* 3: T h e D i n d i c a t o r a n d t h e M I L m a y c o m e o n at t h e s a m e t i m e ( A / T ) .
*5:
M/T
(cont'd)
11-11
Fuel arid Emissions Systems
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC
MIL
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) A F S C i r c u i t H i g h
P 1 1 5 7 (48)
Voltage
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) C i r c u i t O u t o f R a n g e
4
P 1 2 9 8 (20)*"*
P 1 4 5 4 (91)
P 1 5 4 9 (34)
o
High
11-137)
Electrical L o a d Detector (ELD) Circuit High
Voltage
OFF
(see p a g e
11-139)
ON
(see p a g e 11-358)
OFF
ON
(see p a g e 11-141)
Fuel T a n k P r e s s u r e (FTP) S e n s o r Circuit R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e
Charging System High
Problem
Voltage
P16BB016)
Alternator B Terminal Circuit L o w
Problem
Problem
Voltage
"OFF
P 2 1 0 1 (40)
Throttle Actuator System
P2108(40)
Throttle Actuator Control Module
P2118(40)
Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance
P 2 1 2 2 (37)
A c c e l e r a t o r P e d a l P o s i t i o n ( A P P ) S e n s o r A ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP)
Voltage
Malfunction
ON
Problem
Problem
T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r A / B I n c o r r e c t V o l t a g e
P 2 1 3 8 (37)
A c c e l e r a t o r P e d a l P o s i t i o n ( A P P ) S e n s o r A / B ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP)
P 2 1 7 6 (40)
T h r o t t l e A c t u a t o r C o n t r o l S y s t e m Idle Position N o t
S e n s o r D/E) I n c o r r e c t V o l t a g e
Correlation
Learned
E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 2 Circuit R a n g e /
Engine C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 2 Circuit L o w
E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 2 Circuit H i g h
P 2 1 9 5 (48)
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) S i g n a l S t u c k L e a n
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit
Voltage
Voltage
Range/Performance
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit L o w
P 2 2 2 9 (13)
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High
P 2 2 3 8 (48)
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1)
Circuit L o w
Voltage
P 2 2 5 2 (48)
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) A F S — C i r c u i t L o w
Voltage
P 2 2 7 1 (63)
P2279 (109)
P2413H2)
o
o
o
o
11-220)
ON
(see p a g e
11-223)
ON
(see p a g e 11-225)
ON
(see p a g e
ON
ON
(see p a g e
11-230)
(see p a g e
11-232)
ON
ON
(see p a g e
11-234)
(see p a g e
11-146)
ON
(see p a g e
11-148)
ON
(see p a g e
11-150)
ON
ON
(see p a g e
11-153)
(see p a g e
11-155)
(see p a g e
11-156)
(see p a g e 11-218)
11-228)
Problem
P2228 H3)
P 2 2 7 0 (63)
(see p a g e
(see p a g e 11-217)
Problem
P2185(192)
o
11-215)
' ON
ON
ON
Correlation
P2184(192)
P 2 2 2 7 (13)
11-143)
(see p a g e
Voltage
P 2 1 3 5 (7)
Performance
11-142)
(see p a g e
Voltage
A c c e l e r a t o r P e d a l P o s i t i o n ( A P P ) S e n s o r B ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP)
Sensor E) Circuit High
(see p a g e
Voltage
A c c e l e r a t o r P e d a l P o s i t i o n ( A P P ) S e n s o r B ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP)
S e n s o r E) C i r c u i t L o w
1
Voltage
A c c e l e r a t o r P e d a l P o s i t i o n ( A P P ) S e n s o r A ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP)
S e n s o r D) Circuit H i g h
(see p a g e 11-214)
OFF
A l t e r n a t o r FR T e r m i n a l C i r c u i t / I G P C i r c u i t L o w
S e n s o r D) C i r c u i t L o w
(see p a g e 11-213)
ON
P16BC(116)
o
11-136)
(see p a g e
Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance
P 2 1 2 8 (37)
(see p a g e 11-133)
OFF
P 1 6 8 4 (40)
P 2 1 2 7 (37)
(see p a g e
Voltage
Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance
P 2 1 2 3 (37)
ON
ON
Electrical L o a d Detector (ELD) Circuit L o w
P1683(40)
P2183H92)
Note
Detection
P1172(61)
P1297 (20)'
Detection Item
T w o Drive Cycle
1
(MIL i n d i c a t i o n )
AFS+
Voltage
Voltage
S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
Circuit Signal Stuck
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
(see p a g e 11-156)
(see p a g e
11-157)
(see p a g e
11-159)
(see p a g e
11-161)
ON
(see p a g e
11-161)
ON
ON
(see p a g e
11-330)
(see p a g e
11-323)
Lean
S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
Circuit Signal Stuck Rich
Intake Air S y s t e m Leak Detected
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) S y s t e m
Malfunction
N O T E : T h e a b o v e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d w h e n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m is s e l e c t e d in t h e H D S .
S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n D T C s c a u s e t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L i s o n a n d n o D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d i n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m , s e l e c t t h e A / T
system, and check for automatic transmission
DTCs.
* 1 : T h e s e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e S C S l i n e is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .
* 4: U S A
11-12
models
Detection Item
T w o Drive Cycle
DTC
1
(MIL i n d i c a t i o n )
o
P2422 (117)
MIL
Note
Detection
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck
Closed
ON
(see p a g e
ON
(see p a g e
11-236)
ON
(see p a g e
11-162)
11-358)
Malfunction
P2552 (40)
Throttle Actuator Control M o d u l e Relay
P2610(132)
Engine Control Module (ECMVPowertrain Control Module
P2646 (22)
Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S w i t c h Circuit L o w
ON
(see p a g e
11-248)
P2647 (22)
Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S w i t c h Circuit High Voltage
ON
(see p a g e
11-251)
P2648 (21)
Rocker A r m Oil Control S o l e n o i d Circuit L o w
Voltage
ON
(see p a g e
11-253)
P2649 (21)
Rocker A r m Oil Control S o l e n o i d Circuit High
Voltage
ON
(see p a g e
11-255)
ON
(see p a g e
11-163)
ON
(see p a g e
11-164)
ON
(see p a g e
11-238)
ON
(see p a g e
11-165)
Ignition Off Internal Timer
o
P 2 A 0 0 (61)
U0028(126)*
2
Malfunction
(PCM)
Malfunction
A i r F u e l R a t i o ( A / F ) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) C i r c u i t
Voltage
Range/Performance
Problem
F-CAN Malfunction
(Bus-Off)
U 0 1 0 7 (30)
Lost C o m m u n i c a t i o n With Throttle Actuator Control
U0155O26)
F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge Control Module-Engine Control
(ECMVPowertrain Control Module
Module
Module
(PCM))
N O T E : T h e a b o v e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d w h e n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m is s e l e c t e d i n t h e H D S .
S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n D T C s c a u s e t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L i s o n a n d n o D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d i n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m , s e l e c t t h e A / T
system, and check for automatic transmission
DTCs.
* 1: T h e s e D T C s a r e i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e S C S line is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .
*2:A/T
11-13
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
When the vehicle has one of these s y m p t o m s , check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) w i t h the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom
Engine w i l l not start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Diagnostic procedure
Test the battery (see page 22-52).
Test the starter (see page 4-9).
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -283).
Troubleshoot the fuel p u m p circuit (see page 11 -276).
Engine w i l l not start
(MIL comes on and stays o n ,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set)
MIL comes on and stays on,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set
Engine w i l l not start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls
immediately
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine is hard to start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-173).
1.
2.
3.
Test the battery (see page 22-52).
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -283).
Clean the throttle body (see page 11-306).
Cold fast idle too low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
1.
Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Check the idle speed (see page 11-267).
Clean the throttle body (see page 11-306).
Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Check the idle speed (see page 11-267).
Do the throttle position learning check (see page
11-305).
Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Check the idle speed (see page 11-267).
Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-305).
Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
(see page 11-265).
Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-305).
Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11 -264).
Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
(see page 11-265).
Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-245).
Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11-264).
Cold fast idle too high
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After w a r m i n g up, idle speed
is below specification w i t h o u t
load
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After w a r m i n g up, idle speed
is above specification without
load
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
11-14
Also check for
Low compression
No ignition spark
Intake air leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Contaminated fuel
•
•
•
•
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Contaminated fuel
Weak spark
Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-173).
Check the immobilizer system.
Check the immobilizer system.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Idle speed fluctuates
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
•
•
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Intake vacuum leaks
Symptom
Low power
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Diagnostic procedure
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-283),
Engine stalls
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Difficult to refuel
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
']
2.
Fuel overflows during
refueling
(No DTCs set)
HDS does not communicate
with the ECM/PCM or the
vehicle
3.
4.
1.
2.
Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -283).
Check the idle speed (see page 11-267).
Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
circuit (see page 11-266).
Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister
and the fuel tank.
Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank.
Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-300).
Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-300).
Also check for
• Low compression
• Incorrect camshaft
timing
• Incorrect engine oil
level
• Intake air leaks
• Faulty harness and
sensor
connections
Malfunctioning gas
station filling nozzle.
Malfunctioning gas
station filling nozzle.
Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
11-15
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S f s t e m Description
Electronic Control S f stem
The fuel and emission control systems are managed by the engine control module (ECM) on vehicles w i t h manual
transmissions or the powertrain control module (PCM) on vehicles w i t h automatic transmissions.
Self-diagnosis
The ECM/PCM detects a failure of a signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit and stores a Temporary DTC or a
DTC in erasable m e m o r y (RAM). Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle.
W h e n a DTC is stored, the ECM/PCM turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by supplying ground to the MIL
circuit
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method
W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit, the ECM/PCM stores a DTC for
the failure in the RAM and turns on the MIL immediately.
- T w o Drive Cycle Detection Method
W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit in the first drive cycle, the
ECM/PCM stores a Temporary DTC for the failure in RAM. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure
continues in the second drive cycle, the ECM/PCM stores a DTC in erasable-memory and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit, the ECM/PCM ignores that signal
and substitutes a pre-programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a DTC to be
stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition
W h e n the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the ECM/PCM supplies ground to the MIL circuit for about 15 to 20 seconds
to check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all readiness
codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM/PCM stays on (up to 25 minutes). If the ECM/PCM connector is
disconnected during this t i m e , the ECM/PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable
f r o m the battery or j u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
11-16
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections
IGNITION COIL
RELAY (IG COIL)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
© No.
(D N o .
© No.
© No.
© No.
(40 A )
1
8
3
9
6
B A T T E R Y ( 8 0 A)
B A C K U P ( 1 0 A)
I G ( 5 0 A)
S M A L L L I G H T ( 3 0 A)
POWER W I N D O W
© N o . 16 H O R N ,
(15 A )
STOP
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
© N o . 1 4 I G P ( 1 5 A)
© N o . 11 F U E L P U M P
(15 A )
©
N o . 3 IG M E T E R (10 A )
© N o . 10 I G H A G ( 7 . 5 A)
© N o . 2 3 L A F ( 1 0 A)
@
N o . 31 L A F (7.5 A )
UNDER-D
S U B F U S E
© N o . 33
© N o . 32
ASH
/ R E L A Y B O X
I G C O I L (15 A )
D B W (15 A )
*1: M / T
*2: A / T
*5: U S A models
*8: With A / C
(cont'd)
11-17
Fuel and Emissions S f stems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
*2
MAP SENSOR
No. 1 INJECTOR
No. 2 INJECTOR
No. 3 INJECTOR
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR
No. 4 INJECTOR
2
*2
3
A
EGR VALVE
~
IAT SENSOR
EPS CONTROL
ECTSENSOR1
BAROSENSOR
(Built into
the ECM/PCM)
KNOCK SENSOR
j i . To A/C PRESSURE I
^ SWITCH
CKPSENSOR
*2:
*8;
A/T
With
11-18
A / C
R O C K E R A R M OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH
R O C K E R A R M OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
*1:M/T
*5: USA models
(cont'd)
11-19
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S f s t e m D e s c r i p t i o n (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
GAUGE CONTROL |
MODULE
A B S MODULATOR
C O N T R O L UNIT
I
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL MODULE
APPSENSOR A/B
*6: With cruise control
* 7 : M/T with cruise control
* 8 : With A/C
11-20
EPS CONTROL UNIT
AUDIO UNIT
INPUT S H A F T
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
SHIFT L O C K S O L E N O I D
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
^
*2: A/T
* 3 : A/T
* 4 : A/T
(5-position)
(7-position)
/
ECM/PCM
A
ECM/PCM
(24P)
(31P)
1 | 2 | 3 ! 4 | 5
6| 7|
10
18
13 14 15 16
28
23 24
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1 7TTT3
/
I
4
5
|S
9
8
10 11 12 13
20 21
30 31
17 18
21
/
P C M C
(22P) (A/T)
B
/
/
/
16
/
/
/
1
4 5 6 7
m
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
21 22
17 18 19 20
TERMINAL
E C M / P C M
(17P)
/
/
l8
13 14
9 10
15
D
5
6
//
12
/
E C M / P C M
(31P)
/
E
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 6| 7 I
3819
11 1 2 | / | 1 4 | 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
/
24|l25f28
27 28 29 30
/
LOCATIONS
(cont'd)
11-21
Fuel and Emissions S f stems
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Vacuum Hose Routing
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
11-22
Vacuum Distribution
0 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1 )
® SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2)
® MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
® ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 1
KNOCK SENSOR
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
IGNITION COIL
THROTTLE BODY
INJECTOR
FUEL PULSATION DAMPER
@ FUEL FILTER
®
®
®
®
m
©
©
@ FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
© FUEL PUMP
© FUEL TANK
© AIR CLEANER
© EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
POSITION SENSOR
© POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
® THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
© EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
® FUEL TANK VAPOR LIQUID SEPARATION VALVE
© EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
© FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
(cont'd)
11-23
FueS and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (31P)
3
IGP1
2
IGP2
1
KS
10
AFS
HTC
4
PG2
5
PG1
7
CKP
6
CMP
14
16
13
15
IGPL34 IGPLS3 IGPLS2 IGPLS1
24
SG1
23
SG2
Wire side of female
/
8
LG2
18
NC
(VSS)
28
AFS-
9
LG1
21
20
VCC2 VCC1
30
31
MAP AFS+
terminals
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V .
Terminal
Terminal
Wire color
Description
name
Signal
number
1
RED/BLU
KS (KNOCK
2
YEL/BLK
IGP2 (POWER
SENSOR)
SOURCE)
YEL/BLK
IGP1 (POWER
SOURCE)
Detects knock sensor signal
With engine knocking: pulses
Power source for
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
ECM/PCM
circuit
3
BLK
4
PG2 (POWER
GROUND)
Power source for
W i t h ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
ECM/PCM
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
circuit
W i t h ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
G r o u n d circuit for E C M /
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
PCM
BLK
5
PG1 (POWER
GROUND)
G r o u n d circuit for E C M /
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
PCM
GRN
6
CMP
(CAMSHAFT
POSITION
7
BLU
CKP
BRN/YEL
signal
SENSOR)
LG2 (LOGIC
GROUND)
With engine running: pulses
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
Detects CKP sensor
(CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
8
Detects C M P sensor signal
SENSOR)
With engine running: pulses
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
G r o u n d circuit for
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
ECM/PCM
BRN/YEL
9
LG1 (LOGIC
GROUND)
G r o u n d circuit for
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
ECM/PCM
BLK/WHT
10
A F S H T C (AIR F U E L
(A/F) S E N S O R
RATIO
Drives A/F sensor
heater
HEATER
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
With fully w a r m e d up engine running: about 0 V
CONTROL)
WHT/BLU
13
IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION
Drives N o . 4 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
14
WHT/BLK
15
WHT/GRN
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
With engine running: pulses
IGPLS3 (No. 3 IGNITION
Drives N o . 3 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
IGPLS2 (No. 2 IGNITION
Drives N o . 2 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
WHT
16
IGPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION
Drives N o . 1 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
18*
2
BLK/BLU
NC
(COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED
SENSOR)
Detects output shaft
(countershaft) speed
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
sensor
W h i l e d r i v i n g : a b o u t 2.5 V
signal
18*
1
WHT/GRN
V S S (VEHICLE
SENSOR)
*
1:M/T
*2:A/T
11-24
SPEED
Detects V S S signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d f r o n t w h e e l s
t u r n i n g : p u l s e s 0 t o 5.0 V
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (31P)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
KS
IGP2
IGP1
PG2
PG1
CMP
CKP
LG2
LG1
10
AFS
HTC
18
NC
(VSS)
15
14
16
13
IGPLS4 IGPLS3 IGPLS2 IGPLS1
23
24
SG2
SG1
28
AFS-
20
21
VCC2
VCC1
30
31
MAP AFS+
Wire side of female terminals
NOTE:
Standard battery voltage is 1 2 V.
Terminal
number
Wire color
20
YEL/BLU
VCC2 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
Provides sensor voltage
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 . 0 V
21
YEL/RED
VCC1 (SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
Provides sensor voltage
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
23
GRN/BLK
SG2 (SENSOR
GROUND)
Sensor
ground
24
GRN/WHT
SG1 (SENSOR
GROUND)
Sensor
ground
28
RED
Terminal
Description
name
Signal
W i t h ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
W i t h ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
A F S - (AIR F U E L R A T I O
Detects A/F sensor
(A/F) S E N S O R , S E N S O R 1
1) s i g n a l
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
(sensor
-SIDE)
30
RED/GRN
MAP
(MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
Detects M A P sensor signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 3.0 V
A t i d l e : a b o u t 1.0 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n e n g i n e s p e e d )
PRESSURE
SENSOR)
31
GRN
A F S + (AIR F U E L R A T I O
Detects A/F sensor
(A/F) S E N S O R , S E N S O R 1
1) s i g n a l
(sensor
+SIDE)
(cont'd)
11-25
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (24P)
3
INJ3
2
INJ4
4
INJ2
5
INJ1
10
11
12
A L T L VTPSW EGRP
8
ECT1
17
I AT
6
VTS
13
ALTF
16
EGR
/
21
PCS
18
ALTC
Wire side of female terminals
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.
Terminal
Terminal
Wire color
Description
name
Signal
number
2
YEL
INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR)
Drives No. 4 injector
A t idle: d u t y controlled
3
BLU
INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR)
Drives No. 3 injector
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
4
RED
INJ2 {No. 2 INJECTOR)
Drives No. 2 injector
5
6
BRN
GRN/YEL
INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR)
Drives No. 1 injector
VTS (ROCKER A R M
CONTROL
8
RED/WHT
OIL
Drives rocker a r m oil
SOLENOID)
ECT1 (ENGINE
control
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A t idle: a b o u t 0 V
solenoid
Detects ECT sensor 1 signal
1)
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 — 4 . 8 V
(depending on engine coolant temperature)
W i t h fully w a r m e d up engine: about 0.5—0.7 V
10
WHT/BLU
ALTL (ALTERNATOR
Detects alternator signal
L
SIGNAL)
11
BLU/BLK
W i t h engine running: battery voltage
V T P S W (ROCKER A R M
PRESSURE
12
WHT/BLK
WHT/RED
OIL
SWITCH)
Detects rocker a r m oil
W i t h e n g i n e at l o w e n g i n e s p e e d : a b o u t 0 V
pressure switch
W i t h e n g i n e at h i g h e n g i n e s p e e d : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
signal
EGRP (EXHAUST
GAS
Detects EGR valve
RECIRCULATION
(EGR)
sensor signal
( d e p e n d i n g o n E G R v a l v e lift)
D e t e c t s a l t e r n a t o r FR s i g n a l
With engine running: about 0—5.0 V
Drives EGR valve
W i t h EGR operating: duty controlled
VALVE POSITION
13
position
PNK
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 1.2—3.0 V
SENSOR)
ALTF (ALTERNATOR
FR
SIGNAL)
16
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
( d e p e n d i n g o n electrical load)
EGR ( E X H A U S T
RECIRCULATION
GAS
(EGR)
W i t h EGR not operating: about 0 V
VALVE)
17
RED/YEL
IA T ( I N T A K E A I R
TEMPERATURE
18
WHT/GRN
ALTC
(ALTERNATOR
CONTROL)
21
RED/YEL
PCS
(EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION
PURGE
CANISTER
VALVE)
Detects IAT sensor signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 — 4 . 8 V
Sends alternator control
With engine running and fully w a r m e d
signal
a b o u t 8.0 V
SENSOR)
( d e p e n d i n g o n intake air t e m p e r a t u r e )
Drives EVAP canister
valve
purge
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t b e l o w 140
( 6 0 °C):
T
battery voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t a b o v e 1 4 0 °F
(60 *C): d u t y
11-26
up:
controlled
PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector C (22P)*
1
LSB
2
2
4
5
6
7
SHC
SHD
SHB
SHA
LSC
13
OP2
SW
14
15
2-1
12
ATP
RVS
A T FT
LSA
19
NM
20
21
22
ATPN
ATPR
ATPP
10
9
ATPD3 OP3
(ATPS) SW
17
ATPD
11
ATP
18
ATP
FWD
Wire side of female terminals
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V .
Terminal
Wire color
Terminal
Signal
Description
name
number
BRN/WHT
1
LSB (A/T C L U T C H
Drives A/T clutch
PRESSURE
control solenoid valve B
CONTROL
pressure
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): c u r r e n t c o n t r o l
S O L E N O I D V A L V E B)
GRN
2
SHC (SHIFT
SOLENOID
V A L V E C)
Drives shift solenoid
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in R p o s i t i o n , a n d D p o s i t i o n
valve C
(in 3 r d a n d 4th g e a r s ) , a n d D 3 o r S (in 3 r d g e a r ) :
battery voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n P , H,
D (in 1st, 2 n d , a n d 5th
g e a r s ) , D 3 o r S (in 1st a n d 2 n d g e a r s ) , 2 , 1
positions:
about 0 V
4
GRN/RED
S H D (SHIFT
SOLENOID
V A L V E D)
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in P a n d R positions:
Drives shift solenoid
battery voltage
valve D
With engine running N position: about 0 V
GRN/WHT
5
SHB (SHIFT
SOLENOID
V A L V E B)
Drives shift solenoid
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n R, D ( i n 1 s t , 4 t h a n d 5 t h
valve B
gears), D 3 o r S (in 1st g e a r ) , a n d 1 p o s i t i o n s :
battery voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n P, N , D , ( i n 2 n d a n d 3 r d
gears), D 3 o r S (in 2 n d a n d 3 r d g e a r s ) , a n d 2
positions: about 0 V
BLU
6
S H A (SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVE A)
Drives shift solenoid
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in D p o s i t i o n (in 2 n d a n d 4 t h
valve
g e a r s ) , a n d D 3 o r S (in 2 n d g e a r ) , a n d 2 p o s i t i o n :
A
battery voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n P, N a n d D p o s i t i o n s ( i n 1 s t ,
3 r d a n d 5th gears), D3 or S (in 1st a n d 3 r d g e a r s a n d
1 positions): about 0 V
BLU/WHT
7
LSC (A/T C L U T C H
Drivers A/T clutch
PRESSURE
control solenoid valve C
CONTROL
pressure
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): c u r r e n t c o n t r o l
S O L E N O I D V A L V E C)
9'
9*
3
4
RED
RED
ATPS
(TRANSMISSION
POSITION)
input
ATPD3
(TRANSMISSION
BRN
Detects 3rd clutch
TRANSMISSION
transmission fluid
ATP2-1
FLUID
12
YEL
(TRANSMISSION
AND
POSITION)
ATPRVS
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
In D 3 p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
pressure
With 3rd clutch pressure: 0 V
switch signal input
SWITCH)
RANGE SWITCH 1ST
2ND
range
In S p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
input
O P 3 S W (3RD CLUTCH
PRESSURE
11
Detects transmission
switch D3 position signal
D3
POSITION)
BLK/RED
range
switch S position signal
RANGE SWITCH
10
Detects transmission
RANGE SWITCH S
(TRANSMISSION
Detects transmission
s w i t c h 1st a n d 2 n d
signal
range
position
In 1st a n d 2 n d p o s i t i o n s : a b o u t 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 5.0 V
input
Detects transmission
range
RANGE SWITCH R
switch R position signal
POSITION)
input
In R p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
* 2: A / T
* 3: A / T ( 5 - p o s i t i o n )
* 4: A / T ( 7 - p o s i t i o n )
(cont'd)
11-27
FueS and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (22P)
/
2
SHC
1
LSB
/
/
2
9
10
ATPD3 OP3
(ATPS) SW
18
17
ATP
ATPD FWD
4
SHD
5
SHB
6
SHA
7
LSC
11
ATP
2-1
12
ATP
RVS
13
OP2
SW
14
AT FT
15
LSA
19
NM
20
ATPN
21
ATPR
22
ATPP
Wire side of female terminals
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.
Terminal
Terminal
Wire color
Description
name
Signal
number
13
BLU/YEL
OP2SW (2ND
CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
PRESSURE
14
15
RED/YEL
RED/BLK
Detects 2nd clutch
FLUID
SWITCH)
transmission fluid
switch signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
pressure
input
ATFT (ATF TEMPERATURE
Detects ATF temperature
SENSOR)
sensor signal
LSA (A/T
CLUTCH
PRESSURE
input
Drives A/T clutch
CONTROL
With 2nd clutch pressure: about 0 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 2 — 4 . 8 V
(depending on ATF temperature)
pressure
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): c u r r e n t c o n t r o l
control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
17
YEL/GRN
ATPD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
D
Detects transmission
range
In D p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
switch D position signal
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
Detects transmission
In D, D 3 ( S ) , a n d 2 p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
POSITION)
18
BLU/YEL
ATPFWD
(TRANSMISSION
R A N G E S W I T C H D/D3
(S)/2
WHT/RED
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
position signal
POSITION)
19
range
s w i t c h D, D 3 (S), a n d 2
NM (MAINSHAFT
SPEED
SENSOR)
Detects input shaft
(mainshaft) speed
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
sensor
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in N p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 2.5 V
signal
20
RED/BLK
ATPN
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
N
Detects transmission
range
In N p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
switch N position signal
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
Detects transmission
In R p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
POSITION)
21
WHT
ATPR
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH R
switch R position
range
signal
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
POSITION)
22
BLK/BLU
ATPP
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH P
POSITION)
*2:A/T
11-28
Detects transmission
range
switch P position signal
In P p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (17P)
/
5
APSB
8
BKSW
NC
13
SEFD
14
SEDF
W
(SDNP)
10
SG3
12
VCC3
15
ETCS
RLY
Wire side of female
6
APSA
/
/
/
/
/
terminals
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V .
Terminal
Terminal
Wire color
Signal
Description
name
number
BLU/ORN
5
APSB
(ACCELERATOR
Detects APP sensor B signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r
PEDAL POSITION (APP)
p r e s s e d : a b o u t 2.3 V
S E N S O R B)
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r
pedal
pedal
r e l e a s e d : a b o u t 0.2 V
PUR
6
APSA
(ACCELERATOR
Detects APP sensor A
signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r
PEDAL P O S I T I O N (APP)
p r e s s e d : a b o u t 4.5 V
SENSOR
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r
A)
pedal
pedal
r e l e a s e d : a b o u t 0.5 V
BLU
8
BKSWNC (BRAKE
POSITION
PEDAL
SWITCH)
Detects brake
pedal
position switch
signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b r a k e
pedal
released: battery voltage
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b r a k e
pedal
pressed: about 0 V
9*
7
LTBLU
CCCLSW
(CRUISE
CONTROL
CLUTCH
Detects cruise clutch pedal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d c l u t c h
position switch signal
released: about 0 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d c l u t c h
SWITCH)
pedal
pedal
pressed: battery voltage
LT G R N / R E D
SDNP (DOWN
SHIFT
SWITCH)
Detects downshift
switch
W i t h left (—) p a d d l e s h i f t e r p r e s s e d : a b o u t 0 V
W i t h neither paddle shifter pressed:
signal
battery voltage
10
BLK
SG3 (SENSOR
12
BRN
VCC3 (SENSOR
13
BLU/RED
GROUND)
VOLTAGE)
Sensor
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
ground
Provides sensor
voltage
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
W i t h ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
SEFD
(THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
SERIAL
14
BLU/BLK
SEDF
CONTROL
Sends throttle actuator
control serial signal
SIGNAL)
(THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
CONTROL
Detects throttle actuator
control serial signal
SERIAL SIGNAL)
15
ORN
ETCS RLY
(THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
MODULE
*
CONTROL
Drives throttle actuator
control module
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
relay
RELAY)
3:A/T(5-position)
* 7: M / T w i t h c r u i s e c o n t r o l
(cont'd)
11-29
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (31P)
1
2
ECT2
SLS
3
LG3
4
SG4
5
VCC4
6
TAC
16
SUPP
12
11
CANH FANC
14
FTP
15
ELD
24
CANL
25
NEP
26
VSS
OUT
22
BKSW
8
AFS
HTCR
7
MRLY
17
IMO
FPR
18
ACC
VSV
27
IMO
CD
28
ACS
29
SCS
19
20
SH02S
9
IG1
21
S02S
HTC
30
WEN
Wire side of female terminals
NOTE: Standard b a t t e r y voltage i s 12 V .
Wire color
Terminal
Terminal
Description
name
Signal
number
1
LT BLU
ECT2 (ENGINE
COOLANT
Detects ECT sensor 2 signal
T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2)
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 — 4 . 8 V
(depending on engine coolant temperature)
W i t h fully w a r m e d up engine: about 0.5—0.7 V
2'
2
BRN/WHT
SLS (SHIFT
Drives shift lock solenoid
LOCK
SOLENOID)
BRN/YEL
3
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), i n t h e P p o s i t i o n , b r a k e
pedal pressed, and accelerator released: about 0 V
LG3 (LOGIC
GROUND)
Ground for
ECM/PCM
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
control circuit
4
PNK
SG4 (SENSOR
5
ORN
VCC4 (SENSOR
BLU
TAC
GROUND)
VOLTAGE)
Sensor
ground
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
Provides sensor voltage
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
W i t h ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
RED/YEL
7
Detects evaporator
MRLY (PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY)
PNK/BLK
(depending on evaporator
Drives PGM-FI m a i n relay 1
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
(Fl M A I N ) P o w e r s o u r c e f o r
W i t h ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
Drives A/F sensor
(A/F) S E N S O R
relay
CONTROL
9
BLK/YEL
11
WHT
temperature)
memory
A F S H T C R (AIR F U E L R A T I O
HEATER
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 — 4 . 8 V
signal
DTC
8
sensor
heater
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
RELAY)
IG1 (IGNITION
SIGNAL)
Detects ignition signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
CANH
Sends
(CAN
COMMUNICATION
SIGNAL
communication
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V ( p u l s e s )
signal
HIGH)
GRN
12
FANC (RADIATOR
FAN
Drives radiator fan relay
With radiator fan running: about 0 V
Detects FTP s e n s o r signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d f u e l f i l l c a p o p e n :
Detects ELD signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 — 4 . 8 V
Detects upshift switch
W i t h right ( + ) paddle shifter pressed: about 0 V
signal
W i t h neither paddle shifter pressed:
Drives PGM-FI m a i n relay 2
0 V for 2 s e c o n d s after t u r n i n g ignition s w i t c h
(FUEL PUMP)
(II), t h e n b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
CONTROL)
14
LTGRN
W i t h radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
FTP (FUEL T A N K
a b o u t 2.5 V
P R E S S U R E (FTP) S E N S O R )
15*
5
BLU/ORN
16'
3
YEL
ELD (ELECTRICAL
LOAD
( d e p e n d i n g o n electrical load)
DETECTOR)
SUPP (UPSHIFT SWITCH)
battery voltage
17
GRN/YEL
IMOFPR
(IMMOBILIZER
FUEL P U M P
18'
RED
8
RELAY)
A C C (A/C C L U T C H
RELAY)
Drives A/C clutch
relay
With compressor ON: about 0 V
W i t h c o m p r e s s o r OFF: battery voltage
LT G R N / R E D
19
VSV
(EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION
(EVAP)
CANISTER VENT
VALVE)
*2:A/T
* 3: A / T ( 5 - p o s i t i o n )
* 5: U S A
models
* 8: W i t h
A/C
11-30
SHUT
Drives EVAP canister vent
shut valve
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
ON
ECM/PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector E {31P)
1 2
ECT2
SLS
/
3
LG3
12
11
CANH FANC
22
BKSW
/
/
24
CANL
4
SG4
5
VCC4
14
FTP
25
NEP
15
ELD
26
VSS
OUT
6
?
MRLY
17
18
16
SUPP IMO
FPR ACC
AFS
HJCR
TAC
27
IMO
CD
28
ACS
9
I G 1
21
19
20
VSV SHOES S02S
HTC
30
29
SCS WEN
/
Wire side of female terminals
NOTE:
Standard battery voltage is 1 2 V.
Terminal
Terminal
Wire color
Description
name
Signal
number
WHT/RED
20
SH02S
(SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN
(SECONDARY
SENSOR
Detects secondary
H02S
( s e n s o r 2) s i g n a l
W i t h throttle fully c l o s e d at idle a n d fully w a r m e d
u p e n g i n e : a b o v e 0.6 V
H02S),
W i t h t h r o t t l e q u i c k l y c l o s e d : b e l o w 0.4 V
S E N S O R 2)
BLK/WHT
21
S02SHTC
(SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN
(SECONDARY
HEATER
22
WHT/BLK
RED
CANL
Drives secondary
H02S
heater
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
With fully w a r m e d up engine
H02S)
duty
running:
controlled
CONTROL)
B K S W (BRAKE
POSITION
24
SENSOR
PEDAL
Detects brake
Sends
(CAN
COMMUNICATION
pedal
position switch
SWITCH)
SIGNAL
With brake pedal released: about 0 V
signal
With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
communication
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2 . 5 V ( p u l s e s )
signal
LOW)
25
GRN/ORN
NEP (ENGINE
SPEED
Outputs engine speed
pulse
With engine running: pulses
PULSE)
PUR/WHT
27
LT G R N / B L K
V S S O U T (VEHICLE SPEED
Sends vehicle speed sensor
Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SENSOR OUTPUT
signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
IMOCD
SIGNAL)
(IMMOBILIZER
Detects immobilizer
signal
CODE)
28
8
BLU/WHT
A C S (A/C S W I T C H
SIGNAL)
Detects A/C switch
signal
W i t h A / C s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
W i t h A / C s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 5.0 V
29
BRN
SCS (SERVICE
CHECK
Detects service check signal
SIGNAL)
W i t h service check signal shorted using HDS:
about 0 V
W i t h s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n : a b o u t 5.0 V
30
RED/BLU
W E N (WRITE
SIGNAL)
* 2:
ENABLE
Detects service enable
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
signal
A/T
* 8: W i t h A / C
(cont'd)
11-31
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
PGM-FI System
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a
sequential multiport fuel injection system.
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
the ECM/PCM to determine ignition t i m i n g and t i m i n g
for fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting
engine misfire.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling
f r o m the A/C system, it delays the compressor f r o m
being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure
smooth transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor
The A/F sensor operates over a w i d e air/fuel range. The
A/F sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends
signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of
fuel injection accordingly.
MAGNET
TERMINAL
O-RING
SENSOR
TERMINALS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2
The ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the
engine coolant temperature increases.
.TERMINAL
THERMISTOR
HEATER
TERMINALS
^
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1
cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to
each cylinder.
O-RING
MAGNET
TERMINAL
11-32
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
O-RING
Ignition Timing Control
The ECM/PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic ignition
t i m i n g at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
pressures. It also adjusts the t i m i n g according to engine
coolant temperature and intake air temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration
The ECM/PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out f r o m the m e m o r y , is further modified by
signals sent f r o m various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel t r i m , the ECM/PCM
detects long term malfunctions in the fuel system and
sets a diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
Intake Air Temperature flAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases
as the intake air temperature increases.
TERMINAL
Knock Sensor
The knock control system adjusts the ignition t i m i n g to
minimize knock.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation
to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain "readiness c o d e s " that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM
has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states,
part of the emissions testing is to make sure these
codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to
complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test
cannot be finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,
turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15—20 seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not
complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the
engine as described in the procedures (see page 11-53).
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM.
(cont'd)
11-33
Fuel and Emissions S f stems
S f s t e m Description (cont'd)
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S)
The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the three w a y catalytic
converter ( T W O , and sends signals to the ECM/PCM
which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly.
To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
The ECM/PCM compares the H02S output w i t h the A/F
sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The
secondary H02S is located on the TWC.
S E N S O R
Electronic Throttle Control System
The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic
throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
see a functional layout of the system.
Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM
controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle
speed according to engine loads.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is
pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve
depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor signal.
Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle
actuator to maintain set speed w h e n the cruise control
is operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the
cruise control actuator.
HEATER
HEATER
TERMINALS
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (M/T)
The VSS is driven by the differential. It generates a
pulsed signal f r o m an input of 5 volts. The number of
pulses per minute increases/decreases w i t h the speed
of the vehicle.
11-34
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM.
Throttle Body
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant f r o m the cylinder head to prevent icing of the
throttle plate.
idle Control System
W h e n the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the
power steering load is high, or the alternator is
charging, the ECM/PCM signals or communicates w i t h
the throttle actuator to maintain the correct idle speed.
Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM
w h e n the brake pedal is pressed.
Fuel Supply System
T H R O T T L E P O S I T I O N (TP)
S E N S O R and
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
Fuel Cutoff Control
During deceleration w i t h the throttle valve closed,
current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at engine speeds over 900 rpm (1,050 rpm on
Canada models). Fuel cutoff also occurs w h e n the
engine speed exceeds 6,700 r p m , regardless of the
position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine f r o m
over-revving. W h e n the vehicle is stopped, the ECM/
PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over
5,000 rpm (A/T), 6,700 rpm (M/T). The engine speed of
fuel cut is lower on a cold engine.
Fuel Pump Control
W h e n the ignition is turned on, the ECM/PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which feeds current
to the fuel p u m p for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel
system. With the engine running, the ECM/PCM
grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and feeds
current to the fuel p u m p . When the engine is not
running and the ignition is on, the ECM/PCM cuts
ground to PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which cuts
current to the fuel p u m p .
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 (Fl MAIN) and 2 (FUEL PUMP)
PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) is energized whenever
the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to
the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel
p u m p for 2 seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned
ON (II), and w h e n the engine is cranking or running.
(cont'd)
11-35
Fuel and Emissions S f stems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd!
Catalytic Converter System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Three ¥¥ay Catalytic Converter (TWO
The TWC converts hydrocarbons ( H O , carbon
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C0 ), nitrogen (N ), and
water vapor.
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
of the system.
2
2
HOUSING
EGR Valve
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures
and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold
and into the combustion chambers.
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
of the system.
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor f r o m
the fuel tank until it can be purged f r o m the EVAP
canister into the engine and burned.
THREE W A Y
CATALYST
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses f r o m escaping
into the atmosphere by venting t h e m into the intake
manifold.
B R E A T H E R PIPE
<jm
: BLOW-BY
< = •
: FRESH
11-36
AIR
VAPOR
PCV
HOSE
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 °F
(60 °C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge
valve cutting vacuum to the EVAP canister.
OUT
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
O-RING
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting
of the EVAP canister.
O-RING
VALVE
TERMINAL
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Fuel Cap Warning Message
To make the message go off (Without the
HDS)
The ECM/PCM detects whether the fuel fill cap is loose
or missing under certain conditions and alerts the
driver by showing the information in the information
display. If the ECM/PCM detects a small v o l u m e leak,
the MIL may come on during the third drive cycle and
store a DTC.
First drive cycle
During the first drive cycle after a cold start, the ECM/
PCM alerts the driver to check the fuel fill cap by
showing a "CHECK FUEL CAP" message in the
information display (A), and it stores Temporary
DTC P0457 "Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak
Detected/Fuel Fill Cap Loose or M i s s i n g " . Tightening
the fuel cap does not make the message go off
immediately.
Shows "CHECK FUEL CAP" in the
Information display and stores a
Temporary DTC.
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Start the engine, and drive at a steady speed over
28 mph (45 km/h), without moving the accelerator
pedal, for about 1 minute. Do step 2 and 3 several
times.
Second drive cycle
During the second drive cycle after a cold start, if the
fuel fill cap is still loose or missing, the ECM/PCM alerts
the driver to check the fuel fill cap by showing a
"CHECK FUEL CAP" message in the information display
the same as the first drive cycle. Tightening the fuel cap
does not make the message go off immediately.
Third drive cycle
During the third drive cycle after a cold start, if the fuel
fill cap is still loose or missing, the ECM/PCM stores
DTC P0457 "Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak
Detected/Fuel Fill Cap Loose or Missing." The
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (A) comes o n , and the
"CHECK FUEL CAP" message goes off.
Stores D T C and MIL comes
A
To make the message go off (With the HDS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. Clear the Temporary DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP
FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
11-38
on
Electronic Throttle Control S f s t e m Diagram
The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, throttle actuator control module, throttle actuator control module relay, and the ECM/
PCM.
APP
SEIMSOR
A
—
•ORN-
BRN
— PUR—
—
BLK
—
ORN
E C M /
PCM
/
1 VARIOUS
V
I
S E N S O R S
— B L U / O R N APP
—
From
THROTTLE A C T U A T O R
CONTROL M O D U L E
RELAY
THROTTLE A C T U A T O R
CONTROL M O D U L E
PNK
S E N S O R B
- B L U / R E D -
W H T / R E D
- B L U / B L K -
G R N / B L K -
»
From
Y E L / G R N -
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
CONTROL
M O D U L E
RELAY
BLK
(cont'd)
11-39
Fuel and Emissions S f stems
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) S f stem Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake m a n i f o l d , and into the combustion chambers. The ECM/PCM m e m o r y includes the ideal EGR valve position
for varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM then
compares it w i t h the ideal lift in its m e m o r y (based on signals sent f r o m other sensors). If there is any difference
between the t w o , the ECM/PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
11-40
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor f r o m the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged f r o m the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, w h i c h operates whenever engine coolant
temperature is above 140 °F (60 °C).
FTP
8-UEL T A N K
/ E V A P CANISTER
VENT S H U T VALVE
VAPOR
LIQUID S E P A R A T I O N
FUEL TANK VAPOR
RECIRCULATION TUBE
S E N S O R
V A L V E
W H T —
4
^ AIR F U E L RATIO
(A/F) S E N S O R
R E L A Y (LAF)
VARIOUS
S E N S O R S
F U E L FILL C A P
^
<
From
No.
IG M E T E R
(10 A ) F U S E
3
(cont'd)
11-41
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram
24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
I
IGP1
f
I
f
t
T
I
• YEL/BLK
A2
• YEL/BLK
• YEL/BLK
—
1
• YEL/BLK
B5
l—tr~
INJ1
No. 1 INJECTOR
' YEL/BLK
84
INJ2
> — £
No. 2 INJECTOR
• YEL/BLK
B3
>
'
SNJ3
E
• YEL/BLK
£
B2
INJ4
m
5V
*1:M/T
11-42
No. 3 INJECTOR
No. 4 INJECTOR
24P
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
rn
l
- YEL/RED -
m
ryio
VCC1
A30
MAP
A24
SG1
•RED/GRN '
. GRN/WHT
• GRN/WHT •
YEL/RED } I
I
r^n
L£J
A20
' VCC2
B12
EGRP
GRN/BLK •
B17
SAT
RED/YEL
-yWi
[
• RED/YEL •
IAT S E N S O R
- GRN/BLK •
- RED/WHT •
- RED/WHT •
ECT S E N S O R !
• GRN/BLK -
(cont'd)
11-43
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
• WHT/GRN
To
SPARK
PLUG
• WHT/BLU
h^IL—
GRN/YEL
r
R O C K E R A R M OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
-BLU/BLK
i 24P
JUNCTION
! CONNECTOR
*1
*1:M/T
11-44
BRN/YEL
R O C K E R A R M OIL
P R E S S U R E SWITCH
AFS+
A28
• GRIM
• GRIM
• RED
• RED
A10
J
- BLK/WHT
s7
-vw—I
A/F SENSOR
( S E N S O R 1)
|
T
WHT
J
PCS
—
• BLK/WHT
, BLU
—
AFS-
IC101
BLK/YEL
r "
fT
BLK/YEL
III
• RED/YEL
ill«
*1:M/T
*5: USA models
(cont'd)
11-45
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
E C M / P C M Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
C14
-RED/YEL
ATFT
-WHT •
< •——GRN/BLK •
-WHT •
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SHA
SHIFT SOLENOID I
VALVE A
"=T
C5
-GRN/WHT'
SHB
ORN
j
SHIFT SOLENOID
\ I A I */C D
I
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
C4
SHD
-GRN/RED
1
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE D
C15
LSA
-RED/BLK
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
^ 1 -
-BRN/WHT
-BLK A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
> £ 1
LSC
u
-BLU/WHT-
A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
G101
-YEL/BLU
C19
NM
2
-WHT/RED
-GRN/BLK
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
-YEL/RED
-BLK/BLU
-GRN/WHT
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
*2:
11-46
A/T
* 1 : M/T
*2: A/T
*3: A/T
J*4: A/T
(5-position)
(7-position)
(cont'd)
11-47
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
D12
BRN
VCC3
D6
— i
t
PUR -
APSA
D10
BLK ?
SG3
E5
ORN ?
VCC4
D5
BLU/ORN •
APSB
-rrrm
PNK
APP S E N S O R A / B
1
a
C101
-WHT-
D13
SEFD
P14
SEDP
A
9
-BLU/RED
-BLU/BLK
• YEL/GRN
" WHT/RED •
10
—
GRN/BLK
14
—
-YEL/RED - J K
C
TPSB
U
- RED/BLK
~
s B L U ••
- GRN "
"3r
-BLK ^
r
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL MODULE
TP SENSOR
•GRN
-RED/BLK
•RED — —
-BLU
•YEL/RED •
-YEL
—
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
THROTTLE BODY
• LT BLU
-BLK
i
*7:
11-48
M/T
with cruise
control
r
CRUISE CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
—
- WHT/RED
15T
BLK/WHT
47
SECONDARY
SG4
ECT2
H02S ( S E N S O R 2)
^ 3
- LT B L U
ECTSENSOR2
-BLU
1
L:
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
«LT G R N / B L K
I T
ACS
•>
T o IMMOBILIZER UNIT
w To A / C P R E S S U R E
SWITCH
-BLU/WHT
PNK
-ORN
•ORN
—
• LT GRN -
• LT GRN -
-PNK
-PNK
—
—
FTP SENSOR
-LT GRN/RED •
- LT GRN/RED •
• LT GRN/RED •
-WHT
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
*8: With A / C
(cont'd)
11-49
Fuel and Emissions Systems
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
E C M / P C M Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
D A T A LINK
CONNECTOR
UNDER-DASH
S U B F U S E / R E L A Y
BOX
© N o . 33 IG COIL (15 A )
© N o . 32 D B W ( 1 5 A )
11-50
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION S W I T C H
pressed: closed
released; open
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
© No. 3 IG (SO A)
© No. 6 POWER WINDOW (40 A)
®
N o . 8 B A C K UP
(10
A)
® No. 9 SMALL LIGHT (30 A)
® No. 1 6 HORN, STOP (15 A)
® No. 1 BATTERY (80 A)
*5: USA models
* 6 : With cruise control
* 8 : With A/C
(cont'd)
11-51
:
uel and Emissions Systems
S f stem Description feont'
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
|~R~| ~H~| ~ Q ~ | [~V~j [ A E ] [ A D ] |~Z~] [ A B | [~AA| [ A C ]
EPS CONTROL
UNIT
UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y
© N o .
©No.
J
No.
BOX:
14IGPC15A)
2 3 L A F (10
A)
10 IG H A C ( 7 . 5
A)
® No. 3 IG METER (10 A)
© No. 11 I G FUEL PUMP {15 A)
© N o . 31 LAF (7.5 A)
1H "52
How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp {MIL) Indication
(In relation to Readiness Codes)
Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
Code
The vehicle has certain "readiness c o d e s " that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM
has been reset, these readiness codes are reset to
incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions
testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete.
If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may
fail the emission test, or the test cannot be finished.
NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
procedure.
• All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery is
disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
• Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
traffic may increase the drive t i m e needed to switch
the readiness code f r o m incomplete to complete.
• The readiness code will not switch to complete until
all the enable criteria are met.
If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
complete until you correct the f a u l t
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,
turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The MIL w i l l come on for 15—20 seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are set to complete.
If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are
not set to complete. To set readiness codes f r o m
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the
appropriate code.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the
OBD status in the DTC MENU w i t h the HDS (see page
11-9). This screen displays the code, the current data list
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness
testing.
9
Enable Criteria
• ECT at 158 T (70 °C) or more.
• Intake air temperature (IAT) at 20 T ( —7 °C) or more.
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) above 25 mph (40 km/h).
e
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link
connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS
CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
w i t h short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,
check for a Temporary DTC w i t h the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were
probably not met; repeat the procedure.
(cont'd)
11-53
Fuel and Emissions Systems
How to S e t Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
S f stem Monitor and Readiness Code
Air Fuel Ratio {A/F) Sensor Monitor and
Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery
Is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
procedure.
° AH readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
Enable Criteria
• Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
• Engine at idle.
• ECT sensor 1 and 2 between 176 °F (80 °C) and 212 °F
(100 ^C).
• MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 m m H g ) .
• Vehicle speed 0 m p h (0 km/h).
• I AT sensor between 32 °F (0 °C) and 212 T (100 <C).
Enable Criteria
ECT at 140 °F (60 °C) or more.
Procedure
1. Start the engine.
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
2. Start the engine.
3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the
EVAP TEST MENU.
• If the result is normal, readiness is complete.
• If the result is not normal, go to the next step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one
or more of the enable criteria were probably not
met; repeat the procedure.
2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
w i t h short periods of steady cruise. During the
drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
readiness code should switch f r o m incomplete to
complete.
3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU w i t h the
HDS.
• If the screen shows complete, readiness is
complete.
• If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the
enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST MENU. Check the ECT in the ALL DATA
LIST w i t h the HDS. If the ECT is less than 140 T
(60 °C), run the engine until it is more than 140 °F
(60 °C), then repeat the procedure.
11-54
Air Fuel Ratio {A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor
Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery
is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
Procedure
EGR Monitor and Readiness Code
NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
procedure.
• All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery is
disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The
readiness code should switch f r o m incomplete to
complete.
Enable Criteria
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,
check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC,
repeat the procedure.
Procedure
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code
• This readiness code is always set to available
because misfiring is continuously monitored.
• Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
• Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter
holds at its current value, if the throttle position
changes more than a predetermined value, or if
driving conditions fall outside the range of any
related enable criteria.
Fuel S f stem Monitor and Readiness Code
• This readiness code is always set to available
because the fuel system is continuously monitored
during closed loop operation.
• Monitoring pauses w h e n the catalytic converter,
EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
• Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes w h e n
the enable criteria is again being m e t
ECT at 176 T (80 °C) or more.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
2. Start the engine.
3. Drive at a steady speed w i t h the A/T in
D position or M/T in 4th gear, at 50—62 m p h (80—
100 km/h) or above for more than 10 seconds.
4. With the A/T in D position or M/T in 4th gear,
decelerate f r o m 62 m p h (100 km/h) or above by
completely releasing the throttle for at least
5 seconds. If the engine is stopped during this
procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again.
5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• If it is passed, readiness is complete.
• If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and
Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because
the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
11-55
PGM-FI S f stem
Component Location Index
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE (WAP) SENSOR
MANIFOLD
merit, page
11-192
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR
Replacement, page
11-195
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
( I A T ) SENSOR
Replacement, page
11-192
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
(USA models)
Replacement, page
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR
Replacement, page
11-195
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) (M/T)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 2
Replacement, page
Replacement, page
11-193
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 1
KNOCK SENSOR
Replacement, page
11-196
Replacement, page
INJECTORS
Replacement, page
11-56
11-190
11-193
11-196
11-197
RELAY 1
(FI MAIN)
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F)
SENSOR RELAY (LAF)
Circuit Troubleshooting,
page 1 1 - 1 7 4
11-57
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0107: M A P S e n s o r Circuit L o w Voltage
7. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
/ V
1
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
2
3
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
SG1
(GRN/WHT)
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or
less
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. •
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
N O — G o t o step 8.
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A21 and A24.
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or
less
indicated?
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1
2
Y E S — G o t o step9.
NO—Go t o step 7.
3 4 5 6
13 14 15 16
24
7
28
20 21
31
30
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
S G I
(GRN/WHT)
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor, then g o t o step 15.
N O — G o t o step 20.
11-58
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0107 is indicated,
check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step
1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go t o the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.
12. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
MAP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
MAP
(RED/GRN)
20. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
2 1 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0107
W i r e side of female
Is there
indicated?
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (A30) and the MAP sensor, then go t o step 15.
N O — G o t o step20.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
14. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-192).
15. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
17. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
18. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11-59
PGIVI-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0108; M A P S e n s o r C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t r e c o r d all freeze data
7. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more
indicated?
Y E S — G o to step 8.
NO—Go to step 19.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more
indicated?
8. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the MAP sensor 3P
connector.
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. •
9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
M A P S E N S O R 3P
CONNECTOR
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and No. 3 w i t h a jumper w i r e .
M A P S E N S O R 3P
1 2 3
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
SG1
(GRN/WHT)
C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female
terminals
2 3
MAP
(RED/GRN)
SGI
Is there about 5 V?
(GRN/WHT)
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
J U M P E R
WIRE
N O — G o t o step 10.
W i r e side of female
terminals
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
11-60
13. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3
to body ground with a j u m p e r wire.
MAP SENSOR 3 P
16. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and
A30 with a j u m p e r wire.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
CONNECTOR
1
1 2 3
I
2
3G1
23 24
(GRN/WHT)
JUMPER
WIRE
SG1
(GRN/WHT)
I5
3 | 4
/
10
13 14 15
6 |
16
/ /
JUMPER
W i r e side of female
14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A24 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1
10
I
3 | 4 | 5
2
/
6j
7
13 14 1 5 16
/ /
23 24
S G I
8
18
A
28
/
/
18
28
I
9
/
/
9
2 0 21
30 31
MAP
(RED/GRN)
WIRE
Wire side of female
terminals
| 8 |
7
/
/
(31P)
terminals
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
18. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more
indicated?
20 21
30 31
(GRN/WHT)
Y E S — G o t o step 26.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (A30) and the MAP sensor, then go t o step 2 1 .
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female
terminals
20. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-192).
Is there
continuity?
2 1 . Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S - G o t o step 26.
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
IMO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A24) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 2 1 .
23. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
11-61
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
24. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0108 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step
1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0108
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-62
D T C P0111: IAT S e n s o r Circuit R a n g e /
Performance Problem
12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information {see page 11-3).
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the IAT sensor.
Are the connections
and terminals
OK?
Does the IAT SENSOR
more?
change 61 °F (34 °C) or
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM.
NO—Go to step 13.
Y E S — G o to step 2.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 15.
14. Replace the IAT sensor (see page 11-192).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Remove the IAT sensor (see page 11-192).
16. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
3. A l l o w IAT sensor to cool to ambient temperature.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
4. Note the ambient temperature.
5. Connect the IAT sensor to the 2P connector, but do
not install the sensor onto the air cleaner.
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Note the value of the IAT SENSOR quickly in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
8. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR and the
ambient temperature.
Y E S - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0111 is indicated,
check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete I I
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR
(3 °C) or more?
differ
5.4 °F
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
NO—Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the IAT sensor f r o m the 2P connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the IAT sensor for
a f e w seconds. Do not apply the heat longer than a
f e w seconds or you will damage the sensor.
11. Connect the IAT sensor to the 2P connector, but do
not install the sensor onto the air cleaner.
11-63
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0112: IAT S e n s o r Circuit L o w Voltage
10. Check for continuity between IAT sensor 2P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
IAT S E N S O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
IAT
(RED/YEL)
Is about 356 °F (180 °C) or higher, or 0.08 V or
less
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. •
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the IAT
sensor and the ECM/PCM (B17), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
N O — G o t o step 18.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
12. Replace the IAT sensor (see page 11-192).
13. Reconnect all connectors.
Is about 356 °F (180 °C) or higher, or 0.08 V or
less
indicated?
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S — G o t o step7.
15. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
N O - G o t o step 11.
16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC o r DTC P0112 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-64
18. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0112
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0113: IAT S e n s o r Circuit High Voltage
8. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
N O T E : Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
9.
R e m o v e thejumper wire.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page
11-3).
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
1 0 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
11.
Measure voltage between IAT sensor 2P connector
terminal No. 1 a n dbody ground.
2. C h e c k t h e I A T S E N S O R in t h e D A T A L I S T w i t h t h e
HDS.
IAT S E N S O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R
Is about - 40 °F (-40
more
indicated?
°C) or less, or 4.92 V or
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 3.
IAT ( R E D / Y E L )
NO—Intermittent failure, s y s t e m isO Kat this time.
C h e c k for poor c o n n e c t i o n s or loose terminals at
t h e IAT s e n s o r a n d t h e ECM/PCM. •
3. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
Wire side of female
terminals
4. D i s c o n n e c t t h e I A T s e n s o r 2 P c o n n e c t o r .
Is there about 5 V?
5. C o n n e c t I A T s e n s o r 2 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 1
and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
N O — G o t o step 17.
IAT SENSOR 2 P CONNECTOR
12. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h O F F .
13. J u m p t h e S C S line with t h e H D S .
1 2
IAT
(RED/YEL)
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
14.
D i s c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r A (31P).
15. C o n n e c t I A T s e n s o r 2P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 2 t o
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female
terminals
body ground with a jumper wire.
IAT S E N S O R 2 P C O N N E C T O R
6. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( I I ) .
1 2
7.
C h e c k the I A T S E N S O R in t h e D A T A L I S T with t h e
SG2
HDS.
(GRN/BLK)
Is about -40°F
(-40
more
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 8.
N O — G o t o s t e p 18.
11-66
°C) or less, or 4.92 V or
J U M P E R
Wire side of female
WIRE
terminals
16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A23 and body ground.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Replace the IAT sensor (see page 11-192).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1
10
I2 I3 I
8 | 9
4 I 56 I 7
20 21
13 14 15 16 / 18
30
23 24
28
31
/ /
/
/
//
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
20. Reconnect all connectors.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Wire side of female
terminals
Are any Temporary
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 25.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (A23) and the IAT sensor, then go t o step 20.
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0113 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
17. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B17 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
_
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
I
/
2 3 4 | 5
10 11 12 13
8
17 18
21
/
/
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
/
6
/
/16
/ /
I IAT (RED/YEL)
X )
Wire side of female
Is DTC P0113
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (B17) and the IAT sensor, then go to step 20.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—Go to step 25.
11-67
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0116: E C T S e n s o r 1 Circuit R a n g e /
Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Does ECT SENSOR
more?
1 change
18 °F (10 °C) or
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. •
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 176 °F (80 °C) or more, or 0.78 V or less
indicated?
NO—Go to step 11.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193).
Y E S — G o to step 6.
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
N O — G o t o step 3.
14. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
15. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Does ECT SENSOR
more?
1 change
18 °F (10 °C) or
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. •
N O — G o t o step 11.
6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-68
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0116 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •
DTC P0117: ECT S e n s o r 1 Circuit L o w V o l t a g e
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about
less
356
°F (180
°C) or higher,
or 0.08
ECT1 (RED/WHT)
V or
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
Wire side of female
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. •
Is there
terminals
continuity?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between ECT sensor
1 and the ECM/PCM (B8), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
N O — G o t o step 18.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193).
13. Reconnect all connectors.
Is about
less
356
°F (180
°C) or higher,
or 0.08
indicated?
V or
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S - G o t o step 7.
15. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 11.
16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
11-268).
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Are any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0117 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
(cont'd)
11-69
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18, Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0117
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-70
DTC P0118: ECT S e n s o r 1 Circuit H i g h
Voltage
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Remove the jumper wire.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about -40 °F (-40
more
indicated?
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P
connector terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d .
ECT S E N S O R 1 2P C O N N E C T O R
°C) or less, or 4.92 V or
1 2
ECT1
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
(RED/WHT)
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. •
Wire side of female
terminals
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
N O — G o t o step 17.
ECT S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
1 2
SG2
ECT1
(RED/WHT)
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
(GRN/BLK)
JUMPER
WIRE
15. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 2
to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
ECT S E N S O R 1 2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female
terminals
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about -40°F
(-40
more
indicated?
1 2
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
JUMPER
WIRE
°C) or less, or 4.92 V or
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 8.
N O — G o t o step 18.
(cont'd)
11-71
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A23 and body ground.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1
10
2 | 3 | 4 | 5
/
6
1 3 14 15 16
//
23 24
S G 2
I7
/
| 8 | 9
18
/
28
/
20. Reconnect all connectors.
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2 0 21
A
3 0 31
(GRN/BLK)
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Wire
side
of f e m a l e
terminals
Are any Temporary
Is there
continuity?
YES—Go to step 25.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (A23) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 20.
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0118 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
17. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B8 and body g r o u n d .
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B (24P)
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
XUI3J4|5.
/
/
|6
/
/ 16
21
/ // /
10 11 12 1 3
8
17 18
/
E C T 1 (RED/WHT)
Is DTC P0118
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (B8) and ECT sensor 1, then go t o step 20.
N O — G o t o step25.
11-72
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. M
D T C P0125: E C T S e n s o r 1 Malfunction/Slow
Response
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193).
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or
more.
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 64 °F ( -18
indicated?
°C) or less, or 4.45 V or more
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
14. A l l o w the engine t o cool to ambient temperature.
15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 20 minutes.
16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
Is DTC P0125
indicated?
NO—Go to step 3.
3. A l l o w the engine t o cool to 104 °F (40 °C) or less.
4. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
5. Start the engine, and let it idle.
6. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
68 °F (20 °C) or more f r o m the recorded
temperature.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0125 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 17.
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0125 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
8. Compare ECT SENSOR 2 and the recorded
temperature.
Did ECT SENSOR
2 change 14 °F (8 °C) or
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 16, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 16, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
more?
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
14 and recheck.
NO—Check the thermostat (see page 10-4). If the
thermostat is OK, go to step 9. If you had t o replace
the thermostat, go t o step 11.
11-73
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0128: C o o l i n g S y s t e m M a l f u n c t i o n
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
Did temperature
rise 14 °F (8 °C) or
more?
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. •
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
NO—Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go
to step 12.
3. Turn the blower switch OFF.
4. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
Is it
OFF?
YES—Goto step 5.
14. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
between 21 ° F ( - - 6 C ) a n d 104°F(40 °C).
NO—Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go t o step
5.
15. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
<
5. Check the radiator fan operation.
Does the radiator
fan keep
16. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15—75 mph
(24—120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
running?
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YES—Check the radiator fan circuit (see page
10-17), and the radiator fan relay (see page 22-53).
If the circuits and the relay is OK, go to step 19.
Is DTC P0128
indicated?
YES—Check the cooling system, then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 6.
6. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
104 °F (40 °C) or less.
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
N O - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0128 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 18.
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Does the screen
9. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
68 °F (20 X ) or more f r o m the recorded
temperature.
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 17, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
10. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
indicate
PASSED?
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check the
cooling system, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o step 14 and
recheck.
11-74
19. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7),
20. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
between 21 °F ( - 6 °C) and 104 °F (40 °C).
21. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
22. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15—75 m p h
• (24—120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0128
indicated?
YES—Check f o r poor connections or loose
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute
a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go
to step 20. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o
step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0128 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 24.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 23, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go t o step 20. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 20 and recheck.
POSVi-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0133: A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1)
M a l f u n c t i o n / S l o w Response
10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
NOTE:
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0139 is stored at the same time as DTC P0133,
troubleshoot DTC P0139 first, then recheck for DTC
P0133.
11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n .
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 3rd or 4th gear)
• Drive the vehicle at 25 m p h (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
2 6 - 8 1 m p h ( 4 1 - 1 3 0 km/h).
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 3 and recheck.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-194).
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
11-76
12. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °Q
• A/T in D position (M/T in 3rd or 4th gear)
• Drive the vehicle at 25 m p h (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
2 6 - 8 1 mph ( 4 1 - 1 3 0 km/h).
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0133
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM, then go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0133 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S —If there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 13, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 13, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 11 and recheck.
DTC P0134: A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) Heater
System Malfunction
NOTE:
• Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0135 is stored at the same time as DTC P0134,
troubleshoot DTC P0135 f i r s t then recheck for DTC
P0134.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes o n .
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0134 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 10, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 10, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 8 and recheck.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC
P0134
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and
the ECM/PCM. •
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-194).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0134
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F
sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0134 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 11.
11-77
PGM-FI S f stein
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0135: A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) H e a t e r
Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n
7. Remove the A/F sensor relay (A).
NOTE; Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0135
indicated?
8. Check the A/F sensor relay (see page 22-53).
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
Is the A/F sensor
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and
the ECM/PCM. •
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
6. Check these fuses:
• No. 23 LAF (10 A) fuse in under-dash fuse/relay
box.
• No. 31 LAF (7.5 A) fuse in under-dash fuse/relay
box.
Y E S — G o t o step 24.
OK?
NO—Replace the A/F sensor relay, then go to step
33.
9. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Are any of the above fuses
relay
10. At the sensor side, measure resistance between
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 3
and No. 4.
A / F S E N S O R ( S E N S O R 1) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
blown?
+B
1 2
-3 4-
AFSHTC
N O — G o t o step 7.
Terminal side of male
Is there 2.0—2.6
Q at room
Y E S — G o t o step 11.
NO—Go t o step 32.
11-78
terminals
temperature?
11. At the sensor side, check for continuity between
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No, 2
and No, 3, and between terminals No. 2 and No. 4
individually.
15. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4 P CONNECTOR
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4 P CONNECTOR
1 2
3
AFS —
4
AFSHTC
(BLK/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
AFSHTC
W i r e side of female
Terminal side of male
terminals
terminals
16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A10 and body ground.
Is there
continuity?
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
Y E S — G o to step 32.
NO—Goto step 12.
1 2 |3 4 I 5 6 |7
10
13 14 15 16
18
/ 23 24
2S
/ AFSHTC .
/
12. Jump the S C S line with the HDS.
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
/ /
A /
A /
8 I 9
20 21
'30 31
(BLK/WHT)
14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A10 and body ground.
Wire side of female terminals
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
Is there
1 | 2 |
/
10
s
3 !4 |5 6
13 14 15 16
//
23 24
AFSHTC
(BLK/WHT)
/
/
Wire side of female
Is there
8
| 7
18
28
/
/
continuity
?
9
20 21
30 31
Y E S — G o t o step 17.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the E C M /
PCM (A10) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 33.
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — R e p a i r short in the wire between the E C M /
PCM (A10) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 33.
NO—Goto step 15.
(cont'd)
11-79
PGIVS-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
1 7 . Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
terminal No. 3 t o body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
20. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E8 and A/F sensor relay 4P connector
terminal No. 3.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4 P CONNECTOR
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E (31P)
AFSHTCR (PNK/BLK)
2 | 3 4 I 5 6 |7
8 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25 26
27 28 29 30
1
1 2
3
4
JUMPER
/
/
+ B (BLU)
/
Wire side of female terminals
WIRE
A / F S E N S O R RELAY 4 P CONNECTOR
IAFSHTCR (PNK/BLK)
W i r e side of female terminals
3
2
18. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
A/F SENSOR RELAY 4 P CONNECTOR
M
4
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 2 1 .
+B (WHT)
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E8) and the A/F sensor relay, then go to
step 33.
21. Measure voltage between A/F sensor relay 4P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
A / F S E N S O R RELAY 4 P CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
X
Y E S — G o t o step 19.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the A/F sensor relay, then go
to step 33.
+ B (WHT/RED)
19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 22.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/F
sensor relay and the No. 23 LAF (10 A) fuse or the
No. 9 SMALL LIGHT (30 A) fuse, then go t o step 33.
11-80
27. Check for continuity between A/F senor (Sensor 1)
4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
23. Measure voltage between A/F sensor relay 4P
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
A/F S E N S O R (SENSOR
1) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
A / F S E N S O R RELAY 4P C O N N E C T O R
2E
IG1
+B
(BLU)
(PNK)
Wire side of female
Terminal side of female
terminals
Is there
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 39.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/F
sensor relay and the No. 31 LAF (7.5 A) fuse, then
go to step 33.
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the
EVAP canister vent shut valve. Also replace the
No. 23 LAF (10 A) fuse, then go t o step 33.
N O — G o t o step 28.
24. Remove the A/F sensor relay (A).
25. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
26. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
(cont'd)
11-81
PGSVS-FS S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Disconnect the 14P connector f r o m the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
31. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay 4P
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
29. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay 4P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
A / F S E N S O R R E L A Y 4P
A / F S E N S O R R E L A Y 4P
CONNECTOR
C O N N E C T O R
3
i 1G1 ( P N K )
2
4
+ B
(WHT/RED)
Terminal side of female
Terminal side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the A/F
sensor relay and the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Also replace the No. 23 LAF (10 A) fuse, then go t o
step 33.
NO—Go to step 30.
30. Remove the No. 31 LAF (7.5 A) fuse f r o m underdash fuse/relay box.
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the A/F
sensor relay and the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Also replace the No. 31 LAF (7.5 A) fuse, then go t o
step 33.
NO—Replace the dashboard wire harness, then go
to step 33.
32. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1} (see page
11-194).
33. Reconnect all connectors.
34. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
35. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
36. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0135
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F
sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0135 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 38.
11-82
38. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there were no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 37, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
indicated in step 37, go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.•
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 36 and recheck.
39. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
42. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0135 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED
?
Y E S — l f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs were indicated in step 4 1 , go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.•
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM.
If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 40.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, let the engine
idle until a result comes o n .
40. Start the engine.
41. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0135
indicated?
Y E S — C h e c k for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F
sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 40. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—Go t o step 42.
11-83
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0137: Secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2)
Circuit Low Voltage
12. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
4P C O N N E C T O R
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
S H 0 2 S
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
1
2
3
4
(WHT/RED)
-
3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes o n .
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Terminal side of male
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or
terminals
less?
Y E S — G o to step 5.
Is there
continuity?
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/
PCM.B
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E20) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
then go to step 15.
N O — G o t o step 23.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
14. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-194).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Reconnect all connectors.
8. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or
less?
17. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
NO—Go to step 13.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
11-84
18. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
19. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
20. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
• Engine speed at 1,500—3,000 r p m
• Drive 1 minute or more
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0137
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0137 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 22.
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0137
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 24. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0137 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 27.
27. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0137 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 2 1 , troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 2 1 , go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go t o
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 19 and
recheck.
indicated?
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 26, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 24. If the ECM/
PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 24 and recheck.
23. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
24. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
25. Test-drive under these conditions:
•
•
•
•
ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
Engine speed at 1,500—3,000 r p m
Drive 1 minute or more
11-85
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0138: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit High Voltage
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or
more?
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
N O — G o t o step 19.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes o n .
11. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector.
4. Check the H 0 2 S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or
more?
Y E S — G o to step 5.
12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No. 2 t o body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
4P C O N N E C T O R
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/
PCM.B
S H 0 2 S
1
2
3
4
(WHT/RED)
-
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
J U M P E R
WIRE
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
Terminal side of male
terminals
7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
4P C O N N E C T O R
J U M P E R
14. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or
WIRE
more?
Y E S - G o t o step 15.
S G 4 (PNK)
1
2
3
4
S H 0 2 S
Terminal side of male
11-86
(WHT/RED)
terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E4) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then
g o t o step 2 1 .
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Test-drive under these conditions:
16. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
17. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
18. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E20 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
8 9
1 |2 | 3 4 I 5 6 |7
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28 29 3 0
25 26
12
/22 11 24
/
/
SH02S
(WHT/RED)
Wire side of female
/
terminals
•
•
•
•
ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
Engine speed at 1,500—3,000 r p m
Drive 1 minute or more
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0138
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the ECM/PCM, then go step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0138 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 28.
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen
Is there
indicated?
indicate
PASSED?
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 29.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E20) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
then go to step 21.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
20. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-194).
21. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 27, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 27, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go t o step 25 and
recheck.
23. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
29. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
24. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
30. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
25. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
(cont'd)
11-87
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
3 1 . Test-drive under these conditions:
DTC P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Slow
Response
•
•
•
•
ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
Engine speed at 1,500—3,000 r p m
Drive 1 minute or more
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0138
indicated?
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go t o step 30. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0138 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 33.
33. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0138 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
•
•
•
•
ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
Vehicle speed at 35 m p h (56 km/h) or more
Drive about 50 seconds
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0139 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
Does
the screen
indicate
the screen
indicate
FAILED?
PASSED?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
Y E S - l f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 32, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
• connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11 -7), then go t o step 30. If the ECM/
PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 30 and recheck.
11-88
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this t i m e . Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 3 and recheck.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-194).
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
DTC P0141: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Heater Circuit Malfunction
9. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (ll).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
12. Test-drive under these conditions;
3. Start the engine.
•
•
•
•
ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
Vehicle speed at 35 m p h (56 km/h) or more
Drive about 50 seconds
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0139
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0141
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/
PCM.H
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0139 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
6. Check the No. 3 IG METER (10 A) fuse in the underdash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse
OK?
YES—Goto step 7.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 13, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 13, g o t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—Repair short in the wire between the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the No. 3 IG
METER (10 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 3 IG
METER (10 A) fuse, then go to step 23.
7. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go t o
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go t o step 11 and
recheck.
(cont'd)
11-89
PGSVS-FS S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. A t the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, measure
resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector terminals No, 3 and No. 4.
11. Measure voltage between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2)
4 P CONNECTOR
SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2)
4 P CONNECTOR
S 0 2 S H T C
1 2
3 4
1
2
3
4
IG1
(BLK/WHT)
-
Terminal side of male
Wire side of female
terminals
terminals
Is there
Is there
(YEL)
5.4— 7.3 Q at room
battery
voltage?
temperature?
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
N O — G o t o step 16.
N O — G o t o step 22.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. A t the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, check for
continuity between body ground and secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and
No. 4 individually.
SECONDARY H 0 2 S (SENSOR 2)
4 P CONNECTOR
13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E21 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
1 2
3 4
1
2 3
11 12
22
24
/
/
/
4 | 5 6 |7
8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28 29 30 /
25 26
S02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 22.
Is there
continuity?
N O — G o t o step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E21) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
then go t o step 23.
NO—Go to step 29.
11-90
16. Measure voltage between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E21 and body ground.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E
SECONDARY
4P
H02S
(31P)
(SENSOR 2)
CONNECTOR
1
1
2
3
4
/
22
IG1 ( Y E L )
2
3
11 1 2
/
24
y
4 | 5
6 | 7
8
9
1 4 1 5 16 1 7 18 19 2 0 21
25 26
27 28 29 30
/
/
S02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
Wire side of female
terminals
Terminal side of male terminals
Is there
Is there
battery
continuity?
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 29.
Y E S — G o t o step 17.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the No. 3 METER
(10 A) fuse, then go t o step 23.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E21) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
, then go t o step 23.
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
22. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-194).
18. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
23. Reconnect all connectors.
19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No. 3 t o body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
25. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2)
4P
26. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
CONNECTOR
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
S 0 2 S H T C
1
2
3
4
(BLK/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Terminal side of male terminals
Is DTC
P0141
indicated?
Y E S — I f DTC P0141 is indicated, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step
1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0141 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 28.
(cont'd)
11-91
PGIWI-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS indicate.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 27, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 27, go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 26 and recheck.
29. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
30. Start the engine.
31. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0141
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 30. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0141 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 32.
11-92
32. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0141 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 3 1 , go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting, fl
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 30. If the ECM/
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, let the engine idle until
a result comes o n .
D T C P0171: Fuel S y s t e m T o o Lean
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
D T C P0172: Fuel S y s t e m T o o Rich
3. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the
same time as DTC P0171 and/or P0172, troubleshoot
those DTCs f i r s t then recheck for DTC P0171 and/or
P0172.
4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0133, P1157, P1172, P2195, P2238, P2252, P2A00: Air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1)
P0134, P0135: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1)
heater
P0137, P0138, P0139, P2270, P2271: Secondary H02S
(Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: Exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) system
P0443, P0496: EVAP canister purge valve
P2279: Intake air leakage
5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral), until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
6. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 5th gear)
• Drive at a steady speed between 15—75 m p h
( 2 4 - 1 2 0 km/h)
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take up to
80 minutes of test driving t o set. Using the HDS,
monitor the long term fuel t r i m (LT FUEL TRIM) or
the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE). If the
long term fuel trim/air fuel feed back average stays
within 0.80—1.25, there is no problem at this time.
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11 -283).
Is the fuel pressure
OK?
YES—Check the engine valve clearances, and
adjust if necessary (see page 6-8). If the valve
clearances are OK, replace the injectors (see page
11-190), then go to step 2.
Y E S - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0171 or P0172 is
indicated, go to step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Check these items:
• If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
pressure regulator (see page 11-298), then go t o
step 2.
• If the pressure is too low, check the fuel p u m p
and the fuel feed line, then go to step 2.
11-93
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0300: R a n d o m Misfire and A n y
Combination of the Following:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
D T C P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
D T C P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
D T C P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Special Tools Required
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
•A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070300
• A / T pressure hose 07406-0020201
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
•A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
•Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5A0200
NOTE:
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If the misfire is frequent enough t o trigger detection
of increased emissions during t w o consecutive
driving cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300
(and some of the combination of P0301 through
P0304) w i l l be stored.
• If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the
catalyst, the MIL will flash whenever the misfire
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some of the combination
of P0301 through P0304) will be stored. W h e n the
misfire stops, the MIL will remain on.
• Troubleshoot the f o l l o w i n g DTCs first if any of t h e m
were stored along w i t h the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
P0365, P0369: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
P0506, P507: Idle control system
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0401, P0404, P0416, P2413: Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system
Y E S - G o t o step 9.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, and recheck.
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2 MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
CYL3
misfire
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
N O — G o t o step 6.
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECTSENSOR 1
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
11-94
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2 MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or
CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
CYL3
misfire
Is the fuel
pressure
OK?
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
IMO—
YES—Goto step 9.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.B
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
pressure regulator (see page 11-298), then go t o
step 20.
• If the pressure is too low, check the fuel level, the
fuel p u m p , the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter. If
they are OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator
(see page 11-298), then go t o step 20.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Check the fuel quality.
Is the quality
14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-283).
good?
16. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and
install the special tools as s h o w n , then attach the
rocker arm oil pressure switch to the pressure
gauge adapter (B).
YES—Goto step 11.
NO—Drain the tank and fill it w i t h known-good fuel,
then go to step 20.
NOTE: Install the switch in the reverse order of
removal w i t h a new O-ring.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-23). If the spark
plugs are fouled or w o r n , replace t h e m .
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECT SENSOR 1
13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does
CYL1
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or
CYL4
CYL2
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE
show
CYL3
misfire
counts?
Y E S — G o t o step 14.
N O — G o t o step 20.
17. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
18. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on.
(cont'd)
11-95
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Check the oil pressure at engine-speeds of 1,000
and 2,000 rpm. Keep the test t i m e as short as
possible (less than 1 minute) because the engine is
running without load.
Is the oil pressure
7 psi)?
below 49 kPa (0.5
kgf/crrf,
YES—Check for air in the fuel line, then go to step
20.
NO—Inspect the VTEC system, then go to step 2 1 .
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2 1 . Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
22. Clear the CKP pattern w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• RELTP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
• ECT SENSOR 1
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTC w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0300, P0301,
indicated?
P0302,
P0303, or
P0304
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
ECM/PCM, then g o t o troubleshooting DTC P0301,
P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-97).
N O - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0300, P0301,
P0302, P0303, or P0304 is not indicated, or if any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o
step 27.
11-96
27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 26, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 26, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 25 and
recheck.
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
DTC P03O2: N o . 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
•
•
•
•
•
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECT SENSOR 1
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the screen
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in Park
or neutral).
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
indicate
FAILED?
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, g o t o step 5. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, and recheck.
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2 MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2 MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
CYL3
misfire
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check the fuel and ignition system circuit
connections for loose wires or poor connections. •
CYL3
misfire
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
N O — G o t o step 6.
(cont'd)
11-97
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-3).
11. Start the engine, and listen for a clicking sound at
the injector of the problem cylinder.
Does the injector
15. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2 MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
CYL3
misfire
click?
Y E S — G o to step 16.
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
N O — G o t o step 43.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Exchange the ignition coil f r o m the problem
cylinder w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
14. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECT SENSOR 1
NO—Intermittent misfire due to poor contact at the
ignition coil connector (no misfire at this time).
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ignition coil. •
16. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder
ignition coil was
exchanged?
where
the
YES—Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page
4-21), then go to step 62.
NO—Go to step 17.
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18. Exchange the spark plug f r o m the problem cylinder
w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
19. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
11-98
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
RELTP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECT SENSOR 1
20. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes with the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2 MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or
CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
CYL3
misfire
26. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2
MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or
CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
CYL3
misfire
YES—Goto step21.
Y E S — G o to step 27.
NO—Intermittent misfire due t o spark plug fouling
(no misfire at this time). •
NO—Intermittent misfire due t o bad contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the
injector. •
21. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does
the misfire
spark
plug
occur
was
in the cylinder
where
the
YES—Replace the faulty spark plug, then go t o step
62.
N O ™ G o t o step 22.
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
23. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder
w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
24. Start the engine, and let it idle 2 minutes.
25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
27. Determine w h i c h cylinder had the misfire.
exchanged?
Does the misfire
injector
was
occur in the cylinder
exchanged?
where
the
YES—Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-190),
then go t o step 62.
NO—Go t o step 28.
28. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
29. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector f r o m the
problem cylinder.
30. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ENGINE S P E E D
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECT SENSOR 1
(cont'd)
11-99
PGSVI-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
31. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
IGNITION COIL 3 P CONNECTOR
IG
(BLK/WHT)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
battery
34. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
35. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
36. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
37. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
ECM/PCM
TERMINAL
A16
A15
A14
A13
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
WIRE
COLOR
VVHT
WHT/GRN
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLU
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
voltage?
1GPLS4
(WHT/BLU)
Y E S — G o t o step32.
1 2
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ignition
coil and the No. 33 IG COIL (15 A) fuse, then go to
step 62.
3
IGPLS1
4
5
13 1 4 1 5
6~TT|
16
23 24
32. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(WHT)
[J] 9
1 8 / 2 0 21
28[/|30|31
IGPLS3
IGPLS2
(WHT/BLK)
(WHT/GRN)
33. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Wire side of female
IGNITION
COIL 3P
1
CONNECTOR
GND
(BLK)
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM and the ignition coil, then go to step 62.
NO—Go t o step 38.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 34.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ignition
coil and G101, then go to step 62.
11-100
terminals
38. Connect appropriate ignition coil 3P connector
terminal No. 1 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e
(see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o to step 40.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM and the ignition coil, then go to step 62.
WIRE
COLOR
WHT
WHT/GRN
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLU
40. Reconnect the ignition coil 3P connector and ECM/
PCM connector A (31P).
4 1 . Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
test.
IGNITION COIL 3 P CONNECTOR
Did the engine pass both
tests?
IGPLS
Y E S — G o to step 42.
JUMPER WIRE
NO—Repair the engine, then go t o step 62.
42. Do the VTEC rocker arms test (see page 6-7).
Did the VTEC
Wire side of female
rocker arms pass the
test?
terminals
Y E S - G o t o step 7 1 .
39. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
table).
NO—Repair the VTEC rocker a r m , then go to step
62.
43. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
IGPLS4
WIRE
COLOR
WHT
WHT/GRN
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLU
ECM/PCM
TERMINAL
A16
A15
A14
A13
44. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
45. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
46. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(31P)
IGPLS1 (WHT)
(WHT/BLU)
1
3 4 5 6
13 14 15
23 24
2
18/
20 21
30 31
IGPLS2
(WHT/GRN)
IGPLS3
(WHT/BLK)
7
u)(u
Wire side of female
terminals
(cont'd)
11-101
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
47. Measure voltage between body ground and the
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
DTC
ECM/PCM
TERMINAL
P0301
B5
P0302
B4
B3
B2
P0303
P0304
51. Measure voltage between injector 2 P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground.
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
IGP
(YEL/BLK)
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
INJ3 (BLU)
INJ2 (RED)
INJ4 ( Y E L )
INJ1
(BRN)
Wire side of female terminals
17 18
10 11 12 13
21
16
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 52.
(x)(x)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 56.
N O — G o t o step 48.
48. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
49. Disconnect the injector 2 P connector f r o m the
problem cylinder.
50. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-102
NO—Repair open in the wire between the injector
and PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN), then go t o step
62.
52. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
53. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
ECM/PCM
TERMINAL
B5
B4
B3
B2
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
INJ3 (BLU)
INJ4 (YEL)
54. Connect appropriate injector 2P connector terminal
No. 2 t o body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ2 (RED)
INJ1
(BRN)
1 2
3 4 5
10 11 12 13
17 18
21
INJ
2
16
J U M P E R
Wire side of female
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
terminals
continuity?
YES—-Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM and the injector, then go to step 62.
N O — G o t o step 54.
WIRE
55. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
ECM/PCM
TERMINAL
B5
B4
B3
B2
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
INJ3 (BLU)
INJ4 (YEL)
17
INJ2 (RED)
INJ1
(BRN)
10 11 12 13
21
(0)(Q)
Wire side of female
terminals
(cont'd)
11-103
PGSVI-FS S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Is there
continuity?
61. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
YES—Goto step 56.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM and the injector, then go to step 62.
56. Measure resistance between injector 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
I N J E C T O R 2P
C O N N E C T O R
Does CYL1 MISFIRE,
CYL2 MISFIRE,
MISFIRE,
and/or CYL4 MISFIRE
show
counts?
CYL3
misfire
Y E S — G o t o step 7 1 .
NO—Replace the original injector (see page 11-190),
then go to step 62.
62. Reconnect all connectors.
63. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
64. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
65. Clear the CKP pattern w i t h the HDS.
Terminal side of male
terminals
66. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Is there 10- 13 Q?
67. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
YES—Goto step 57.
68. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
NO—Replace the injector (see page 11-190), then
go to step 62.
57. Exchange a known-good injector f r o m another
cylinder w i t h the one f r o m the problem cylinder.
58. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
59. Start the engine, and let it idle 2 minutes.
60. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
RELTP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECTSENSOR 1
11-104
•
•
•
•
•
ENGINE SPEED
VSS
REL TP SENSOR
CLV (calculated load value)
ECTSENSOR 1
69. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0301,
indicated?
P0302, P0303,
or
P0304
YES—-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to troubleshooting DTC P0300,
P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-94).
N O - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 is not indicated, or if any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to step
70.
70. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 69, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 69, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. H
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go t o step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 68 and
recheck.
7 1 . Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
72. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
73. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0301, P0302,
indicated?
P0303, or
P0304
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute
a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then g o
to step 72. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o
step 1.
N O - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 is not indicated, or if any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o step
74.
74. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f t h e ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 73, g o t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go t o step 72. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes o n . If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go t o
step 72 and recheck.
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
• ECTSENSOR 1
11-105
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0325: Knock S e n s o r Circuit Malfunction
Is there
continuity?
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
YES—Repair short in the wire between the E C M /
PCM (A1) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
N O — G o t o step 11.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Connect the knock sensor 1P connector terminal t o
body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
KNOCK SENSOR 1P
CONNECTOR
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
1
4. Hold the engine speed at 3,000—4,000 rpm for at
least 10 seconds.
KS (RED/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0325
indicated?
YES—Goto step6.
Wire side of female terminals
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the knock sensor and the ECM/PCM. •
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A1 and body ground.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
KS (RED/BLU)
1
1
1 |2 |3 |4 | 5 6 | 7
10
13 14 15 16
18
'23 24
28
7 . J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
8. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector.
/
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
/ /
//
A /
A /
8 | 9
20 21
30 31
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A1 and body ground.
Wire side of female terminals
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
KS
(RED/BLU)
I
1
10
i
2
3 |4 | 5 6|7
13 14 15 16
18
28
23 24
/ /
// / /
8 9
20 21
'30 31
St
Wire side of female terminals
11-106
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A1) and the knock sensor, then g o t o step 14.
13. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-196).
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
14. Reconnect all connectors.
Is DTC P0325
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a k n o w n good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 22.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
16. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
18. Hold the engine speed at 3,000—4,000 r p m f o r at
indicated?
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0325 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
. are indicated, go t o step 24. .
least 10 seconds.
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0325
indicated?
Does
Y E S — G o t o step 2 1 .
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0325 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 20.
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the.
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 19, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 19, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 23, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED,'go to step 22 and recheck.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 17 and
recheck.
21. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
22. Hold the engine speed between 3,000—4,000 rpm
for at least 10 seconds.
11-107
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0335: C K P S e n s o r No S i g n a l
9.
M e a s u r e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n C K P s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r
terminal No.2 a n d body ground.
N O T E : Before y o u troubleshoot, r e c o r d allfreeze data
and any on-board snapshot, a n d review the general
troubleshooting information (see page
CKP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
11-3).
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( I I ) .
2. C l e a r t h e D T C w i t h t h e H D S .
CKP
(BLU)
3. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e .
4. C h e c k f o r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
Is DTC
P0335
indicated?
Wire side o f female
terminals
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 5.
Is there about 5 V?
NO—-Intermittent failure, s y s t e m i s O Kat this t i m e .
Y E S - G o t o step 10.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the C K P s e n s o r a n dthe E C M / P C M . •
NO—Go to step 11.
5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
10.
6. D i s c o n n e c t t h e C K P s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r .
7. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
M e a s u r e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n C K P s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r
t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 a n d N o . 3.
CKP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
8. M e a s u r e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n C K P s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r
terminal No. 1 a n d body ground.
1
CKP SENSOR 3 P CONNECTOR
IGP
2 3
IGP
(YEL/BLK)
LG
(BRN/YEL)
(YEL/BLK)
W i r e side o f female
Is there battery
Wire side o f female
terminals
terminals
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 17.
NO—Repair o p e n in the w i r e b e t w e e n t h e C K P
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
N O — R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e C K P
s e n s o r a n d P G M - F I m a i n relay 1 (FlM A I N ) , t h e n g o
to s t e p 19.
11-108
s e n s o r a n d G 1 0 1 , then g oto step 19.
1 6 . Check f o r continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A7 and body ground.
1 1 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
(31P)
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A7 and body ground.
E C M / P C M
/
CONNECTOR A (31P)
1 |2 3 |4 | 5 6 ( 7 ,
10
18
13 14 15 16
28
23 24
/
1 | 2 | 3 [4 | 5
10,
13 14 15 16
23 24
//
8 I 9
20 21
'30 31
/ /
/
/
//
/
/
Wire side of female
Is there
18
28
/
/
8 I 9
20 21
30 31
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 26.
Wire side of female
terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A7) and the CKP sensor, then go t o step 19.
Is there
continuity?
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A7) and the CKP sensor, then go t o step 19.
18. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-195).
NO—Go to step 15.
19. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 to
body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
21. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
C K P S E N S O R 3P
CONNECTOR
22. Clear the CKP pattern w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
CKP (BLU)
J U M P E R
24. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
WIRE
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
Wire side of female
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
terminals
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0335 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
(cont'd)
11-109
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
26. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
27. Check f o r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0335
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-110
D T C P0339: C K P S e n s o r Circuit Intermittent
Interruption
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
8. Remove the cam chain case (see page 6-12), and
check for damage on the CKP sensor pulse plate.
Is the pulse plate
damaged?
YES—Replace the CKP sensor pulse plate (see page
6-19), then go t o step 11.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
N O — G o t o step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.
10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-195).
4. Check the CKP NOISE count in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
Are 0 counts
indicated?
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
YES—Goto step 7.
13. Clear the CKP pattern w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 5.
14. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
15. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
16. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
6. Check the CKP NOISE count in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
Are 0 counts
indicated?
YES—Goto step7.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM. •
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0339 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step
1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals
at these locations:
•
•
•
•
CKP sensor
ECM/PCM
Engine ground
Body ground
Are the connections
and terminals
OK?
YES—Goto step8.
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go t o
step 11.
11-111
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0365: C M P S e n s o r No S i g n a l
9. M e a s u r e voltage b e t w e e n C M P s e n s o r 3 P
connector terminal No. 1and body ground.
N O T E : B e f o r e you troubleshoot record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, a n d review the general
CMP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i n f o r m a t i o n ( s e e p a g e 11-3).
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
2. C l e a r t h e D T C w i t h t h e H D S .
CMP
(GRN)
3. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e .
4.
C h e c k for T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s with the H D S .
Is DTC
P0365
indicated?
Wire side o f female
terminals
YES—Goto step5.
Is there
about 5 V?
NO—Intermittent failure, s y s t e m is O K atthis time.
C h e c k for poor c o n n e c t i o n s o r loose terminals at
Y E S — G o t o step10.
t h e C M P s e n s o r a n d t h e ECM/PCM. •
N O — G o t o step11.
5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
1 0 . M e a s u r e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n C M P s e n s o r 3P
6.
D i s c o n n e c t t h e C M P s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r .
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
7 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
8.
CMP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
Measure voltage between C M P sensor 3 P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
LG (BRN/YELJJ
CMP SENSOR'3P CONNECTOR
[JGP (YEL/BLK)
IGP ( Y E L / B L K )
Wire side o f female
Is there
Wire side o f female
terminals
battery
terminals
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step17.
NO—Repair o p e n inthe wire b e t w e e n the C M P
Is there
battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
NO—Repair o p e n inthe w i r e b e t w e e n the C M P
s e n s o r a n d P G M - F I m a i n r e l a y 1 (Fl M A I N ) , t h e n g o
to step19.
11-112
sensor and G101, then go to step19.
16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A 6 and body ground.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
CMP (GRN)
14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A6 and body ground.
1 2
3 I 4 I 56 | 7 |
10
13 14 15 16
18
23 24
28
/
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
/
/
/
/
/
/
8 I 9
20 21
30 31
CMP (CRN)
1
10
2
6 |7
3|4|5
13 14 15 16
18
28
23 24
/
/ / // //
8 9
20 21
30 31
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
cotinuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 25.
Wire side of female
terminals
NO— Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A6) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 19.
Is there
continuity?
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A6) and the CMP sensor, then go t o step 19.
18. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-195).
N O — G o t o step 15.
19. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Connect CMP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1
to body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
21. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
C M P S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
22. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
23. Start the engine.
CMP (GRN)
JUMPER
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
WIRE
Are any Temporary
Wire side of female
terminals
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0365 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
(cont'd)
11-113
PGtVI-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0365
indicated?
YES—Check f o r poor connections or loose
terminals at the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-114
DTC P0369: C M P S e n s o r C i r c u i t I n t e r m i t t e n t
Interruption
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
8. Check for damage to the CMP pulse plate (see page
6-27).
Is the pulse
plate
damaged?
YES—Replace the CMP pulse plate (see page 6-27),
then go to step 11.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Go t o step 9.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.
10. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-195).
4. Check the CMP NOISE count in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
Are 0 counts
indicated?
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Y E S — G o t o step7.
N O — G o t o stepS.
14. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
Are
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
6. Check the CMP NOISE count in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
Are 0 counts
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
indicated?
any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0369 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step
1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the CMP sensor and the ECM/PCM. •
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals
at these locations:
• CMP sensor
• ECM/PCM
• Engine ground
• Body ground
Are the connections
and terminals
OK?
YES—Goto step 8.
NO— Repair the connectors or terminals, then go
to step 11.
11-115
PG8V1-F1 S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd!
D T C P0500: V S S Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Check the No.3 IG METER (10 A) fuse in under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse
blown?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the VSS and
the No. 3 IG METER (10 A) fuse, and replace the
No. 3 IG METER (10 A) fuse, then go to step 27.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Test-drive under these conditions:
• Transmission in 3rd gear
• Engine speed between 2,000—4,000 r p m
• Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with
the throttle fully closed) f o r 5 seconds
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the VSS and
the No. 3 IG METER (10 A) fuse, then go to step 27.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P)
(see page 17-83).
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0500
13. Disconnect the gauge control module 40P
connector (see page 22-161).
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the VSS and the ECM.B
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the VSS 3P connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Measure voltage between VSS 3P connector
terminal No. 2 and body ground.
V S S 3P
h
CONNECTOR
2 3|
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
(V)
Wire side of female
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 11.
N O — G o t o step 9.
11-116
terminals
14. Disconnect the audio system 17P connector
(see page 23-38).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. Measure voltage between VSS 3P connector
terminal No. 3 and body ground.
21. Connect VSS 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body
ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
VSS 3 P CONNECTOR
V S S
V S S 3P C O N N E C T O R
V S S
(WHT/GRN)
(WHT/GRN)
J U M P E R
Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Wire side of female
WIRE
terminals
22. Check for continuity between ECM connector
terminal A18 and body ground.
Y E S — G o t o step 23.
E C M C O N N E C T O R A
(31P)
N O — G o t o step 17.
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1 |2 |3 |4 | 5 6 I 7
10
13 14 15 16
18
23 24
23
18. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
/
//
//
/
/
/ /
19. Disconnect ECM connector A (31P).
V S S
8 9
20 21
30 31
(WHT/GRN)
20. Check for continuity between VSS 3P connector
terminal No. 3 and body ground.
Wire side of female
terminals
VSS 3 P CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 34.
V S S
(WHT/GRN)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM
(A18) and the VSS, then go t o step 27.
23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM
(A18), the gauge control module, the EPS control
unit, the audio system, and the VSS, then go t o step
27.
N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-117
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
24. Check f o r continuity between VSS 3P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground.
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0500
VSS
3P
CONNECTOR
1 2 3
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the VSS and the ECM, then go to step
1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0500 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 33.
33. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0500 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Wire side of female
terminals
Does the screen
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 25.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSS and
G101, then g o t o step 27.
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Replace the VSS (see page 11-196).
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 33, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 32, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.P
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the VSS and the
ECM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 31 and recheck.
28. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
34. Update the ECM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM
(see page 11-7).
29. Reset the ECM w i t h the HDS.
35. Test-drive under these conditions:
27. Reconnect all connectors.
30. Do the ECM idle learn procedure (see page 11-268).
31. Test-drive under these conditions:
• Transmission in 3rd gear
• Engine speed between 2,000—4,000 r p m
• Drive f o r several minutes, then decelerate (with
the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds
11-118
• Transmission in 3rd gear
• Engine speed between 2,000—4,000 r p m
• Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with
the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds
36. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0500
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the VSS and the ECM. If the ECM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM (see page
11 -7), then go to step 35. If the ECM w a s substituted,
go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0500 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 37.
37. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0500 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—lf the ECM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the ECM was substituted, replace the
original ECM (see page 11-198). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs was indicated on step 36,
g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the VSS and the
ECM. If the ECM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 35. If the
ECM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 35 and
recheck.
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0562: Charging S y s t e m L o w Voltage
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE:
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If any high current load accessories are installed, this
DTC can be set.
• If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same t i m e
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
first, then recheck for DTC P0562.
8. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
10. Start the engine.
11. Check under these conditions:
• A/C on
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
•
•
•
•
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam
3. Start the engine.
4. Check under these conditions:
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
• A/C o n
•
•
•
•
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger o n
Headlights on high beam
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0562
indicated?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), then
go t o step 7.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and check the battery performance (see page
22-52). •
11-120
12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0562 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. H
D T C P0563: E C M / P C M P o w e r S o u r c e Circuit
Unexpected Voltage
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
10. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E7 and body ground.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E
MRLY
(31P)
(RED/YEL)
I
I
1 2 3 |4 | 5 6 I7
8 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25 26
27 28 29 30
/
/
/
/
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
X
4. Wait 10 seconds.
Wire side of female
terminals
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0563
indicated?
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the No. 14 IGP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box, PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN), and the
ECM/PCM. •
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 13.
N O — G o t o step 11.
11. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) (A) f r o m
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
(cont'd)
11-121
PGM-FS S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r
16.
Measure voltage between body ground a n d E C M /
P C M connector terminals A 3 a n d A 2 individually.
t e r m i n a l E7 a n d b o d y g r o u n d ,
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
MRLY
1
/
I
2 3
/
24
11 12
22
/
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1GP2 ( Y E L / B L K )
(RED/YEL)
I
4
I
8
56 | 7
I
9
1 | 2 | 3 |4 | 5
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28 29 30
25 26
10
/
A
23 24
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
IGP1 (YEL/BLK)
6 |7
13 14 15 16
//
A 28 /
A /
Wire side o f female
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair s h o r t in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e E C M /
battery
8
18
I
9
20 21
30 31
terminals
voltage?
YES—Goto step 17.
P C M (E7) a n d P G M - F I m a i n r e l a y 1 ( F l M A I N ) , t h e n
g o t o s t e p 20.
N O — G o to step 27.
17. R e m o v e P G M - F I m a i n r e l a y 1 (Fl M A I N ) (A) f r o m
N O — G o t o s t e p 19.
the under-relay box.
13.
14.
R e c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r E (31P).
Measure voltage between E C M / P C M connector
t e r m i n a l E7 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
MRLY (RED/YEL)
2
1
/
3 |4 | 5
11 12
22
/
24
/
6
I
25 26
battery
8
I
27 28 29 30
Wire side o f female
Is there
7
9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
terminals
voltage?
YES—Go to step 15.
N O — G o t o step 27.
1 5 . D i s c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r A (31P).
11-122
18. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
PCM connector terminals A3 and A2 individually.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
IGP2 (YEL/BLK)
1GP1 ( Y E L / B L K )
//
/ /
/
Wire side of f e m a l e
Is there battery
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
25. Wait 10 seconds.
1
1
1 2 I3I 4 5 6 7
18
10
13 14 15 16
28
23 24
/
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
/
8 9
20 21
'30 31
terminals
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P0563 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
voltage?
NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •
YES—Repair short t o power in the w i r e between
the ECM/PCM (A2, A3) and PGM-FI main relay 1
(Fl MAIN), then go to step 20.
27. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
N O — G o t o step 19.
28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
19. Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) (A).
Is DTC P0563
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute
a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o
step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1. •
20. Reconnect all connectors.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
11-123
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0602: E C M / P C M P r o g r a m m i n g Error
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• This DTC is indicated w h e n a ECM/PCM update is not
completed.
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the ECM/PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF
before completion, the ECM/PCM can be damaged.
D T C P0§03: E C M / P C M Internal Control
Module Keep Alive M e m o r y (KAM) Error
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
1. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure (see page 11-7).
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o to step 4.
Is DTC P0602
indicated?
YES—Replace the original ECM/PCM (see page
11-198).•
NO—Update is c o m p l e t e . •
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.H
4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0603
indicated?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-124
D T C P0606: E C M / P C M P r o c e s s o r Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
5. Wait 40 seconds.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0606
indicated?
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.H
7. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Wait 40 seconds.
11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0606
indicated?
YES—If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to
step 8. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step
1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0630: VIN Not P r o g r a m m e d or
Mismatch
8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Are any Temporary
NOTE;
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• This DTC is stored only w h e n the ECM/PCM does not
have the VIN information of the vehicle. Use the HDS
to input the missing VIN information.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - G o t o step 9.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.B
9. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
2. Check the VIN w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS show the vehicle's
DTCs
VIN?
Is DTC P0630
indicated?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
Y E S — G o to step 5.
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Input the VIN t o the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
show
COMPLETE?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
N O — G o t o step 4.
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0603
indicated?
Y E S — G o to the DTC P0603 troubleshooting. •
N O — G o t o step 9.
5. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait f o r
5 seconds.
11-126
NO—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •
DTC P0685: E C M / P C M Power Control Circuit/
Internal Circuit Malfunction
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0685
NOTE:
• Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If the problem doesn't return after you clear the DTC,
or if this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose
terminals at the IGP line connectors before replacing
the ECM/PCM.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
indicated?
YES—If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o
step 10. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step
1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0685
indicated?
YES—Goto step 9.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.B
9. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
10. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-127
PGM-FS S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0700: A / T C o n t r o l S y s t e m M a l f u n c t i o n
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• This DTC is stored w h e n there is a problem in the A/T
control system. Check for A/T DTCs w i t h the HDS, and
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
D T C P1109: B A R O S e n s o r Circuit Out of
R a n g e High
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Start the engine.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1109
indicated?
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.H
4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1109
indicated?
YES—If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-128
DTC P I 1 1 6 : ECT S e n s o r 1 C i r c u i t R a n g e /
Performance Problem
9. A l l o w ECT sensor 1 t o cool t o ambient temperature.
10. Note the ambient temperature.
NOTE;
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P1116.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Are
the connections
and terminals
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 t o its 2P connector, but do
not install sensor on the engine.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
ambient temperature.
OK?
Does
the value
of ECT
SENSOR
1 differ
5.4 °F
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
(3 °C) or
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 27.
YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193), then
g o t o step 27.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are
DTC
P1116
and P2183
indicated
at the
same
more?
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. m
15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
time?
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
Is about
N O — G o t o step 4.
118 °F (48 °C) or less,
or 1.75 ¥ or
more
indicated?
4. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193), then
go to step 27.
N O — G o t o step 17.
Is about
129 °F (54 °C) or less,
or 1.54 V or
more
indicated?
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193), then
go to step 27.
18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
N O — G o t o step 6.
Is about
131 °F (55
°C) or less,
or 1.50 V or
more
indicated?
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-193), then
go to step 27.
8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193).
N O — G o t o step 19.
(cont'd)
11-129
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
28. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-193).
29. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
22. A l l o w the sensors t o cool t o ambient temperature.
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
23. Note the ambient temperature.
Are
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to the 2P connector, and ECT
sensor 2 t o its 2P connector, but do not install t h e m
on the engine.
YES—lf Temporary DTC or DTC P1116 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM,
then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 quickly in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does
one of the sensors
(3 °C) from
the ambient
differ
more
than 5.4 °F
temperature?
YES—Replace the sensor that differed more than
5.4 °F (3 °C) f r o m the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. •
11-130
any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
indicated?
DTC PI 128; MAP S e n s o r S i g n a l Lower T h a n
hxpected
9. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
10.
Reset the E C M / P C M with the H D S .
11.
D o the E C M / P C M idle learn p r o c e d u r e ( s e e p a g e
NOTE:
• B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t r e c o r d all f r e e z e d a t a a n d
11-268).
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g information ( s e e p a g e 11-3).
• Before starting this t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g c h e c k for poor
12.
Start the engine. Hold the engine s p e e d at
3 , 0 0 0 r p m w i t h o u t l o a d (in P a r k o r n e u t r a l ) until t h e
c o n n e c t i o n s o r b l o c k a g e at the intake air duct.
r a d i a t o r f a n c o m e s o n , t h e n l e t it i d l e .
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( I I ) .
13. T e s t - d r i v e u n d e r t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s :
2. C h e c k t h e M A P S E N S O R in t h e D A T A L I S T w i t h t h e
• E C T S E N S O R 1 a b o v e 1 5 8 ° F ( 7 0 °C)
HDS.
• Engine s p e e d between 1,400—5,400 r p m
Is less than 54.1 kPa (16.0 in.Hg, 406 mmHg) or
1.61 V held for more than 5
seconds?
• A / T in D position (M/T in 3rd gear)
• Vehicle s p e e d accelerated f r o m 16—31 m p h
( 2 5 — 5 0 k m / h ) u n d e r half throttle
YES—Goto step?.
14. C h e c k for T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w i t h the H D S .
NO—Go to step 3.
Is DTC P1128
indicated?
3. C l e a r t h e D T C w i t h t h e H D S .
YES—Check for poor c o n n e c t i o n s o r l o o s e
terminals atthe M A P sensor a n d the E C M / P C M ,
4. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e . H o l d t h e e n g i n e s p e e d a t
t h e n g o t o s t e p 1.
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t l o a d (in P a r k o r neutral) until t h e
r a d i a t o r f a n c o m e s o n , t h e n l e t it i d l e .
NO—If T e m p o r a r y D T C o r D T C P 1 1 2 8 i s n o t
i n d i c a t e d , o r if a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s
5. T e s t - d r i v e u n d e r t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s ;
are indicated, g oto step 15.
• E C T S E N S O R 1 a b o v e 1 5 8 °F ( 7 0 °C)
15.
• E n g i n e speed b e t w e e n 1 , 4 0 0 — 5 , 4 0 0 r p m
Monitor the O B D S T A T U S forD T C P1128 in the
D T C s M E N U with the H D S .
• A / T in D position (M/T in 3rd gear)
• V e h i c l e s p e e d a c c e l e r a t e d f r o m 16—31 m p h
Does the screen
(25—50 km/h) under half throttle
6. M o n i t o r t h e O B D S T A T U S f o r D T C P 1 1 2 8 i n t h e
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If t h e r e w a s n o T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s
i n d i c a t e d o n s t e p 14, t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is c o m p l e t e .
D T C s M E N U with the H D S .
If a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w a s
i n d i c a t e d o n s t e p 14, g ot o t h e i n d i c a t e d
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
troubleshooting.
YES—Goto step7.
DTCs
•
NO—If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s F A I L E D , c h e c k f o r p o o r
NO—If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s P A S S E D ,
intermittent
connections o r loose terminals at the M A P
sensor
failure, s y s t e m is O K at this time. C h e c k for poor
a n d t h e E C M / P C M , t h e n g o t o s t e p 1. If t h e s c r e e n
c o n n e c t i o n s o r loose terminals atthe M A P
indicates N O T C O M P L E T E D , g ot o s t e p 12 a n d
sensor
a n d t h e E C M / P C M . If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s N O T
recheck.
C O M P L E T E D , g o t o s t e p 4 and r e c h e c k .
7 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF.
8. R e p l a c e t h e M A P s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e
11-192).
11-131
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P1129: M A P S e n s o r Signal H i g h e r T h a n
Expected
NOTE; Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Check f o r vacuum leaks in these parts:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PCV valve
PCV hose
EVAP canister purge valve
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster
Brake booster hose
Are there any vacuum
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Y E S - G o t o step7.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 5 and recheck.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-192).
leaks?
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Repair or replace parts w i t h vacuum leaks,
then go t o step 9.
10. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
11. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
N O — G o t o step 2.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3.000 r p m without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
3. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
13. Test-drive under these conditions:
Is more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg, 277 mmHg) or
1.1 V held for more than for 5
seconds?
Y E S — G o t o step 7.
N O — G o t o step 4.
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
5. Test-drive under these conditions:
- ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 5th gear)
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 m p h
(88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds
• During the drive , decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed) f o r 2 seconds
11-132
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 5th gear)
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 m p h
(88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds
• During the drive , decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed) for 2 seconds
14. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P1129
D T C P1157: A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) A F S Circuit
High Voltage
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P1129 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 15.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and wait for 20 seconds.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 14, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 14, g o t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o step 12 and
recheck.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P1157
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. •
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
9. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1)
AFS+ ( G R N )
AFS-
1 2
3 4
J U M P E R
4P CONNECTOR
(RED)
WIRE
Wire side of female
terminals
(cont'd)
11-133
PGIVt-FI System
#
DTC Troubleshooting fcont d)
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A28 and A 3 1 .
E C M / P C M
CONNECTOR A (31P)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
10
/
/
Is there
18
/AFS—
/ (RED)
/
Wire side of female
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
1 | 2
| 8 | 9
6 | 7
1 3 1 4 15 16
23 24
28
/
/
10
2 0 21
3
/
23 24
3 0 31
AFS+ (GRN)
4 | 5
6
I7
Is there
(31P)
8 | 9
/
// / /
1 3 14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals
continuity?
18
2 0 21
28
3 0 31
AFS+ ( G R N )
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A28) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then
go to step 15.
YES—Goto step 14.
N O — G o t o step 11.
11. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) 4P connector.
1 2 . Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4 P connector
terminal No. 1 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1)
A F S +
13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A31 and body ground.
4P
C O N N E C T O R
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A31) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then
go to step 15.
14. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-194).
15. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(GRN)
1
2
3
4
J U M P E R
17. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
WIRE
18. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Wire side of female
terminals
Is DTC P1157
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1. If the connector and
terminal fits are OK, go t o step 2 1 .
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P1157 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 20.
11-134
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1157 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 19, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 19, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
18 and recheck.
21. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P1157 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated o n step 23, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step 1. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 22.
If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, let the engine
idle until a result comes o n .
22. Start the engine.
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1157
indicated?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o
step 22. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go to step
1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P1157 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 24.
11-135
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P1172: A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) Circuit Out
of R a n g e High
11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1172
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P1172 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 12.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o to step 5.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 3 and recheck.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-194).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
10. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
11-136
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — l f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 11, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 11, g o t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 10 and recheck.
DTC P1297: E L D Circuit L o w Voltage
( U S A models)
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E15 and body ground.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
1 |2 |3 |4 | 5 6 I 7
8 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
27 28 29 30
25 25
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
/
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is 72 A or more
/
/
/
ELD
(BLU/ORN)
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step3.
Wire side of female
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ELD and the ECM/PCM. •
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E15) and the ELD, then go t o step 13.
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
N O — G o t o step 20.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
12. Replace the ELD (see page 11-197).
Is 72 A or more
indicated?
13. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S — G o t o step 7.
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Go to step 11.
15. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
17. Start the engine.
18. Turn on the headlights.
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P1297 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ELD and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o
the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
(cont'd)
11-137
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
21. Start the engine.
22. Turn o n the headlights.
23. Cheek for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1297
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 21. If the ECM/
PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
11-138
D T C P1298: E L D Circuit High Voltage
7 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF.
(USA models)
8.
C o n n e c t E L D 3 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 3 to b o d y
ground with a jumper wire.
N O T E ; B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , r e c o r d all f r e e z e d a t a
and any on-board snapshot, a n d review the general
troubleshooting Information (see page
11-3).
ELD 3 P CONNECTOR
1. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e , a n d l e t it i d l e .
2. C h e c k t h e E L D in t h e D A T A L I S T w i t h t h e H D S .
ELD
Is 0,2 A or less
indicated?
(BLU/ORN)
J U M P E R
WIRE
YES—Goto step3.
N O — I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, s y s t e m is O K at t h i s t i m e .
C h e c k for p o o r c o n n e c t i o n s o r l o o s e t e r m i n a l s at
Wire side of female
terminals
the E L D a n d the E C M / P C M . •
9. J u m p t h e S C S line w i t h t h eH D S .
3. T u r n t h e I g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
4. D i s c o n n e c t t h e E L D 3 P c o n n e c t o r .
10.
D i s c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r E (31P).
5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
11. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r
terminal E 1 5and body ground.
6.
Measure voltage between E L D 3P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
ELD 3 P CONNECTOR
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
/
22
11 12
/
24
/
6 | 7
25 2
8
2 7 28 29 30
ELD
1G1 ( Y E L )
Wire side of female
Wire side of female
9
(BLU/ORN)
/
terminals
terminals
Is there
Is there battery
|8
14 15 16 1 7 18 19 2 0 21
voltage?
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 12.
N O — R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e E C M /
YES—Goto step7.
P C M (E15) a n d t h e E L D , t h e n g o to s t e p 14.
N O - C h e c k t h e N o . 3 I G M E T E R ( 1 0 A) f u s e i n t h e
u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x . If t h e f u s e i s OK,
repair
o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e N o . 3 I G M E T E R
( 1 0 A) f u s e a n d t h e E L D , t h e n g o t o s t e p 1 4 .
(cont'd)
11-139
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Check f o r continuity between ELD 3P connector
terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
E L D 3 P
19. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
C O N N E C T O R
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1298
G N D
Wire
Is there
side of female
(BLK)
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ELD and
G301, then g o t o step 14.
13. Replace the ELD (see page 11-197).
14. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1298
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 19.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-140
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
D T C P1549: Charging S y s t e m High Voltage
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to
the vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Are any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).
YES—lf Temporary DTC or DTC P1549 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
3. Start the engine.
4. Check under these conditions:
• A/C off
• Headlights off
• Rear window defogger off
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC
P1549
indicated?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), then
go to step 7.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box. •
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-288).
10. Start the engine.
11. Check under these conditions:
• A/C off
• Headlights off
• Rear window defogger off
12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
11-141
PGfVS-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P 1 6 B B : A l t e r n a t o r B T e r m i n a l C i r c u i t
Low V o l t a g e
NOTE; Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 1 1 - 3 ) .
8. Check f o r an open in the wire ( + B line)between the
alternator and under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is the harness
OK?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), then
go to step 9.
1 . Turn the ignition switch O N (II).
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then
go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h HDS.
3. Start the engine.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Check under these conditions;
10. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
• A/C o n
•
•
•
•
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights o n high beam
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
11. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
12. Start the engine.
13. Check under these conditions:
• A/C on
6. Check f o r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16BB
indicated?
•
•
•
•
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam
Y E S — G o t o step 7.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and check the battery performance (see page
22-52). •
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box
( + B line).
Are the connections
and terminals
OK?
14. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P16BB is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 9.
11-142
indicated?
D T C P16BC: A l t e r n a t o r FR T e r m i n a l Circuit/
IGP Circuit L o w V o l t a g e
8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTCP16BC
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1 . Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator 4P connector.
Are the connections
and terminals
OK?
indicated?
Y E S — G o to step 9.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator. •
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
10. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
NO—Repair the connections or terminals, then go
to step 20.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check the alternator mounting surface for
corrosion.
Is the mounting
surface
corroded
12. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground.
A L T E R N A T O R 4P
?
CONNECTOR
SGI
(BLK/YEL)
Y E S — R e m o v e the alternator (see page 4-34). Clean
all mounting surface and reinstall the alternator,
then go to step 20.
1 2
3 4
N O — G o t o step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Wire side of female
terminals
5. Start the engine.
Is there
battery
voltage?
6. Check under these conditions:
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
• A/C on
•
•
•
•
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
alternator (IG1 line) and the No. 3 IG METER (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
step 19.
7. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
(cont'd)
11-143
PGM-Ft S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector
terminal No. 4 and body ground.
18. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B13 and body ground.
CONNECTOR
A L T E R N A T O R 4P
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B( 2 4 P )
I
6
2 I3I4 I 5
8
10
16
13 /
17 18
/ /
1 2 ALTF
(WHT/RED)
3 4
/
/
1112
/
/
21 / /
ALTF
Wire
side
of female
(WHT/RED)
Wire side of female terminals
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Is there
continuity?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), then
go to step 19.
YES—Goto step 28.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B13) and the alternator, then go t o step 20.
N O — G o t o step 14.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Jump the S C S line w i t h the HDS.
20. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 t o
body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
22. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
ALTERNATOR 4P C O N N E C T O R
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Start the engine.
1 2
3 4
25. Check under these conditions:
ALTF
• A/C on
(WHT/RED)
J U M P E R
WIRE
Wire side of female terminals
11-144
•
•
•
•
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam
26. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in Park or
neutral) f o r 1 minute.
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P16BC is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the alternator and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •
28. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
29. Start the engine.
30. Check under these conditions:
• A/Con
•
•
•
•
Temperature control at m a x i m u m cool
Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
Rear w i n d o w defogger on
Headlights on high beam
3 1 . Hold the engine speed at 2,000 r p m (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16BC
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the alternator and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 29. If the
ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
PGIVS-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd!
DTC P2183: ECT S e n s o r 2 Circuit R a n g e /
Performance Problem
11. Connect ECT sensor 2 t o its 2P connector, but do
not install it on the engine.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same t i m e as DTC P2183,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P2183.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Are the connections
and terminals
OK?
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature.
Does ECT SENSOR
more?
2 differ
5.4 °F (3 °C) or
YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-193), then
go t o step 27.
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 27.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. •
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated
time?
at the same
Is about 118 °F (48 °C) or less, or 1.75 V or more
indicated?
Y E S - G o t o step 15.
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
5. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less, or 1.50 V or more
indicated?
YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-193), then
go to step 27.
N O — G o t o step 6.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-193).
9. A l l o w ECT sensor 2 t o cool to ambient temperature.
10. Note the ambient temperature.
11-146
YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193), then
go t o step 27.
N O — G o t o step 17.
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less, or 1.50 V or more
indicated?
YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-193), then
go to step 27.
N O — G o t o step 19.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
28. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
2 1 . Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-193) and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-193).
29. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
22. A l l o w the sensors t o cool t o ambient temperature.
30. Check f o r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
23. Note the ambient temperature.
Are any
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT
sensor 2 to the 2P connector, but do not install
them on the engine.
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2183 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM,
then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 quickly in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does one of the sensors
(3 °C) from the ambient
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
differ
more than 5,4 °F
temperature?
Y E S — R e p l a c e the sensor that differed more than
5.4 °F (3 °C) f r o m the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. •
11-147
PGIVS-FS S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P2184: E C T S e n s o r 2 Circuit L o w Voltage
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
ECT SENSOR 2 2 P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 356 °F (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or
indicated?
E C T 2 (LT B L U )
less
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
Wire side of female
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. •
Is there
terminals
continuity?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Y E S — R e p a i r short in the wire between ECT sensor
2 and the ECM/PCM (E1), then go t o step 13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
NO—Go to step 18.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-193).
13. Reconnect all connectors.
Is about 356 °F (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or
indicated?
less
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S — G o t o step 7.
15. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 11.
16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P2184 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-148
18. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2184
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2185: E C T S e n s o r 2 Circuit High
Voltage
NOTE; Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about -40°F
(-40
more
indicated?
°C) or less,
or 4.92 V or
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S — G o t o step 8.
2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about -40°F
(-40
more
indicated?
°C) or less,
or 4.92 V or
N O - G o t o step 18.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the ECT sensor 2 2P
connector.
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. •
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ECT S E N S O R 2 2P CONNECTOR
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 w i t h a jumper w i r e .
ECT2 (LT BLU)
ECT S E N S O R 2 2P CONNECTOR
SG4
(BLU)
ECT2
(LT B L U )
Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
J U M P E R
WIRE
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
Wire side of female terminals
N O — G o t o step 17.
11-150
17. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E1 and body ground.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
14. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
ECT2 (LTBLU)
15. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 1
to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
/
22
ECT S E N S O R 2 2P CONNECTOR
SG4
2
1
I 3
11 1 2
/
24
/
4
14
I 5
6
15 16
25 26
8
I T
17
18 19
I 9
20
27 28 29 30
Wire side of female
21
/
terminals
(BLU)
J U M P E R
WIRE
Is there about 5 V?
Wire side of female
YES—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E1) and ECT sensor 2, then go t o step 20.
terminals
N O — G o t o step 25.
16. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E4 and body ground.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E
SG4
1
/
22
3
I 2
11 1 2
/
24
]/
I 4
14
5
6
19. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-193).
20. Reconnect all connectors.
(PNK)
8
7
15 16 17
25 26
(31P)
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18
19
20
27 28 29 30
9
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
21
/
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Goto step 25.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E4) and ECT sensor 2, then go t o step 20.
(cont'd)
11-151
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P2185 is indicated,
check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2185
indicated?
YES—Check f o r poor connections or loose
terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-152
D T C P2195; A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) Signal
Stuck Lean
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel, then clear the DTC
w i t h the HDS.
• If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P 2 1 7 6 o r a
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138,
or P2127 and P2138 is stored at the same time,
troubleshoot t h e m first, then recheck for DTC P2195.
7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-194).
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-286).
11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2195
indicated?
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1).
Is the A/F sensor loose or disconnected
exhaust
pipe?
from
the
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2195 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 12.
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
N O — G o t o step 2.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate
PASSED?
4. Start the engine, then let it idle.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — l f DTC P2195 is indicated, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 13. If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 11, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 11, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1. If
the screen indicated NOT COMPLETED, go t o step
10 and recheck.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. •
(cont'd)
11-153
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Update the ECM/PCM If it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
14. Start the engine, then let it idle.
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P2195
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o
step 14. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o step
1.
.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2195 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 16.
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated o n step 15, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 14. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 14 and recheck.
11-154
D T C P2227: B A R O S e n s o r Circuit R a n g e /
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored
at the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2227.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
7. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
9. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
• REL TP SENSOR between 12 degrees and
20 degrees for 3 seconds
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about
2.9 V at sea level
indicated?
Is DTC P2227
indicated?
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 8. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2227 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 11.
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
NO—Go to step 7.
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P2227 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Test-drive under these conditions:
£
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 1 5 8 T ( 7 0 € )
• A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
• RELTP SENSOR between 12 degrees and
20 degrees for 3 seconds
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P2227 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 7.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 4 and
recheck.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f t h e ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 10, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 8. If
the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 8
and recheck.
11-155
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P2228: B A R O S e n s o r Circuit L o w V o l t a g e
N O T E : Before you troubleshoot,
D T C P2229: B A R O S e n s o r Circuit High
Voltage
record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
N O T E : B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , r e c o r d all freeze data
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i n f o r m a t i o n ( s e e p a g e 11-3).
and a n y on-board s n a p s h o t , and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page
11-3).
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( I I ) .
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
2. C h e c k the B A R O S E N S O R in t h e D A T A L I S T w i t h
2. C h e c k the B A R O S E N S O R in t h e D A T A L I S T w i t h
the H D S .
the H D S .
Is about 53 kPa (15.6 in.Hg, 397 mmHg), or 1.31 V
or less
indicated?
Is about 160 kPa (47.2 in.Hg,
4.49 V or more
indicated?
1,200 mmHg),
or
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 3.
YES—Goto step 3.
N O — I n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , s y s t e m i s OK a t t h i s
time.B
NO—Intermittent failure, s y s t e m is O K at this
time.B
3. U p d a t e t h e E C M / P C M if it d o e s n o t h a v e t h e l a t e s t
software, or substitute a known-good
(see page
ECM/PCM
3.
U p d a t e t h e E C M / P C M if it d o e s n o t h a v e t h e l a t e s t
software, or substitute a known-good
11-7).
(see page
ECM/PCM
11-7).
4. C h e c k f o r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
4. C h e c k f o r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
Is DTC P2228
indicated?
Is DTC P2229
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
t e r m i n a l s a t t h e E C M / P C M . If t h e E C M / P C M w a s
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
updated, substitute a known-good
t e r m i n a l s a t t h e E C M / P C M . If t h e E C M / P C M w a s
ECM/PCM
( s e e p a g e 1 1 - 7 ) , t h e n r e c h e c k . If t h e E C M / P C M w a s
updated, substitute a known-good
s u b s t i t u t e d , g o t o s t e p 1.
( s e e p a g e 1 1 - 7 ) , t h e n r e c h e c k . If t h e E C M / P C M w a s
ECM/PCM
s u b s t i t u t e d , g o t o s t e p 1.
NO—If t h e E C M / P C M w a s u p d a t e d ,
troubleshooting
i s c o m p l e t e . If t h e E C M / P C M w a s s u b s t i t u t e d ,
NO—If t h e E C M / P C M w a s u p d a t e d ,
r e p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l E C M / P C M ( s e e p a g e 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . If
i s c o m p l e t e . If t h e E C M / P C M w a s s u b s t i t u t e d ,
troubleshooting
any other Temporary D T C s or D T C s are indicated,
r e p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l E C M / P C M ( s e e p a g e 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . If
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.
any other T e m p o r a r y D T C s or D T C s are indicated,
•
go to theindicated D T C s troubleshooting.
11-156
•
D T C P2238: A / F S e n s o r (Sensor 1) A F S +
Circuit L o w Voltage
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
9. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-194).
10. Reconnect all connectors.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
14. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2238
indicated?
Is DTC P2238
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. •
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM. If the connector and terminal fits are OK, go
to step 16.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2238 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 15.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
6. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
Does the screen
8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A31 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1
10
1
I
8 I 9
2 j 3
4 | 56
7|
13 14 15 16
18 / 20 21
23 24
/ 28 '30 31
/
/ /
/
A F S + (GRN)
Wire side of female
Is there
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 14, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 14, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.•
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 13 and recheck.
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A31) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 10.
N O — G o t o step9.
(conf d)
11-157
PGSVI-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. U p d a t e t h e E C M / P C M if it d o e s n o t h a v e t h e l a t e s t
software, or substitute a known-good
(see page
ECM/PCM
11-7).
17. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e .
18. C h e c k f o r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
Is DTC P2238
indicated?
YES—If t h e E C M / P C M w a s u p d a t e d , s u b s t i t u t e a
known-good E C M / P C M (see page
11-7),
then go to
s t e p 17. If t h e E C M / P C M w a s s u b s t i t u t e d , g o t o s t e p
1.
NO—If T e m p o r a r y D T C o r D T C P 2 2 3 8 i s n o t
i n d i c a t e d , o r if a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s
" a r e i n d i c a t e d , g o t o s t e p 19.
19. M o n i t o r t h e O B D S T A T U S f o r D T C P 2 2 3 8 i n t h e
DTCs M E N U with the H D S .
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If t h e E C M / P C M w a s u p d a t e d ,
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i s c o m p l e t e . If t h e E C M / P C M w a s
substituted, replace the original E C M / P C M
( s e e p a g e 11-198). If a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r
D T C s w a s i n d i c a t e d o n s t e p 18, g o t o t h e i n d i c a t e d
D T C s troubleshooting.
•
N O — I f t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s F A I L E D , g o t o s t e p 1. If
the E C M / P C M w a s updated, substitute a knowngood E C M / P C M (see page
11-7),
t h e n g o to s t e p
17.
If t h e E C M / P C M w a s s u b s t i t u t e d , g o t o s t e p 1. If t h e
s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s N O T C O M P L E T E D , lett h e e n g i n e
idle until a result c o m e s o n .
11-158
DTC P2252: A/F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) A F S —
Circuit Low Voltage
10. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-194).
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
11. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
14. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
3. Start the engine.
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
is DTC P2252
Is DTC P2252
indicated?
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. •
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/
PCM. If the connector and terminal fits are OK, go
to step 17.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2252 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 16.
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A28 and body ground.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
1 |2 |3 |4 | 5 6
10
/ 13 14 15 16
23 24
/
/
I7I
/
/
18
28
(31P)
I8
/
/
9
20 21
30 31
A F S -
Wire side of female
Is there
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 15, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 15, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.H
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 14 and recheck.
(RED)
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A28) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 11.
N O — G o t o step 10.
(cont'd)
11-159
POIVS-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
18. Start the engine.
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2252
indicated?
YES—if the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o
step 18. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o step
1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2252 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 20.
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f t h e ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 19, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go t o step 1. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 18.
If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, g o t o step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, let the engine
idle until a result comes o n .
11-160
D T C P2270: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
11. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes o n .
D T C P2271: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit Signal Stuck Rich
12. Test-drive under these conditions:
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Vehicle speed at 35 m p h (56 km/h) or more for at
least 23 seconds
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
is DTC P2270
or P2271
indicated?
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Y E S - l f DTC P2270 or P2271 is indicated, check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Vehicle speed at 35 m p h (56 km/h) or more for at
least 23 seconds
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271
in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
N O - l f T e m p o r a r y DTC or DTC P2270 or P2271 is
not indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, g o t o step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271
in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
Does the screen
indicate
indicate
PASSED?
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Y E S — l f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 13, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 13, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. B
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 11 and recheck.
7. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-194).
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11-161
PGIVI-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2610: E C M / P C M Ignition Off Internal
T i m e r Malfunction
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Check f o r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2610
indicated?
YES—Goto step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.B
4. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2610
indicated?
YES—If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, g o t o
step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-162
D T C P2A00: A / F S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) C i r c u i t
Range/Performance Problem
10. D o t h e E C M / P C M i d l e l e a r n p r o c e d u r e ( s e e p a g e
N O T E : Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t r e c o r d all freeze data
11.
11-268).
Test-drive under these conditions;
and a n y on-board snapshot, a n d review the general
troubleshooting information (see page
• E C T S E N S O R 1 a b o v e 158 °F ( 7 0 X )
11-3).
• A / T in D p o s i t i o n ( M / T in 3 r d g e a r )
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( I I ) .
• V e h i c l e s p e e d b e t w e e n 25—55 m p h ( 4 0 —
2. C l e a r t h e D T C w i t h t h e H D S .
• Drive at a s t e a d y s p e e d b e t w e e n 5 5 — 7 5 m p h
88 k m / h ) f o r 5 m i n u t e s
(88—120
km/h) for
10
seconds, then decelerate
(with t h e throttle fully c l o s e d ) f o r 4 s e c o n d s
3. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e . Hold t h e e n g i n e s p e e d at
3 , 0 0 0 r p m w i t h o u t l o a d (in P a r k o r neutral) until t h e
12. C h e c k f o r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r . D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
r a d i a t o r f a n c o m e s o n , t h e n l e t it i d l e .
Is DTC P2A00
4. T e s t - d r i v e u n d e r t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s ;
indicated?
• E C T S E N S O R 1 a b o v e 1 5 8 °F ( 7 0 °C)
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
• A / T in D p o s i t i o n ( M / Tin 3 r d g e a r )
t e r m i n a l s a t t h e A / F s e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) a n d t h e E C M /
• V e h i c l e s p e e d b e t w e e n 2 5 — 5 5 m p h (40 —
P C M , t h e n g o t o s t e p 1.
88 km/h) for 5 minutes
NO—If T e m p o r a r y D T C o r D T C P 2 A 0 0 i s n o t
• Drive at a s t e a d y s p e e d b e t w e e n 5 5 — 7 5 m p h
5.
( 8 8 — 1 2 0 km/h) for 10 s e c o n d s , t h e n d e c e l e r a t e
i n d i c a t e d , o r if a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s
(with t h e throttle fully c l o s e d ) f o r 4 s e c o n d s
are indicated, g oto step 13.
Monitor t h e O B DS T A T U S for D T C P 2 A 0 0 in t h e
Does the screen
indicate
13.
Monitor the O B D S T A T U S for D T CP 2 A 0 0 in t h e
DTCs M E N U with the HDS.
D T C s M E N U with the H D S .
Does the screen
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 6.
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If t h e r e w a s n o T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s
indicated o n step 12,troubleshooting is complete.
NO—If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s P A S S E D ,
intermittent
If a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w a s
failure, s y s t e m is O K at this time. C h e c k for poor
indicated o n step 12, g o to t h e indicated
connections or loose terminals at the A / F s e n s o r
troubleshooting. H
DTCs
( S e n s o r 1) a n d t h e E C M / P C M . If t h e s c r e e n
i n d i c a t e s E X E C U T I N G , k e e p d r i v i n g until a r e s u l t
NO—If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s F A I L E D , c h e c k f o r p o o r
c o m e s o n . If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s O U T O F
connections or loose terminals at the A / F s e n s o r
C O N D I T I O N , g oto step 3 a n d recheck.
( S e n s o r 1) a n d t h e E C M / P C M , t h e n g o t o s t e p 1. If
t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s E X E C U T I N G , k e e p d r i v i n g until
6. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
a r e s u l t c o m e s o n . If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s O U T O F
C O N D I T I O N , g o to step 10 a n d r e c h e c k .
7.
R e p l a c e t h e A / F s e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) ( s e e p a g e
11-194).
8. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
9.
Reset the E C M / P C M with the H D S .
11-163
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C U0028: F - C A N Malfunction (Bus-Off)
(A/T)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC U0028
indicated?
YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-198). •
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time.B
11-164
D T C U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge
Control M o d u l e - E C M / P C M )
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
10. Connect gauge control module 40P connector
terminal No. 13 to body ground with a jumper wire.
G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E 40P CONNECTOR
n_
p n
/|2|8|4|/|/|7|8
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
n
n
rj
9 |10|11|12 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
121 \2z\/\/\/\/\u\m\z9\m\m
/|34|/|36|37|38|39|40
|32|j
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
CANH (WHT)
JUMPER
WIRE
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
U0155
indicated?
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM. •
11. Check f o r continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E11 and body ground.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E
(31P)
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU
w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
B1168,
B1169,
and/or
B1178
1
indicated?
/
22
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
2 | 3
11 12
/
24
/
4
I5
6 | 7
8
9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2 5 26:
2 7 28 29 30
/
CANH (WHT)
NO—Do the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-157). •
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female
terminals
6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
Is there
7. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-161).
8. Disconnect the gauge control module 40P
connector.
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E11) and the gauge control module, then go
to step 14.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
(cont'd)
11-165
PGM-Ff System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Connect gauge control module 40P connector
terminal No. 12 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
14. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
G A U G E CONTROL MODULE 4 0 P CONNECTOR
m
n
n
n
„ n
/ | 2 | 8 U J / | / l 7 l 8
9 11011 "I |IS13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
| 2 1 | 2 2 | / | X I / I / | 2 T | 2 8 | 2 9 | 3 0 | 3 1 | 3 2 | / | 3 4 1 / | 36137138|a |40
C A N L (RED)
JUMPER
WIRE
Wire side of female terminals
13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E24 and body ground.
16. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
YES—If DTC U0155 is indicated, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the gauge control
module and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
I
8 I 9
1 I2 3 I4 ! 5 6 |7
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
27 28 29 30
25 26
/
/
/
/
C A N L (RED)
St
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good gauge control
module, then go to step 14 and recheck. If DTC
U0155 is not indicated, replace the original gauge
control module, then go to step 14.
NO—-Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E24) and the gauge control module, then go
to step 14.
11-166
indicated?
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE; Information marked with an asterisk C) applies
to the CANL line.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Disconnect the gauge control module 40P
connector (see page 22-161).
6. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector (see page 19-79).
2. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
3. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P), then
disconnect the HDS.
7. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminals E11 and E24.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E( 3 1 P )
4. Measure resistance between ECM/PCM connector
terminals E11 and E24.
CANH
(WHT)
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
1 | 2 3 | 4 5 6 |7
8 | 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25 26
27 28 29 30 /
/
CANH
(WHT)
1
2 3
11 12
22
24
/
/
/
CANL
(RED)
4 | 5 6 |7
8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28 29 30
25 26
/
CANL
(RED)
Wire side of female
Is there
Wire side of female
terminals
continuity?
terminals
YES—Repair short in the wires between ECM/PCM
connector terminals E11 and E24*.H
Is there about 108-
132 Q ?
NO—Go to step 8.
Y E S - G o t o step 20.
N O — G o t o step 5.
(cont'd)
11-167
PGM-FI S f stem
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E11 t o body
ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
10. Check for continuity between ABS modulatorcontrol unit 25P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 2SP CONNECTOR
2 3 |4 | 5 6|7
8 9
11 1 2 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 / 24
25 26
27 28 29 30 /
1
I CANH (WHT)
„ 12 3 / 5 6
8 9
14 15 16
10 / 12
17 18 /
/ z4 25
/
/
CANH (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals
9. Check for continuity between gauge control
module 40P connector terminal No. 13 and body
ground.
Is there
continuity?
YES—Goto step 11.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 40P CONNECTOR
n n
/|2|3|4|/|/|7|8
p
CANH (WHT)
n
9 |10|11|12 3|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
|21 | 2 2 ! / | / | / 1 / | 2 7 | B | 2 9 | 3 0 | 3 1 |32(/l34|/1S«|37|38|39|40
/
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E11) and the gauge control module. •
11-168
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM ( E l l ) and the ABS modulator-control u n i t . B
11. Remove the jumper wire f r o m ECM/PCM connector
E(31P).
12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E24to body
ground w i t h a jumper wire.
14. Check for continuity between ABS modulatorcontrol unit 25P connector terminal No. 17 and
body ground.
A B S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 25P
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
1 2 3/ 5 6
8 9
10 / 12 / 14 15 16
25
24
17 18 / / / / /
1
1
2 3 |4 | 5 6 |7
8 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 / 24
27 28 29 30 /
25 26
/
CONNECTOR
C A N L (RED)
/
CANL (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
13. Check for continuity between gauge control
module 40P connector terminal No. 12 and body
ground. •
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 4 0 P
continuity?
YES—Goto step 15.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E24) and the ABS modulator-control u n i t . B
CONNECTOR
C A N L (RED)
7\
2 | 3 | 4 l/T/1 7 | 8 [ 9 110111112 j 13114115116117118119 |SD
21 l 2 2 l / ^ / C / 1 / l 2 7 l 2 8 [ 2 9 | 3 0 | 3 1 | 3 2 | y J M | y l 8 6 | 3 7 | 3 8 | a 9 p
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
YES—Goto step 14.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E24) and the gauge control module. •
(cont'd)
11-169
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Reconnect the gauge control module 40P connector.
19. Measure resistance between ECM/PCM connector
terminals E l 1 and E24.
16. Measure resistance between ECM/PCM connector
terminals E11 and E24.
E C M / P C M
CONNECTOR
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
E (31P)
CANH
(WHT)
1
2
3 | 4 | 5
11 12
CANH
(WHT)
3 | 4 | 5
1 | 2
11 1 2
22
/
24
/
6 | 7
8
9
1 4 1 5 16 1 7 18 1 9 2 0 21
25 26
2 7 28 29 30
/
22
/
24
/
6 | 7
8
I9
1 4 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21
25 26
27 28 29 30
/
CANL
(RED)
CANL
(RED)
Wire side of female
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there about 2.34-2.86
Is there about 112-
136 Q ?
YES—Goto step 17.
NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control
module (see page 22-161). If the HDS identifies the
vehicle, replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-161). •
17. Disconnect the gauge control module 40P
connector.
18. Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector.
11-170
terminals
kQ?
YES—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . •
NO—Substitute a known-good ABS modulatorcontrol unit (see page 19-79). If the HDS identifies
the vehicle, replace the original ABS modulatorcontrol unit (see page 19-79). M
20. Disconnect the gauge control module 40P
connector (see page 22-161).
23. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E24 and body ground.
21. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector (see page 19-79).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
22. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E11 and body ground.
8 9
1 |2 |3|4 | 5 6 I7
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
27 28 29 30 /
25 26
/
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
/
/
I C A N L (RED)
8 I 9
1 I2I3I4 I 5 6|7|
11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 / / 24
27 28 29 30 /
25 26
/
Wire side of female terminals
CANH (WHT)
Is there
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM
connector terminal E24 and the gauge control
module, the ABS modulator-control unit, or the
DLC.B
continuity?
N O — G o t o step 24.
YES—Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM
connector terminal E11 and the gauge control
module, the ABS modulator-control unit, or the
DLC.B
N O — G o t o step 23.
(cont'd)
11-171
PGM-FI S f stem
F-CAISI Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
24. Reconnect all connectors.
25. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).
26. Disconnect the gauge control module 40P
connector.
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS identify
the
vehicle?
YES—Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-161).H
IMO—Goto step 28.
28. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
29. Reconnect the gauge control module 40P connector.
30. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector.
31. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS identify
the
vehicle?
YES—Replace the ABS modulator-control unit
(see page 19-79). H
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
11-172
SV11L Circuit Troubieshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E29 and body g r o u n d .
2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-142).
Does
the MIL indicator
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
flash?
1 |2 | 3 4 | 5T m
8 9
11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25 26
27 28 29 30
Y E S — G o t o step3.
//
NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control
module, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK,
replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-161). B
SCS (BRN)
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).
W i r e side of female
terminals
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is there
Is a short
continuity?
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (A31) and the SRS unit, the EPS control unit,
or the DLC.B
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198).H
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P), then
disconnect the HDS.
11-173
PGIVi-FS S f stem
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Before y o u begin, make sure the HDS and its
DLC cable are w o r k i n g properly.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect the HDS t o the DLC (see page 11-3).
Does the ABS indicator
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Y E S — G o to the ABS system's general
troubleshooting information (see page 1 9 - 3 7 ) . •
Does the HDS identify
the
stay
on?
vehicle?
N O — G o t o step 11.
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
N O — G o t o step 20.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
Does the immobilizer
system w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the
immobilizer indicator.
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
indicator
stay on or
flash?
Y E S — G o to the immobilizer system's
troubleshooting (see page 22-180). m
Y E S — G o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—Go t o step 13.
N O — G o t o step 5.
13. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function without the
HDS (see page 22-142).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the SRS
indicator.
Does the SRS indicator
stay
on?
Y E S — G o to the SRS system's general
troubleshooting information (see page 24-29).B
N O — G o t o step 7.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Start the engine, and watch the EPS indicator.
Does the EPS indicator
stay
on?
Y E S — G o to the EPS system's general
troubleshooting information (see page 17-18).H
NO—Go to step 9.
11-174
Are any indicators
flashing?
Y E S — G o to step 14.
NO—Troubleshoot the gauge control module
(see page 22-142).
17. Continue t o check for continuity between DLC
terminals No. 1 and No. 7 and body g r o u n d
individually, while disconnecting these parts, one
at a t i m e :
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
16. Check for continuity between body ground and DLC
terminals No. 1 and No. 7 individually.
DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R
DIAG-H (GRY)
\ 1
\9
(DLC)
K-LINE
/ /
/ /
4
12
5
/
6
14
7
(RED/WHT)
/\16/
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gauge control module 40P connector
SRS unit connector A (28P)
ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector
Immobilizer control unit 7P connector
A u d i o unit 17P connector
EPS control unit connector D (28P)
DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R
DIAG-H (GRY)
(DLC)
K-LINE
(RED/WHT)
14
Terminal side of female
is there
terminals
coutinuity?
YES—Goto step 17.
Terminal side of female
terminals
N O — G o t o step 18.
Does continuity
components is
go away when one of the
disconnected?
above
YES—Replace the part that caused an open w h e n it
was disconnected. H
NO—Repair short in the wire between the DLC
No. 7 (K-line) and the ABS modulator-control unit,
the SRS unit, the audio unit, the EPS control unit, or
the gauge control module, or DLC No. 1 (DIAG-H
line) and the immobilizer control unit. •
(cont'd)
11-175
PGM-FI S f stem
D L C Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Connect DLC terminals No. 1 and No. 7 to body
ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
DATA LINK
\ 1
\9
K-LINE
/
4
/
21. Check odometer/tripmeter for "Error 1 " message.
CONNECTOR (DLC)
DIAG-H (GRY)
12
(RED/WHT)
/
/
Is Error
1
displayed?
Y E S — G o t o step 35.
5 6 7
14
20. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-142).
16 /
N O — G o t o step 22.
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER
WIRE
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
23. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
Terminal side of female
terminals
24. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and
body ground.
19. Check f o r continuity between body ground and
these connector terminals:
Connector
Gauge control
module 40P
ABS modulatorcontrol unit 25P
SRS unit25P
Audio unit 17P
EPS control unit
28P
Immobilizer
control unit 7P
Unit
Terminal
No. 37
(RED/WHT)
No. 10
(RED/WHT)
No. 24
(RED/WHT)
No. 6
(RED/WHT)
No. 17
(RED/WHT)
No. 3 (GRY)
DLC
Terminal
No. 7
(RED/WHT)
No. 7
(RED/WHT)
No. 7
(RED/WHT)
No. 7
(RED/WHT)
No. 7
(RED/WHT)
No. 1 (GRY)
DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R
12
14
(DLC)
16
1
+B
Terminal side of female
Is there battery
(WHT/RED)
terminals
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 25.
Is there continuity between the DLC terminal
each of the terminals in the chart?
and
YES—Replace the unit that does not communicate
w i t h the HDS.B
NO—Repair open in the wire between the DLC
(K-line or DIAG-H line) and the appropriate
connector. •
11-176
NO—Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 8 and the No. 8 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay b o x . B
25. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No. 4 and
No. 16.
3 1 . Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E11 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
GND
1 |2 |3 |4 | 5 6 |7| |8 | 9
11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22 / 24
25 26
27 28 29 30
(BLK)
/
7
14
12
/
16
CANH (WHT)
+ B (WHT/RED)
Wire side of female terminals
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there
battery
voltage?
Is there
continuity?
YES—Goto step 26.
YES—Goto step 32.
NO—Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 4 and G403 (see page 2 2 - 2 6 ) . •
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E11) and DLC terminal No. 6 . B
26. Connect the HDS t o the DLC (see page 11-3).
32. Disconnect the j u m p e r wire.
27. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
33. Connect DLC terminal No. 14 t o body ground w i t h a
jumper wire.
28. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
29. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
30. Connect DLC terminal No. 6 t o body ground w i t h a
jumper wire.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
12
14
CANL (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
CANH (WHT)
\
1
\ 9
/
/
/
/
4
12
5
/
6
14
7
/ I
1 6 /
Terminal side of female terminals
JUMPER WIRE
Terminal side of female terminals
(cont'd)
11-177
PGM-FI S f stem
D L C Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
34. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E24 and body ground.
35. Try t o start the engine.
Does the engine start and idle
smoothly?
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
YES—Go to the F-CAN circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-167). •
1
/
2
11
22 /
3 I
12
24
/
8 9
4 I5 6 I7
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28 29 30
25 26
N O — G o t o step 36.
36. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
CANL (RED)
37. Check the No. 3 IG (50 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — U p d a t e the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E24) and DLC terminal No. 14.B
11-178
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 IG
(50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire is OK,
go t o step 38.
NO—Repair short in the wire between the No. 3 IG
(50 A) fuse and the under-hood fuse/relay box. Also
replace the No. 3 IG (50 A) fuse. •
38. Inspect the No. 14 IGP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse
41. Check for continuity between body ground and
PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) 4P connector
terminals No. 2 and No. 4 individually.
OK?
P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y 1 (Fl M A I N ) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
Y E S — G o t o step 45.
+B
A
4
N O — G o t o step39.
X
39. Remove the b l o w n No. 14 IGP (15 A) fuse f r o m the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
1
2
Q
O
+ B
St
40. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) (A) f r o m
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
(si
Terminal side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the No. 14
IGP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN).
If the wire OK, replace the dashboard wire harness
(under-dash fuse/relay box) Also replace the
No. 1 4 I G P 0 5 A ) fuse.H
N O — G o t o step 42.
(cont'd)
11-179
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting fcont'd)
42.
Disconnect each ofthe c o m p o n e n t s orconnectors
44.
C h e c k for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1
below, o n e at a time, a n d c h e c k for continuity
( F l M A I N ) 4P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 1 a n d b o d y
b e t w e e n P G M - F I m a i n relay 1 (Fl MAIN) 4 P
ground.
connector terminal No. 1 a n d body ground.
MAIN RELAY 1 (Fi MAIN)
PGM-FI
• PGM-FI main relay 2 ( F U E L
4P
CONNECTOR
PUMP)
• E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r A (31P)
• E a c h i n j e c t o r 2P c o n n e c t o r
• C a m s h a f t p o s i t i o n ( C M P ) s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r
• Crankshaft position (CKP) s e n s o r 3 P connector
• N o . 3 1 LAF (7.5 A) f u s e i n t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e /
IGP
relay box
• Throttle actuator control m o d u l e
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY 1 (Fl MAIN)
4P
relay
Terminal
CONNECTOR
Is there
IGP
side o f female
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short int h e w i r e b e t w e e n
PGM-FI
m a i n relay 1 (Fl M A I N ) a n d e a c h item. A l s o r e p l a c e
t h e N o . 14 I G P (15 A ) f u s e . H
N O - R e p l a c e P G M - F I m a i n r e l a y 1 (Fl M A I N ) . A l s o
r e p l a c e t h e N o . 14 I G P (15 A ) f u s e . H
Terminal side of female terminals
45.
Does
continuity
components
go away
is
when
one
of the
above
I n s p e c t t h e N o . 11 I G F U E L P U M P (15 A ) f u s e i n t h e
under-dash fuse/relay box.
disconnected?
Is the fuse
OK?
YES—Replace the c o m p o n e n t that m a d e t h e short
t o b o d y g r o u n d g o a w a y w h e n d i s c o n n e c t e d . If t h e
Y E S - G o t o s t e p 58.
i t e m i s t h e E C M / P C M , u p d a t e t h e E C M / P C M if it
d o e s not h a v e the latest software, o r substitute a
N O — G o t o s t e p 46.
k n o w n - g o o d E C M / P C M ( s e e p a g e 11-7), t h e n
r e c h e c k . If t h e s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n g o e s a w a y w i t h
46.
a known-good E C M / P C M , replace the original E C M /
R e m o v e t h e b l o w n N o . 11 I G F U E L P U M P (15 A )
fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
P C M ( s e e p a g e 11-198). A l s o r e p l a c e t h e N o . 14 I G P
43.
(15 A ) f u s e . H
47.
J u m p t h e S C S line with t h eH D S .
N O — G o t o s t e p 43.
48.
D i s c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r E (31P).
Disconnect the connectors from these components:
• PGM-FI main relay 2 ( F U E L
PUMP)
• E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r A (44P)
• Injectors
• C a m s h a f t position (CMP) sensor
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
• N o . 31 L A F (7.5 A ) f u s e i n t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e /
relay b o x
• Throttle actuator control m o d u l e
11-180
relay
49. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E9 and body ground.
5 1 . Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E9 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
IG1
I
1
/
22
3
2
11 1 2
/
24
/
4 |
(BLK/YEL)
5
6
7
I
8
9
25 26
2 7 2 8 29 30
/
/
22
YES—Goto step 50.
N O - R e p l a c e the No. 11 IG FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse,
and update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
11 12
/
24
/
8
9
6
7 !
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25 26
27 28 29 30
Wire side of female
terminals
continuity?
(BLK/YEL)
I
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
14 1 5 16 17 18 19 2 0 21
Wire side of female
Is there
IG1
I
Is there
7
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the No. 11
IG FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9),
between the No. 11 IG FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), or between the
No. 11 IG FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the
immobilizer control unit. Also replace the No. 11 IG
FUEL PUMP (15 A) f u s e . B
N O — G o t o step 52.
50. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A)
f r o m the under-dash fuse/relay box.
52. Remove the center console (see page 20-71).
53. Remove the access panel f r o m the floor (see step 4
on page 11-296).
54. Disconnect the fuel p u m p 4P connector.
(cont'd)
11-181
PGM-FI S f stem
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
55. Check for continuity between fuel p u m p 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
F U E L P U M P 4P
57. Check for continuity between fuel p u m p 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
F U E L P U M P 4P
C O N N E C T O R
1
2
3
4
FUEL
FUEL PUMP
(YEL/GRN)
1 2
3
continuity?
PUMP
(YEL/GRN)
4
Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the fuel
p u m p and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also
replace the No. 11 IG FUEL PUMP (15 A) f u s e . B
Y E S - R e p l a c e PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
Also replace the No. 11 IG FUEL PUMP (15 A)
fuse.B
NO—Go t o step 56.
NO—Check the fuel p u m p , and replace it if
necessary (see page 11-299). Also replace the
No. 11 IG FUEL PUMP (15 A) f u s e . B
56. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A).
58. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
59. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors E (31P).
60. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-182
61. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E9 and body ground.
64. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) (A) f r o m
the under-hood fuse/relay box.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
1 1 2 1 34 I 5 6 | 7
8 | 9
11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
27 28 29 30
25 26
/
/
/
Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
65. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1
(Fl MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
Y E S — G o to step 62.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 11 IG
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM (E9).H
P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y 1 ( F l M A I N ) 4P
62. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E7 and body ground.
+ B
CONNECTOR
A
4
X
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
2
1
3
MRLY (RED/YEL)
1
2 | 3 |4 | 5 6 | 7
8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28 29 30
25 26
A
/22 11 12
/
24
/
Terminal side of female
Is there battery
Wire side of female
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 67.
terminals
terminals
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 66.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 14
IGP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN).
If the wire is OK, replace the dashboard wire
harness (under-dash fuse/relay box).
N O — G o t o step 63.
63. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
11-183
PGM-FI S f stem
D L C Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
66. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1
(Fl MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and ECM/
PCM connector terminal E7.
P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y 1 (Fl M A I N ) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
Terminal side of
female terminals
67. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
68. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
69. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
IGP2 (YEL/BLK)
(31P)
IGP1 (YEL/BLK)
MRLY
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
1
2 3
11 12
22 / 24
/
/
Wire side of female
Is there
MRLY
(RED/YEL)
4 | 5 6 7
8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
27 28 29 30
25 26
8 9
1 |2 |3 4 I 5 6 I7
10 / / 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 21
/ 23 24 /
/ 28 / 30 31
/
/
terminals
Wire side of female
terminals
continuity?
Is there battery
Y E S - T e s t PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN)
(see page 22-53). If the relay is OK, update the ECM/
PCM if it does not have the latest software, or
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away
w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
ECM/PCM (see page 11-198).B
voltage?
YES—Goto step 74.
N O — G o t o step70.
70. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7 1 . Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) (A).
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E7) and PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl M A I N ) . !
11-184
72. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl
MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
74. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
PCM connector terminals A4, A5, A8, A9, and E3
individually.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
(31P)
MAIN RELAY 1 (Fi MAIN) 4 P CONNECTOR
PGM-FI
PG1 (BLK)
PG2
4
1
10
+ B
/
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
(PNK)
LG1
3 4 I 5 6 |7
13 14 15 16 / 18
23 24
28
2
/ /
//
/
/
/
(BRN/YEL)
8 9
20 21
30 31
(VXY)
Terminal side of female
terminals
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
LG3
Is there battery
voltage?
(BRN/YEL)
2 3 4 I 5 6 |7
8 9
11
/ 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
25 26
27 28 29 30
1
YES—Go to step 73.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 14
IGP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl
MAIN).B
73. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1
(Fl MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/
PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually.
P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y 1 (FlM A I N ) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
IGP
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
IGP1
1
10
2 3 4 I 5 6
13 14 15 16
23 24
/ /
I
/
/
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
Is there less than 1.0 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 75.
(31P)
(YEL/BLK)
I
/
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e
/
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than
1.0 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (A4, A5, A8,
A9, E3).B
Terminal side o f
female terminals
IGP2
/
7
18
28
/
/
8 9
20 21
30 31
terminals
continuity?
Y E S - R e p l a c e PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl M A I N ) . I I
NO—Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 1 (Fl MAIN) and the ECM/PCM (A2, A 3 ) . B
(cont'd)
11-185
PGM-FI S f stem
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
75. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
78. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
76. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
PCM connector terminal A 2 1 .
79. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
80. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A21 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A
1
10
/
2
3 I4 I 5
/ /
1 3 14 15 16
//
23 24
/
/
(31P)
8 | 9
6 | 7
18
28
/
/
2 0 21
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
30 3 1
10
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
/
6|7|
13 14 1 5 16
2 3 24
/
/
/
18
28
8
/
I9
2 0 21
/ '30
31
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
Wire side of female
terminals
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 8 1 .
Is there
N O — G o t o step 77.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor or the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor (A/T model). •
77. Disconnect the connector f r o m each of these
sensors, one at a time, while measuring voltage
between body ground and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A21 w i t h the ignition switch ON (II).
• MAP sensor
• A/T model: Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A
1 I 2 I 3
10
/
/ /
23 24
4 I 5
6 | 7 |
1 3 14 15 16
//
/
/
18
28
(31P)
8 | 9
/
/
2 0 21
30 3 1
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the sensor that restored 5 V w h e n
disconnected.!
N O — G o t o step 78.
11-186
continuity?
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
81. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
PCM connector terminal A20.
84. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
85. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A ( 3 1 P )
1
I2 I
10
/
3 I4 I 5
23 24
/ /
8
6 | 7
13 1 4 1 5 16
/
/
18
/
28 /
86. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A20 and body ground.
9
21
'3 0 31
20
v
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
10
/
Wire side of female
/ /
6
1 3 14 15 16
2 3 24
/ /
I7
/
/
I8
18
28
/
/
1
9
2C 21
30 31
terminals
v
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 87.
Is there continuity
NO—Goto step82.
82. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
83. Disconnect the connector f r o m each of these
sensors, one at a t i m e , while measuring voltage
between body ground and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A20 w i t h the ignition switch ON (II).
• EGR valve position sensor
• A/T model: Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A20) the EGR valve position sensor or the
input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor. •
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198).•
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1 I 2 I 3
10
/
4
5
13 14 1 5
23 24
/
6 I7
16 / 18
/
28
8 I
/
/ '3 0
31
v
Wire side of female
9
2 0 21
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the sensor that restored 5 V w h e n
disconnected. •
N O - G o t o step 84.
(cont'd)
11-187
PGM-FI S f stem
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
87. Measure voltage between body g r o u n d and ECM/
PCM connector terminal D12.
90. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9 1 . Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR D (17P)
/
/ /
8 9 10
15
13 14
92. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D12 and body ground.
5 6
12
/
/
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR D (17P)
/
VCC3
(BRN)
/
/ /
8 9 10
15
13 14
Wire side of female terminals
Is thereabouts
5 6
12
/
/
/
/
VCC3
(BRN)
V?
Wire side of female terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 93.
Is there
N O — G o t o step 88.
88. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (D12) and APP sensor A. •
89. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor 6P connector, then measure voltage
between body ground and ECM/PCM connector
terminal D12 w i t h the ignition switch ON (II).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR D (17P)
//
/
8 9 10
15
13 14
5 6
12
/
/
/
VCC3
(BRN)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
about
5
V?
YES—Replace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11-246),
N O — G o t o step 90.
11-188
continuity?
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or subsutitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
93. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
PCM connector terminal E 5 .
ECM/PCM C O N N E C T O R E {31P)
VCC4 ( O R N )
1
/
22
2
3
11 12
/
/
24
6|7
4 | 5
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the sensor that restored 5 V w h e n
disconnected. •
N O — G o t o step 96.
8
9
96. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21
25 26
/
27 28 29 30
97. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
98. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E5 and body ground.
Wire side of female
terminals
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
VCC4
Is there about 5 V?
1
/
Y E S — U p d a t e the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
22
NO—Go to step 94.
2
3
11 1 2
/
24
/
4 I 5
(ORN)
6 | 7
8
9
1 4 15 16 17 18 19 2 0 21
25 26
27 28 29 30
Wire side of female
/
terminals
94. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there
95. Disconnect the connector f r o m each of these
sensors, one at time, while measuring voltage
between body ground and ECM/PCM connector
terminal E5 w i t h the ignition switch ON (II).
• Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor
• Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor B
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E
VCC4
2 I 3 I4 I 5
1
/
22
11 12
/
24
/
(31P)
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor or APP sensor B. •
NO—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or subsutitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
(ORN)
6 I 7 |
I8
I 9
14 15 16 17 18 1 9 20 21
25 26
27 28 2 9 30
Wire side of female
/
terminals
11-189
PGM-FI S f stem
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-280).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-306).
3. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
4. Disconnect the injector 2P connectors (A) f r o m the injectors (B), and remove the harness clips (C) f r o m the fuel rail
(D).
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (E).
6. Remove the fuel rail bracket (F).
7. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (G) f r o m the fuel rail.
8. Remove the injector clip (H) f r o m the injector.
9. Remove the injector f r o m the fuel rail.
11-190
10. Coat the new O-rings (A) w i t h clean engine oil, then insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C).
11. Install the injector clip (D).
12. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the injectors in the fuel rail first, then install t h e m in the injector base (E).
13. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts. Install the fuel rail bracket (F).
14. Connect the quick-connect fittings.
15. Connect the connectors to the injectors, and install the harness clips (G).
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this t w o or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
17. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
18. Install the air cleaner (see page 11-306).
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
11-191
PGM-FI S f stem
IAT Sensor Replacement
MAP Sensor Replacement
1.
D i s c o n n e c t t h e MAP
s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r
(A).
1.
D i s c o n n e c t t h e IAT
2. Pull the sensor (B)
2. R e m o v e the screw (B).
2P c o n n e c t o r
out
of
(A).
its g r o m m e t
(C).
A
3.
4.
R e m o v e the
MAP
Install t h e p a r t s in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of
w i t h a n e w O - r i n g (D).
11-192
3.
s e n s o r (C).
removal
I n s t a l l t h e p a r t s in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement
1. R e m o v e t h e a i r c l e a n e r ( s e e p a g e
11-306).
1.
Drain the engine coolant (see page
10-6).
2.
D i s c o n n e c t t h e E C T s e n s o r 1 2P c o n n e c t o r .
2.
R e m o v e the splash shield.
3.
R e m o v e the E C T s e n s o r 1
3.
D i s c o n n e c t t h e E C T s e n s o r 2 2P c o n n e c t o r ( A ) .
(B).
A
A
B
4.
I n s t a l l t h e p a r t s in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
removal
with a n e w O-ring (C).
4.
5.
Remove E C T sensor 2
(B).
Install t h e p a r t s in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of
removal
w i t h a n e w O - r i n g (C), t h e n r e f i l l t h e r a d i a t o r w i t h
engine coolant (see page
10-6).
11-193
PGM-FI S f stem
A / F Sensor Replacement
Secondary H 0 2 S Replacement
Special Tools Required
0 2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or
equivalent, commercially available
Special Tools Required
0 2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or
equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then
remove the A/F sensor (B).
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-71), and
the rear heater upper duct.
2. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A).
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
A
3. Remove the secondary H02S (A).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-194
CMP Sensor Replacement
CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-306),
1. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector (A).
2. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector (A).
2. Remove the CKP sensor (B).
3. Remove the CMP sensor (B).
B
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (C).
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (C),
4. Do the CKP Pattern clear/pattern learn procedure
(see page 11-4).
11-195
PGIVS-FI S f stem
V S S Replacement
Knock Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
M/T
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-306).
2. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector (A).
2. Disconnect the VSS 3P connector (A).
3. Remove the knock sensor (B).
B
3. Remove the VSS (B).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order removal w i t h
new O-rings.
11-196
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
ELD Replacement
USA models
6.
D i s c o n n e c t t h e E L D 3P c o n n e c t o r ( A ) , t h e n
the E L D
1.
remove
(B).
M a k e s u r e y o u h a v e the anti-theft c o d e for the
a u d i o unit, t h e n write d o w n the a u d i o p r e s e t s .
2.
R e m o v e the
3.
R e m o v e the under-hood fuse/relay box.
4.
battery.
R e m o v e the under-hood fuse/relay box lower cover
(A) f r o m the f u s e / r e l a y b o x .
\
7.
Install t h e p a r t s in t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r of r e m o v a l .
8.
Reinstall the
9.
battery.
E n t e r t h e anti-theft c o d e for the a u d i o unit, t h e n
enter the audio presets.
10.
Set the clock.
11-197
PGM-FI S f stem
E C M / P C M Replacement
NOTE:
• Make sure the HDS is loaded w i t h the latest software
version.
• If you are replacing the ECM/PCM after substituting a
known-good ECM/PCM, reinstall the original ECM/
PCM, then do this procedure.
• During the procedure, if any READ DATA, WRITE
DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then
continue.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
7. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then select
READ DATA and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
NOTE:
• Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life
data f r o m the original ECM/PCM so you can later
download (WRITE) it into the new ECM/PCM.
• If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with
this procedure.
8. A/T: Select the A/T system w i t h the HDS.
9. A/T: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM M E N U , then
select READ DATA and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
NOTE:
• Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data
f r o m the original PCM so you can later download
(WRITE) It into the new PCM.
• If READ DATA Indicates FAILED, continue with
this procedure.
10. Turn the Ignition switch OFF.
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM. If It doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-174). If y o u are
returning f r o m DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip
steps 4 through 9,17 through 22, and 25 through
27, and do this after replacing the ECM/PCM:
• Replace the engine oil (see page 8-5) and the
engine oil filter (see page 8-6).
• Replace the ATF (A/T) (see page 14-227).
• Clean the throttle body (see page 11-306).
4. Select the PGM-FI system w i t h the HDS.
5. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
6. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue w i t h this procedure.
11-198
12. Remove the passenger's dashboard under cover
(see page 20-78), the side kick panel (see page
20-52), and the glove box (see page 20-77).
13. Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the
bolts (B) then remove the ECM/PCM (C).
20. A/T; If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 9, go
to step 23. Otherwise go to step 2 1 .
21. A/T: Select the A/T SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
22. A/T; Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then
select WRITE DATA and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED,
continue w i t h this procedure.
23. Select IMMOBI system w i t h the HDS.
24. Enter the immobilizer code w i t h the ECM/PCM
replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows y o u to
start the engine.
25. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6 clean the
throttle body (see page 11-306), then go to step 26.
26. If the READ DATA failed in step 7 or the WRITE
DATA failed in step 19, replace the engine oil
(see page 8-5) and engine oil filter (see page 8-6),
then go to step 27 (A/T) or step 28 (M/T).
14. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of
removal.
27. If the READ DATA failed in step 9 or the WRITE
DATA failed in step 24, replace the ATF (see page
14-227), then go to step 28.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
28. Select PGM-FI system, and reset the ECM/PCM w i t h
the HDS.
16. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM w i t h the
HDS.
29. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7).
NOTE; DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or
M i s m a t c h " may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it,
and continue this procedure.
30. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
3 1 . Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
17. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 7,
go to step 20 (A/T) or step 23 (M/T). Otherwise, go
to step 18.
18. Select the PGM-FI system w i t h the HDS.
19. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM M E N U , then select
WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE; If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED,
continue w i t h this procedure.
11-199
Electronic Throttle Control System
11-200
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0122: T P S e n s o r A Circuit L o w Voltage
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
7. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or
THROTTLE BODY 6P C O N N E C T O R
less?
2
Y E S — G o to step 4.
TPSA
3 4
5 6
(RED/BLK)
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module.•
W i r e side o f female
terminals
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are DTC P0122 and P0222 indicated
time?
YES—Goto step 9.
at the same
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(TPSA line), then go t o step 17.
N O — G o t o step 5.
NO—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go t o step
17 and recheck. If DTC P0122 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go t o step 17. If
DTC P0122 is indicated, go t o step 15.
(cont'd)
11-201
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
14. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 11 and
body ground.
THROTTLE BODY 6P C O N N E C T O R
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL M O D U L E 16P
CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4
V C C
5 6
1
(GRN)
9
2
/ //
1 0 11 1 2
V C C
Wire side of female
/
7
6
14
8
/ /
(GRN)
terminals
Wire side o f female
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 15.
N O — G o t o step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
12. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
13. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 2
to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4
V C C
(GRN)
J U M P E R
Wire side o f female
11-202
5 6
WIRE
terminals
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go to step
17 and recheck. If DTC P0122 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go to step 17. If
DTC P0122 is indicated, go t o step 15.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(VCC line), then go to step 17.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
17. Reconnect all connectors.
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
20. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Are
any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0122 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
D T C s troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting Is complete. •
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0123: TP S e n s o r A Circuit High Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
8. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
2
TPSA
3
4
5
6
(RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o to step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module. •
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S —Go to step 18.
NO—Go to step 9.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Are DTC P0123
time?
and P0223 indicated
at the same
10. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
N O — G o t o step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 1
to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2 3 4 5 6
TPSA
(RED/BLK)
J U M P E R
WIRE
Wire side of female
11-204
terminals
12. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 1 6 P connector terminal No. 1 0 and
body ground.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 4
to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
T H R O T T L E BODY 6 P C O N N E C T O R
T H R O T T L E A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L M O D U L E 16P
CONNECTOR
1
2
9
10
A/
1
/
11 / / /
12
7
6
8
14
2
3
S G (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
T P S A (RED/BLK)
Wire side of female
Wire side of female
Is there
6
4J 5
terminals
terminals
continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11 -246), then go t o step
20 and recheck. If DTC P0123 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go to step 20. If
DTC P0123 is indicated, go to step 18.
17. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 9 and
body ground.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE 16P
CONNECTOR
1
9
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(TPSA line), then go t o step 20.
2
1 0 11 1 2
S G (BLU)
7
6
8
/ //
14
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female
terminals
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
15. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
Is there
continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go to step
20 and recheck. If DTC P0123 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go to step 20. If
DTC P0123 is indicated, go to step 18.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(SG line), then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
11-205
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
1 8 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
20. Reconnect all connectors.
21. Turn the Ignition switch ON (II).
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM Idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0123 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-206
DTC P0222: TP S e n s o r B C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE; Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
7. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Check T P SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or
THROTTLE BODY
6P CONNECTOR
less?
1 2
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
3 4
5 6
T P S B (RED)
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module. H
Wire side of female terminals
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are DTC P0122
time?
and P0222 indicated
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
at the same
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(TPSB line), then g o t o step 17.
N O — G o t o step 5.
NO—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go to step
17 and recheck. If DTC P0222 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go t o step 17. If
DTC P0222 is indicated, g o t o step 15.
(cont'd)
11-207
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
T H R O T T L E B O D Y 6P
14. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 11 and
body ground.
CONNECTOR
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL M O D U L E 16P
CONNECTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
V C C (GRN)
9
2
///
/ //
7
6
1 0 11 1 2
14
V C C
(GRN)
8
Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
N O — G o t o step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
12. Disconnect the throttle body 6 P connector.
13. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 2
to body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1
2
3
V C C
4
6
(GRN)
J U M P E R
Wire side o f female
11-208
5
WIRE
terminals
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go t o step
17 and recheck. If DTC P0222 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then g o t o step 17. If
DTC P0222 is indicated, go t o step 15.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(VCC line), then go t o step 17.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
17. Reconnect all connectors.
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
20. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0222 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting ( c o n t ' d )
DTC P0223: TP S e n s o r B C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e
8 . Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
THROTTLE BODY 6 P
CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1 2
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3 4
5 6
T P S B (RED)
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there
about
4.8 V or
more?
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module. S
Is there
about
5
V?
Y E S - G o t o step 18.
N O — G o t o step 9.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Are
DTC
P0123
and P0223
indicated
at the
time?
same
10. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
N O — G o t o step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 3
to body ground with a jumper wire.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
7 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1 2
3 4
5 6
T P S B (RED)
J U M P E R
Wire side of female
11-210
WIRE
terminals
12. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 12 and
body ground.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 4
to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL
MODULE 16P
CONNECTOR
1
9
2
1
/ / /
/ /
1 0 11 1 2
7
6
8
2 3 4 5 6
S G
14
(BLU)
J U M P E R
T P S B (RED)
Wire side o f female
Wire side of female
is there
WIRE
terminals
terminals
continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go t o
step 20 and recheck. If DTC P0223 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go to step 20. If
DTC P0223 is indicated, go to step 18.
17. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 9 and
body ground.
THROTTLE A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L M O D U L E 16P
C O N N E C T O R
1
9
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(TPSB line), then go t o step 20.
2
///
/
1 0 11 1 2
S G
6
14
(BLU)
7
8
A
/
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female
terminals
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
15. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
is there
continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go to
step 20 and recheck. If DTC P0223 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go to step 20. If
DTC P0223 is indicated, go to step 18.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(SG line), then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
11-211
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
20. Reconnect all connectors.
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0223 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. B
11-212
D T C P I § 8 3 : Throttle V a l v e Default Position
Spring Performance Problem
9. Push the throttle valve closed as s h o w n .
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body w h e n you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If y o u do, y o u
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Release the throttle valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the throttle valve
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
return?
YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-306),
then go t o step 13 and recheck. If DTC P1683 is
indicated, go to step 11.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and w a i t 10 seconds.
N O — G o t o step 11.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
12. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
Is DTC P1683
indicated?
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S — G o t o step 7.
14. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module.H
15. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
body.
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P1683 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-213
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting f cont'd)
D T C P1884: Throttle Valve Return Spring
Performance Problem
9. Push the throttle valve open as shown.
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If y o u do, y o u
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
I
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Release the throttle valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the throttle valve
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
return?
YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-306),
then go to step 13 and recheck. If DTC P1684 is
indicated, go to step 11.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
N O — G o t o step 11.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
12. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
Is DTC PI684
indicated?
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S — G o t o step 7.
14. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module. •
15. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
body.
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P1684 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-214
D T C P2101: Throttle Actuator S y s t e m
Malfunction
11. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Does the throttle valve operate
smoothly?
YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-306),
then go t o step 20 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is
indicated, then go to step 18.
N O — G o t o step 13.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
Is DTC P2101
indicated?
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Go to step 5.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
15. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 6 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
T H R O T T L E B O D Y 6P
CONNECTOR
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• APPSENSOR A
2
M -
3 4
5 6
(YEL)
M +
(YEL/RED)
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2101
indicated?
YES—Go to step 7.
J U M P E R
Wire side of female
WIRE
terminals
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then clean the throttle body (see page
11-306). H
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
body.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-215
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 8.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL M O D U L E 16P
CONNECTOR
24. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• APPSENSOR A
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
M +
M -
(YEL/RED)
2
9
///
/ //
1 0 11 1 2
7
6
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
terminals
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2101 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, clean the throttle body (see page 11-306),
then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
continuity?
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go t o
step 20 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go to step 20. If
DTC P2101 is indicated, go t o step 18.
NO—Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(motor drive lines), then go t o step 20.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
20. Reconnect all connectors.
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11-216
indicated?
8
14
Wire side of female
Is there
(YEL)
DTC P2108: T h r o t t l e A c t u a t o r C o n t r o l M o d u l e
Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2108
indicated?
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), and recheck. If
Temporary DTC or DTC P2108 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246). •
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body, the throttle actuator control
module, and the ECM/PCM. •
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2118: Throttle Actuator Current R a n g e /
Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
4. A t throttle body side, measure resistance between
throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and
No. 6 w i t h the throttle fully closed.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
2. Measure resistance between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 8.
5
6
M-
M +
THROTTLE ACTUATOR C O N T R O L M O D U L E 16P
C O N N E C T O R
M +
Terminal side of male
M -
(YEL/RED)
2
9
/
/ //
1 0 11 1 2
6
7
14
Wire side of female
(YEL)
8
/ /
Is there about 1.0 Q or
terminals
less?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Repair short in the wires between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(motor drive lines), then go to step 6.
terminals
5. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
Is there about 1.0 0, or
less?
6. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go t o step 6
and recheck. If DTC P2118 is not indicated, replace
the original throttle actuator control module
(see page 11-246), then go t o step 6.
8. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
11-218
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—if Temporary DTC or DTC P2118 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2122: A P P S e n s o r A (TP S e n s o r D)
Circuit L o w Voltage
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there about 0.2 V or
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
less?
1 2 3 4 5 6
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
APSA
(PUR)
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. •
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female
terminals
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
Is there
continuity?
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
YES—Repair short in the wire between APP sensor
A and the ECM/PCM (D6), then go to step 20.
N O — G o t o step 11.
APP S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R
1 2
SG3
(BLK)
3 4
5 6
11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
VCC3 ( B R N )
2
APSA
Wire side of female
terminals
3 4 5 6
(PUR)
J U M P E R
WIRE
Is there about 5 V?
Wire side of female
Y E S — G o t o step7.
N O — G o t o step 17.
11-220
terminals
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D6 and body ground.
|
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R D(17P)
A P S A
/
/ /
(PUR)
8 9 10
15
13 14
16. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is there about 0.2 V or
5 6
12
Y E S — G o t o step 25.
/
N O — G o t o step 18.
/
/
less?
17. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminals D10 and D12.
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R D(17P)
/ //
8 9 10
15
13 14
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
NO—Repair open in the wire between APP sensor
A and the ECM/PCM (D6), then go to step 20.
S G 3 (BLK)
5 6
12
/
/
/
VCC3
(BRN)
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
Wire side of female
terminals
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
Is there about 5 V?
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
5 6
2 3
APSA
(PUR)
J U M P E R
VCC3
YES—Repair open in the wire between APP sensor
A and the ECM/PCM (D12), then go to step 20.
N O — G o t o step 25.
(BRN)
WIRE
Wire side of female
terminals
(cont'd)
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd!
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
I
19. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-246).
20. Reconnect all connectors.
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2122 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2122
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-222
DTC P2123: A P P S e n s o r A (TP Sensor D)
Circuit High Voltage
7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminals D10 and D12.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R D (17P)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
.
/ 8 /9 /10 5 126
/ /
15
13 14
/
S G 3 (BLK)
V C C 3 (BRN)
Is there about 4.9 V or more?
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
Wire side of female
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. •
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (D10) and the APP sensor, then go to step 10.
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
NO—Go to step 15.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
9. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-246).
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
10. Reconnect all connectors.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
1 2
S G 3 (BLK)
3 4
5 6
V C C 3 (BRN)
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
14. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side of female
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o to step 8.
terminals
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P2123 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
N O - G o t o step 7.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
(cont'd)
11-223
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
16. Cheek for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC
P2123
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
11-224
D T C P2127: A P P S e n s o r B (TP S e n s o r E)
Circuit L o w Voltage
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there about 0.2 V or
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
less?
1
2
5 6
3
Y E S — G o t o step 3.
APSB
(BLU/ORN)
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. •
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female
terminals
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
Is there
continuity?
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
terminals No. 5 and No. 6.
YES—Repair short in the wire between APP sensor
B and the ECM/PCM (D5), then go to step 20.
NO—Go to step 11.
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
SG4
(PNK)
11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 4 to
body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
5 6
VCC4(ORN)
1
2
3
5 6
4
APSB
Wire side o f female
terminals
(BLU/ORN)
J U M P E R
WIRE
Is there about 5 V?
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o t o step7.
N O — G o t o step 17.
(cont'd)
11-22
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r
t e r m i n a l D5 a n d b o d y
1 5 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
ground.
16. C h e c k A P P S E N S O R B i n t h e D A T A L I S T w i t h t h e
E C M / P C M
CONNECTOR
D (17P)
APSB (BLU/ORN)
Is there about 0.2 V or
6
5
/
8
12
10
13 14
less?
YES—Goto step 25.
/
15
/ /
9
HDS.
N O — G o t o s t e p 18.
17. M e a s u r e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r
t e r m i n a l s E4 a n d E 5 .
Wire side o ffemale
Is there
terminals
E C M / P C M
E (31P)
Gb
continuity?
S G 4
YES—Goto step 13.
N O — R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n A P P s e n s o r
B a n d t h e E C M / P C M ( D 5 ) , t h e n g o t o s t e p 20.
13.
CONNECTOR
(PNK)
VCC4 (ORN)
1 |2 | 3 |4 |5 6 J7 I I 8J9
11 12 / 1 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
2 7 28 2 9 30
25 26
/
/
/
R e c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r D (17P).
Wire side o ffemale
terminals
14. C o n n e c t A P P s e n s o r 6 P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 4
a n d N o .6 with a j u m p e r
wire.
Is there about 5 V?
APP SENSOR 6 P CONNECTOR
YES—Repair o p e n in t h e wire b e t w e e n A P P s e n s o r
B a n d t h e E C M / P C M (E5), then g o tostep 20.
1
APSB
2
3
5 6
J U M P E R
Wire side o ffemale
11 -226
NO—Go tostep 25.
VCC4 (ORN)
(BLU/ORN)
WIRE
terminals
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-246).
20. Reconnect all connectors.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2127 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated D T C s troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2127
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. H
Electronic Throttle Control System
D T C Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P2128: A P P S e n s o r B (TP S e n s o r E)
Circuit High Voltage
7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminals E4 and E5.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
<2>
SG4
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is there about 4.0 V or more?
YES—Goto step 3.
1|
/22
2
I3 I4 I
11 12
/
VCC4 ( O R N )
(PNK)
24
/
5
6
I
7
25
26
27
Wire side of female
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. •
I
| 8
I
9
14 15 16 1 7 18 19 20 21
28 29 30
/
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E4) and the APP sensor, then go to step 10.
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
NO—Go to step 15.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
terminals No. 5 and No. 6.
9. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-246).
10. Reconnect all connectors.
APP S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1 2 3 4
S G 4
12. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
5 6
VCC4
(PNK)
A7v
Wire side of female
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 8.
terminals
(ORN)
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
14. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
Y E S — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P2128 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Go to step 7.
NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . i l
11-228
indicated?
15. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P2128
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2131; T P S e n s o r A / B Incorrect Voltage
Correlation
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body w h e n you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If y o u d o , y o u
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.
11. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminals No. 10 and
No. 12.
THROTTLE A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L M O D U L E 16P
CONNECTOR
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1
9
2
/
/
1 0 11 1 2
TPSA
(RED/BLK)
/
/
6
14
7
8
/ /
TPSB
(RED)
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2135
indicated?
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module.•
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
body.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Visually check the throttle valve operation w h i l e
you clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 14.
N O — G o t o step 9.
11-230
Is there
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
Does the valve temporarily
closed
position?
Wire side of female
move to its
fully
NO—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go t o step
16 and recheck. If DTC P2135 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go t o step 16.
12. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
13. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminals No. 10 and
No. 12.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE 16P
CONNECTOR
1 2
/ / /
9 10 11 12
TPSA
(RED/BLK)
6 7 8
14
/
/ /
TPSB
(RED)
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wires between the TPSA
line and the TPSB line, then go t o step 16.
N O — G o t o step 14.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
16. Reconnect all connectors.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
18. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
19. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2135 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary
DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2138: APP S e n s o r A / B (TP S e n s o r D/E)
Incorrect V o l t a g e C o r r e l a t i o n
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminals D5 and D6.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR D (17P)
<®
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
APSB (BLU/ORN)"
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1
/ / / / 5
/13 148 9 10
/
15
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal t o the floor.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P2138
Wire side of female
I APSA
6
12
(PUR)
/
terminals
indicated?
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
APP sensor A/B and the ECM/PCM. •
YES—Repair short in the wires between the ECM/
PCM terminals (D5, D6), then go to step 13.
NO—Go t o step 2 1 .
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Are they
the same
voltage?
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-246).
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
13. Reconnect all connectors.
N O — G o t o step 11.
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. '
15. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
8. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Press the accelerator pedal t o the floor.
1 U "232
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are
any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—lf Temporary DTC or DTC P2138 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the APP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step
1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
21. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P2138
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at APP sensor A/B and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 22.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2176: Throttle Actuator Control S y s t e m
Idle Position Not Learned
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body w h e n you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, y o u
w i l l seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.
10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
performing the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the throttle valve move to its fully
position?
closed
Y E S - G o t o step 11.
NO—Go to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P2135 is stored at the same time as DTC P2176,
troubleshoot DTC P2135 first, then recheck for DTC
P2176.
Is there sludge
or carbon on the throttle
valve?
YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-306),
then go to step 20.
N O — G o t o step 17.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and w a i t
10 seconds.
15. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 6 w i t h a jumper wire.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2176
indicated?
T H R O T T L E B O D Y 6P
CONNECTOR
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, then clean the throttle body (see page
11-306). •
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
body.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
11-234
1 2
3 4
M—
5 6
(YEL)
M-f
J U M P E R
Wire side o f female
WIRE
terminals
(YEL/RED)
16. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 8.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE 16P
CONNECTOR
M-f
M— (YEL)
(YEL/RED)
2
9
1 0 11 1 2
8
/ /
Are
any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—lf Temporary DTC or DTC P2176 is indicated,
check f o r poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module, clean the throttle body (see page 11-306),
then go t o step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
14
Wire side of female
Is there
7
6
25. Check f o r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
terminals
continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go to step
19 and recheck. If DTC P2176 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go t o step 19.
NO—Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module
(motor drive lines), then go t o step 19.
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
19. Reconnect all connectors.
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
21. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
22. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait
10 seconds.
11-235
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P2552: Throttle Actuator Control Module
Relay Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Test the throttle actuator control module relay
(see page 22-53).
Is the relay OK ?
Y E S — G o to step 7.
NO—Replace the throttle actuator control module
relay, then go to step 10.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Is the RELAY
circuit
OK?
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D15 and body ground.
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle actuator control module relay, the
throttle actuator control module, and the
ECM/PCM. •
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R D (17P)
/ //
8 9 10
15
13 14
N O — G o t o step 4.
5 6
12
/
//
I ETCSRLY
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(ORN)
5. Remove the throttle actuator control module
relay (A).
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the throttle
actuator control module relay and the ECM/PCM
(D15), then g o t o step 10.
N O — G o t o step 17.
11-236
10. Reconnect all connectors.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Turn the Ignition switch ON (II), and wait
10 seconds.
16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2552 Is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle actuator control module relay, the
throttle actuator control module, and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are Indicated, go t o the Indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
17. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P2252
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle actuator control module
relay, the throttle actuator control module, and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute
a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o
step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C U0107: Lost C o m m u n i c a t i o n With
Throttle Actuator Control Module
11. Check the throttle valve operation.
Does the valve open after it
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
closes?
Y E S — G o to step 12.
NO—Go to step 13.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Check the throttle valve again.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Does the throttle valve open
fully?
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 40.
Is DTC U0107
indicated?
N O — G o t o step 34.
YES—Check f o r poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body, the throttle actuator
control module relay, the throttle actuator control
module, and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 50. If
the connections are OK, go to step 6.
N O — G o t o step 4.
4. Start the engine.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC U0107
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector.
15. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 7 and
body ground.
THROTTLE A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L M O D U L E 16P
CONNECTOR
indicated?
GND
Y E S — G o to step 46.
1 2
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body, the throttle actuator control
module relay, the throttle actuator control module,
and the ECM/PCM. •
9 10 11 12
(RLK) I
/// 678
/ //
14
Wire side of female
terminals
6. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there
8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
body.
Y E S — G o t o step 16.
9. Press the accelerator pedal t o the floor.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-238
continuity?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body, the throttle actuator control module, and
G101, then go to step 50.
16. R e m o v e t h e t h r o t t l e a c t u a t o r c o n t r o l m o d u l e
relay
19. Install t h e t h r o t t l e a c t u a t o r c o n t r o l m o d u l e relay.
(A).
20. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
21.
Measure voltage between throttle actuator control
m o d u l e 16P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o .2 a n d b o d y
ground.
THROTTLE A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L MODULE 16P
C O N N E C T O R
+B
1 2
(YEL/GRN)
//
A 6 7
9 10 11 12 A 14
17.
8
//
Measure voltage between throttle actuator control
m o d u l e relay 4P connector terminal N o . 1 a n d b o d y
Wire side of female
terminals
ground.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
M O D U L E
Is there battery
CONTROL
voltage for about 2
seconds?
RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
c o n t r o l m o d u l e (seep a g e 11-246), t h e n g ot o
s t e p 5 0 a n d r e c h e c k . If D T C U 0 1 0 7 i s n o t i n d i c a t e d ,
replace t h e original throttle actuator control
+ B
m o d u l e (seepage 11-246), t h e n g ot o step 50.
(RED/WHT)
NO—Go t o step 22.
22. T u r n t h e ignition switch OFF.
Terminal side offemale
terminals
23.
Remove thethrottle actuator control module
relay
(A).
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 19.
N O — G o t o step 18.
18. C h e c k t h e N o . 3 2 D B W ( 1 5A ) f u s e i n t h e u n d e r dash subfuse/relay box.
Is the fuse
OK?
YES—Repair open inthewire between the throttle
actuator c o n t r o l m o d u l e relay ( + B line) a n d t h e
No. 32 D B W(15A )fuse, then g ot o step 50.
NO—Repair short int h e wire between t h e throttle
actuator c o n t r o l m o d u l e relay ( + B line) a n d t h e
No. 32 D B W(15A )fuse, then g ot o step 50.
(cont'd)
11-239
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
24. Check the throttle actuator control module relay
(see page 22-53).
Is the throttle
actuator
control
module
relay
30. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D15 and throttle actuator control module
relay 4P connector terminal No. 3.
OK?
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R D (17P)
YES—Go t o step 25.
/
/ /
8 9 10
15
13 14
NO—Replace the throttle actuator control module
relay, then go t o step 50.
Wire side of female terminals
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
/
| ETCSRLY
(ORN)
4
X3
2
1
ETCSRLY
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
MODULE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
(YEL/BLK)
/
/
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
M O D U L E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
26. Measure voltage between throttle actuator control
module relay 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
IGP
5 6
12
(ORN)
Terminal side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 3 1 .
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (D15) and the throttle actuator control module
relay, then go t o step 50.
Terminal side of female
Is there battery
terminals
3 1 . Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 27.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL M O D U L E 16P
CONNECTOR
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
actuator control module relay and PGM-FI main
relay 1 (Fl MAIN), then go t o step 50.
+B
1 2
(YEL/GRN)
///
/
9 10 11 12
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6 7 8
14
28. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
29. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the throttle
actuator control module and the throttle actuator
control module relay ( + B line), then go t o step 50.
NO—Go to step 32.
11-240
32. Connect throttle actuator control module relay 4P
connector terminal No. 2 t o body ground w i t h a
jumper wire.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
M O D U L E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
34. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
35. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
36. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector (see page 11-246).
37. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
1
4-B
38. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D13 and body ground.
(WHT)
J U M P E R
Terminal side of female
WIRE
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R D (17P)
/ //
terminals
8
13 14
33. Check for continuity between throttle actuator
control module 16P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
SEFD
9
10
15
5
/
6
12
//
(BLU/RED)
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL M O D U L E 16P
Wire side of female
CONNECTOR
+ B
(YEL/GRN)
///
9 10 11 12
1 2
terminals
6 7
14
8
/ //
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (D13) and the throttle actuator control module,
then go t o step 50.
NO—Go to step 39.
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 56.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
actuator control module and the throttle actuator
control module relay ( + B line), then go t o step 50.
(cont'd)
11-241
Electronic Throttle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'c
39. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D13 and throttle actuator control module
16P connector terminal No. 6.
ECM/PCM C O N N E C T O R
//
/
D
(17P)
5 6
12
8 9 10
15
13 14
S E F D (BLU/RED)
16P
CONNECTOR
1 2
/ / /
M O D U L E
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R D (17P)
(WHT/RED)
6 7 8
14
W i r e side of female
Is there
42. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P
connector.
44. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D14 and body ground.
SEFD
9 10 11 12
41. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
43. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
/
/ /
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
40. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
/ /
8 9 10
13 14
15
terminals
SEDF
continuity?
5 6
12
/
//
(BLU/BLK)
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go to
step 50 and recheck. If DTC U0107 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go t o step 50. If
DTC U0107 is indicated, g o t o step 56.
Is there
IMO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (D13) and the throttle actuator control module,
then go t o step 50.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (D14) and the throttle actuator control module,
then go to step 50.
Wire side of female
continuity?
N O — G o t o step 45.
11-242
terminals
45. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal D14 and throttle actuator control module
16P connector terminal No. 14.
E C M / P C M
CONNECTOR D
/ / /
/13 148 9
(17P)
5 6
12
10
15
SEDF ( B L U / B L K )
47. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
48. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
49. Check for continuity between body ground and
ECM/PCM connector terminals A8 and A9
individually.
/
/ /
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
46. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A
MODULE 1 0 P CONNECTOR
1 2
/
V
9 10 11 12
/
/
6
7
14
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
8
/ /
SEDF
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
1 |2 |3|4 | 5 6 ]7
|8 | 9
10
20 21
13 14 15 16
18
23 24
30 31
28
(GRN/BLK)
/
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
(31P)
CONTROL
/ /
/
/
/
/ /
/
continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good throttle actuator
control module (see page 11-246), then go t o
step 50 and recheck. If DTC U0107 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control
module (see page 11-246), then go t o step 50. If
DTC U0107 is indicated, go t o step 56.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (D14) and the throttle actuator control module,
then go t o step 50.
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body, the throttle actuator
control module relay, the throttle actuator control
module, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM <A8, A9) and G101, then go to step 50.
(cont'd)
11-243
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
50. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
51. Reconnect all connectors.
52. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
53. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
54. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
55. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are
any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC U0107 is Indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the throttle body/the throttle actuator control
module relay, the throttle actuator control module,
and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting Is c o m p l e t e . •
56. Update the ECM/PCM if It does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
57. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
U0107
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body, the throttle actuator
control module relay, the throttle actuator control
module, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are Indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-244
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
NOTE;
• This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures.
• Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are
indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this
procedure.
• Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the
pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator
pedal module (see page 11-246).
Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,
then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
• If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
• If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal
module (see page 11-246), then go to step 1.
1 Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,
then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
* If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
• If it is not 0 %, update the ECM/PCM if it does not
have the latest software, or substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step
4.
11-245
Electronic Throttle Control System
Accelerator Pedal Module R e m o v a l /
Installation
1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal module 6P
connector (A).
Throttle Actuator Control Module
Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard under cover
(see page 20-78), the side kick panel (see page
20-53), and the glove box (see page 20-77).
2. Push the tab (A), and disconnect the throttle
actuator control module 16P connector (B).
2. Remove the accelerator pedal module (B).
NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately.
Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
3. Remove the bolts (C), and the throttle actuator
control module (D).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-246
VTEC
Component Location Index
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE
Inspection, page 11-258
Removal/Installation, page 11-258
11-247
VTEC
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P2646: Rocker A r m Oil P r e s s u r e S w i t c h
Circuit L o w Voltage
Speca! Tools Required
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
•A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070300
•A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
•A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
•Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5A0200
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
Is switch
ON
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 14.
N O — G o t o step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A) and
install the special tools as s h o w n , then attach the
rocker arm oil pressure switch t o the oil pressure
gauge adapter (B).
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level
OK?
NOTE: Install the switch in the reverse order of
removal w i t h a new O-ring.
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
NO—Adjust the engine oil t o the proper level, then
go to step 19.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the rocker a r m oil pressure switch, the rocker arm
oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM. •
NO—Go to step 5.
11. Start the engine.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-248
12. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
18. Reconnect all connectors.
13. Check the oil pressure.
Does
the oil pressure
(56.9psi,
4.0
increase
to at least
392
kPa
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
kgf/crrf)?
20. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
YES—Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(see page 11-259), then go t o step 18.
NO—Inspect the VTEC system. If it is OK, replace
the rocker a r m oil control valve (see page 11-258),
then go t o step 18.
2 1 . Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
22. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
23. Check f o r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
Is DTC P2646
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker a r m oil pressure switch, the
rocker a r m oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM,
then go t o step 1.
17. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B11 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B (24P)
/8
3 4 5
10 11 12 13
21
17 18
2
/
6
/
/ / 16
/
/ / //
V T P S W
(BLU/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
indicated?
N O - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P2646 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 24.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2646 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 23, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 23, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B11) and the rocker a r m oil pressure switch,
then g o t o step 18.
N O — G o t o step 25.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go t o step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 22 and recheck.
25. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
26. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator f a n comes on, then let it idle.
27. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-249
VTEC
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2646
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker a r m oil pressure switch, the
rocker arm oil control solenoid, and the ECM/PCM.
If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 26.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2646 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 29.
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P2646 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 28, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the rocker a r m oil
pressure switch, the rocker a r m oil control solenoid,
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 26. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go t o step 26 and recheck.
11-250
D T C P2S47; Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S w i t c h
Circuit H i g h V o l t a g e
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine
oil level
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Disconnect the rocker a r m oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
8. At the switch side, check for continuity between
rocker a r m oil pressure switch 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
OK?
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
Y E S — G o to step 2.
.VTPSW
NO—Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then
go to step 14.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Is the result
Is there
OK?
Y E S — I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, sytem is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the rocker a r m oil pressure switch and the ECM/
PCM.B
5. Check the result of step 4.
• Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Switch Failure
• Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Switch Open
• Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Switch SIG Line Open
• Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Switch GND Line Open
any of the
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 9.
NO—Replace the rocker a r m oil pressure switch
(see page 11-259), then go t o step 13.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
N O — G o t o step 5.
Is the test result
Terminal side of male terminals
10. Measure voltage between rocker a r m oil pressure
switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
above?
YES—Go t o step 6.
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the rocker arm oil pressure switch. If it is OK,
replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
11-258), then go t o step 14.
Wire side of female terminals
(cont'd)
11-251
VTEC
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Is there battery
voltage?
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YES—Repair open in the w i r e between the rocker
arm oil pressure switch and G101, then g o t o step
13.
N O — G o t o step 11.
11. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B11 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
/8
2|3|4 5
10 11 12 13
21
17 18
/
/ /
6
/
V T P S W
Wire side of female
Is there battery
/16
//
(BLU/BLK)
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2647 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 18.
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P2647 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 17, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 17, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.H
terminals
voltage?
YES—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM ( B I D and the rocker a r m oil pressure switch,
then go to step 12.
NO—Go to step 19.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Reconnect the rocker a r m oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11-252
Is DTC P2647
N O - l f the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 16 and recheck.
19. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
20. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
D T C P2648: Rocker A r m O i l C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d
Circuit L o w V o l t a g e
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P2647
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then g o t o step 20. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
g o t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2647 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 22.
22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2647 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 2 1 , go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
3. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the ECM/
PCM.H
N O — G o t o step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Disconnect the rocker a r m oil control solenoid 2P
connector.
6. A t the solenoid side, measure resistance between
rocker a r m oil control solenoid 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
2P CONNECTOR
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the rocker a r m oil
pressure switch and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 20 and recheck.
Terminal side of male terminals
Is there
14— 17 Q at room
temperature?
Y E S — G o to step 7.
N O — G o t o step 10.
7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-253
VTEC
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B6 and body ground.
ECM/PCM C O N N E C T O R B (24P)
V T S
/
(GRN/YEL)
2|3|4 | 5
10 11 12 13
8
17 18
21
/
/
/
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e
Is there
6
/
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 16, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 16, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting, a
16
//
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B6) and the rocker a r m oil control solenoid,
then go to step 11.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, g o t o step 15 and recheck.
18. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
19. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2648
indicated?
N O — G o t o step 18.
10. Replace the rocker a r m oil control valve (see page
11-258).
11. Reconnect all connectors.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 19. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go t o step 1.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
14. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
15. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2648
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker a r m oil control solenoid and
the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2648 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 17.
11-254
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2648 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 2 1 .
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — l f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 20, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 19. If the ECM/
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 19 and
recheck.
D T C P2649: Rocker A r m Oil Control S o l e n o i d
Circuit High Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2649
indicated?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the rocker a r m oil control solenoid and the ECM/
PCM.B
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
connector.
7. A t the solenoid side, measure resistance between
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P connector .
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
R O C K E R A R M O I LC O N T R O L
2P C O N N E C T O R
Terminal side of male
Is there 14— 17 Q, at room
SOLENOID
terminals
temperature?
Y E S — G o t o step 8.
N O — G o t o step 13.
(cont'd)
11-255
WEC
#
DTC Troubleshooting |cont d)
8. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control
solenoid 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B6 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (24P)
ROCKER mm OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
2P
VTS
CONNECTOR
(GRN/YEL)
2
3 4 5
10 11 12 13
17 18
21
G N D
16
(BLK)
Wire side of female
terminals
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
Is there
continuity?
continuity?
YES—Goto step 20.
YES—Goto step9.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the rocker
arm oil control solenoid and G101, then go to step
14.
9. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (B6) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid,
then go to step 14.
13. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
11-258).
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
14. Reconnect all connectors.
11. Connect rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
connector terminal No. 1 t o body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
2 P CONNECTOR
16. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2649
V T S
JUMPER WIRE
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
11-256
indicated?
(GRN/YEL)
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2649 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 19.
19. M o n i t o r the OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED
?
YES—lf there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 18, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 18, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go t o step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 17 and recheck.
20. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
2 1 . Start the engine.
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P2649 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f t h e ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 22, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the rocker a r m oil
control solenoid and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/
PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 21. If the ECM/
PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o step 21 and
recheck.
22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2649
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go t o step 21. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P2649 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 23.
11-257
VTEC
Rocker Arm Oil Control V a l v e
Inspection
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
connector and the rocker arm oil pressure switch
2P connector.
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve
Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P
connector (A), rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector (B), and the bolts (C).
2. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve f r o m the
cylinder head (see page 11-258).
3. Measure resistance between rocker arm oil control
solenoid 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Resistance: 14—17 0,
2. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (D).
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
w i t h a new rocker arm oil control valve filter (E).
4. If the resistance is w i t h i n specifications, check the
rocker arm oil control valve filter (A) for clogging. If
it is clogged, replace the rocker arm oil control
valve filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil.
11-258
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure S w i t c h Removal/Installation
1. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid
assembly (see page 11-258).
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A).
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
w i t h a new O-ring (B).
Idle Control System
Component Location Index
11-260
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0506: Idle Control S y s t e m R P M L o w e r
T h a n Expected
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore.
Is there
bore?
dirt, carbon,
or damage
in the
throttle
YES—If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
body (see page 11-306). Also check for damage t o
the air cleaner element (see page 11-307), then g o
to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, g o
to step 8.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Check under these DATA LIST parameter
conditions w i t h the HDS:
NO—Check the A/C system or power steering
system, then go t o step 17.
8. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-308).
9. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
•
•
•
•
•
ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C)
IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C)
VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h)
ST FUEL TRIM between 0 . 6 9 - 1 . 4 7
FSS is CLOSED
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
FAILED?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, g o t o step 15.
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, let the engine
idle until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
10. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let It Idle.
12. Check under these DATA LIST parameter
conditions w i t h the HDS:
•
•
•
•
•
ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C)
IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C)
VSS is 0 m p h (0 km/h)
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69—1.47
FSS Is CLOSED
6. Remove the intake air duct f r o m the throttle body
(see page 11-306).
(cont'd)
11-261
Idle Control S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0506
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 In the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
indicated?
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — G o t o step 1 and recheck.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0506 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 13, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 13, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.•
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go t o step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, let
the engine idle until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 12 and
recheck.
15. Remove the intake air duct f r o m the throttle body
(see page 11-306).
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore.
Is there
dirt,
carbon,
or damage
in the
throttle
bore?
Y E S — I f there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
body (see page 11-306). Also check for damage t o
the air cleaner element (see page 11-307), then go
to step 9. If there is damage In the throttle bore, go
to step 8.
N O — G o t o step 17.
17. Recheck w i t h different load conditions (turn on the
headlights, blower motor, rear w i n d o w defogger
and/or A/C, change the gear position, etc.).
11-262
YES—Intermittent failure, system Is OK at this
time.B
NO—If the screen Indicates FAILED, check the A/C
system and/or power steering system, then go to
step 1 and recheck. If the screen Indicates
EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a result comes
. on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go
to step 17 and recheck.
D T C P0507: Idle Control S y s t e m R P M Higher
T h a n Expected
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0507 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, Intermittent
failure, system Is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, let the engine Idle until a
result comes on. If the screen Indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, recheck w i t h different load conditions
(electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), then go t o
step 3.
5. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
PCV valve
PCV hose
EVAP canister purge valve
Throttle body
Intake manifold
Brake booster hose
Brake booster
Are
there
any
9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it Idle.
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0507
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
FAILED?
YES—Go to step 5.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
leaks?
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0507 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are Indicated, go to step 11.
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 In the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 10, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 10, go to the Indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, let the engine Idle until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, recheck w i t h different load conditions
(turn on the headlights, blower motor, or A/C;
change the gear position, etc.), then go to step 9. '
YES—Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go
to step 6.
NO—Go to step 6.
11-263
Idle Control System
A / C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
13. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector terminal
E18 t o body ground w i t h a jumper wire several
times.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle.
2. Turn the blower switch o n .
3. Turn the A/C switch o n .
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Does it indicate
1
2 3
11 12
24
22
/
ON?
/
/
4 5 6|7|
8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25 26
27 2 3 29 30
/
A C C (RED)
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
J U M P E R
WIRE
NO—Do the A/C system test (see page 21-55). •
5. Check the A/C system.
Does the A/C system
Wire side of female
operate?
Y E S — T h e air conditioning system circuit is OK. •
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
noise from the A/C
compressor
Y E S — D o the A/C system test (see page 21-55). •
NO—Goto step9.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-264
Is there a clicking
clutch?
noise from the A/C
compressor
Y E S — U p d a t e the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
N O — G o t o step 6.
Is there a clicking
clutch?
terminals
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the A/C clutch relay and the ECM/PCM. If the
connections and terminals are OK, check the A/C
clutch relay (see page 22-53), also repair open in
the w i r e between the ECM/PCM (E18) and the A/C
clutch relay and the other A/C systems. •
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1 . Start the engine, and let it idle.
8 . Check for continuity between body ground a n d
ECM/PCM connector terminal B13.
2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
E C M / P C M
3. Cheek if the Indicated percentage varies w h e n the
headlight switch is turned o n .
/
17
2
8
Does
the percentage
vary?
18
Y E S — T h e alternator signal circuit is OK. II
CONNECTOR B
(24P)
/
/ / ALTF/ (WHT/RED)
/
I
3 | 4
6
5
10 11 1 2 1 3
21
/
16
N O — G o t o step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch and Ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female terminals
5. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
Is there
continuity?
6. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (B13) and the alternator. •
N O — U p d a t e the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . •
11-265
Idle Control S f stem
Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
Does it indicate
9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E22 and brake pedal position switch 4P
connector terminal No. 2.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
OFF?
1 |2 | 3 !4 | 5 6 | 7
8 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25 26
27 28 29 30
BKSW (WHT/BLK)
/
YES—Goto step3.
NO—Inspect the brake pedal position switch
(see page 22-98). •
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE
SWITCH In the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
/
/
/
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
BKSW (WHT/BLK)
OX1
Does it change to ON?
Wire side of female terminals
YES—The brake pedal position switch signal circuit
(BKSW line) i s O K . B
Is there
continuity?
NO—Go t o step 4.
5. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
YES—Repair open In the wire between the brake
pedal position switch and the No. 16 HORN, STOP
(15 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch
(see page 22-98). •
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P
connector.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (E22) and the brake pedal position switch. •
4. Turn the Ignition switch OFF.
7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E22 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
1 |2 |3 |4 | 5 6 |7
8 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
27 28 29 30
25 26
/
/
/
BKSW
/
(WHT/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E22) and the No. 16 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse.
Replace the No. 16 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse. •
N O — G o t o step 9.
11-266
Idle Speed inspection
NOTE:
• Before checking the idle speed, check these items:
- The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been
reported on, and there are no DTCs.
- Ignition t i m i n g
- Spark plugs
- Air cleaner
- PCV system
• Apply the parking brake, and make sure the
headlights are off.
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP)
canister purge valve connector.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
6. Check the idle speed w i t h o u t load conditions:
headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
conditioner off.
Idle speed should be:
USA models:
M/T
7 5 0 ± 5 0 rpm
A/T
7 5 0 ± 5 0 rpm (in Park or neutral)
Canada models:
M/T
8 5 0 ± 5 0 rpm
8 5 0 ± 5 0 rpm (in Park or neutral)
A/T
7. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric
load (A/C switch o n , temperature set to max cool,
blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam),
Idle speed should be:
M/T
8 5 0 ± 5 0 rpm
8 5 0 ± 5 0 rpm (in Park or neutral)
A/T
NOTE: If the idle speed is not w i t h i n specification,
do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268). If the idle speed is still not w i t h i n
specification, go to s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve
connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to
the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-174).
11-267
Idle Control S f stem
E C I V S / P C M Idle Learn Procedure
The Idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM
can learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of
these actions:
•
•
•
•
Replace ECM/PCM.
Reset ECM/PCM.
Update ECM/PCM.
Replace or clean the throttle body.
NOTE: Erasing DTCs w i t h the HDS does not require you
to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.)
are off.
2. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and w a i t 2 seconds.
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant
temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes w i t h the
throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes o n , do not include
its running time in the 5 minutes.
11 -268
Fuel Supply System
Component Location Index
FUEL LINE/
QUICK-CONNECT
FITTING
Precautions, page 11-288
R e m o v a l , p a g e 11-290
Installation, p a g e 11-293
F U E L FILL C A P
FUEL
RAIL
F U E L T A N K
Replacement, page
11-300
FUEL TANK UNIT
Includes:
FUEL PUMP
Circuit Troubleshooting,
p a g e 11-276
Replacement, page
FUEL
FUEL PULSATION
DAMPER
Replacement, page
Replacement, page
FUEL LINE/
QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
11-298
FUEL VAPOR
LINE
FUEL FEED
LINE
Precautions, page 11-288
R e m o v a l , page 11-290
Installation, page 11-293
11-299
FILTER
11-299
FUEL G A U G E SENDING
Test, page
UNIT
11-302
FUEL PRESSURE
R E G U L A T O R
Replacement, page
11-298
ENGINE CONTROL M O D U L E (ECM)/
P O W E R T R A I N C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM)
11-269
Fuel Supply System
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0461: Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e
S e n d i n g Unit) Circuit R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e
Problem
NOTE;
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving
without refueling to complete this diagnosis, DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-302).
Is the fuel
gauge
sending
unit
OK?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge assembly. •
NO—Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
11-299), then go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268)..".'
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any
Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If DTC P0461 is indicated, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the fuel gauge
sending unit and the gauge control module, then
go t o step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-270
DTC P0462: Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e
S e n d i n g Unit) Circuit L o w V o l t a g e
14. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
F U E L T A N K U N I T 4P
C O N N E C T O R
SIGNAL
(YEL/BLK)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1
2
3
4
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0462
indicated?
Wire side of female terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending unit. •
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the gauge
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go t o step 23.
4 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
N O — G o t o step 15.
5. Remove the center console (see page 20-71).
15. Reconnect the gauge control module 20P connector.
6. Remove the access panel f r o m the floor (see page
11-296).
16. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4 P connector.
17. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
19. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC
P0463
indicated?
YES—Replace the fuel gauge sending unit
(see page 11 -299), then go to step 22.
NO—Go to step 11.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-161).
13. Disconnect the gauge control module 20P
connector.
(cont'd)
11-271
'Fuel Supply System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
29. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
20. Set the float (A) to the E position.
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0462
indicated?
YES—Check f o r poor connections or loose
terminals at the gauge control module and the fuel
gauge sending unit. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
21. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the empty
position?
YES—Go t o step 29.
NO—Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-161), then go to step 22.
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
23. Reconnect all connectors.
24. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
26. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
27. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0462 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go t o step 1. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
11-272
DTC P0463: Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e
S e n d i n g U n i t ) Circuit H i g h V o l t a g e
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
9. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-161).
10. Disconnect the gauge control module 40P
connector.
11. Check for continuity between gauge control
module 40P connector terminal No. 39 and body
ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
G A U G E CONTROL M O D U L E 40P CONNECTOR
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P0463
indicated?
n
wt
/12|3|4|/|/|7|8
\n\n\AAAAti\i
YES—Goto step4.
it
r
9 |10|11|12 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
8|29|30|31132|/|34|/|36|37|38|39|40
G N D (BLK)
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending u n i t 11
Wire side of female terminals
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Remove the center console (see page 20-71).
Is there
6. Remove the access panel f r o m the floor (see page
11-296).
YES—Goto step 12.
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
continuity?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the gauge
control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go t o step 25.
8. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 3
to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
G N D (BLK)
J U M P E R
WIRE
Wire side of female terminals
(cont'd)
11-273
Fuel Supply System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Disconnect the gauge control module 20P
connector.
15. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the fuel tank unit 4P
connector.
1 3 . Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No. 1
to body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
1 6 . Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
17. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-302).
FUEL T A N K UNIT 4 P
SIGNAL
(YEL/BLK)
C O N N E C T O R
Is the fuel gauge sending
unit OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 18.
1 2
3 4
J U M P E R
NO—Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
11-299), then go to step 24.
WIRE
Wire side o f female
18. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
19. Reconnect the gauge control module 20P connector
and the 40P connector.
terminals
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
14. Check f o r continuity between gauge control
module 20P connector terminal No. 18 and body
ground.
21. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
22. Set the float (A) to the F position.
G A U G E CONTROL M O D U L E 20P C O N N E C T O R
ri
r
2
3
4
5
ri
ri
6 /
8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1
20
SIGNAL
(YEL/BLK)
Wire side o f female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Go to step 15.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the gauge
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 25.
23. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the full
position?
Y E S - G o t o step 3 1 .
NO—Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-161), then go to step 24.
11-274
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
25. Reconnect all connectors.
26. Reinstall the fuel tank unit and the gauge control
module.
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
28. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
29. Do the E C M / P C M idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—lf Temporary DTC or DTC P0463 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go t o step 1. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •
3 1 . Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
is DTC P0463
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the gauge control module and the fuel
gauge sending unit. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go t o the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting
If y o u suspect a problem w i t h the fuel p u m p , check that
the fuel p u m p actually runs; w h e n it is o n , y o u will hear
some noise if you listen t o the fuel fill port w i t h the fuel
fill cap removed. The fuel p u m p should run for
2 seconds w h e n the ignition switch is first turned o n . If
the fuel p u m p does not make noise, check as follows:
5. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL
4P C O N N E C T O R
PUMP)
4
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
X
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A).
2 1
o
O
IG1
Terminal side of female
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO-
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and
body ground.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL
4P C O N N E C T O R
PUMP)
IGP
x
Terminal side of female
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 1 (Fl MAIN) and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP).
11-276
• Repair open in the wire between the No. 11 IG
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUELPUMP).H
• If needed, replace the No. 11 IG FUEL PUMP
(15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
• If needed, replace the dashboard wire harness
(under-dash fuse/relay box).B
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
12. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E7 to body
ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
9. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P
connector terminal No. 3 t o body ground w i t h a
jumper wire.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL
4P C O N N E C T O R
PUMP)
MRLY
1
2 3
11 12
24
22
/
/
/
(RED/YEL)
4 I 5 6 |7
8 I 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25 26
27 28 29 30
/
J U M P E R
4
Wire side of female
WIRE
terminals
IMOFPR
JUMPER
WIRE
Terminal side of female
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
terminals
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E17 and body ground.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E
/
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
(31P)
1 |2 | 3 |4 | 5 6 | 7
8 | 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25 26
2 7 28 29 30
/
14. W i t h i n 2 seconds of turning on the ignition switch,
measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E17 and body ground.
/
1 |2 | 3 |4 | 5 6 |7
8 I 9
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25 26
2 7 28 29 30
12
/22 11 24
/
/
/
IMOFPR
(GRN/YEL)
/
IMOFPR
(GRN/YEL)
Wire side of female
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there battery
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Goto step 11.
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 15.
N O - R e p l a c e PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
NO—Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the ECM/PCM (E17).B
(cont'd)
11-277
:
uel Supply System
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P), and
disconnect the j u m p e r wire.
20. Remove the center console (see page 20-71).
17. Open the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
2 1 . Remove the access panel f r o m the floor (see page
11-296).
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E17
and body ground w i t h i n 2 seconds.
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector
terminal No. 2 and body ground w i t h i n 2 seconds.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
/
22
11 1 2
/
24
/
5
6 | 7
| 8 | 9
1 2
3 4
1 4 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 2 0 21
25 26
2 7 28 29 30
/
CONNECTOR
FUEL PUMP
(YEL/GRN)
IMOFPR
(GRN/YEL)
Wire side of female
Is there battery
F U E L T A N K U N I T 4P
terminals
voltage?
Wire side of female
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
YES—Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the
latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away w i t h a known-good ECM/PCM,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). •
23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
N O — G o t o step 19.
24. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
11-278
Y E S - G o t o step 27.
N O — G o t o step 23.
25. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r
wire.
28. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
F U E L TANK UNIT 4 P CONNECTOR
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)
4 P CONNECTOR
x
GND (BLK)
IG1
FUEL P U M P
J U M P E R WIRE
Wire side of female terminals
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector
terminal No. 2 and body ground.
F U E L TANK UNIT 4 P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
continuity?
YES—Replace the fuel pump. •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the fuel tank
unit 4P connector and G403.B
F U E L PUMP
(YEL/GRN)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
battery
voltage?
Y E S - R e p l a c e PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMPhB
NO—Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the fuel tank unit 4P
connector. •
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11-279
Fuel Supply S f stem
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve
pressure f r o m the system by disabling the fuel p u m p
and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect
fitting in the engine compartment.
7. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
the fuel tank.
With the HDS
9. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select
Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle
until it stalls.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio system, then write d o w n the audio presets.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
• Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm
or the ECM/PCM will continue to operate the fuel
pump.
• A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them
as needed (see page 11-4).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery.
13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
5. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to
the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-174).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11-280
14. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and
clean it if needed.
17. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check
it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-291).
15. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
fitting (A).
18. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
do this:
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system,
then enter the audio presets.
• Set the clock.
Without the HDS
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the
audio system, then write d o w n the audio presets.
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A)
f r o m the under-dash fuse/relay box.
16. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
connector (B) w i t h one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them f r o m the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed d o w n , and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer f r o m the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced w i t h a
new one.
A
3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore
them.
(cont'd)
11-281
Fuel Supplf System
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Remove the fuel fill cap.
6. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery.
7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
connector (B) w i t h one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) w i t h the other hand to release
them f r o m the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed d o w n , and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer f r o m the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced w i t h a
new one.
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and
clean it if needed.
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
fitting (A).
11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check
it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-291).
12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
do this:
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system,
then enter the audio presets.
• Set the clock.
11-282
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel Tank Draining
Special Tools Required
* Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B
•Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11 -296).
2. Using a hand p u m p , a hose, and a container
suitable for fuel, draw the fuel f r o m the fuel tank.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-280).
3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel
pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle.
• If the engine starts, go to step 5.
• If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel p u m p is running; Listen to
the fuel filler port w i t h the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds w h e n the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• If the pump runs, go to step 5.
• If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-276).
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should
be 3 2 0 - 3 7 0 kPa ( 3 . 3 - 3 . 8 kgf/cm , 4 7 - 5 4 psi).
2
• If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.
• If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-298) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-299), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
11-283
Fuel Supply S f stem
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Make sure the connections are
secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
11-284
Check all clamps, and retighten If necessary.
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
A:
align the mark on the
tube with the projection
on the fill neck fitting.
B:
no clearance,
Fuel Supply System
Breather Line and Suction Line Inspection
Special Tools Required
• Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150
• V a c u u m pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivarent, commercially available
1. Remove the access panel f r o m the floor (see page
11-296).
5. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg (A) to
the suction line (B), and apply vacuum to the line.
• If the line holds v a c u u m , check for blockage in
the suction line. If there is blockage, replace the
line.
• If the line does not hold v a c u u m , go to step 6.
2. Disconnect the suction line (A) f r o m the fuel p u m p ,
and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg
(B) to the hose as s h o w n .
07AAJ-S6MA150
6. Disconnect the breather line (A) f r o m the filler side
of the suction line (B), then plug the suction line
w i t h a rubber cap (C).
3. Start the engine, and check the vacuum.
• If there is v a c u u m , go to step 4.
• If there is no v a c u u m , replace the fuel filter
(see page 11-299).
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11-286
7. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg (A) to
the suction line (B), and apply vacuum to the line.
• If the line holds vacuum, check for blockage in
the suction line and the fuel tank vapor liquid
separation valve on the breather line. If there is
blockage, replace the fuel tank (see page 11-300).
If the breather line is OK, replace the suction line.
• If the line does not hold v a c u u m , go to step 8.
10. Connect a v a c u u m pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg (A) to
the suction line (B), and apply pressure to the line.
• If the line holds pressure, the breather line and
the suction line are OK.
• If the line does not hold pressure, check for a
vacuum leak in the suction line, and replace the
suction line if necessary.
07AAJ-S6MA150
8. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg (A) to
the filler side of the breather line (B), and apply
vacuum to the line.
• If the line holds vacuum, check for blockage
between the suction line and the filler neck on the
breather pipe, and replace the part that is causing
the blockage.
• If the line does not hold v a c u u m , go to step 9.
9. Remove the rubber cap f r o m the suction line, and
reconnect the breather pipe to the suction line.
11-287
Fuel Supply S f stem
Fuel Line/Quick-Connecf Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C), (D), (E),
(F), <G), (H), (l) (J), (K) connect the fuel rail (L) to fuel
feed tube (M), the fuel feed tube to the fuel line (N), the
fuel line (O) to the fuel tank unit (P), the fuel tank unit t o
the fuel vent tube (Q), the fuel tank unit to the suction
line (R), the fuel vent tube to the vent shut float tube (S),
the suction tube to the return tube (T), the suction tube
to the breather pipe (U), the breather pipe to the
breather tube (V), the fuel vapor line (W) to the EVAP
canister (X). W h e n removing or installing the fuel feed
tube, fuel tank unit or fuel tank, it is necessary to
disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the f o l l o w i n g :
f
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage t h e m during w e l d i n g or other heatgenerating procedures.
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch t h e m w i t h a
shop towel that was used for w i p i n g battery
electrolyte. Replace t h e m if they come in contact w i t h
electrolyte or something similar.
• W h e n connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist t h e m excessively. Replace t h e m
if they are damaged.
11-288
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed f r o m the line.
Replace the retainer w h e n :
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
replacing the fuel rail.
replacing the fuel line.
replacing the fuel p u m p .
replacing the fuel filter.
replacing the EVAP canister.
replacing the fuel filler pipe.
replacing the fuel tank.
replacing the suction tube.
it has been removed f r o m the line.
it is damaged.
Place
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1
J
K
Manufacturer
Tokai
Tokai
Sanoh
Tokai
Tokai
Tokai
Tokai
Tokai
Tokai
Tokai
Sanoh
Retainer
Color
Green
Green
White
Green
Green
Green
Natural
Natural
Natural
Natural
White
Line Diameter
0.3 in. (8.0 m m )
0.25 in. (6.3 m m )
0.4 in. (9.5 m m )
0.3 in. (8.0 m m )
0.3 in. (8.0 m m )
0.3 in. (8.0 m m )
0.5 in. (12 m m )
0.5 in. (12 mm)
0.5 in. (12 mm)
0.5 in. (12 m m )
0.5 in. (12 m m )
11-289
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
11-290
4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage.
• If it is dirty, clean it.
• If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter, or
fuel feed line.
3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
fitting. Hold the connector (A) w i t h one hand, and
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) w i t h the other hand to
release t h e m f r o m the locking tabs (C). Pull the
connector off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other
parts. Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed d o w n , and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer f r o m the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced w i t h a
new one.
(cont'd)
11-291
Fuel Supply S f stem
Fuel Line/Quick-Connecf Fitting Removal (cont'd)
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
cover the disconnected connector and line ends
with plastic bags (A).
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has
been removed f r o m the line.
Replace the retainer w h e n :
• replacing the fuel rail.
• replacing the fuel feed line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• replacing the fuel tank.
• it has been removed f r o m the line.
• it is damaged.
11-292
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the
retainer is damaged, or after:
• replacing the fuel rail.
• replacing the fuel line.
replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• replacing the fuel filler pipe.
• replacing the fuel tank.
• replacing the suction tube.
• it has been removed f r o m the line.
• it is damaged.
• Use the same manufacturer retainer and the
same size retainer w h e n the replacing the
retainer (see page 11-288).
8
(cont'd)
11-293
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
11-294
4. Align the quick-connect fittings w i t h the line (A),
and align the retainer locking tabs (B) w i t h the
connector grooves (C). Then press the quickconnect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs
lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of
new engine oil on the line end.
Connection with new retainer
5. When you are reconnecting the connector w i t h the
old retainer, make sure the connection is secure
and the tabs (A) are f i r m l y locked into place; check
visually and also by pulling the connector (B).
When you are replacing the fuel line w i t h a new
one, make sure y o u remove the ring pull (C)
upwards after you confirm the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure
the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection
is not secure, the ring pull could break w h e n you try
to remove it.
Reconnection to existing retainer
Connection to new fuel line
Sanoh-made
Connection to new fuel line
Tokai-made
Reconnection to existing retainer
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and
turn the ignition switch ON (II) (but do not operate
the starter motor). The fuel p u m p will run for about
2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat t w o
or three times, and check that there is no leakage in
the fuel supply system.
11-295
Fuel Supplf S f stem
Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required
Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100
Removal
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-280).
2. Remove the fuel fill cap.
3. Remove the center console (see page 20-71).
4. Remove the access panel (A) f r o m the floor.
5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (C) f r o m the
fuel tank unit.
11-296
7. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A).
Installation
1. Install a new base gasket (A) on the fuel tank (B).
4. Using the t o o l , tighten the fuel tank unit locknut (A).
NOTE: After installation, check the base gasket
visually or by hand to be sure the gasket is not
pinched.
2. Insert the fuel tank unit (G) into the fuel tank. Be
careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
3. Align the marks (D) on the fuel tank and the fuel
tank unit, then tighten a new locknut (E) by hand.
NOTE:
• After tightening, make sure the marks are aligned.
Check circumference of the base gasket visually
or by hand and be sure that the gasket is not
pinched.
• Do not coat the base gasket w i t h the engine oil.
11-297
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pulsation Damper
Replacement
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Replacement
1. Remove the engine cover.
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
2. Remove the fuel rail (see page 11-190).
2. Remove the cover (A).
3. Remove the fuel pulsation damper cover (A).
4. Remove the clip (B), then remove the fuel pulsation
damper (C).
3. Remove the clips (A).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (D).
NOTE: If the drain hole (A) of the fuel pulsation
damper cover does not face b o t t o m , reinstall it as
shown.
A
C
4. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (B).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
w i t h new O-rings (C).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings w i t h clean engine oil. Do
not pinch the O-rings during installation. Never
apply brake fluid, vegetable oil, or alcohol-based oil
to the O-rings.
11-298
Fuel Filter Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (see page
11 -283), after making sure that the fuel p u m p and the
fuel pressure regulator are OK.
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending
Unit Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-296).
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A)
f r o m the fuel tank unit (B).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank
unit:
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank
unit:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure
the connection is secure and the connectors (B)
are firmly locked into place.
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is f i r m l y locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
w i t h new O-rings (D) and new base gasket (E).
W h e n installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks
on the unit and the fuel tank (see page 11-297).
• W h e n connecting the wire harness, make sure
the connection is secure and the connectors (C)
are f i r m l y locked into place.
• W h e n installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is f i r m l y locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
W h e n installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks
on the unit and the fuel tank (see page 11-297).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil.
11-299
Fuel Supply S f stem
Fuel Tank Replacement
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-280).
2. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-283).
3. Raise the vehicle, and support it w i t h jack stands.
4. Remove the fuel tank guard (A), fuel tank cover (B), front floor cross beam (C), and tank mount bracket (D).
5. Disconnect the fuel neck hose (E), fuel vapor hoses (F), and fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (I).
6. Place a jack or other support under the fuel tank (G), then remove the strap bolts (H).
7. Remove the fuel tank.
8. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-300
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-280).
2. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11 -283).
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover (A).
^ 2 2 N-m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
5. Remove the tank mount bracket (B).
6. Disconnect the fuel fill tube (C) and fuel vapor hoses (D).
7. Remove the fuel fill pipe (E).
8. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-301
Fuel Supply S f stem
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit d i a g r a m , refer
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-145).
1. Check the No. 3 IG METER (10 A) fuse In the underdash fuse/relay box before testing.
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs (see page
22-6).
• If no problem is f o u n d , go to step 3.
* If DTC B1175 (see page 22-154) or B1176
(see page 22-155) is indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting.
7. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 w i t h the
Ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery
voltage.
• If the voltage Is OK, go to step 8.
• If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
- a short in the YEL/BLK wire to ground.
- an open In the YEL/BLK or BLK wire.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
(YEL/BLK)
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Remove the center console (see page 20-71).
(BLK)
5. Remove the access panel (A) f r o m the floor.
Wire side of female terminals
8. Turn the Ignition switch OFF.
9. Remove the fuel tank unit f r o m the fuel tank
(see page 11-296).
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
11-302
L o w Fuel Indicator Test
10. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 4P
1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test (see page 22-142).
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float
at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2
(HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-299).
• If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
• If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace
the gauge control module (see page 22-161).
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
F
1/2
LOW
!E
4.6 In.
2.4 In.
0.9 in.
0.7 in.
(116.7 mm) (63.2 mm) (23.1 mm) (18.5 mm)
554.2 to
Resistance 19 to
194.1 to
773 to
787
204.1
21
714.3
(Q)
Float
Position
1
• If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting.
• If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page
11-302).
Terminal side of
male terminals
LOW E
11. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
12. Remove the No. 8 BACK UP (10 A) fuse f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds,
then reinstall it.
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
14. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates
" F " with the float at F.
• If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate
" F " , replace the gauge assembly.
• If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
• The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the
bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch
is OFF, regardless of the fuel level.
• Remove the No. 8 BACK UP (10 A) fuse f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds
after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it
may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to
indicate the correct fuel level.
11-303
Intake Air System
Component Location Index
11-304
Throttle Body Test
Carbon Accumulation Check
Throttle Position Learning Check
NOTE: if the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM and other vehicle system. If it doesn't, go to
the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-174).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the ECM/
PCM and other vehicle system. If it doesn't, go to
the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-174).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If
needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-306).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS. The reading should be below 2.6 deg. If it
is not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-306).
11-305
Intake Air System
Air Cleaner Removal/installation
1. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector (A).
Do not insert your f i n n p r Q into t h e ! s t ? M e d t h r o t t l e
body w h e n you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.
n
1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air
cleaner is damaged, replace it (see page 11-306).
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-308).
3. Clean off the carbon f r o m the throttle valve and
inside the throttle body w i t h a paper towel soaked
in throttle plate and induction cleaner.
NOTE:
• Remove the throttle body to clean it.
• Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
• To avoid removing the m o l y b d e n u m coating, do
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A).
• Do not spray throttle plate and induction cleaner
directly on the throttle body.
• Use Honda genuine throttle plate and induction
cleaner.
A
4. Install the throttle body (see page 11-308).
5. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS (see page 11-4).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for
2 seconds.
7. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11-306
2. Remove the bolts (B).
3. Remove the air cleaner (C).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner housing cover (A).
2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) f r o m the air
cleaner housing (C).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or
clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace
the air cleaner element.
NOTE; Do not use compressed air to clean the air
cleaner element.
4. Clean and remove any debris f r o m inside the air
cleaner housing.
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Air System
T h r o t t l e Body RemovaS/lnstallatiori
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body w h e n you turn the ignition switch ON (ii) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If y o u do, y o u will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If y o u are removing the throttle body, start at
step 4.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC while the engine is off.
2. Select the INSPECTION MENU on the HDS.
3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
4. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-306).
5. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector (A) and the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector (B).
6. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (C).
7. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (D).
8. Remove the throttle body (E).
9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal w i t h a new gasket (F).
NOTE:
• Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure after replacing throttle body (see page 11-268).
• Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see page 10-6).
11-308
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
5.9 N m
(0.6 k g f m , 4.3 Ibfft)
11-309
Catalytic Converter System
Component Location index
11-310
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below
Threshold
NOTE;
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the
same time as DTC P0420, troubleshoot them first,
then recheck for DTC P0420.
P0137, P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
• Poor quality fuel may cause this DTC.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 8.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 4 and recheck.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Replace the TWC (see page 11-313).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 5th gear)
• Vehicle speed between 45—75 m p h
(72—120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise
control set
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise control set
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0420 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
11. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
12. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n .
14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle
speed.
15. Check the CATA MONITOR CONDITION in the
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is the temperature
Does
the screen
indicate
OK?
EXECUTING?
YES—Goto step 16.
YES—Goto step 6.
NO—Go to step 13 and recheck.
NO—If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION,
go to step 4 and recheck. If the screen indicates
PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at
this time. If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step
8.
6. Continue the test-drive until a result comes on.
16. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 5th gear)
• Vehicle speed between 45—75 m p h
(72 — 120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise
control set
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 m p h (88 km/h)
for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise control set
(cont'd)
11-311
Catalytic Converter System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
EXECUTING?
Y E S — G o t o step 18.
NO—Go t o step 16 and recheck.
18. Continue the test-drive until a result comes on.
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, a
N O — G o t o step 20.
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check the fuel
quality. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go t o step 13 and
recheck.
11-312
Catalytic Converter Removal/Installation
1. Remove the secondary H 0 2 S (see page 11-194).
2. Remove t h e T W C (A).
E
22
(2.2
N-m
kgfm,
16 Ibf-ft)
9.8 N-m
D
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
33
(3.4 k g f m , 2 4 Ibfft)
N-m
3. Remove the converter cover (B).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
w i t h new gaskets (C), new self-locking nuts (D), and
new bolts (E).
EGR System
Component Location Index
11-314
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0401: E G R Insufficient F l o w
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
8. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
11. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
12. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 m p h
(88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
• During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed) for 5 seconds
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 7.
Is DTC P0401
indicated?
5. Test-drive under these conditions;
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 m p h
(88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
• During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed) for 5 seconds
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
YES—Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the
passage inside the EGR valve w i t h throttle plate
and induction cleaner, then go t o step 9.
MO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 5 and recheck.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
connections and terminals are OK, go t o step 15.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0401 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 13, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 13, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go t o step 12 and
recheck.
(cont'd)
11-315
EGR System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
16. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 1 5 8 T (70 °C)
• A/T in D position (M/T in 4th gear)
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 m p h
(88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
• During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed) for 5 seconds
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0401
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 16. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0401 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 18.
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 17, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 16. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 16 and
recheck.
11-316
D T C P0404: EGR V a i v e C i r c u i t R a n g e /
Performance Problem
8. M e a s u r e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n E G R v a l v e 6P
c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 a n d N o . 3.
N O T E ; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
EGR V A L V E 6P C O N N E C T O R
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page
11-3).
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( I I ) .
VCC2
EGRP
2. C l e a r t h e D T C w i t h t h e H D S .
3. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e . Hold t h e e n g i n e s p e e d a t
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t l o a d ( i n P a r k o r n e u t r a l ) u n t i l t h e
r a d i a t o r f a n c o m e s o n , t h e n l e t it i d l e .
Terminal
4. D o t h e E G R T E S T i n t h e I N S P E C T I O N M E N U
side of male
terminals
with
the H D S .
Is there 100 kQ or
Is the result
more?
OK?
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 26.
YES—Intermittent failure, s y s t e m isO Kat this time.
Clean a n y carbon build-up o nthe E G Rvalve with
N O — G o t o s t e p 9.
throttle plate a n d induction c l e a n e r . •
9. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n E G R v a l v e 6P
connector terminal N o .6 a n d body ground.
NO—Goto steps.
5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF.
EGR V A L V E 6P CONNECTOR
6. D i s c o n n e c t t h e E G R v a l v e 6P c o n n e c t o r .
1
7. A t t h e E G R v a l v e s i d e , m e a s u r e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n
4
E G R v a l v e 6P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 a n d N o . 2.
2
/
3
6
PG1
(BLK)
EGR V A L V E 6P CONNECTOR
Wire side o f female
EGRP
terminals
SG2
l_
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o s t e p 10.
Terminal
side of male
terminals
NO—Repair o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e E G R
valve and
G101 ( s e e p a g e 22-16), t h e n g o t o s t e p
27.
Is there 100 kQ or
more?
Y E S - G o t o s t e p 26.
N O — G o t o s t e p 8.
(cont'd)
11-317
EG1 S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B16 and body ground.
10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B (24P)
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B16 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B (24P)
I
2
8
/
1 7 18
EGR
I3 I4 I 5
10 11 1 2 1 3
/
/
(PNK)
6
/
21
16
/
EGR (PNK)
Wire side of female
Is there
Wire side of female
terminals
continuity?
terminals
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
Is there
continuity?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B16) and the EGR valve, then go t o step 27.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B16) and the EGR valve, then go t o step 27.
NO—Go to step 13.
13. Connect EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4 t o
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
15. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
16. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the
passage inside the EGR valve w i t h throttle plate
and induction cleaner.
17. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
EGR V A L V E 6P CONNECTOR
18. Reconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
19. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
EGR
(PNK)
J U M P E R
Wire side of female
11-318
WIRE
terminals
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
32. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
21. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
33. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
22. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
23. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
24. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
Y E S — G o t o step 33.
Is DTC P0404
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1. If the connections and terminals are
OK, go to step 35.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0404 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 34.
34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0404 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 25.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
27. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 33, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 33, go t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
28. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
29. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
30. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 31 and
recheck.
31. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
(cont'd)
11-319
EGR S f stem
#
DTC Troubleshooting fcont d)
35. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
36. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0404
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 36. If the
ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0404 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 38.
38. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0404 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 37, go t o the indicated
D T C s troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go t o step 35. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
Indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 36 and
recheck.
11-320
D T C P§4§§: E G R Valve Position S e n s o r
Circuit High Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector
terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(V)
2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
V or more
1
/
- CM
Is 4.88
indicated?
4
Y E S — G o t o step3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. •
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
3
6
Wire side of female terminals
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there
about
5
V?
4. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
YES—Go t o step 8.
N O — G o t o step 7
(cont'd)
11-321
EGR S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminals A20 and A23.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
10. Reconnect all connectors.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1
2
3
13
10
4
5
6TT|
14 15 16
23 24
18
|8 | 9
2 0 21
31
30
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
12. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
13. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
14. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side of female terminals
Are any Temporary
Is there
about 5 V?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and ECM/PCM (A23), then go to step 10.
DTCs
or DTCs
indicated?
YES—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0406 is indicated,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
N O — G o t o step 15.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
15. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0406
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting
is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see page 11-198). If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-322
D T C P2413: E G R S y s t e m Malfunction
11. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector
terminal No. 3 and body g r o u n d .
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. •
N O — G o t o step 5.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o to step 13.
N O — G o t o step 12.
12. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminal A20 and body ground.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR A
(31P)
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 0 V
indicated?
1 |2 | 3 4 I 5 6 |7
10
/ 1 1 3 14 15 16
18
23 24)
28
/
/
/
// / /
8 9
20 21
3 0 31
Y E S — G o t o step 8.
VCC2
. (YEL/BLU)
N O — G o t o step 19.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female
terminals
9. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
Is there about 5 V?
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and the ECM/PCM (A20), then go t o step 44.
NO—Go to step 51.
(cont'd)
11-323
E G R S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. T u r n t h e I g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF.
18. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r
t e r m i n a l B12 a n d b o d y
ground.
14. J u m p t h e S C S l i n e w i t h the HDS.
E C M / P C M
15.
Disconnect E C M / P C M connector
CONNECTOR
B( 2 4 P )
B (24P).
I
16. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r
t e r m i n a l B12 a n d b o d y
/
2 | 3 |4 | 5
8
10 11 12 13
17 18
/ 21
ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B ( 2 4 P )
/
/
6
/ /
/ /
16
/
EGRP
(WHT/BLK)
XI 2: | 3 | 4 I 5 I
[6
8 M l O J H |l2]T3l/n/1l6
21
17 18
EGRP
Wire side of female
terminals
(WHT/BLK)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o s t e p 19.
Wire side o f
female
terminals
NO—Repair o p e n int h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e E C M /
P C M (B12) a n d t h e E G R v a l v e , t h e n g o t o s t e p 44.
Is there
continuity?
19. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF.
Y E S — R e p a i r s h o r t i n t h e wire b e t w e e n t h e E C M /
P C M (B12) a n d t h e E G R v a l v e , t h e n g o t o s t e p 44.
20. If n o t a l r e a d y d o n e , d i s c o n n e c t t h e E G R v a l v e 6P
connector.
N O — G o t o s t e p 17.
21. A t t h e E G R v a l v e s i d e , m e a s u r e r e s i s t a n c e b e t w e e n
17. C o n n e c t E G R v a l v e 6P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l N o . 1 t o
body ground with a jumper
E G R v a l v e 6P c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s N o . 1 a n d N o . 2.
wire.
EGR V A L V E 6P CONNECTOR
EGR V A L V E 6P CONNECTOR
EGRP
(WHT/BLK)
[-©-]
EGRP
J U M P E R
SG2
WIRE
Terminal side o f male
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there 100 kQ or more?
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 43.
N O — G o t o s t e p 22.
11-324
terminals
2 2 . At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between
EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
EGR VALVE
BP
26. Connect EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4 to
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
CONNECTOR
EGR V A L V E 6P C O N N E C T O R
2
EGRP
VCC2
EGR
(PNK)
J U M P E R
Terminal side of male
Is there 100 kQ or
Wire side of female
terminals
more?
WIRE
terminals
27. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B16 and body ground.
Y E S — G o t o step 43.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B(24P)
N O — G o t o step 23.
I
23. If not already done, j u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
/
8
24. If not already done, disconnect ECM/PCM
connector B (24P).
2 | 3 |
/
1 7 18
4
| 5
10 11 12 1 3
/ /
21
/
6
/
/
A
16
EGR
(PNK)
2 5 . Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B16 and body ground.
Wire side of female
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R B (24P)
1
2 ] 3 l 4
8
/
17 18
/
/
21
Wire side of female
Is there
Is there
6
I5
10 11 12 1 3
/
16
/
/
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — G o to step 28.
EGR
(PNK)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (B16) and the EGR valve, then go to step 44.
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (B16) and the EGR valve, then go to step 44.
N O — G o t o step 26.
(cont'd)
11-325
EG1 System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the EGR valve 6P
connector.
29. Check f o r continuity between EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
32. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the
battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No. 6 w i t h a jumper wire.
Does the engine stall or run
rough?
Y E S - G o t o step 5 1 .
N O — G o t o step 33.
33. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
PG (BLK)
34. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the
passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate
and induction cleaner.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
36. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
37. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S — G o t o step 30.
38. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and G101, then go to step 44.
39. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
30. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
40. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
31. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve
6P connector terminal No. 4 w i t h a jumper w i r e .
41. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
E G R V A L V E 6P
CONNECTOR
Is the result
OK?
Y E S — G o t o step 49.
1 2 3
4
6
EGR
/
) (5
Terminal side of male
11-326
N O — G o t o step 42.
PG
terminals
42. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
43. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-328).
51. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
52. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
44. Reconnect all-connectors.
45. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
53. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
46. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
47. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
48. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
P2413
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 52. If the
ECM/PCM w a s substituted, g o t o step 1.
49. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC
P2413
N O — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P2413 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 54.
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
N O — I f Temporary DTC or DTC P2413 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 50.
50. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2413 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 49, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 49, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 48 and
recheck.
54. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2413 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 53, go to the indicated
D T C s troubleshooting. •
N O — I f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 52. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 52 and
recheck.
11-327
EGR System
EGR Valve Replacement
1. D i s c o n n e c t t h e E G R v a l v e 6 P c o n n e c t o r (A).
2.
3.
R e m o v e t h e EGR
valve
(B).
Install t h e parts in t h e reverse o r d e r of
w i t h a n e w g a s k e t (C).
11-328
removal
PCV S f stem
Component Location index
PCV
VALVE
Inspection, page 11-331
Replacement, page 11-331
11-329
PCV S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P2279; intake Air S y s t e m Leak D e t e c t e d
NOTE:
* Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0443 is stored at the same t i m e as DTC P2279,
troubleshoot DTC P0443 first, then recheck for DTC
P2279.
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
•
•
•
•
•
PCV valve
PCV hose
EVAP canister purge line
Throttle body
Intake manifold
the parts
OK?
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle f o r 1 minute.
3. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2279 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
indicate
FAILED?
YES—Check the camshaft t i m i n g (see step 1 on
page 6-15), then go to step 4.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 2 and
recheck.
4. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
5. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11-330
indicated?
N O - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P2279 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 7.
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 6, troubleshooting is complete. If
any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was indicated
on step 6, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
NO—Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go
to step 4.
the screen
P2279
YES—Check for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the
PCV hose, the EVAP canister purge line, the throttle
body, the intake manifold, or the brake booster and
hose, then go t o step 4.
Does
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
Does
Is DTC
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2279 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Brake booster and hose
Are
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 5 and recheck.
PCV Valve Inspection
1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and
connections for leaks or restrictions.
PCV Valve Replacement
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
2. Disconnect the PCV hose (A).
B
2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound f r o m the
PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your
fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
washer for cracks or damage. If the washer is OK,
replace the PCV valve and recheck.
3. Remove the PCV valve (B).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
w i t h a new washer (C).
11-331
EVAP System
Component Location Index
11-332
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: E V A P C a n i s t e r Purge V a l v e
Circuit Malfunction
7.
S t a r t t h e e n g i n e , a n d l e t it i d l e .
Is there
vacuum?
Special Tools Required
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
V a c u u m pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, S n a p - o n Y A 4 0 0 0 A
or equivalent, c o m m e r c i a l l y available
N O — G o t o step 14.
N O T E : B e f o r e y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t , r e c o r d all freeze data
a n d a n yon-board s n a p s h o t , a n dr e v i e w the general
8. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h O F F .
t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i n f o r m a t i o n ( s e e p a g e 11-3).
9.
1. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
2. C l e a r t h e D T C w i t h t h e H D S .
Disconnect the E V A P canister purge valve 2 P
connector.
10. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n E V A P c a n i s t e r p u r g e
valve 2 Pconnector terminal No.2 a n d body ground.
3. S t a r t t h e e n g i n e . H o l d t h e e n g i n e s p e e d a t
3 , 0 0 0 r p m w i t h o u t l o a d (in P a r k o r neutral) until t h e
E V A P C A N I S T E R P U R G E V A L V E 2P C O N N E C T O R
r a d i a t o r f a n c o m e s o n , t h e n l e t it i d l e .
4. C h e c k f o r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
Is DTC P0443
1
indicated?
2
PCS
(RED/YEL)
Y E S — G o to s t e p 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, s y s t e m is O K at this time.
C h e c k for poor c o n n e c t i o n s or loose terminals at
the E V A P canister purge valve a n dthe E C M / P C M . •
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e
terminals
5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F , a n d a l l o w t h e e n g i n e
6.
t o c o o l b e l o w 1 4 0 °F ( 6 0 °C).
Is there continuity
?
D i s c o n n e c t t h e v a c u u m h o s e (A)f r o m t h e E V A P
Y E S — G o t o step 11.
c a n i s t e r p u r g e v a l v e (B) i n t h e e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t ,
a n d connect a v a c u u m p u m p / g a u g e , 0—30 in.Hg, to
NO—Goto step 24.
the E V A P canister purge valve.
11. J u m p t h e S C S line with t h e H D S .
12. D i s c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r B (24P).
(cont'd)
11-333
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER P U R G E V A L V E 2P
CONNECTOR
17. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE 2P
PCS
(RED/YEL)
W i r e side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM (B21), then
go t o step 25.
N O — G o t o step 3 1 .
CONNECTOR
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
Wire side of female
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 18.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the No. 3 IG METER (10 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
step 25.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
19. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
2 1 . Connect EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector
terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P
CONNECTOR
1 2
PCS
(RED/YEL)
JUMPER
Wire side of female
11-334
WIRE
terminals
22. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal B21 and body ground.
2 6 . Turn the ignition switch O N (II).
2 7 . Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR B
(24P)
2 8 . Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
7\ 2 I
3 I4 I 5
8
10 11 12 13
21
17 18
/
/
/
/
16
/ /
PCS (RED/YEL)
2 9 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0443
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0443 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 30.
continuity?
30. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0443 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 23.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM (B21), then
go to step 25.
23. A t the purge valve side, measure resistance
between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
EVAP CANISTER P U R G E VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
-1 2
Terminal side of male
Is there about 24.5 Q at room
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 2 9 , troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 2 9 , go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. H
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1 . If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 2 8 and recheck.
terminals
temperature?
Y E S - G o t o step 3 1 .
N O — G o t o step 24.
24. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-362).
25. Reconnect all connectors.
(cont'd)
11-335
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
3 1 . Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
32. Start the engine.
33. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0443
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute
a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go
to step 32. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0443 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 34.
34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 33, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 32. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1 . If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes o n . If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 32 and recheck.
11-336
DTC P0451: FTP S e n s o r Circuit R a n g e /
Performance Problem
11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0451
NOTE:
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P2422 is stored at the same time as DTC P0451,
troubleshoot DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC
P0451.
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
g o t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0451 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 12.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0451 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute.
Does the screen
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0451 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 11, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 11, g o t o the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — G o to step 5.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 3 and recheck.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 10 and
recheck.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-362).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
9. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
10. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute.
11-337
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0452: F T P S e n s o r C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
indicated?
4. Remove the fuel fill cap.
Y E S - G o t o step 20.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Go to step 14.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (~~2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg), or
0.3 V or less
indicated?
14. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground.
F T P S E N S O R 3P
CONNECTOR
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
N O — G o t o step 7.
VCC4 ( O R N )
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
8. Start the engine.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Wire side of female
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o to step 10.
Y E S - G o t o step 16.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this t i m e . Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 4 and recheck.
NO—Go to step 15.
11-338
terminals
15. M e a s u r e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n ECM/PCM c o n n e c t o r
20. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF.
t e r m i n a l E5 a n d b o d y g r o u n d .
21.
ECM/PCM
CONNECTOR
R e p l a c e t h e F T P s e n s o r ( s e e p a g e 11-362).
E (31P)
22. R e c o n n e c t a l l c o n n e c t o r s .
VCC4 (ORN)
1
2 |3 |4 | 5 6 |7
8 | 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24
22
27 28 29 30
25 26
/
/
/
/
23. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h ON (II).
24. R e s e t t h e E C M / P C M w i t h t h e H D S .
25. D o t h e E C M / P C M i d l e l e a r n p r o c e d u r e ( s e e p a g e
11-268).
26. C h e c k f o r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w i t h t h e H D S .
Wire side of female terminals
Is DTC P0452
Is there 5 V?
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the F T P s e n s o r a n dthe E C M / P C M , then
Y E S — R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e E C M /
g o t o s t e p 1.
P C M (E5) a n d t h e F T P s e n s o r , t h e n g o t o s t e p 22.
NO—If T e m p o r a r y D T C o r D T C P 0 4 5 2 i s n o t
i n d i c a t e d , o r if a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s
N O — G o t o s t e p 28.
are indicated, g o to s t e p 2 7 .
16. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
27. M o n i t o r t h e O B D S T A T U S f o r D T C P 0 4 5 2 in t h e
17. J u m p t h e S C S l i n e w i t h t h e H D S .
D T C s M E N U with the H D S .
18. D i s c o n n e c t E C M / P C M c o n n e c t o r E (31P).
Does the screen
19. C h e c k f o r c o n t i n u i t y b e t w e e n F T P s e n s o r 3 P
YES—If t h e r e w a s n o T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s
connector te-minaI No.2 a n d body ground.
indicate
PASSED?
indicated o n step 26, troubleshooting is complete.
If a n y o t h e r T e m p o r a r y D T C s o r D T C s w a s
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
indicated o n step 26, g oto the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting.
•
NO—If t h e s c r e e n i n d i c a t e s F A I L E D , c h e c k f o r p o o r
c o n n e c t i o n s o r loose t e r m i n a l s at the F T P s e n s o r
FTP
(LT GRN)
a n d t h e E C M / P C M , t h e n g o t o s t e p 1. If t h e s c r e e n
indicates N O T C O M P L E T E D , g o to step 2 5a n d
recheck.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — R e p a i r s h o r t i n t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e ECM/
PCM (E14) a n d t h e FTP s e n s o r , t h e n g o t o s t e p 22.
N O — G o t o s t e p 28.
(cont'd)
11-339
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Update the ECM/PCM If It does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
29. Start the engine.
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0452
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 29.
If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted, go t o step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0452 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 3 1 .
31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 30, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. H
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and the ECM/PCM. if the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 29. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
go t o step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, let the engine idle until a result
comes o n .
11-340
D T C P0453: FTP S e n s o r Circuit High Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and No. 3 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
FTP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
2
3
FTP
(LT G R N )
SG4
(PNK)
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
J U M P E R
4. Remove the fuel fill cap.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more
indicated?
WIRE
Wire side of female
terminals
1 3 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
14. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
N O — G o t o step 7.
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
N O — G o t o step 25.
8. Start the engine.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
15. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
FTP S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
Y E S — G o to step 10.
1
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 8 and recheck.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2
3
VCC4
SG4
(ORN)
(PNK)
Wire side of female
terminals
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 2 1 .
NO—Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
11-341
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
21. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
17. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
22. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and E14
w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
18. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR E (31P)
19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 t o
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
SG3
FTP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR
2 3
11 12
22
24
1
/
1 2
3
/
/
JUMPER
S G 4 (PNK)
J U M P E R WIRE
(PNK)
I
I
8 9
6 I 7
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 | 5
25 26
27 28 29 30
FTP (LT GRN)
WIRE
Wire side of female terminals
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
24. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
26. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E4 and body g r o u n d .
E C M / P C M CONNECTOR E ( 3 1 P )
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 33.
S G 4 (PNK)
1
I
3 |4 | 5 6 7
8 I 9
11 12
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22
24
25 26
27 28 29 30
1
/
2
/
/
/
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E14) and the FTP sensor, then go t o step 27.
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-362).
St
27. Reconnect all connectors.
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 33.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the ECM/
PCM (E4) and the FTP sensor, then go t o step 27.
11-342
28. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
29. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
30. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
33. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
34. Start the engine.
35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
3 1 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0453
Is DTC P0453
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0453 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 32.
32. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicated?
indicated?
indicate
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM w a s updated, substitute a knowngood ECM/PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step 34.
If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
N O - l f Temporary DTC or DTC P0453 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 36.
36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
PASSED?
Does the screen
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 3 1 , troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 3 1 , go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check f o r poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 30 and
recheck.
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f t h e ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM w a s
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs w a s indicated on step 35, go t o the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go t o step 34. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, let the engine idle until a result
comes o n .
11-343
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0455: EVAP S y s t e m Large Leak
Detected
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
D T C P0456: EVAP S y s t e m V e r y S m a l l Leak
Detected
B
INOTICEI
The fuel system is designed t o allow specified
m a x i m u m vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate f r o m the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum w o u l d damage the EVAP components or
cause eventual fuel tank failure.
Special Tools Required
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create
greater pressure/vacuum. The o p t i m u m condition f o r
testing is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible,
to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel t o
the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank) just before
starting these procedures.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged,
fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord
under the cap?
is the
caught
YES—Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,
then go t o step 22.
N O — G o t o step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say ' T i g h t e n to
click"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, then it
clicks.
Is the correct
tightened?
fuel fill cap installed
and
properly
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
NO—Replace or tighten the cap, then go t o step 22.
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM.B
NO—Go to step 6.
11-344
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel
tank vapor recirculation tube.
Is the tube
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) f r o m
the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
compartment, and the v a c u u m pump/gauge,
0—30 in.Hg, t o the hose as shown.
B
OK?
YES—Go t o step 8.
NO• Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube,
then go t o step 22.
• If necessary, replace the fuel tank {see page
11-300), then go to step 22.
8. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube
(A) f r o m the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
canister port (C).
C
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
A
12. Apply v a c u u m to the hose until the FTP reads
1.90 V ( - 0 . 5 9 in.Hg, - 1 5 . 1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you
do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
13. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for
1 minute w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage increase
(0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
more than 0.2 V
YES—Goto step 14.
N O - G o t o step 19.
14. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-345
EVAP S f stem
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g (cont'd)
15. Disconnect the fresh air hoses (A) f r o m the EVAP
canister vent shut valve (B), and plug the EVAP
canister vent shut valve port (C).
C
18. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge
line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP
canister purge valve.
Is the line
OK?
YES—Replace the f o l l o w i n g parts, then go t o
step 2 1 .
• FTP sensor O-ring (see page 11-362)
• EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring
(see page 11-363)
• EVAP canister (see page 11-361)
NO—Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge
hose, then go to step 2 1 .
19. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
16. Apply v a c u u m to the hose (disconnected in step 10)
until the FTP reads 1.90 V (—0.59 in.Hg,
— 15.1 m m H g ) .
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If y o u
do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
17. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for
1 minute w i t h the HDS.
Does
the voltage
(0.1 in.Hg,
2.5
Increase
more
than 0.2 V
mmHg)?
20. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
• Fuel fill pipe
• Fuel vapor return pipe
Are the parts OK ?
YES—Check the fuel p u m p base gasket (see page
11-296), and check the fuel tank, then go t o step 2 1 .
NO—Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go
to step 2 1 .
Y E S — G o t o step 18.
21. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.
NO—Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-363), then go t o step 2 1 .
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
23. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
24. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
25. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1.
11-346
D T C P0457: E V A P S y s t e m Leak Detected/Fuel
Fill Cap L o o s e or Missing
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "Tighten to
click"). It should turn 1 / 4 turn after it's tight, then it
clicks.
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the FTP sensor or the EVAP canister vent shut valve
and the ECM/PCM. •
N O — G o t o step 6.
Is the correct
tightened?
fuel fill cap installed
and
properly
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
NO—Replace or tighten the cap, then go t o step 19.
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve f r o m the
EVAP canister vent shut valve case (see page
11-361).
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
operation.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged,
fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord
under the cap?
is the
caught
YES—Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,
then go to step 19.
Does the valve
operate?
N O — G o t o step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Check the routing of the EVAP canister vent
tube, then go t o step 18.
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
NO—Go t o step 12.
(cont'd)
11-347
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-363).
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
16. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
17. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor or the EVAP canister vent shut
valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-363).
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
21. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
22. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete.—
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor or the EVAP canister vent shut
valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
11-348
D T C P049S: E V A P S y s t e m High Purge F l o w
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM.B
N O — G o t o step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-362).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
8. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
9. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK ?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM, then g o t o step 1.
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0497; E V A P S y s t e m L o w Purge F l o w
Special Tools Required
•Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0—4 in.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
• V a c u u m pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available
• Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150
5. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the EVAP
canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
and connect a T-fitting (C) f r o m the vacuum gauge
and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the
EVAP canister purge valve as shown.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Check the fuel fill cap installation.
Is the fuel fill cap installed
tightened?
and
properly
07JAZ-001000B
Y E S — G o t o step 2.
NO—Properly install the fuel fill cap (the cap must
say ' T i g h t e n t o click"). It should turn 1/4 turn after
it's tight, then go t o step 23.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
4. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
6. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
7. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
YES—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM.B
YES—Replace the EVAP canister purge valve, then
go to step 22.
N O — G o t o step 5.
NO—Go t o step 8.
Does it hold
vacuum?
8. Check for a damaged O-ring between the throttle
body and the EVAP canister purge valve.
Is the O-ring
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 9.
NO—Replace the O-ring, then go t o step 23.
9. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister
purge valve.
11-350
10. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge line (EVAP
canister side), and connect a T-fitting (A) f r o m the
vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0—
30 in.Hg, to the hose as shown.
14. Connect a T-fitting (A) f r o m the v a c u u m pump/
gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, and the vacuum p u m p t o the
FTP sensor (B) as shown.
15. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
16. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
11. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
12. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
Does it hold
vacuum?
YES—Check for a restriction in the EVAP canister
purge line between the EVAP canister purge valve
and the EVAP canister, then go to step 22.
N O — G o t o step 13.
17. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is the difference more than 1,1 kPa (0.31 in.Hg,
8 mmHg) before and after applying
vacuum?
YES—Goto step 18.
NO—Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-362),
then go to step 22.
18. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge line (EVAP
canister side), and reinstall the FTP sensor.
13. Remove the FTP sensor w i t h its connector
connected (see page 11-362).
(cont'd)
11-351
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (purge line) (A) f r o m
the EVAP canister purge valve (B), and connect a
T-fitting (C) f r o m the vacuum gauge and the
vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the hose as
shown.
26. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Is the result
OK?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM, then go t o step 1.
07JAZ-001000B
20. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
21. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
Does the hose hold
vacuum?
YES—Check for blockage at the EVAP canister port,
then go t o step 22.
NO—Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve,
then go to step 22.
22. Reconnect all hoses.
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
11-352
D T C P0498: E V A P Canister Vent S h u t Valve
Circuit L o w Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3),
8. A t the valve side, measure resistance between
EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
E V A P C A N I S T E R V E N T S H U T V A L V E 2P
CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
—/. \ —
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, then wait 5 seconds.
-1
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0498
2 -
if
indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
Terminal side of male
terminals
N O — G o t o step 4.
Is there about 25-30
4. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step9.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 12.
Is DTC P0498
indicated?
& at room
temperature?
9. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM.B
11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E19 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1 I 2
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
/
22
3
11 1 2
/
24
/
4 I 5
6
7
8 I 9
14 15 16 1 7 18 1 9 20 21
25 26
2 7 2 8 2 9 30
/
V S V
, (LT G R N / R E D )
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM (E19),
then g o t o step 13.
N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-353
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-363).
2 1 . Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
14. Reconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
22. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
is DTC
P0498
indicated?
16. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
17. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
18. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC
P0498
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM w a s updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go t o step 1 .
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0498 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 24.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0498 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 20.
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC P0498 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S - l f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 23, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
PASSED?
YES—If there w a s no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 19, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated o n step 19, go t o the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go t o step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 18 and recheck.
11-354
the screen
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, g o t o step 1 . If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22 and recheck.
D T C P0499: E V A P Canister Vent S h u t Valve
Circuit High Voltage
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step9.
NOTE; Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the A/F sensor relay
(LAF), then go to step 16.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, then wait 5 seconds.
3. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0499
10. A t the valve side, measure resistance between
EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
EVAP CANISTER V E N T S H U T VALVE 2P C O N N E C T O R
Indicated?
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
' PCM.B
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Terminal side of male
6. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
Is there about 25-
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Y E S - G o t o step 11.
8. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut
valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NO—Go to step 15.
terminals
30 Q, at room
temperature?
EVAP CANISTER V E N T S H U T VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
! IG1 (WHT)
Wire side of female
terminals
(cont'd)
11-355
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
16. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector terminal No. 1 t o body ground w i t h a
jumper wire.
18. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
E V A P C A N I S T E R V E N T S H U T VALVE 2 P C O N N E C T O R
19. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
20. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
V S V (LT GRN/RED)
J U M P E R
Is DTC P0499
indicated?
WIRE
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the ECM/PCM, then go t o step 1.
Wire side of female
terminals
14. Check f o r continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal E19 and body ground.
E C M / P C M C O N N E C T O R E(31P)
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P00499 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 22.
22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0499 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
1
/
22
3
2
11 1 2 /
/
24
4
5
6
7
8
14 15 16 1 7 18 19 2 0 21
25 26
2 7 2 8 29 3 0
v
Wire side of female
Is there
9
/
V S V
(LT GRN/RED)
terminals
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 23.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM (E19),
then go t o step 16.
15. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-363).
11-356
indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 21, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs was
indicated on step 2 1 , go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. S
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o
step 20 and recheck.
23. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7).
24. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0499
indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see page 11-7),
then go to step 24. If the ECM/PCM w a s substituted,
go to step 1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P0499 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to step 26.
26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0499 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED
?
Y E S - l f the ECM/PCM was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM
(see page 11-198). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs was indicated on step 25, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see page 11-7), then go to step 24. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 24 and recheck.
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P1454: F T P S e n s o r Circuit R a n g e /
Performance Problem
10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
D T C P2422: E V A P Canister Vent S h u t Valve
Stuck C l o s e d Malfunction
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
12. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-363).
13. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
15. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute.
16. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
operation.
5. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and
0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and5 mmHg), or 2.4 and2.6 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
N O — G o t o step 17.
6. Install the fuel fill cap.
7. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen
indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
or the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM. Also check for a blockage in the canister filter,
vent hoses, and drain joint. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 8 and recheck.
11-358
Does the valve
operate?
YES—Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister,
canister filter, vent hoses, and drain joint, then
install the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and go to
step 23.
NO—Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-363), then go to step 23.
17. Disconnect the air tube (A) f r o m the F T P sensor (B)
!
/
B
/
^
\|^-^7^\
"\
l
/
A
/
'
^^^^^^^^^L;.
/
[ p ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ i ^ ^ ^ ^ f /
\ ^ \ ^
_\
/
^
/
/
\ /
/
/
\ J j
/ / ^
^
^
I
jj
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch O N (II).
22. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is it between
°-
2
i n
'
H g
' "
- 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (-0.2
5
a
n
d
5
m m H
9 ) > or 2.4 and2.6
and
V?
YES—Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP
canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to step 23.
NO—Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-362),
^
then go to step 23.
j
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Reset the ECM/PCM w i t h the HDS.
18. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (-0.2
and
0.2 in.Hg, — 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES—Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air
tube, then go to step 23.
25. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see page
11-268).
26. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P1454 and/or
P2422
indicated?
N O — G o t o step 19.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
20. Remove the FTP sensor (A) f r o m the EVAP canister
w i t h its connector connected (see page 11-362).
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor, or the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1.
NO—If Temporary DTC or DTC P1454 is not
indicated, or if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go t o step 28.
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does
the screen
indicate
PASSED?
YES—If there was no Temporary DTCs or DTCs
indicated on step 27, troubleshooting is complete.
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs w a s
indicated on step 27, go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
or the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/
PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 26 and recheck.
11-360
E V A P Canister Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank guard (A).
(2.2
kgfm,
4. Remove the hoses (A), and disconnect the EVAP
canister subharness 6P connector (B).
16 Ibfft)
2. Remove the fuel tank cover (A).
9.8 N m ( 1 . 0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf.ft)
3. Remove the fuel pipe cover (A).
6. Remove the EVAP canister assembly (B).
7. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (C), hose (D),
and clips (E).
8. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-361
EVAP System
FTP Sensor Replacement
E V A P Canister Purge Valve
Replacement
1. R e m o v e t h e EVAP c a n i s t e r ( s e e p a g e 11-361).
2. D i s c o n n e c t t h e F T P s e n s o r 3P c o n n e c t o r (A).
1 . D i s c o n n e c t t h e EVAP c a n i s t e r p u r g e v a l v e 2P
c o n n e c t o r (A), a n d h o s e (B).
with a n e w O-ring (D).
2. R e m o v e t h e EVAP c a n i s t e r p u r g e v a l v e (C).
3. I n s t a l l t h e p a r t s i n t h e r e v e r s e o r d e r o f r e m o v a l
w i t h a n e w O-ring (D).
11-362
E V A P Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement
E V A P Canister Filter
RepSfflGemeoirtt
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-306).
1. Remove the EVAP canister (see page 11-361).
2. Disconnect the hoses (A).
2. Remove the hose (A), and disconnect EVAP
canister vent shut valve 2P connector (B).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f m ,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the EVAP canister filter (B).
B
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
3. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (C) f r o m
the canister bracket (D).
4. Pry the lock tabs (E) outward and remove the EVAP
canister vent shut valve.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the lock tabs.
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (G).
NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with o i l , etc.
11-363
Transaxle
Clutch
12-1
Manual Transmission
13-1
Automatic Transmission
14-1
Driveline/Axle
16-1
Clutch
Clutch
Special T o o l s
.
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
................
C l u t c h Pedal, Clutch Pedal P o s i t i o n S w i t c h ,
a n d C l u t c h Interlock S w i t c h A d j u s t m e n t
Clutch D a m p e r Replacement
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement
S l a v e C y l i n d e r R e p l a c e m e n t .......................................
Clutch R e p l a c e m e n t
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-7
12-9
12-11
Clutch
Special Tools
Ref. No.
®
®
®
(D
<D
12-2
Tool Number
07JAF-PM7012A
07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003
07749-0010000
07936-KC10500
07936-3710100
07946-1870100
Description
Clutch Alignment Shaft
Ring Gear Holder
Driver
Bearing Remover Shaft
Handle
A t t a c h m e n t 28 x 30 m m
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
Component Location Index
RESERVOIR
RESERVOIR HOSE
CLUTCH PEDAL
Adjustment, page
12-4
CLUTCH
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
Adjustment,
page
12-4
CLUTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
Adjustment,
page
12-4
CLUTCH MASTER
CYLINDER
Replacement, page
CLUTCH
12-7
DAMPER
Replacement,
page
12-5
CLUTCH HOSE
PILOT BEARING
Inspection, page
12-13
Replacement, page
12-13
C L U T C H H O S E CLIP
FLYWHEEL
Inspection, page
12-14
Replacement, page
12-14
PRESSURE PLATE
ROLL PIN
Removal,
page
12-11
Installation,
page
12-15
RELEASE FORK
SLAVE CYLINDER
Replacement,
page
12-9
R E L E A S E FORK BOOT
RELEASE BEARING
Replacement, page
12-16
12-3
Clutch
Clutch P e d a l Clutch Pedal Position S w i t c h , and Clutch Interlock S w i t c h
Adjustment
NOTE:
• Check the clutch pedal position switch (see page 4-48).
• Check the clutch interlock switch (see page 4-8).
• Remove the driver's side floor mat before adjusting
the clutch pedal.
• The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear.
• If there is no clearance between the master cylinder
piston and pushrod, the release bearing will be held
against the diaphragm spring, which can result in
clutch slippage or other clutch problems.
1. Loosen the clutch pedal position switch locknut (A),
and back off the clutch pedal position switch (B) (or
adjusting bolt; w i t h o u t cruise control model) until it
no longer touches the clutch pedal (C).
3. Tighten the clutch pushrod locknut.
4. With the clutch pedal released, turn in the clutch
pedal position switch until it contacts the clutch
pedal.
5. Turn in the clutch pedal position switch an
additional 3/4 to 1 turn.
6. Tighten the clutch pedal position switch locknut.
7. Loosen the clutch interlock switch locknut (J) and
the clutch interlock switch (K).
8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
9. Release the clutch pedal 67—72 m m (2.64—2.83 in.)
f r o m the floor, and hold it there. Adjust the position
of the clutch interlock switch so the engine will start
w i t h the clutch pedal in this position.
10. Tighten the clutch interlock switch locknut.
2. Loosen the clutch pushrod locknut (D), and turn the
pushrod (E) in or out to get the specified height (F),
stroke (G), free play (H) and disengement height (I)
at the clutch pedal.
Clutch Pedal Stroke:
1 3 0 - 1 4 0 mm (5.12-5.51 in.)
Clutch Pedal Free Play:
6 - 2 0 mm (0.24-0.79 in.)
Clutch Pedal Height:
163 mm (6.42 in.)
Clutch Pedal Disengement Height:
72 mm (2.76 in.)
12-4
Clutch Damper Replacement
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
8. Remove the clutch damper (A) f r o m the clutch
damper bracket (B).
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio, then write d o w n the audio unit presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery,
then disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the battery.
4. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
5. Remove the battery base.
6. Disconnect the clutch hose (A) and clutch pipe (B).
Plug or w r a p the end of the clutch line w i t h a shop
towel to prevent brake fluid f r o m coming out.
9. Install the clutch damper (A) to the clutch damper
bracket (B).
9.8
N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2
Ibfft)
7. Remove the clutch damper bracket mounting bolts.
(cont'd)
12-5
Clutch
Clutch Damper Replacement (cont'd)
10. Install the clutch damper bracket m o u n t i n g bolts.
12. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system.
• Attach a hose to the bleeder screw (A), and
suspended the hose in a container of brake fluid.
• Make sure there is an adequate supply of fluid in
the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the
clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the
bleeder hose.
• Tighten the bleeder screw to 8 N-m (0.8 kgf-m,
5.8 Ibf-ft); do not overtighten it.
• Refill the clutch master cylinder w i t h fluid w h e n
done.
• Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid.
1.25 mm
22 N - m
8 x
(2.2
kgfm,
16 I b f f t )
11. Connect the clutch pipe (A) and clutch hose (B). Use
the new oil bolt packing (C).
13. Make sure the fluid level in the reservoir is at the
M A X (upper) level line (A).
29 N m
(3.0 k g f m
22 Ibfft)
MAX
MIN
A
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 1 6 I b f f t )
14. Install the battery base.
15. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
16. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals with sandpaper. Connect the
positive cable t o the battery first, then connect the
negative cable, and apply multipurpose grease to
prevent corrosion.
17. Check the clutch operation and check for leaking
fluid.
18. Test-drive the vehicle.
19. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio unit, then
enter the audio presets, and set the clock.
12-6
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement
NOTE:
5.
• U s e f e n d e r c o v e r s to a v o i d d a m a g i n g
R e m o v e the clutch master cylinder
(A).
painted
surfaces.
• D o n o t s p i l l b r a k e f l u i d o n t h e v e h i c l e ; it m a y
damage
t h e p a i n t . If b r a k e f l u i d d o e s c o n t a c t t h e p a i n t , w a s h it
off i m m e d i a t e l y w i t h w a t e r .
1.
R e m o v e the brake fluid f r o m the clutch m a s t e r
cylinder reservoir with a syringe.
2.
R e m o v e t h e r e t a i n i n g c l i p (A).
l i n e (B).
Disconnect the clutch
Plug or w r a p the e n d of the clutch line w i t h
a s h o p t o w e l to prevent brake fluid f r o m
coming
out.
C
6.
R e m o v e t h e O - r i n g (B) a n d t h e c l u t c h m a s t e r
c y l i n d e r s e a l (C) f r o m t h e c l u t c h m a s t e r c y l i n d e r .
7.
I n s t a l l t h e c l u t c h m a s t e r c y l i n d e r s e a l (A),
m a s t e r c y l i n d e r (B), a n d a n e w O - r i n g
clutch
(C).
A
3.
D i s c o n n e c t t h e r e s e r v o i r h o s e (C) f r o m t h e c l u t c h
m a s t e r c y l i n d e r . P l u g or w r a p t h e e n d of the
reservoir h o s e w i t h a s h o p t o w e l to p r e v e n t
fluid f r o m c o m i n g
4.
brake
out.
P r y o u t t h e l o c k p i n (A), a n d p u l l t h e p e d a l p i n
(B)
out of the y o k e . R e m o v e the m a s t e r c y l i n d e r
mounting nuts
(C).
C
(cont'd)
12-7
Clutch
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement (cont'd)
8. Install the pedal pin (A) and the lock pin (B), then
tighten the master cylinder m o u n t i n g nuts (C).
10. Install the retaining clip (A), and pry to open the tip
of the retaining clip (B) w i t h a screwdriver to
prevent it f r o m coming off.
9. Connect the reservoir hose (A) and the clutch line
(B). Make sure the tabs (C) on the reservoir hose
clamp is pointed in the directions s h o w n .
11. Bleed the clutch master hydraulic system (see step
12 on page 12-6).
12. Make sure the fluid level in the reservoir is at the
Max (upper) level line (see step 13 on page 12-6).
13. Check the clutch operation and check for leaking
fluid.
14. Adjust the clutch pedal, clutch pedal position
switch, and clutch interlock switch (see page 12-4).
A
12-8
15. Test-drive the vehicle.
Slave Cylinder Replacement
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces,
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately w i t h water.
5. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts (A) and the slave
cylinder (B).
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio unit, then write d o w n the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery,
then disconnect the positive cable. Remove the
battery.
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
4. Remove the harness clamps (A) and the battery
base (B).
8 x 1.25
22 N-m
6. Remove the roll pins (C). Disconnect the clutch line
(D), and remove the O-ring (E). Plug or wrap the
end of the clutch line w i t h a shop t o w e l to prevent
brake fluid f r o m c o m i n g out.
m m
7. Install the slave cylinder in the reverse order of
removal. Install a new O-ring (A).
B
8. Pull back the boot (B), and apply brake assembly
lube to the boot and slave cylinder rod (C). Reinstall
the boot.
9. A p p l y super high t e m p urea grease (P/N 087989002) to the slave cylinder pushrod. Tighten the
slave cylinder mounting bolts to 22 N- m (2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibfft).
(cont'd)
12-9
Clutch
Slave Cylinder Replacement (cont'd)
10. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system (see step 12 on
page 12-6).
11. Make sure the fluid level in the reservoir is at the
Max (upper) level line (see step 13 on page 12-6).
12. Install the battery base.
13. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
14. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals w i t h sandpaper. Connect the
positive cable to the battery f i r s t then connect the
negative cable, and apply multipurpose grease to
prevent corrosion.
15. Check the clutch operation and check for leaking
fluid.
16. Test-drive the vehicle.
:
17. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio u n i t then
enter the audio presets, and set the clock.
12-10
Clutch Replacement
Special Tools Required
• Clutch alignment shaft 07JAF-PM7012A
• Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or 07924-PD20003
•Driver 07749-0010000
• Bearing remover shaft 07936-KC10500
•Handle 07936-3710100
•Attachment, 28 x 30 m m 07946-1870100
• Slide hammer, 3/8"-16 commercially available
4. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (A) for
wear at the release bearing contact area.
A
P r e s s u r e Plate a n d Clutch Disc Removal
1. Check the height of the diaphragm spring fingers
using the dial indicator (A). If the height is more
than the service limit, replace the pressure plate.
Standard P e w ) ;
Service Limit:
0.8 mm (0.03 in.) max.
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
5. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear,
cracks, and burning.
2. Install the clutch alignment shaft (A), handle (B),
and the ring gear holder (C).
0 7 L A B - P V 0 0 1 0 0 or
07924-PD20003
3. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate
mounting bolts (D) in a crisscross pattern in several
steps, then remove the pressure plate (E).
(cont'd)
12-11
Clutch
#
Clutch Replacement (cont d)
6. Use a straight edge (A) and feeler gauge (B) to
inspect the pressure plate (C) for warpage.
Measure across the pressure plate. If the warpage
is more than the service l i m i t replace the pressure
plate.
9. Measure the clutch disc thickness. If the thickness
is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc.
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max.
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
7. Remove the clutch disc (A), the clutch alignment
shaft (B), and handle (C).
10. Measure the rivet depth f r o m the clutch disc lining
surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the
rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the
clutch disc.
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
8. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of
slipping or oil. If the clutch disc looks burnt or is
soaked w i t h oil, replace it. Find the source of the oil
leak if the clutch disc is soaked.
12-12
7.25—7.95 mm
(0.285-0.313 in.)
5.0 mm (0.20 in.)
1.1 — 1.6 mm
(0.043-0.063 in.)
0.2 mm (0.08 in.)
Pilot Bearing Inspection
1. Turn the inner race of the pilot bearing w i t h your
finger. The pilot bearing should turn smoothly and
quietly. Check that the pilot bearing outer race fits
tightly in the crankshaft. If the race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the crankshaft,
replace the pilot bearing.
Pilot Bearing Replacement
1. Remove the pilot bearing (A) using the bearing
remover shaft (B) and the slide hammer (C).
2. Install the new pilot bearing (A) into the crankshaft
using the driver (B) and the 28 x 30 m m attachment
(C). Apply a light coat of oil to the bearing surface.
(cont'd)
12-13
Clutch
Clutch Replacement (cont'd)
Flywheel Inspection
Flywheel Replacement
1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage.
1. Install the ring gear holder (A).
2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the
flywheel for wear, cracks and burning.
3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial
indicator (B) through at least t w o full turns w i t h the
engine installed. Push against the flywheel each
time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust
washer clearance. If the runout is more than the
service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the
runout. Resurfacing the flywheel is not
recommended.
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max.
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
A
B
2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross
pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel
and ring gear holder.
3. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft, and install
the mounting bolts finger-tight.
4. Install the ring gear holder (A), then torque the
flywheel mounting bolts (B) in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
12-14
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation
1. Temporarily install the clutch disc onto the splines
of the transmission mainshaft. Make sure the clutch
disc slides freely on the mainshaft.
5. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent
w a r p i n g the diaphragm spring.
Specified Torque: 25 N-m (2.6 k g f m , 19 Ibfft)
2. Install the ring gear holder (A).
6. Remove the clutch alignment tool set and ring gear
holder.
3. Apply super high t e m p urea grease (P/N 087989002) to the splines (B) of the clutch disc (C), then
install the clutch disc using the clutch alignment
shaft (D), and handle (E).
7. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the
same height.
4. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting
bolts (B) finger-tight.
(cont'd)
12-15
Clutch
Clutch Replacement (cont'd)
Release Bearing Replacement
1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch
housing (B).
4. A p p l y super high t e m p urea grease (P/N 087989002) to the release fork (A), the release bearing (B),
and release bearing guide (C).
2. Remove the release fork (C) f r o m the clutch
housing by squeezing the release fork set spring (D)
w i t h pliers. Remove the release bearing (E).
3. Check the play of the release bearing by spinning it
by your hand. If there is excessive play or noise,
replace the release bearing w i t h a new one.
NOTE: The release bearing is packed w i t h grease.
Do not w a s h it in solvent.
5. With the release fork slid between the release
bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the
mainshaft while inserting the release fork through
the hole in the clutch housing.
6. Align the detent of the release fork w i t h the release
fork bolt, then press the release fork over the.
release fork bolt squarely.
7. Install the release fork boot (D). Make sure the boot
seals around the release fork and clutch housing.
8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make
sure that it fits properly against the release bearing
(B), and that the release bearing slides smoothly.
12-16
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission
Special T o o l s
Transmission Fluid inspection
and Replacement
Back-up L i g h t S w i t c h Test .......
Gearshift M e c h a n i s m
Replacement
T r a n s m i s s i o n R e m o v a l ...........
T r a n s m i s s i o n I n s t a l l a t i o n ........
T r a n s m i s s i o n D i s a s s e m b l y .....
Reverse S h i f t Fork Clearance
Inspection
C h a n g e Lever Clearance
Inspection
C h a n g e Lever A s s e m b l y
D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y ...
S h i f t Fork Clearance
Inspection
S h i f t Fork D i s a s s e m b l y /
Reassembly
Mainshaft A s s e m b l y Clearance
Inspection
M a i n s h a f t D i s a s s e m b l y ...........
M a i n s h a f t I n s p e c t i o n ...............
Mainshaft Reassembly
Countershaft Assembly
Clearance I n s p e c t i o n ...........
C o u n t e r s h a f t D i s a s s e m b l y ......
13-2
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-11
13-17
13-22
13-22
C o u n t e r s h a f t I n s p e c t i o n ..........
C o u n t e r s h a f t R e a s s e m b l y .......
Synchro Sleeve and Hub
Inspection and
Reassembly
S y n c h r o Ring a n d Gear
Inspection
M a i n s h a f t B e a r i n g a n d Oil Seal
Replacement
Countershaft Bearing
Replacement
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance
Adjustment
Transmission Reassembly
13-35
13-36
13-40
13-40
13-42
13-43
13-44
13-47
13-23
M/T Differential
13-24
13-25
13-26
13-28
13-29
13-30
13-32
13-34
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ....
Backlash I n s p e c t i o n
D i f f e r e n t i a l Carrier, Final
D r i v e n Gear R e p l a c e m e n t ...
Carrier B e a r i n g / S p e e d o m e t e r
D r i v e Gear R e p l a c e m e n t
Oil Seal R e p l a c e m e n t ..............
D i f f e r e n t i a l T h r u s t Clearance
Adjustment
13-51
13-52
13-52
13-53
13-54
13-55
Manual Transmission
Special Tools
Description
Tool Number
07AAK-SNAA120
Universal Eyelet
Mainshaft Holder
07GAJ-PG20110
*©
#
Base Collar
07GAJ-PG20120
®
07GAJ-PG20130
Mainshaft Base
*©
07JAD-PH80200
Pilot 2 6 x 3 0 m m
©
Oil Seal Driver Attachment
07JAD-PN00100
®
07736-A01000B
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25—40 m m
**©
Attachment, 37 x 40 m m
07746-0010200
®
Attachment, 52 x 55 m m
07746-0010400
©
Driver, 40 m m I.D.
07746-0030100
®
Attachment, 25 m m I.D.
07746-0030200
®
Attachment, 30 m m I.D.
07746-0030300
©
Attachment, 35 m m I.D.
07746-0030400
®
Driver
07749-0010000
®
* Part of Mainshaft Inspection Tool Set, 07GAJ-PG20102.
* * Must be used w i t h a commercially available 3/8"-16 slide hammer.
Ref. No.
Qty
©
13-2
©
©
©
©
©
®
©
©
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
®
Transmission Fluid Inspection and
Replacement
Back-up Light S w i t c h Test
1. Disconnect the back-up light switch (A) 2P
connector.
y\
-
-
3. If the fluid is dirty, remove the drain plug (A) and
drain the fluid.
2. Check for continuity between the back-up light
switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
There should be continuity w h e n the shift lever is
only in reverse.
3. If necessary, replace the back-up light switch.
Install the back-up switch on the transmission
housing w i t h a new washer.
r v - m \>
Ibfft)
4. Reinstall the drain plug w i t h a new washer, and
refill the transmission fluid to the proper level.
Fluid Capacity
1.5 L (1.6 U S qt) at fluid change
1.6 L (1.7 U S qt) at overhaul
Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF). Using engine oil can cause stiffer shifting
because it does not contain the proper additives.
5. Reinstall the oil filler plug (B) w i t h a new washer.
13-3
Manual Transmission
Gearshift Mechanism Replacement
13-4
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required
• Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
•Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 *
• Fit engine hanger adapter VSB02C000026 *
• These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
5. Carefully remove the slave cylinder (A) to avoid
bending the clutch line. Do not press the clutch
pedal once the slave cylinder, boot (B) and clamp
(C) have been removed. Remove the breather tube
(D) f r o m the clamp.
B
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio unit, then write d o w n the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery,
then disconnect the positive cable. Remove the
battery.
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
4. Remove the harness clamps (A) and the battery
base (B).
6. Disconnect the back-up light switch 2P connector
(A), then remove the harness clamps (B).
B
B
(cont'd)
13-5
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the cable bracket (A), then disconnect the
shift cables (B) f r o m the top of the transmission
housing. Carefully remove both cables and the
bracket together to avoid bending the cables.
13-6
9. Attach the universal eyelet (A) to the air cleaner
stay (B).
/
11. Install the Fit engine hanger adapters (A) onto the A
and Reds engine support hanger (B), then position
the engine support hanger on the vehicle. Attach
the hook (C) to the universal eyelet (D). Tighten the
w i n g n u t (E) by hand to lift and support the engine/
transmission.
16. Remove the clutch cover.
A
VSB02C000026
AAR-T-1256©
17. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolts,
bracket (A) and stiffener (B).
07AAK-SNAA120
12. Raise the vehicle on the hoist, and make sure it is
securely supported.
13. Drain the transmission fluid. Install the drain plug
w i t h a new washer (see page 13-3).
14. Remove the splash shield.
15. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4).
(cont'd)
13-7
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
18. Remove the power steering gearbox bracket.
19. Attach a nylon strap or rope to the body and around
the steering gearbox t o support it on both sides.
2 1 . Support the front subframe w i t h a jack.
22. Remove the front subframe mounting bolts (A) and
the front subframe (B).
20. Remove the three rear transmission m o u n t bracket
bolts.
A
Replace.
13-8
(cont'd)
13-9
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
28. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
29. Support the transmission with a transmission jack.
30. Remove the lower transmission mounting bolts.
3 1 . Pull the transmission away f r o m the engine until
the transmission mainshaft clears the clutch
pressure plate.
3 2 . Slowly lower the transmission about 1 5 0 m m ( 6 in.)
Check once again that all hoses and electrical
w i r i n g are disconnected and free f r o m the
transmission, then lower it all the way.
33. Remove the release fork (A) f r o m the clutch
housing (B) by squeezing the release fork set spring
(C) w i t h pliers. Then remove the release bearing (D).
13-10
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required
* Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 *
* Fit engine hanger adapter V S B 0 2 C 0 0 0 0 2 6 *
* These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
6. Install the transmission m o u n t bracket (A) and
ground cable (B).
9
10 x 1.25 m m
49 N-m
(5.0 k g f m , 3 6 I b f f t )
Replace.
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m ,
33 Ibfft)
Replace.
1. Check the t w o dowel pins are installed in the clutch
housing.
2. Apply super high t e m p urea grease (P/N
08798-9002) to the release fork (A) and the release
bearing (B), and release bearing guide (C). Install
the release fork and the release bearing, and wipe
excess grease off the release bearing after install it.
(P/N 087989002)
0.3-0.9 g
( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 0 3 oz)
10 x 1.25 m m
49
N-m
(5.0 k g f m , 3 6 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 I b f f t )
7. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
(P/N 08798-9002)
0.5-1.1 g
( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 4 oz)
8. Install the air cleaner stay.
mm
(2.2
(P/N 08798-9002)
kgfm,
(P/N 08798-9002)
0.4-1.0 g
(0.01-0.04 oz)
3. Place the transmission on the transmission jack,
and raise it to the engine level.
4 . Install the lower transmission mounting bolts.
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f m ,
47 Ibfft)
1.25
• 12 x
m m
6 4 N-m (6.5 k g f m , 47 Ibfft)
5. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
(cont'd)
13-11
Manual Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
9. Install the front transmission mount assembly.
11. Lift and support the front subframe with a jack.
12. Install the front subframe w i t h new mounting bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
39 N m (4.0 k g f m , 29 ibfft)
NOTE: When installing, align the reference holes in
the subframe w i t h the reference holes in the body
on both sides w i t h a screwdriver or tapered punch.
10. Install the rear transmission m o u n t bracket (A) and
the rear transmission mount (B).
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m
(4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
R e
P
, a c e
-
„
12x1.25 m m
14 x
1.5 m m
Nm
(9.5 k g f m , 6 9 I b f f t )
93
Replace.
13-12
13. Install the three rear transmission mount bracket
bolts.
14. Install the power steering gearbox bracket.
10 x 1.25 m m
10 x 1.25
44 N - m
59
(4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
N-m
mm
16.0 k g f m ,
43 Ibfft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25
58 N - m
mm
15. Install the steering gearbox mounting bolts w i t h the
bracket (A) and stiffener (B).
10 x 1.25
52 N - m
(5.S k g f m , 43 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25
49 N - m
mm
(5.0 k g f m ,
36 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 m m
49 N m
(5.0 k g f m ,
36 Ibfft)
Replace.
Replace.
mm
(5.3 k g f m ,
38 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 mm
52 N m
(5.3 k g f m , 38 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
13-13
Manual Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
16. Install the clutch cover.
22. Install the one upper transmission mounting bolt
(A) and lower starter motor m o u n t i n g bolt (B).
A
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
(6.5 k g f m ,
47 Ibfft)
6x
mm
1.0
12 N - m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
17. Install the driveshaft (see page 16-23).
18. Install the splash shield.
19. Refill the transmission fluid (see page 13-3).
20. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
21. Remove the universal eyelet the engine support
hanger, and Fit engine hanger adapter.
13-14
B
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
(6.5 k g f m ,
47 Ibfft)
23. Connect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector
(A).
24. Install the cable bracket (A) and shift cables (B) to
avoid bending the shift cables. Then install new
cotter pins (C) and bend it as s h o w n .
26. Install the boot (A).
NOTE; Make sure the reference marks (D) on the
shift cables come upper side.
8 x 1.25 mm
27 N-m
(2.8
k g f m , 20
Ibfft)
(P/N 08798-9002)
27. Apply super high t e m p urea grease (P/N
08798-9002) to the end of the slave cylinder rod.
Install the slave cylinder (B) and avoid bending the
clutch line.
28. Align the reference mark (C), install the breather
tube (D) to the clamp (E).
29. Install the battery base (A) and harness clamps (B).
(P/N
08C30-B0234M)
(P/N
08C30-B0234M)
25. Connect the back-up light switch 2P connector (A),
then install the harness clamps (B).
B
(cont'd)
13-15
Manual Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
30. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-306).
3 1 . Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals w i t h sandpaper. Connect the
positive cable to the battery first, then connect the
negative cable, and apply multipurpose grease to
prevent corrosion.
32. Check the f r o n t wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
33. Check the shift lever and clutch operation.
34. Test-drive the vehicle.
35. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio unit, then
enter the audio presets, and set the clock.
13-16
Transmission Disassembly
Exploded View - Clutch Housing
© DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
© SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY
® COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBLY
© M A I N S H A F T ASSEMBLY
© NEEDLE BEARING
® OIL GUIDE PLATE C
© MAGNET
® 26 mm WASHER
© 36 mm SPRING WASHER
@ BALL BEARING
CD) 26 x 40 x 7 mm OIL SEAL
Replace.
(3) 1 4 x 2 0 mm DOWEL PIN
@ REVERSE GEAR SHAFT
0$> REVERSE IDLER GEAR
© 6 x 1.0 mm SPECIAL BOLT
15 N-m (1.5 k g f m , 1 1 Ibfft)
® REVERSE SHIFT FORK
© 35 x 58 x 8 mm OIL SEAL
Replace.
@ CLUTCH HOUSING
dD 6 x 1 . 0 m m FLANGE BOLT
9.8 N-m ( 1 . 0 kgfm, 7.2 Ibfft)
® VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)
@
O-RING
Replace.
® REVERSE LOCK CAM
@ 6 x 1 . 0 mm SPECIAL BOLT
15 N-m (1.5 k g f m , 11 Ibfft)
@ 8 x 1 . 0 mm SPECIAL BOLT
31 N-m (3.2 k g f m , 23 I b f f t )
# 8 m m SPRING WASHER
® STARTER CABLE BRACKET B
® 6 x 1 . 0 m m FLANGE BOLT
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
® E-RING
Replace.
® WASHER
® SPRING
® VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) GEAR
(cont'd)
13-17
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
E x p l o d e d V i e w - T r a n s m i s s i o n Housing
© 12 x 1 . 0 mm SET SCREW
2 2 N-m ( 2 . 2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
® 1 2 m m WASHER
Replace.
(D SPRING
® STEEL BALL
© 32 x 1.25 mm SEALING SCREW
2 5 Nm
( 2 . 5 k g f m , 18
Ibfft)
® TRANSMISSION HOUSING
® 8 x 1 . 2 5 mm FLANGE BOLT
27 N-m (2.8 kgfm, 20 ibfft)
® TRANSMISSION HANGER
® OIL GUIDE PLATE M
13-18
) 72 mm SHIM
) OIL GUTTER PLATE
) 80 mm SHIM
) BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
29 N-m (3.0 k g f m , 22 I b f f t )
) 18 mm WASHER
Replace.
) BREATHER TUBE CLAMP
) BREATHER TUBE
) 6 x 1.0 mm FLANGE BOLT
12 N-m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
) CHANGE LEVER ASSEMBLY
) 8x10 mm DOWEL PIN
) 20 mm WASHER.
Replace.
) FILLER PLUG
44 N-m (4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfft)
) 35 x 56 x 8 mm OIL SEAL
Replace.
) 14 mm WASHER
Replace.
) DRAIN PLUG
39 N-m (4.0 kgfm, 29 Ibfft)
NOTE: Place the clutch housing on t w o pieces of w o o d
thick enough to keep the mainshaft f r o m hitting the
workbench.
3. Remove the drain plug (A), filler plug (B), vehicle
speed sensor (VSS) (C) and O-ring (D).
1. Remove the set screws (A), 12 m m washers,
springs, steel balls and back-up light switch (B).
2. Remove the change lever assembly (A) and 8 x
10 m m dowel pins (B).
4. Remove the 8 m m flange bolts (A) and
transmission hanger (B) in a crisscross pattern in
several steps.
(cont'd)
13-19
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
5. Remove the 32 m m sealing screw (A).
9. Remove the reverse shift fork.
10. Remove the reverse lock cam.
6. Expand the 52 m m snap ring (B) on the
countershaft ball bearing, and remove it f r o m the
groove w i t h snap ring pliers.
7. Remove the transmission housing (C) and
14 x 20 m m dowel pins (D).
8. Remove the reverse idler gear (A) and reverse gear
shaft (B).
13-20
12.
R e m o v e t h e 8 m m s p e c i a l bolt (E) a n d 8 m m
washer
13.
R e m o v e t h e 36 m m s p r i n g w a s h e r ( G ) a n d 26
washer
14.
spring
(F).
mm
(H).
R e m o v e the differential a s s e m b l y (A), a n d
magnet
(B).
13-21
manual Transmission
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance
Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between reverse idler gear
(A) and the reverse shift fork (B) w i t h a feeler gauge
(C). If the clearance is more than the service limit,
go to step 2.
Change Lever Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between change lever (A)
and the select lever (B) with a feeler gauge (C). If
the clearance is more than the service limit, go to
step 2.
Standard:
0.05—0.35 mm (0.002-0.014 in.)
Service Limit: 0.55 mm (0.022 in.)
Standard:
1.30—1.90 mm (0.051 —0.075 in.)
Service Limit: 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
2. Measure the w i d t h of the change lever.
2. Measure the w i d t h of the reverse shift fork.
• If the w i d t h is not w i t h i n the standard, replace the
reverse shift fork.
• If the w i d t h is w i t h i n the standard, replace the
reverse idler gear.
Standard: 13.5—13.8 mm (0.531—0.543 in.)
13-22
• If the w i d t h is not within the standard, replace the
change lever.
• If the w i d t h is w i t h i n the standard, replace the
select lever.
Standard: 13.00-13.15 mm (0.512-0.518 in.)
Change Lever Assembly Disassembly/Reassembly
Prior to reassembling clean all the parts in s o l v e n t dry then, and apply lubricate to any contact surface.
(P/N 08734-0001)
(P/N
08C30-B0234M)
BREATHER
TUBE
SELECT LEVER
SELECT SPRING PLATE
INTERLOCK
• 8 M 1.25 mm
31 N-m
(3.2 k g f m , 23 ibfft)
13-23
Manual Transmission
Shift Fork Clearance Inspection
NOTE: The synchro sleeve and synchro hub should be
replaced as a set.
1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A)
and its matching synchro sleeve (B). If the
clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
Standard:
0.35—0.65 mm (0.014—0.026 in.)
Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
3. Measure the clearance between the shift forks (A)
and the shift arm (B). If the clearance exceeds the
service limit, go to step 4.
Standard:
0.2—0.5 mm (0.008—0.020 in.)
Service Limit: 0.62 mm (0.024 in.)
A
B
4. Measure the w i d t h of the shift a r m .
A
2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork fingers.
• If the thickness is not w i t h i n the standard, replace
the shift fork.
• If the thickness is w i t h i n the standard, replace the
synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
Standard:
1st/2nd, 3rd/4th shift forks:
7 . 4 - 7 . 6 mm (0.29-0.30 in.)
5th shift fork:
6 . 7 - 6 . 9 mm (0.26-0.27 in.)
13-24
• If the w i d t h is not within the standard, replace the
shift a r m .
• If the w i d t h is w i t h i n the standard, replace the
shift fork or shift piece.
Standard: 12.9-13.0 mm (0.508-0.512 in.)
Shift Fork Disassembly/Reassembly
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply lubricant to any contact parts.
5 T H SHIFT FORK
3-4 SHIFT FORK
1-2 S H I F T F O R K
5 - R SHIFT PIECE
13-25
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the
synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
1. Support the bearing inner race w i t h an appropriate
sized socket (A), and push d o w n on the mainshaft
(B).
4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and
the distance collar (B) with a dial indicator (C). If the
clearance is more than the service limit, go to step
5.
Standard:
0.06—0.19 mm (0.002—0.007 in.)
Service Limit: 0.31 mm (0.012 in.)
2. Measure the clearance between 2nd gear (C) and
3rd gear (D) w i t h a feeler gauge (E).
5. Measure distance © on the distance collar.
• If the clearance is more than the service limit, go
to step 3.
• If the clearance is w i t h i n the service limit, go to
step 4.
Standard:
0.06—0.21 mm (0.002—0.008 in.)
Service Limit: 0.33 mm (0.013 in.)
3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,
replace 3rd gear.
• If the thickness is w i t h i n the service limit, replace
the 3rd/4th synchro hub and 3rd/4th synchro
sleeve.
Standard:
27.92-27.97 mm (1.099-1.101 in.)
Service Limit: 27.85 mm (1.096 in.)
13-26
• If distance © is not w i t h i n the standard, replace
the distance collar.
• If distance ® is w i t h i n the standard, go to step 6.
Standard: 24.03—24.06 mm (0.946—0.947 in.)
6. Measure the thickness of 4th gear.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,
replace 4th gear.
• If the thickness is within the service limit, replace
the 3rd/4th synchro hub and 3rd/4th synchro
sleeve.
8. Measure distance © on the distance collar.
• If distance @ is not w i t h i n the standard, replace
the distance collar.
• If distance © is w i t h i n the standard, go to step 9.
Standard: 24.03-24.06 mm (0.946-0.947 in.)
Standard:
27.02-27.07 m m (1.064-1.066 in.)
Service Limit: 26.95 m m (1.061 in.)
0
0
®
9. Measure the thickness of 5th gear.
7 . Measure the clearance between the distance
collar (A) and 5th gear (B) with a dial indicator (C). If
the clearance is more than the service limit, go to
step 8.
Standard:
0.06—0.19 mm (0.002—0.007 in.)
Service Limit: 0.31 mm (0.012 in.)
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,
replace 5th gear.
• If the thickness is w i t h i n the service limit, replace
the 5th synchro hub and 5th synchro sleeve.
Standard:
28.92-28.97 mm (1.139-1.141 in.)
Service Limit: 28.85 mm (1.136 in.)
(cont'd)
13-27
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance
Inspection (cont'd)
10. Measure the thickness of the distance collar. If the
thickness is not w i t h i n standard, replace the
distance collar.
Standard; 12.00-12.05 m m (0.472-0.474 In.}
Mainshaft Disassembly
1. Remove the ball bearing, tapered cone ring,
distance collar, synchro ring and 5th synchro
sleeve.
2. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks, and press the
mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub (B). Use of a
jaw-type puller can cause damage to the gear teeth.
3. Support the 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks, and press
the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B).
Use of a jaw-type puller can cause damage to the
gear teeth.
13-28
Mainshaft Inspection
1.
Inspect the g e a r a n d b e a r i n g s u r f a c e s for w e a r a n d
d a m a g e , t h e n m e a s u r e t h e m a i n s h a f t a t p o i n t s A,
B,
2.
I n s p e c t t h e r u n o u t b y s u p p o r t i n g both e n d s of the
mainshaft. Rotate the mainshaft two complete
C, D a n d E. If a n y p a r t o f t h e m a i n s h a f t i s l e s s t h a n
t u r n s w h i l e m e a s u r i n g w i t h a d i a l g a u g e . If t h e
t h e s e r v i c e l i m i t ( e x c e p t E), r e p l a c e i t
runout is m o r e than the service limit replace the
mainshaft.
Standard:
2 5 . 9 8 7 - 26.000 mm
(1.0231 -1.0236 in.)
28.992- 29.005 mm
B Distance collar surface: (1.1414 -1.1419 in.)
3 4 . 9 8 4 - 35.000 mm
C Needle bearing surface: (1.3773 -1.3780 in.)
25.977- 25.990 mm
D Ball bearing surface:
(1.0227 -1.0232 in.)
14.870- 14.890 mm
E Pilot bearing surface:
(0.5854- 0.5862 in.)
Service Limit: A: 25.93 mm (1.021 in )
B: 28.93 mm (1.139 in
C: 34.93 mm (1.375 in
D: 25.92 mm (1.021 in
E: 14.82 rum (0.583 in
A Ball bearing surface:
Standard:
0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
13-29
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly
E x p l o d e d View
BALL BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
Note the direction
of installation.
TAPERED C O N E RING
DISTANCE
COLLAR
S Y N C H R O
RING
S Y N C H R O SPRING
3RD/4TH
SYNCHRO SLEEVE
3RD/4TH
S Y N C H R O
5TH S Y N C H R O SLEEVE
Note the direction
of installation.
HUB
SYNCHRO SPRING
5TH S Y N C H R O HUB
Note the direction
of installation.
SYNCHRO RING
S Y N C H R O SPRING
3RD GEAR
S Y N C H R O
5TH
RING
GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
MAINSHAFT
4TH
GEAR
S Y N C H R O
RING
S Y N C H R O SPRING
13-30
Special Tools Required
• Driver, 40 m m LD. 07746-0030100
• A t t a c h m e n t 30 m m I.D. 07746-0030300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed during
this procedure.
5. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve (A) by aligning
the stops (B) of the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and 3rd/
4th synchro hub. After installing, check the
operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub s e t
A
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply
lubricant all contact surfaces except the 3rd/4th and
5th synchro hubs.
2. Install the 3rd gear, its bearing, and the 3rd gear
synchro ring and synchro spring on the mainshaft.
3. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A) by aligning the
synchro ring fingers (B) w i t h the grooves in the 3rd/
4th synchro hub (C).
c
B
6. Install the 4th gear synchro spring and synchro ring,
4th gear and its bearing, the distance collar, and 5th
gear and its bearing on the mainshaft. Then install
the 5th gear synchro ring and synchro spring.
7. Install the 5th synchro hub (A) by aligning the
synchro ring fingers (B) w i t h the grooves in the 5th
synchro hub (C).
4. Support 2nd gear (A) on steel blocks, then install
the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B) using the 40 m m I.D.
driver (C), 30 m m I.D. attachment (D), and a press
(Eh
(cont'd)
13-31
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Countershaft Assembly Clearance
Inspection
8. * Install the 5th synchro hub (A) using the 40 m m I.D.
driver (B), 30 m m I.D. attachment (C), and a press
1. Measure the clearance between the 1st gear (A)
and the countershaft (B) w i t h a feeler gauge (C). If
the clearance is more than the service limit, go to
step 2.
Standard:
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 1 2 mm (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 5 In.)
Service Limit: 0.22 mm (0.009 in.)
9. Install the 5th synchro sleeve.
10. Install the synchro s p r i n g / t h e synchro ring,
distance collar, tapered cone ring, and ball bearing.
2. Measure the thickness of the 1 st gear.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,
replace 1st gear.
• If the thickness is w i t h i n the service limit, replace
the 1st/2nd synchro hub.
Standard:
2 6 . 8 9 - 2 6 . 9 4 mm ( 1 . 0 5 9 - 1 . 0 6 1 in.)
Service Limit: 26.86 mm (1.057 in.)
13-32
3. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear (A)
and 3rd gear (B) w i t h a feeler gauge (C). If the
clearance is more than the service limit, go to
step 4.
Standard;
0.04—0.12 mm (0.002—0.005 in.)
Service Limit: 0.24 mm (0.009 in.)
5 . Measure the thickness of the 2 n d gear.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,
replace 2 n d gear.
• If the thickness is w i t h i n the service limit, replace
the 1 s t / 2 n d synchro hub.
Standard;
27.41-27.46 mm (1.079-1.081 in.)
Service Limit; 27.36 mm (1.077 in.)
4. Measure the thickness of the distance collar.
• If the thickness is less than the service limit,
replace the distance collar.
• If the thickness is within the service limit, go to
step 5.
Standard;
27.53-27.56 mm (1.084-1.085 in.)
Service Limit; 27.51 mm (1.083 in.)
13-33
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Disassembly
1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a
bench vise w i t h w o o d blocks (A).
4. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a
press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the
countershaft (E) out of the ball bearing (F) and the
needle bearing (G).
2. Use a chisel (B) to raise the locknut tab (C) f r o m the
groove in the countershaft.
3. Remove the 22 m m locknut (left-hand threads) (A)
and the 22 m m spring washer (B).
5. Support 4th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a
press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the
countershaft (E) out of the 4th gear.
13-34
Countershaft Inspection
6. Support 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a
press (C) and an attachment (D) to press the
countershaft (E) out of the 3rd gear.
1. Inspect the gear and bearing surfaces for wear and
damage, then measure the mainshaft at points A, B,
and C. If any part of the mainshaft is less than the
service limit, replace it.
Standard:
A Ball bearing surface:
24.980-24.993 mm
(0.9835-0.9840 in.)
B Needle bearing surface: 37.984-38.000 mm
(1.4954-1.4961 in.)
C Needle bearing surface: 34.000-34.015 mm
(1.3386-1.3392 in.)
Service Limit: A: 24.93 mm (0.981 in.)
B : 37.934 mm (1.493 in.)
C: 33.95 mm (1.337 in.)
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the
countershaft. Rotate the countershaft t w o complete
turns w h i l e measuring w i t h a dial gauge. If the
runout is more than the service limit, replace the
countershaft.
Standard:
0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
13-35
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly
Exploded V i e w
22 mm LOCKNUT
Replace.
108—0—108
N-m
11.0—0—11.0
kgfm,
79.6-0—79.6 Ibfft)
SYNCHRO RING
/
SYNCHRO SPRING
FRICTION DAMPER
Check for wear
and operation.
Note the direction
of installation.
22 mm SPRING WASHER
Note the direction
of installation.
BALL BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
Note the direction
of installation.
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
5TH GEAR
Note the direction
of installation.
1ST GEAR
4TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
3RD GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear
and operation.
DISTANCE COLLAR
2ND GEAR
FRICTION DAMPER
Check for wear
and operation.
Note the direction
of installation.
SYNCHRO RING
COUNTERSHAFT
SYNCHRO SPRING
REVERSE GEAR
1ST/2ND
SYNCHRO HUB
Note the direction
of installation.
13-36
Special Tools Required
• Driver, 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
• A t t a c h m e n t 25 m m I.D. 07746-0030200
• A t t a c h m e n t 30 m m I.D. 07746-0030300
• A t t a c h m e n t 35 m m I.D. 07746-0030400
5. Install the reverse gear (A), synchro spring (B), and
synchro ring (C) on the countershaft.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed during
this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply
lubricant all contact surfaces.
2. Install the needle bearing (A), 1st gear (B), and
friction damper (C) on the countershaft (D).
6. Install the distance collar (A) and friction damper
(B), then align the fingers (C) on the friction damper
and grooves <D) in the 1st/2nd synchro hub.
3. Install the 1st gear synchro ring (E) and synchro
spring (F) on the countershaft.
4. Align the fingers (A) on the friction damper w i t h the
grooves (B) on the 1st/2nd synchro hub (C), then
install the 1st/2nd synchro hub onto the
countershaft.
(cont'd)
13-37
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
7.
I n s t a l l t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g (A) a n d 2 n d g e a r
(B).
9.
I n s t a l l t h e 4 t h g e a r (A) u s i n g t h e 4 0 m m I.D.
driver
(B), 3 0 m m I.D. a t t a c h m e n t (C), a n d a p r e s s ( D ) .
07746-0030100
07746-0030300
A
8.
I n s t a l l t h e 3 r d g e a r (A)
(B), 35 m m
u s i n g t h e 4 0 m m I.D.
driver
I.D. a t t a c h m e n t (C), a n d a p r e s s ( D ) .
10.
I n s t a l l t h e 5th
g e a r (A) u s i n g t h e 40 m m I.D.
driver
(B), 30 m m I.D. a t t a c h m e n t (C), a n d a p r e s s ( D ) .
07746-0030100
07746-0030400
07746-0030100
A
C
07746-0030300
A
13-38
11. Install the needle bearing (A) using the 40 m m I.D.
driver (B), 25 m m I.D. attachment (C), and a press
(D).
13. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a
bench vise w i t h w o o d blocks.
14. Install the 22 m m spring washer (A) and new
22 m m locknut (left-hand threads) (B).
15. Torque the new 22 m m locknut to 108 N-m
(11.0 kgf-m, 79.6 Ibf-ft), then loosen it and torque it
again to the same value. Stake the locknut tab into
the groove.
13-39
Manual Transmission
Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection
and Reassembly
1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro
sleeves for wear (rounded off corners).
Synchro Ring and Gear inspection
1. Inspect the inside of each synchro ring (A) for wear.
Inspect the teeth (B) on each synchro ring for wear
(rounded off).
2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro
sleeve (B), and check for free movement. Make
sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (C)
(120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve w i t h the
three sets of deeper grooves (D) in the synchro hub.
Do not install the synchro sleeve w i t h its longer
teeth in the synchro hub slots (E) because it will
damage the spring ring.
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace
the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
B
E x a m p l e of s y n c h r o ring teeth
G O O D
W O R N
2. Inspect the teeth (A) on each synchro sleeve and
matching teeth on each gear for wear (rounded off).
E x a m p l e of s y n c h r o s l e e v e teeth a n d gear teeth
G O O D
13-40
W O R N
3. Inspect the thrust surface (A) on each gear hub for
wear.
7. Measure the clearance between each gear (A) and
its synchro ring (B) all the w a y round. Hold the
synchro ring against the gear evenly while
measuring the clearance. If the clearance is less
than the service limit, replace the synchro ring and
gear.
Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance
Standard:
0.85—1.10 mm (0.033—0.043 in.)
Service Limit: 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
4. Inspect the cone surface (B) on each gear hub for
wear and roughness.
5. Inspect the teeth on all gears (C) for uneven wear,
scoring, and cracks.
6. Coat the cone surface of each gear with
transmission fluid, and place its synchro ring on it.
Rotate the synchro ring, making sure that it does
not slip.
13-41
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required
•Adjustable bearing puller, 25—40 m m
07736-A01000B
•Attachment, 37 x 40 m m 07746-0010200
•Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
•Driver 07749-0010000
• Slide hammer, 3/8"-16 commercially available
3. Drive in the new oil seal f r o m the transmission side
using the driver (A) and 37 x 40 m m attachment (B).
07749-0010000
1. Remove the ball bearing (A) f r o m the clutch
housing (B) using the 25—40 m m adjustable
bearing puller (C) and a commercially available
3/8"-16 slide hammer (D).
07746-0010200
07736-A01000B
4. Drive in the new ball bearing (A) f r o m the
transmission side using the driver (B) and
52 x 55 m m attachment (C).
07749-0010000
07746-0010400
2. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the transmission side.
13-42
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required
•Adjustable bearing puller, 25—40 m m
07736-A01000B
•Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
•Driver 07749-0010000
•Slide hammer, 3/8"-16 commercially available
1. Remove the needle bearing (A) using the
25—40 m m adjustable bearing puller (B) and
commercially available 3/8"-16 slide hammer (D),
then remove the oil guide plate C.
2. Position the oil guide plate C and new needle
bearing (A) in the bore of the clutch housing (B).
3. Install the needle bearing using the driver (D) and
52 x 55 m m attachment (E).
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment
Special Tools Required
• Mainshaft holder 07GAJ-PG20110
• Base collar 07GAJ-PG20120
• Mainshaft base 07GAJ-PG20130
5. Measure distance @ between the end of the clutch
housing (A) and bearing inner race (B) w i t h a
straight edge and depth gauge. Measure at three
locations and average the readings.
1, Remove the 72 m m shim (A) and oil guide plate M
f r o m the transmission housing (B).
Shim Selection Formula:
6. Select the proper 72 m m shim f r o m the chart.
Follow the example below, and use the
measurements you made in steps 4 and 5:
2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A), the distance
collar (B), the 5th synchro hub (C), distance collar
(D), and ball bearing (E) on the mainshaft (F), then
install the assembled mainshaft in the transmission
housing (G).
(Basic Formula)
© + © — ( 0 . 7 5 + 0 . 1 1 ) =s shim thickness (maximum)
® + @ — ( 0 . 7 5 + 0 . 1 8 ) = shim thickness (minimum)
• A d d distance © (step 4) to distance © (step 5).
• 0.75 m m (0.029 in.): Spring washer, a dimension
in the installation.
• 0.11 m m (0.004 in.): M i n i m u m thrust clearance.
• 0.18 m m (0.007 in.): M a x i m u m thrust clearance.
(For example)
2 . 4 1 + 0 . 2 2 - ( 0 . 7 5 + 0 . 1 1 ) = 1.77 mm (0.070 in.)
2 . 4 1 + 0 . 2 2 - ( 0 . 7 5 + 0 . 1 8 ) = 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
7. Take the middle value of the m i n i m u m value and
the m a x i m u m value, and select shim of 1.74 m m
(0.069 in.).
3. Install the 26 m m washer (H) on the mainshaft.
4. Measure distance © between the end of the
transmission housing and 26 m m washer w i t h a
straight edge and vernier caliper. Measure at three
locations and average the reading.
13-44
72 m m Shim
Part Number
23931-P21-000
A
3
23932-P21-000
C
23933-P21-000
23934-P21-000
c
23935-P21-000
E
F
23936-P21-000
23937-P21-000
G
H
23938-P21-000
i
23939-P21-000
J
23940-P21-000
23941-P21-000
K
L
23942-P21-000
M
23943-P21-000
23944-P21-000
N
23945-P21-000
0
P
23946-P21-000
23947-P21-000
Q
R
23948-P21-000
23949-P21-000
S
T
23950-P21-000
23951-P21-000
U
V
23952-P21-000
W
23953-P21-000
X
23954-P21-000
Y
23955-P21-000
Z
23956-P21-000
AA
23957-P21-000
23958-P21-000
AB
23959-P21-000
AC
AD
23960-P21-000
AE
23961-P21-000
AF
23962-P21-000
23963-P21-000
AG
AH
23964-P21-000
Al
23965-P21-000
23966-P21-000
AJ
23967-P21-000
AK
AL
23968-P21-000
AM
23969-P21-000
AN
23970-P21-000
AO ! 23971-P21-000
0.60
0.63
0.66
0.69
0.72
0.75
0.78
0.81
0.84
0.87
0.90
0.93
0.96
0.99
1.02
1.05
1.08
1.11
1.14
1.17
1.20
1.23
1.26
1.29
1.32
1.35
1.38
1.41
1.44
1.47
1.50
1.53
1.56
1.59
1.62
1.65
1.68
1.71
1.74
1.77
1.80
Thickness
m m (0.0236
m m (0.0248
m m (0.0260
m m (0.0271
m m (0.0283
m m (0.0295
m m (0.0307
m m (0.0319
m m (0.0331
m m (0.0343
m m (0.0354
m m (0.0366
m m (0.0378
m m (0.0390
m m (0.0402
m m (0.0413
m m (0.0425
m m (0.0437
m m (0.0449
;r.~ (0.0461
m m (0.0472
m m (0.0484
m m (0.0496
m m (0.0508
m m (0.0520
m m (0.0531
m m (0.0543
m m (0.0555
m m (0.0567
m m (0.0579
m m (0.0591
m m (0.0602
m m (0.0614
m m (0.0626
m m (0.0638
m m (0.0650
m m (0.0661
m m (0.0673
m m (0.0685
m m (0.0697
m m (0.0709
8. Install the 72 m m shim (A) selected and oil guide
plate M in the transmission housing (B).
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
9. Thoroughly clean the 36 m m spring washer (A) and
26 m m washer (B) before installing them on the
clutch housing side ball bearing (C). Note the
installation direction of the spring washer.
C
10. Install the assembled mainshaft in the clutch
housing.
11. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft
and onto the clutch housing.
12. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with
several 8 m m bolts.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent
between the housings.
13. Lightly tap on the mainshaft with a plastic hammer.
(cont'd)
13-45
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
I
14. Slide the base collar (A) and mainshaft base (B)
over the mainshaft (C).
18. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end of the mainshaft.
15. Attach the mainshaft holder (A) to the mainshaft as
follows:
• Back-out the mainshaft holder bolt (B) and loosen
the t w o hex bolts (C).
• Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is
towards the transmission.
• Align the mainshaft holder's lip around the
groove at the inside of the mainshaft splines,
then tighten the hex bolts.
B
A
19. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt (B) clockwise; stop
turning w h e n the dial gauge (A) has reached its
m a x i m u m movement. The reading on the dial
gauge is the amount of mainshaft end play.
NOTE: Do not turn the mainshaft holder bolt more
than 60 degrees after the needle of the dial gauge
stops m o v i n g , this may damage the transmission.
20. If the reading is w i t h i n the standard, the clearance
is correct. If the reading is not within the standard,
recheck the shim thickness.
Standard: 0.11—0.18 mm (0.004—0.007 in.)
16. Fully seat the mainshaft by tapping its end w i t h a
plastic hammer.
17. Thread in the mainshaft holder bolt until it just
contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base.
13-46
Transmission Reassembly
NOTE: Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in
solvent, dry t h e m , and apply lubricant to any contact
surfaces.
5. Install the reverse lock cam.
6 x
1.0 m m
15
Nm
( 1 . 5 k g f m , 11
Ibfft)
1. Install the magnet (A) and differential assembly (B).
6. Install the reverse shift fork.
x
6
1.0 m m
15
N m
(1.5 k g f m ,
11 Ibfft)
2. Install the 8 m m spring washer (A) and the 8 m m
special bolt(B). Note the installation direction of
the spring washer.
8x
1.0
31
N-m
kgf-m,
mm
bfft)
3. Install the 36 m m spring washer (C) and 26 m m
washer (D) over the ball bearing (E). Note the
installation direction of the spring washer.
4. Apply tape to the mainshaft splines (F) to protect
the seal. Install the mainshaft and countershaft (G)
into the shift forks (H), and install t h e m as an
assembly.
(cont'd)
13-47
manual Transmission
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
7. Install the reverse idler gear (A) and reverse gear
shaft (B).
9. Remove any dirt and oil f r o m the transmission
housing sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket
(P/N 08718-0003) to the sealing surface. Make sure
y o u seal the entire circumference of the bolt holes
to prevent leakage.
NOTE: If 5 minutes have passed after applying
liquid gasket reapply it and assemble the housings.
A l l o w it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly
before filling the transmission w i t h oil.
8. Select the proper size 72 m m shim (A) according to
the measurements made during the Mainshaft
Thrust Clearance Adjustment {see page 13-52).
Install the oil gutter plate (B), oil guide plate M, and
72 m m s h i m into the transmission housing (C).
NOTE: Align the groove <D) of the transmission
housing to the mark and finger (E) of oil guide plate
M, and install i t
13-48
10. Install the 14 x 20 m m dowel pins (A).
15. Install the transmission hanger (A) and the 8 m m
flange bolts finger-tight.
16. Tighten the 8 m m flange bolts in a crisscross
pattern in several steps.
Specified Torque;
8 x 1 . 2 5 mm
27 N-m (2.8 k g f m , 20 Ibfft)
11. Make the finger (B) of tapered cone ring touch the
5th shift fork (C) as shown.
12. Lower the transmission housing the rest of the w a y
as you expand the 52 m m snap ring (D). Release
the snap ring so it seats in the groove of the
countershaft bearing.
13. Make sure the 52 m m snap ring is securely seated
in the groove of the countershaft bearing.
Dimension © as installed;
4 . 6 - 8 . 3 mm (0.18-0.33 in.)
14. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08717-0004) to the threads
of the 32 m m sealing screw (E), and install it on the
transmission housing.
(cont'd)
13-49
Manual Transmission
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
17. Remove any dirt and oil f r o m the change lever
assembly sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket
(P/N 08718-0003) to the sealing surface.
19. Install the set screws (A), new 12 m m washers,
springs, and steel balls.
A
1 2 x 1.0
_
29 N m
(3.0 k g f m , 2 2 I b f f t )
Liquid gasket
18. Install the 8 x 1 0 m m dowel pins (A) and change
lever assembly (B).
m m
20. Install the new washer and back-up light switch (B).
2 1 . Install the new washers (A), drain plug (B), filler
plug (C), new O-ring (D), and vehicle speed sensor
(VSS) (E).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 Ibfft)
B
3 9 N - m (4.0 k g f m , 2 9 Ibfft)
C
N-m
5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibfft)
13-50
M/T Differential
Component Location Index
13-51
M/T Differential
Backlash Inspection
Differential Carrier, Final Driven
Gear Replacement
1. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and
install both driveshafts.
1. Remove the bolts (left-hand threads) in a crisscross
pattern in several steps, then remove the final
driven gear (A) f r o m the differential carrier (B).
10x1.0 mm (10)
101 N-m (10.3 k g f m , 74.5 Ibfft)
2. Measure the backlash of both pinion gears (B) w i t h
a dial indicator (C). If the backlash is not w i t h i n the
standard, replace the differential carrier.
Standard (New): 0.05—0.15 mm (0.002—0.006 in.)
13-52
2. Install the final driven gear w i t h the chamfer on the
inside diameter facing the carrier. Tighten the bolts
in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
Carrier Bearing/Speedometer Drive Gear Replacement
3. Remove the speedometer drive gear.
Special Tool Required
Driver, 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
1. Check the carrier bearings for wear and rough
rotation. If they rotate smoothly and their rollers
show no signs of wear, the bearings are OK.
2. Remove the carrier bearings (A) w i t h a
commercially available bearing puller (B) and
bearing separator (C).
4. Install the speedometer drive gear by aligning the
finger of the speedometer drive gear w i t h the
groove of the differential carrier.
A
(cont'd)
13-53
M/T Differential
Carrier Bearing/Speedometer Drive
Gear Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the new bearings (A) w i t h the 40 m m I.D.
driver (B) and a press. Press on each bearing until it
bottoms. There should be no clearance between
the bearings and the carrier.
NOTE: Turn the seal (C) part of the bearing to the
outside of differential, and install it.
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required
• Pilot 26 x 30 m m 07JAD-PH80200
•Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PN00100
•Driver 07749-0010000
1. Remove the differential assembly.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the transmission
housing (B).
3. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the clutch housing (B).
13-54
Differential Thrust Clearance
Adjustment
4,
I n s t a l l t h e n e w oil s e a l (A) i n t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
h o u s i n g (B) w i t h t h e d r i v e r (C), o i l s e a l d r i v e r
a t t a c h m e n t ( D ) , a n d 26 x 30 m m p i l o t
Special Tool Required
(E).
D r i v e r , 4 0 m m I.D.
1.
07746-0030100
If y o u r e m o v e d 8 0 m m s h i m ( A ) f r o m t h e c l u t c h
h o u s i n g (B), reinstall the s a m e sized s h i m .
5.
Install
the n e w
driver
with the
oil s e a l
(A) in the clutch h o u s i n g (B)
driver a t t a c h m e n t <D),
( C ) , oil s e a l
a n d 2 6 x 3 0 m m pilot (E).
B
(cont'd)
13-55
M/T Differential
Differential Thrust Clearance Adjustment ( c o n t ' d )
3. Install the transmission housing onto the clutch
housing, then tighten the 8 m m flange bolts in a
crisscross pattern in several steps.
6. If the clearance is more than the standard, select a
new 80 mm shim f r o m the following table. If the
clearance measured in step 5 is within the standard,
go to step 9.
Specified Torque:
8 x 1 . 2 8 mm
27 N-m (2.8 k g f m , 20 i b f f t )
80 mm Shim
Part Number
A
41441-PL3-B000
B
41442-PL3-B000
C
41443-PL3-B000
D
41444-PL3-B000
E
41445-PL3-B000
F
41446-PL3-B000
G
41447-PL3-B000
H
41448-PL3-B000
J
41449-PL3-B000
K
41450-PL3-B000
L
41451-PL3-B000
M
41452-PL3-B000
N
41453-PL3-B000
41454-PL3-B000
P
Q
41455-PL3-B000
R
41456-PL3-B000
S
41457-PL3-B000
4. Use the 40 m m I.D. driver (A) to bottom the
differential assembly in the clutch housing.
07746-0030100
:kness
1.0 m m (0.0394 in.)
1.1 m m (0.0433 in.)
1.2 m m (0.0472 in.)
1.3 m m (0.0512 in.)
1.4 m m (0.0551 in.)
1.5 m m (0.0591 in.)
1.6 m m (0.0630 in.)
1.7 m m (0.0669 in.)
1.8 m m (0.0709 in.)
1.05 m m (0.0413 in.)
1.15mm (0.0453 in.)
1.25 m m (0.0492 in.)
1.35 m m (0.0531 in.)
1.45 m m (0.0571 in.)
1.55 m m (0.0610 in.)
1.65 m m (0.0650 in.)
1.75 m m (0.0689 in.)
7. Remove the bolts and transmission housing.
8. Replace the thrust shim selected in step 6, then
recheck the clearance.
9. Reinstall the transmission.
5. Measure clearance between 80 m m shim and
bearing outer race in transmission housing.
Standard: 0—0.1 m m (0—0.004 in.)
I
I
13-56
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (if automatic transmission maintenance is
required)
The Fit SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the
glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, driver's seat belt outer lap tensioner in the driver's seat
belt lower anchor, front passenger's seat belt outer lap tensioners in the front passenger's seat belt lower anchor, side
curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service
the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are
located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and
tools, and should be done only by an authorized Honda dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors w h e n the ignition switch is ON (II),
or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the
airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
Automatic Transmission
A / T Gear Position Indicator
Automatic Transmission
Special Tools
14-2
General Troubleshooting Information
14-3
DTC Troubleshooting Index
14-10
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
14-13
System Description
14-31
DTC Troubleshooting
14-86
Road Test
14-202
Stall Speed Test
14-204
Pressure Test
14-205
Shift Solenoid Valve Test
14-208
Shift Solenoid Valve Replacement ........... 1 4 - 2 1 0
Shift Solenoid Harness Replacement ....... 1 4 - 2 1 0
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A
Test
Replacement
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve B
Test
Replacement
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve C
Test
14-212
14-214
Shift Cable Replacement
Shift Cable Adjustment
14-251
14-252
14-254
14-256
14-258
14-262
14-266
14-267
14-268
14-269
14-270
A / T Interlock System
14-215
14-219
14-217
Replacement
14-219
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor
Replacement
14-220
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor
Replacement
14-221
2 n d Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Switch Replacement
14-222
3 r d Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Switch Replacement
14-223
ATF Temperature Sensor Test/
Replacement
14-224
ATF Level Check
14-226
ATF Replacement
14-227
Transmission Removal
14-228
Transmission Installation
14-235
Drive Plate Removal and Installation ........ 1 4 - 2 4 1
ATF Filter Replacement
14-242
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement
14-243
Shift Lever Removal
14-244
Shift Lever Installation
14-245
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
Component Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Transmission Range Switch Test ..............
Transmission Range Switch
Replacement
* Steering Wheel Upshift ( + ) Switch
Circuit troubleshooting
* Steering Wheel Downshift (—) Switch
Circuit troubleshooting ...........................
* Steering Wheel Upshift ( + ) Switch
Test
Replacement
* Steering Wheel Downshift (—) Switch
Test
.
Replacement
* Cable Reel Subharness Replacement .......
...... 1 4 - 2 4 6
14-247
14-249
Component Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Shift Lock System Circuit
Troubleshooting
* Key Interlock System Circuit
Troubleshooting
Shift Lock Solenoid Test
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
Key Interlock Solenoid Test
Park Pin Switch Test/Replacement
14-271
14-272
14-273
14-277
14-279
14-279
14-280
14-280
Shafts and Clutches
T r a n s m i s s i o n E n d Cover
End Cover Removal
14-281
Park Lever Stop Inspection and
Adjustment
14-284
Idler Gear Shaft Bearing Replacement ..... 14-285
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Replacement
14-285
Selector Control Shaft Bearing
Replacement
14-286
ATF Feed Pipe Replacement
14-287
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch
Replacement
14-287
Air Check Valve Inspection and
Replacement
14-288
End Cover Installation
14-343
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assembly Removal .... 14-289
Bearing Removal
14-291
Bearing Installation
14-292
Reverse Idler Gear Removal
14-293
Reverse Idler Gear Installation
14-294
Idler Gear Shaft Removal and
Installation
14-295
Shaft Assembly and Housing
Installation
14-339
Valve B o d y
Valve Body and ATF Strainer Removal ....
Valve Body Repair
Valve Body Valve Installation ....................
Main Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly
ATF Pump Inspection
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and
Installation
Valve Body and ATF Strainer
Installation
14-296
14-298
14-299
14-300
14-301
14-302
14-303
14-304
14-336
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Replacement
Countershaft Bearing Replacement ..........
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement ...
Lubrication Check Valve Replacement .....
Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Replacement
14-305
14-306
14-307
14-308
14-308
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and
Reassembly
Mainshaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
Removal ...................................................
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
Installation
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection
Secondary Shaft 2nd Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection
Secondary Shaft Sealing Ring
Replacement
1st Clutch Disassembly
2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th Clutch
Disassembly
Clutch Inspection
Clutch Waved-plate Phase Difference
Inspection
Clutch Clearance Inspection
1st Clutch Reassembly
2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th Clutch
Reassembly
14-309
14-310
14-312
14-313
14-313
14-314
14-315
14-317
14-319
14-320
14-321
14-325
14-326
14-327
14-331
14-332
A / T Differential
Component Location Index
Backlash Inspection
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear
Replacement
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Oil Seal Replacement
Carrier Bearing Side Clearance
Inspection
14-351
14-351
14-352
14-352
14-353
14-354
Automatic Transmission
Special Tools
Tool Number
Description
07AAK-SNAA120
Universal Eyelet
Mainshaft Holder
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GA3-PF50100
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly
Housing Puller
07HAC-PK40102
Oil Seal Driver Attachment
07JAD-PH80101
Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment
07LAE-PX40100
07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m
A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
07MAJ-PY40120
Attachment, 78 x 80 m m
07NAD-PX40100
Clutch Compressor Attachment
07ZAE-PRP0100
®
Gear Installer Set
070AC-XFD0100
®
A/T Clutch Pressure Gauge Set/Panel
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401
©
07736-A01000B or07736-A01000A
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25—40 m m
@
Attachment, 52 x 55 m m
07746-0010400
®
Attachment, 62 x 68 m m
07746-0010500
©
Attachment, 72 x 75 m m
07746-0010600
©
Attachment, 22 x 24 m m
07746-0010800
©
Driver, 40 m m I.D.
07746-0030100
©
Attachment, 30 m m I.D.
07746-0030300
©
Driver
07749-0010000
®
07947-ZV00100
Oil Seal Driver Attachment
®
© : If the top arm is too short, replace it with 07SAC-P0Z01001.
® : 07HAE-PL50101 may also be used to substitute one of these tools.
@: Must be used w i t h commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer.
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ret. No.
©
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
©
14-2
®
®
®
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
®
General Troubleshooting Information
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic S f stem (HDS)
If t h e D i n d i c a t o r o r m a l f u n c t i o n i n d i c a t o r l a m p
(MIL)
h a s b e e n r e p o r t e d o n , o r if a d r i v e a b i l i t y p r o b l e m i s
suspected, do this;
When the powertrain control module ( P C M ) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D
indicator ( A ) in the gauge control module (B) will
usually blink.
1. C o n n e c t t h e H D S t o t h e D L C . ( S e e t h e H D S u s e r ' s
m a n u a l for specific instructions.)
2 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), s e l e c t A / T s y s t e m ,
7-position
a n d o b s e r v e the D T C in t h e D T C s M E N U o n t h e
HDS screen.
B
N O T E : If t h e H D S d o e s n o t c o m m u n i c a t e w i t h t h e
P C M , troubleshoot the D L C circuit (see page
11-174).
3.
R e c o r d all f u e l a n d e m i s s i o n s D T C s , a n d A / T D T C s ,
and freeze data.
4.
if t h e r e i s a f u e l a n d e m i s s i o n s D T C , f i r s t c h e c k t h e
fuel a n d e m i s s i o n s s y s t e m a s indicated by the D T C
(except for D T C
P0700,
DTC
P0700
m e a n s there is
one or more A / T D T C s , and no problems w e r e
5-position
d e t e c t e d in t h e f u e l a n d e m i s s i o n s c i r c u i t o f t h e
PCM).
B
5.
6.
Clear the D T C and data.
Drive the v e h i c l e for s e v e r a l m i n u t e s u n d e r the
s a m e conditions a s those indicated by the freeze
d a t a , a n d t h e n r e c h e c k f o r a D T C . If t h e A / T D T C
r e t u r n s , g o t o t h e D T C t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g i n d e x . If t h e
D T C d o e s not return, there w a s a n intermittent
p r o b l e m w i t h i n t h e c i r c u i t M a k e s u r e all p i n s a n d
t e r m i n a l s in t h e c i r c u i t a r e tight.
When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected
to the data link connector (DLC) ( A ) (located behind the
driver's dashboard lower cover), it will indicate the
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) when the ignition switch
is turned O N (11) and the appropriate menu is selected.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC
Troubleshooting
S o m e s y m p t o m s will not trigger d i a g n o s t i c trouble
c o d e s ( D T C s ) o r c a u s e t h e D i n d i c a t o r t o b l i n k . If t h e
malfunction indicator l a m p (MIL) w a s reported on or
t h e D i n d i c a t o r h a s b e e n b l i n k i n g , c h e c k f o r D T C s . If t h e
vehicle has an abnormal s y m p t o m , and there are no
D T C s s t o r e d , g o to the s y m p t o m t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g index.
C h e c k t h e list of p r o b a b l e c a u s e ( s ) for t h e s y m p t o m , in
t h e s e q u e n c e l i s t e d , until y o u f i n d t h e p r o b l e m .
(cont'd)
14-3
Automatic Transmission
General Troubleshooting Information fcont'd)
H o w to C h e c k f o r DTCs w i t h t h e SCS Mode
(retrieving t h e f l a s h c o d e s )
If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same time,
or if a driveability problem is suspected, do this;
NOTE; The preferred method Is t o use the HDS to
retrieve the P-code.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge control
module (B) will usually blink.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select SCS mode,
then observe the D indicator in the gauge control
module. Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by
individual short blinks. Codes 10 and above are
indicated by a series of long and short blinks. One
long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and
short blinks together to determine the code.
7-position
NOTE; If the HDS does not communicate w i t h the
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-174).
E x a m p l e : D T C 1-1
Short blink
ON
(once)
-
OFF-
5-position
Example: D T C 15-5
L o n g blink
S h o r t b l i n k s (five)
ON
OFF10
+
p
I
15
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
When the D indicator has been reported o n , connect the
HDS to the DLC (A) (located behind the driver's
dashboard lower cover). Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
select SCS mode, then the D indicator will indicate flash
the DTC.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the
fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except DTC 70, DTC 70 means there is one or more
A/T DTCs, and no problems were detected in the
fuel and emissions circuit of the PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, and then recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC
returns, go t o the DTC troubleshooting index. If the
DTC does not return, there w a s an intermittent
problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and
terminals in the circuit are tight.
14-4
H o w t o Troubleshoot Circuits at t h e PCM
Special Tools Required
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard under cover
(see page 20-78).
DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS w h e n the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait 30 seconds.
2. Inspect the circuit at the PCM, according to the DTC
troubleshooting, w i t h the special tools and a digital
multimeter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a
multimeter (C).
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS f r o m the DLC.
PCM Reset
This c o m m a n d clears stored specific data f r o m the PCM
such as DTCs freeze data, and readiness codes. It does
not clear CKP PATTERN data.
1. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS w h e n the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS f r o m the DLC.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-268).
4. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the
contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide
the tip into the connector f r o m the wire side until it
touches the end of the wire terminal.
5. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector
or the wire side is sealed, disconnect the connector
and use the tester probe to probe the connectors
f r o m the terminal side. Do not force the probe into
the connector.
(cont'd)
14-5
Automatic Transmission
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
OBD Status
How to End a Troubleshooting Session
The OBD Status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully
finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are
displayed as:
Tiiis procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
1. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• PASSED: On Board Diagnosis is successfully finished.
• FAILED: On Board Diagnosis has finished but failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The On Board Diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and w a i t for
30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS f r o m the DLC.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-268).
6. Start the engine in the P or N position, and w a r m it
to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan
comes on).
7. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the
vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph
(50 km/h) or under the same conditions as those
indicated by the freeze data.
14-6
PCM Updating and Substitution f o r Testing
Special Tools Required
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) TDSGDS2200
- Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570
• HDS pocket tester TDSS3557011401
These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
Use this procedure w h e n you have to substitute a
known-good PCM or update the PCM in a
troubleshooting procedure.
Updating the PCM
NOTE:
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
• Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully changed.
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem w i t h the update, leave the
ignition switch ON.
• To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C,
power w i n d o w s , door locks, etc.) during the update.
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced.
• You cannot update an PCM w i t h a program it already
has. It will only accept a new program.
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red ( # 3 ) lamp came on or
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position w h e n you disconnect the
HIM f r o m the data link connector (DLC). This w i l l
prevent PCM damage.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-174). If you are returning f r o m the
DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5,
then clean the throttle body after updating the PCM
(see page 11-306).
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts with the
HDS.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue this procedure.
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the
update mode, and follow the screen prompts to
update the PCM.
(cont'd)
14-7
Automatic Transmission
General Troubleshooting Informatio
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect
the HDS/HIM f r o m the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that you were doing. If the software in
the PCM is not the latest, f o l l o w the instructions on
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI
system or the A/T system, make sure y o u update
both.
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to
cool the PCM, f o l l o w the screen prompts. If y o u run
into a problem (programming takes over
15 minutes, status bar goes over 100 %, D or
immobilizer indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes,
etc.) during the update procedure, f o l l o w these
steps to minimize the chance of damaging the
PCM:
• Leave the ignition switch in the " O N (II)" position.
• Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
• Shut d o w n the HDS.
• Disconnect the HDS f r o m the HDS.
• Reboot the HDS.
• Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.
8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean
the throttle body (see page 11-306).
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-268).
(cont'd)
Substituting the PCM
MOTE: Use this procedure w h e n substituting a knowngood PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-174). If you are returning f r o m DLC
circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 thru 8, then
clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM
(see page 11-306).
10. Do the CKP learn procedure (see page 11-4).
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
continue this procedure.
6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
14-8
7. Remove the passenger's dashboard under cover
(see page 20-78), the side kick panel (see page
20-52), and the glove box (see page 20-77).
8. Disconnect the connectors (A), and remove the
bolts (B), then remove the PCM (C).
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: DTC P0630 " V I N Not Programmed or
M i s m a t c h " may be stored because the VIN has not
been p r o g r a m m e d into the PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
11. Manually input the VIN to the PCM w i t h the HDS.
12. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software.
13. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
14. Enter the immobilizer code w i t h the PCM
replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
16. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean
the throttle body (see page 11-306).
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-268).
18. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
A
9. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal.
14-9
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Record all freeze data, any on-board snapshot, and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page
14-3) before you troubleshoot.
DTC'
P0705 ( 5 )
MIL
Detection Item
Blinks
ON
Not blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2)
Blinks
ON
M2)
Blinks
ON
Transmission range switch (multiple shift-position
input)
Transmission range switch (open)
ATF temperature sensor (range/performance)
ATF temperature sensor (short)
ATF temperature sensor (open)
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
(range/performance)
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (no signal
input)
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (intermittent
failure)
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (range/
performance)
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (no signal
input)
Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
(intermittent failure)
1st gear incorrect ratio
2nd gear incorrect ratio
3rd gear incorrect ratio
4th gear incorrect ratio
5th gear incorrect ratio
Torque converter clutch circuit performance or
stuck OFF
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A stuck
OFF
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A stuck
ON
Shift solenoid valve A stuck OFF
Shift solenoid valve A stuck ON
Shift solenoid valve B stuck OFF
Shift solenoid valve B stuck ON
Shift solenoid valve C stuck OFF
N>
D
Indicator
M2)
i2>
P0706 (6K
P0711 ( 2 8 )
P0712(28)
P0713(28p
P0716(15)
M2)
M2)
2)
M2)
P0717 ( 1 5 P
P0718(15)
o
P0721 ( 9 )
M2)
Blinks
ON
P0722 ( 9 )
M2)
Blinks
ON
P0723 (9)
M2>
Blinks
ON
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Not blinks
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
P0746 (76)
Blinks
ON
P0747 (76)
Blinks
ON
P0751
P0752
P0756
P0757
P0761
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
P0731
P0732
P0733
P0734
P0735
P0741
(64)
(64)
(64)
(64)
(64)
(40)
(70)
(70)
(71)
(71)
(72)
Page
(see page 14-86)
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
14-96)
14-99)
14-100)
14-102)
14-104)
(see page 14-110)
(see page 14-116)
(see page 14-121)
(see page 14-127)
(see page 14-133)
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
page
14-138)
14-139)
14-140)
14-141)
14-142)
14-143)
(see page 14-144)
(see page 14-145)
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
14-146)
14-147)
14-148)
14-149)
14-150)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code (Honda code) the D indicator indicates when the data link connector
(DLC) is connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
14-10
NOTE; Record all freeze data, any on-board snapshot, and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page
14-3) before you t r o u b l e s h o o t
DTC *
m
D
Indicator
MIL
Detection I t e m
Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON
Shift solenoid valve D stuck OFF
Shift solenoid valve D stuck ON
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B stuck
OFF
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B stuck
ON
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C stuck
OFF
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C stuck
ON
. v..
Transmission range switch ATP R switch
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
(short or stuck ON)
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (open
or stuck OFF)
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (short
or stuck ON)
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (open
or stuck OFF)
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (open/
short)
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (open/
short)
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (open/
short)
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid valve A (short)
Shift solenoid valve A (open)
Shift solenoid valve B (short)
Shift solenoid valve B (open)
Shift solenoid valve C (short)
o
(72)
(73)
(73)
(77)
Blinks
Blinks
' Blinks
Blinks
ON
ON
ON
ON
P0777 (77)
Blinks
ON
P0796 (78)
Blinks
ON
P0797 (78)
Blinks
ON
P0812 (65)
P0842 (25)
Blinks
Blinks
ON
ON
P0843 (25)
Blinks
ON
P0847 (26)
Blinks
ON
P0848 (26)
Blinks
ON
M2)
Blinks
ON
P0963(16)
P0966 (23) >
M2)
Blinks
Blinks
ON
ON
H2)
Blinks
Biinks
ON
ON
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
P0762
P0766
P0767
P0776
P0962 (16)
M2
P0967 ( 2 3 )
P0970 ( 2 9 )
P0971
P0973
P0974
P0976
P0977
P0979
M2)
(29)*
(7) "
{1Y
(8)
(8)
(22)
(2i
:
{2]
M2)
M2)
M2)
Page
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
14-151)
14-152)
14-153)
14-154)
(see page 14-155)
(see page 14-156)
(see page 14-157)
(see page 14-158)
(see page 14-160)
(see page 14-162)
(see page 14-164)
(see page 14-166)
(see page 14-168)
(see page 14-170)
(see page 14-172)
(see page 14-174)
(see page 14-176)
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
page
14-178)
14-180)
14-182)
14-184)
14-186)
14-188)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code (Honda code) the D indicator indicates w h e n the data link connector
(DLC) is connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
(cont'd)
14-11
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
NOTE: Record ail freeze data, any on-board snapshot, and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page
14-3) before you troubleshoot.
MIL
Detection Item
Blinks
Blinks
Blinks
Not blinks
Blinks
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
P1746 (45)
Blinks
OFF
P1747 (45)
Blinks
OFF
P1780 (49)
U0121 (107)
Blinks
Blinks
ON
OFF
Shift solenoid valve C (open)
Shift solenoid valve D (short)
Shift solenoid valve D (open)
PCM A/T control system incomplete update
Transmission range switch ATP RVS switch (open
or short)
Hydraulic control system (cut valve A stuck OFF or
cut valve B stuck ON)
Hydraulic control system (cut valve A stuck ON or
cut valve B stuck OFF)
Shift control system (transmission default mode)
F-CAN malfunction (PCM-to-ABS modulator-control
unit)
D
Indicator
DTC*"'
P0980 (22V
P0982 (60)
P0983 (60)
P16C0 (99)
P1717(62)
m
o
Page
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
14-190)
14-192)
14-194)
14-196)
14-197)
(see page 14-199)
(see page 14-199)
(see page 14-200)
(see page 14-201)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code (Honda code) the D indicator indicates w h e n the data link connector
(DLC) is connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
14-12
lymptom
Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
When you turn t h e
i g n i t i o n switch ON
(II), the D indicator
comes on and
stays on in all shift
lever positions, or
it never comes on
at all
A/T gear position
indicator does not
come on while the
shift lever is in that
position
Shift lever cannot
be moved f r o m P
w h i l e you are
pressing on the
brake pedal
Ignition switch
cannot be moved
f r o m ACC (1) to
LOCK (0) (key is
pushed in, shift
lever in P)
HDS does not
communicate w i t h
the PCM or the
vehicle
Probable cause(s)
• F-CAN communication line error
• Gauge control module defective
• PCM defective
Notes
• Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
(see page 22-153).
• Check indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
module by gauge control module self-diagnostic
function (see page 22-142).
•
•
•
•
• Check the F CAN communication line for a DTC
(see page 22-153).
• Check indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
module by gauge control module self-diagnostic
function (see page 22-142).
• Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-254).
• Inspect the APP sensor signal (see page 11-245).
• Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit
(see page 14-272).
• Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-279).
• Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-254).
F-CAN communication line error
Gauge control module defective
PCM defective
Transmission range switch
defective
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
circuit
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
defective
• Brake pedal position switch circuit
• Brake pedal position switch
defective
• Shift lock solenoid defective
• Shift lock solenoid control circuit
• Shift lock mechanism defective
• Throttle body defective
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch stuck OFF
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch line opened
• Interlock control system circuit
• Key interlock solenoid stuck ON
• Park pin switch stuck ON
• Transmission range switch
DLC circuit error
• Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit
(see page 14-277).
• Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-254).
Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-174).
(cont'd)
14-13
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Engine runs, but
vehicle does not
move in any gear
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
14-14
Probable cause(s)
Low ATF level
Shift c a b l e broken or out of
adjustment
Connection between shift cable
a n d transmission or body is
worn
ATF p u m p w o r n or binding
Regulator valve stuck or spring
worn
ATF strainer clogged
Mainshaft w o r n or damaged
Final gears worn or damaged
Transmission-to-engine
assembly error
Axle disengaged
Notes
• Check the ATF level, a n d check the ATF cooler
lines for leakage a n d loose connections. If
necessary, clean the A T F cooler lines.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever a n d
the transmission control lever.
• Check for a stored DTC, a n d check for loose
connections.
• Check the line pressure.
• Improper alignment of ATF p u m p and torque
converter housing may cause the ATF pump to
seize. The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related
ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing w h e n replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF p u m p w h e n you
torque d o w n the main valve body. This will cause
the ATF pump seize.
• Install the main seal flush w i t h the torque
converter housing w h e n replacing the main seal.
If you push it into the torque converter housing
until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid return
passage and result in damage.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged, find the damaged components that
caused the debris.
• Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If
the differential pinion gears are w o r n , replace the
differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the
ATF cooler and cooler lines.
• Replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the countershaft and secondary shaft for
wear and damage.
Symptom
Vehicle moves in 2
and R, but not in D,
D3, S, or 1
1.
2.
3.
Vehicle moves in D, 1.
D3, S, 1, and R, but 2.
3.
not in 2, or in 2nd
inS
Probable cause(s)
1st accumulator defective
1 st gears w o r n or damaged
1st clutch defective
2nd accumulator defective
2nd gears w o r n or damaged
2nd clutch defective
Notes
• Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and
spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
• Inspect the countershaft, secondary shaft, and
1 st clutch for wear and damage.
• Check the 1st clutch pressure.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch w a v e d plate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If the w a v e d plate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 2nd accumulator piston, O-ring, and
spring for wear and damaged in the servo body.
• Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
• Inspect the countershaft, secondary shaft, and
2nd clutch for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace them as a set. If the w a v e d plate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 2nd clutch feed pipe. If the 2nd clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
2nd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
(cont'd)
14-15
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Vehicle moves in D, 1.
D3, S, 2, and 1, but 2.
3.
not in R
4.
5.
6.
Poor acceleration
14-16
1.
2.
3.
Probable cause(s)
Shift solenoid valve D defective
Shift fork shaft stuck
Shift valve D defective
5th/reverse accumulator defective
5th clutch defective
Reverse gears w o r n or damaged
Shift solenoid valve A defective
Shift solenoid valve B defective
Shift solenoid valve C defective
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the shift solenoid valve function w i t h the
HDS.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
fork shaft.
• Inspect the servo valve O-ring.
• Check the shift fork shaft detent for wear and
damage.
• Inspect the 5th accumulator piston, O-ring, and
spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
• Check the 5th clutch pressure.
• Inspect the mainshaft and 5th clutch for wear and
damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace them as a set. If the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers,
and inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of
the countershaft 5th gear and reverse gear.
Replace the reverse gears and the reverse
selector if they are w o r n or damaged. If the
transmission makes a clicking, grinding, or
whirring noise, also replace the mainshaft 5th
gear, reverse idler gear, and countershaft 5th
gear.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the shift solenoid valve function w i t h the
HDS.
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
flares w h e n
starting off in D,
D3, S , 2 , 1 , a n d R ;
stall speed high in
D, D3, S, 2, and 1
(D, D3, and S in 1st
and 2nd)
Poor acceleration;
flares w h e n
starting off in D,
D3, S, 2, and R;
stall speed high
w h e n starting off
in 2, and in 2nd in
S
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Probable cause(s)
Low ATF level
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
ATF p u m p w o r n or binding
Regulator valve stuck or spring
worn
ATF strainer clogged
Torque converter check valve
defective
2nd clutch defective
Notes
• Check the ATF level and check the ATF lines for
leakage and loose connections. If necessary,
clean the ATF lines.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
• Check the line pressure.
• Improper alignment of ATF p u m p and torque
converter housing may cause the ATF p u m p to
seize. The s y m p t o m s are mostly an rpm-related
ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing w h e n replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when y o u
torque d o w n the main valve body. This will cause
the ATF p u m p to seize.
• Install the main seal flush w i t h the torque
converter housing w h e n replacing the main seal.
If you push it into the torque converter housing
until it bottoms out, it w i l l block the fluid return
passage and result in damage.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged, find the damaged components that
caused the debris.
• Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If
the differential pinion gears are w o r n , replace the
differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the
ATF cooler and ATF lines.
• Replace the torque converter.
• Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
• Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch for
wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch w a v e d plate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If the w a v e d plate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
with the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 2nd clutch feed pipe. If the 2nd clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
2nd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
(cont'd)
14-17
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
flares w h e n
starting off in D,
D3, S, and R; stall
speed high in R
Poor acceleration;
stall speed low in
D, D3, S, 2, and 1
(D, D3, and S in 1st
and 2nd)
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Poor acceleration;
stall speed low in R
1.
2.
3.
14-18
Probable cause(s)
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
5th clutch defective
Shift solenoid valve D defective
Torque converter one-way clutch
defective
Engine output low
Torque converter clutch piston
defective
Lock-up shift valve defective
Engine output low
Torque converter clutch piston
defective
Lock-up shift valve defective
Notes
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
• Check the 5th clutch pressure.
• Inspect the mainshaft and 5th clutch for wear and
damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace t h e m as a set. if the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the shift solenoid valve function with the
HDS.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Replace the torque converter assembly.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
• Check the engine control system.
• Check the engine control system.
• Replace the torque converter assembly.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
Symptom
Engine idle
vibration
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Probable cause(s)
Low ATF level
Shift solenoid valve D defective
Drive plate defective or
transmission misassembled
Engine output low
Torque converter clutch piston
defective
ATF p u m p w o r n or damaged
Lock-up shift valve defective
Misassembled engine or
transmission mount
Notes
• Check the ATF level and check the ATF lines for
leakage and loose connections. If necessary,
clean the ATF lines.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the shift solenoid valve function w i t h the
HDS.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Check transmission and drive plate installation.
• Check the drive plate for wear and damage, if the
drive plate is w o r n or damaged, replace the drive
plate.
• Check the engine control system.
• Replace the torque converter assembly.
• Check the line pressure.
• Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
converter housing may cause the ATF p u m p to
seize. The s y m p t o m s are mostly an rpm-related
ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing w h e n replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump w h e n you
torque d o w n the main valve body. This will cause
ATF p u m p to seize.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing w h e n replacing the main seal.
If you push it into the torque converter housing
until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid return
passage and result in damage.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
• Adjust the transmission and engine mounts by
loosening and retightening the mount bolts.
(cont'd)
14-19
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting index (cont'd)
Symptom
Vehicle moves in N
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
14-20
Probable cause(s)
Excessive ATF
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
Relief valve defective
1 st cl utch defective
2nd clutch defective
3rd clutch defective
4th clutch defective
5th clutch defective
Clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
clearance incorrect
Needle bearing seized, w o r n , or
damaged
Thrust washer seized, w o r n , or
damaged
Notes
° Check the ATF level, and drain the A T F if it is
overfilled.
• Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF p u m p is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is found,
replace the torque converter.
• Check the relief valve in the main valve body.
• Check the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
pressures.
• Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 1st, 2nd,
3rd, 4th, and 5th clutches for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace them as a set. If the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch feed pipes.
• If the 2nd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace the
end cover.
• If the 3rd or 4th clutch feed pipe is scored,
replace it and the O-rings under the feed pipe
flange.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
2nd clutch feed pipe or 4th clutch feed pipe is
loose or damaged.
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd
clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Symptom
Late shift after
shifting f r o m N to
D, D3, and S, or
excessive shock
w h e n shifted into
D, D3, and S
1.
2.
5.
6.
7.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Probable cause(s)
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Connection between shift cable
and transmission or body is
worn
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor defective
Output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor defective
ATF temperature sensor
defective
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
Servo control valve defective
1st accumulator defective
1st check ball stuck
Lock-up shift valve defective
1st clutch defective
Notes
Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings,
for wear and damage.
Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF p u m p . If the ATF p u m p is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
Check the servo control valve in the main valve
body.
Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and
spring for wear and damage in the regulator
valve body.
Check the 1 st check ball for stuck in the main
valve body.
Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
Check the 1st clutch pressure.
Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st clutch for
wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
(cont'd)
14-21
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Late shift after
shifting f r o m N to
R, or excessive
shock w h e n shifted
into R
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14-22
Probable cause(s)
Shift solenoid valve D defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A defective
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Connection between shift cable
and transmission or body is
worn
I nput shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor defective
Output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor defective
ATF temperature sensor
defective
Shift fork shaft stuck
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
Shift valve D defective
5th/reverse accumulator
defective
Lock-up shift valve defective
5th clutch defective
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings,
for wear and damage.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
• Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
• Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
• Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
fork shaft.
• Inspect the servo valve O-ring.
• Check the shift fork shaft detent for wear and
damage.
• Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
• Check the shift valve D in the main valve body.
• Inspect the 5th accumulator piston, O-ring, and
spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
• Check the 5th clutch pressure.
• Inspect the mainshaft and 5th clutch for wear and
damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
Symptom
The A/T does not
shift
1.
2.
Excessive shock or
flares on all
upshifts and
downshifts
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Probable cause(s)
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor defective
Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor defective
Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor defective
ATF temperature sensor defective
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
• Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
• Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
• Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF p u m p is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is found,
replace the torque converter.
(cont'd)
14-23
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Excessive shock
or flares on 1-2
upshift or 2-1
downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14-24
Probable cause(s)
Shift solenoid valve D defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective
2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch defective
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
1st accumulator defective
2nd accumulator defective
1st check ball stuck
2nd check ball stuck
1st clutch defective
2nd clutch defective
Look up shift valve defective
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
• Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the 1st accumulator piston, O-ring, and
spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
• Inspect the 2nd accumulator piston, O-ring, and
spring for wear and damage in the servo body.
• Check the 1 st check ball and 2nd check ball for
stuck in the main valve body.
• Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
• Inspect the secondary shaft, 1st clutch, and 2nd
clutch for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace them as a set. If the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 2nd clutch feed pipe. If the 2nd clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace the end cover.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
2nd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Symptom
Excessive shock or
flares on 2-3
upshift or 3-2
downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Probable cause(s)
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective
3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch defective
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
2nd accumulator defective
3rd accumulator defective
2nd check ball stuck
2nd clutch defective
3rd clutch defective
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function with the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
• Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the 2nd and 3rd accumulator pistons, 0 rings, and springs for wear and damage in the
servo body.
• Check the 2nd check ball for stuck in the main
valve body.
• Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
• Inspect the secondary shaft, mainshaft, 2nd
clutch, and 3rd clutch for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch w a v e d plate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace them as a set. If the w a v e d plate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 2nd and 3rd clutch feed pipes.
• If the 2nd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace the
end cover.
• If the 3rd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and
the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
2nd clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd
clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
(cont'd)
14-25
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Excessive shock or
flares on 3-4
upshift or 4-3
downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
14-26
Probable cause(s)
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
3rd accumulator defective
4th accumulator defective
3rd clutch defective
4th clutch defective
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the 3rd and 4th accumulator pistons, 0 rings, and springs for wear and damage in the
servo body.
• Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
• Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 3rd
clutch, and 4th clutch for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 3rd and 4th clutch feed pipes.
• If the 3rd clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and
the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
• If the 4th clutch feed pipe is scored, replace it and
the O-rings under the feed pipe flange.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
4th clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd
clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
Symptom
Excessive shock or
flares on 4-5
upshift or 5-4
downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Probable cause(s)
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective
Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
4th accumulator defective
5th accumulator defective
4th clutch defective
5th clutch defective
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Check for clogged orifice in the separator plate. If
the orifice is clogged, remove it and clean the
separator plate orifice.
• Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
clogged w i t h particles of steel or a l u m i n u m ,
inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF p u m p is OK,
find the damaged components that caused the
debris. If no cause for contamination is f o u n d ,
replace the torque converter.
• Inspect the 4th and 5th accumulator pistons, 0 rings, and springs for wear and damage in the
servo body.
• Check the 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
• Inspect the mainshaft, secondary shaft, 4th clutch,
and 5th clutch for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plateto-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wavedplate height. If the discs and plates are w o r n or
damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If the wavedplate height is out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end-plate.
• Inspect the 4th clutch feed pipes. If the 4th clutch
feed pipe is scored, replace it and the O-rings
under the feed pipe flange.
• Replace the secondary shaft if the bushing for the
4th clutch feed pipe is loose or damaged.
(cont'd)
14-27
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Noise f r o m
transmission in all
shift lever
positions
1.
2.
Probable cause(s)
ATF p u m p w o r n or damaged
Mainshaft bearing, countershaft
bearing, or secondary shaft
bearing defective
Vehicle does not
accelerate above
31 m p h (50 km/h)
Vibration in all
shift lever
positions
Torque converter one-way clutch
defective
Shift lever does
not operate
smoothly
1.
Drive plate defective or transmission
misassembled
2.
3.
14-28
Transmission range switch
defective or out of adjustment
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Connection between shift cable
and transmission or body is w o r n
Notes
° Check the line pressure.
° Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
converter housing may cause the ATF pump to
seize. The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related
ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing w h e n replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump w h e n you
torque d o w n the main valve body. This will cause
the ATF p u m p seize.
• Install the main seal flush w i t h the torque
converter housing w h e n replacing the main seal.
If you push it into the torque converter housing
until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid return
passage and result in damage.
• Inspect the mainshaft, countershaft, and
secondary shaft bearing for wear and damage.
Replace the torque converter assembly.
• Check transmission and drive plate installation.
• Check the drive plate for wear and damage, if the
drive plate is w o r n or damaged, replace the drive
plate.
• Check the engine control system.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
the transmission range switch is out of
adjustment, adjust it and shift cable.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Symptom
Transmission does
not shift into P
1.
2.
3.
Torque converter
clutch does not
disengage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Torque converter
clutch does not
operate smoothly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Probable cause(s)
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Connection between shift cable
and transmission or body is w o r n
Park mechanism defective
Shift solenoid valve D defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A defective
Torque converter clutch piston
defective
Lock-up shift valve defective
Lock-up control valve defective
Shift solenoid valve D defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A defective
Torque converter clutch piston
defective
Torque converter check valve
defective
Lock-up shift valve defective
Lock-up control valve defective
Notes
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
• Check the park pawl spring installation and the
park lever spring installation. If installation is
incorrect, install the spring correctly. Make sure
that the park lever stop is not installed upside
d o w n . Check the distance between the park pawl
shaft and park lever pin. If the distance is out of
tolerance, adjust the distance with the park lever
stop.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Replace the torque converter assembly.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
• Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve
body.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Replace the torque converter assembly.
• Check the torque converter check valve in the
regulator valve body.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
• Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve
body.
(cont'd)
14-29
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Torque converter
clutch does not
engage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A/T gear position
indicator does not
indicate shift lever
positions
1.
2.
3.
Probable cause(s)
Shift solenoid valve D defective
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A defective
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor defective
Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor defective
Torque converter clutch piston
defective
Torque converter check valve
defective
Lock-up shift valve defective
Lock-up control valve defective
Transmission range switch
defective or out of adjustment
Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Connection between shift cable
and transmission or body w o r n
Speedometer and
odometer do not
work
Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor defective
Engine does not
rev to high r p m ,
and the
transmission
upshifts at low rpm
(engine at normal
operating
temperature)
Engine rocker arm defective
14-30
Notes
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Test the solenoid valve function w i t h the HDS.
• Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve body gasket, ATF feed pipes, and O-rings
for wear and damage.
• Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
• Check the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
• Inspect the sensor O-ring for wear and damage.
• Replace the torque converter assembly.
• Check the torque converter check valve in the
regulator valve body.
• Check the lock-up shift valve in the regulator
valve body.
• Check the lock-up control valve in the main valve
body.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
the transmission range switch is out of
adjustment, adjust it and shift cable.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
• Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
connections.
• Check the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor installation.
• Inspect the sensor O-ring.
Check the engine rocker arms.
S f stem Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and a triple-shaft electronically
controlled unit which provides 5 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line w i t h the engine.
Torque Converter, Shafts, Gears, and Clutches
The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing (pump)
is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine runs. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes w i t h the starter pinion w h e n the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel while transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel
shafts; the mainshaft, the countershaft and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line w i t h the engine crankshaft,
and includes the 3rd and 5th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 5th, reverse, and idler. The mainshaft reverse gear is integral
w i t h the mainshaft 5th gear. The countershaft includes the gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th-5th, reverse, park, and the final
drive. The countershaft 4th-5th gear enables the shared use of the secondary shaft 4th gear and the mainshaft 5th gear.
The countershaft 4th-5th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft providing the 4th,
5th or reverse gear, depending on which way the selector is moved. The final drive gear is integral w i t h the
countershaft. The secondary shaft includes the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd, 4th, and idler. The
idler gear shaft is located between the mainshaft and secondary shaft, and the idler gear transmits power between the
mainshaft and the secondary shaft. The gears on the mainshaft and the secondary shaft are in constant mesh w i t h
those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the transmission are engaged by the clutches,
power is transmitted through the mainshaft, to the secondary shaft, then to the countershaft to provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
behind the glove box.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. They are bolted to the
torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, cut valve B, shift valves A, C, and D, the
relief valve, the lock-up control valve, the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the torque converter check valve, the lock-up shift valve, the 1 st
accumulator, and the 3rd accumulator. The servo body contains the servo valve, shift valve B, cut valve A,
accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th, and shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D. Fluid f r o m the regulator passes through
the manual valve to the various control valves. The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive fluid f r o m their respective feed
pipes, and the 1st and the 5th clutches receive fluid f r o m the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism
To shift gears, the PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D, and automatic transmission (A/T) clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A, B, and C, while receiving input signals f r o m various sensors and switches located
throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port to send
hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C regulate their respective
pressure, and pressurize to the clutches to engage it and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism operates in the D position or S position in sequential shift mode (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and
D3 position or S position in automatic shift mode (2nd and 3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the
torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque
converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together w i t h
the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the t i m i n g and volume of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve
D is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve D pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. The A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control valve control the amount of lock-up.
(cont'd)
14-31
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description f c o n t ' d )
General Operation (cont'd)
Gear Selection - 7-position Automatic T r ^ s ^ s s S o n
The shift lever has seven positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N; NEUTRAL, D; DRIVE 1st through 5th gear ranges, D3:
DRIVE 1st through 3rd gear ranges, 2: 2nd gear, and 1: 1st gear.
Position
P; PARK
R: REVERSE
N: NEUTRAL
D: DRIVE
(1st through 5th)
D3: DRIVE
(1st through 3rd)
2: SECOND
1: FIRST
Description
Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged w i t h park gear on countershaft. All clutches are
released.
Reverse; reverse selector engaged w i t h countershaft reverse gear and 5th clutch engaged.
All clutches are released.
General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then 5th, depending on
vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on
deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill and down-hill
driving; starts off in 1 st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
accelerator pedal position. Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up
mechanism operates in 2nd and 3rd gears.
Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear; does not shift up and d o w n .
Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.
Starting the engine is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Gear Selection - 5-position Automatic Transmission
The shift lever has five positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear ranges, and S:
DRIVE 1st through 3rd gear range w i t h automatic shift mode and 1st through 5th in sequential shift mode.
Position
p. p
A
R
K
R: REVERSE
N: NEUTRAL
D: DRIVE
(1st through 5th)
S: DRIVE
Automatic shift
mode
(1st through 3rd)
Sequential shift
mode
(1st through 5th)
Description
Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged w i t h park gear on countershaft. All
clutches are released.
Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 5th
clutch engaged.
All clutches are released.
General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then
5th, depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts
through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. Transmission can be
shifted manually w i t h steering wheel upshift ( + ) and downshift (—) switches.
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill
and down-hill driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd,
depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts
through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates
in 2nd and 3rd gears.
Manual gear shift driving; transmission enters this mode by pulling the
steering wheel upshift ( + ) or downshift (—) switch while the shift lever is in
the S position. Vehicle can start off in 1st or 2nd gears, and does not upshift
automatically. Downshifts automatically to 1st on deceleration to complete
stop and to 4th or 3rd on deceleration or braking. The lock-up mechanism
operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
Starting the engine is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
14-32
Automatic Transmission Gear Position Indicator
The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which shift lever position has been selected.
Shift Indicator - 5-position Automatic Transmission
The shift indicator, located in the gauge control module, displays the selected gear w h e n the transmission is in the Dsteering shift and sequential shift modes (shifting the transmission manually w i t h the steering wheel shifter switches).
The shift indicator also displays " M " w h e n the transmission is in the sequential shift mode.
14-33
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Clutches and Gears
The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch d r u m , the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled f r o m the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin independently
on its shaft, transmitting no power.
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT
5TH G E A R
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
IDLER G E A R
RING G E A R
REVERSE
IDLER G E A R
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT
IDLER G E A R
FINAL
DRIVE G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER G E A R
SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR
SECONDARY
SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
3RD G E A R
SECONDARY
SHAFT
PARK G E A R
1ST CLUTCH
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR
S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T IDLER G E A R
C O U N T E R S H A F T 4TH-5TH G E A R
DIFFERENTIAL A S S E M B L Y
S E C O N D A R Y S H A F T 4TH G E A R
S E C O N D A R Y SHAFT 2ND G E A R
SECONDARY SHAFT 1S T GEAR
14-34
FINAL D R I V E N G E A R
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the end of the secondary shaft, opposite the end cover.
The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch, and is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe w i t h i n the secondary
shaft.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 5th clutch, and is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 4th clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch, and is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe w i t h i n the secondary
shaft.
5th Clutch'The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
5th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch, and is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the
internal hydraulic circuit.
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
• 3rd gear is engages/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch.
• 5th gear is engaged/disengages w i t h the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• Idler gear is splined w i t h the mainshaft, and rotates w i t h the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:
• Final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.
• 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and park gears are splined w i t h the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
• 4th-5th gear and reverse gear rotate freely f r o m the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 4th-5th gear and
reverse gear w i t h the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so 4th-5th gear
and reverse gear engage w i t h the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:
• 1st gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
• 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
• 4th gear is engages/disengages w i t h the secondary shaft by the 4th clutch.
• Idler gear is splined w i t h the secondary shaft, and rotates w i t h the secondary shaft.
The idler gear on the idler gear shaft transmits power between the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
The reverse idler gear transmits power f r o m the mainshaft reverse gear to the countershaft reverse gear, and changes
rotational direction of the countershaft reverse.
14-35
Automatic Transmission
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
P o w e r Flow
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl, interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted f r o m the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the idler gear shaft idler gear, and
the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the
countershaft. In this position, the position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted
f r o m D or R position:
• W h e n shifted f r o m D position, the reverse selector engages w i t h the countershaft 4th-5th gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the 4th-5th gear engages w i t h the countershaft.
• W h e n shifted f r o m R position, the reverse selector engages w i t h the countershaft reverse gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the reverse gear engages w i t h the countershaft.
14-36
D, D3, and S position
In the D, D3, and S positions, the o p t i m u m gear is automatically selected f r o m the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in
the D position and S position in sequential shift mode; 1st, 2nd, and 3rd gears in the D3 position and S position in
automatic shift mode according to conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and
vehicle speed.
In 1st Gear and 1 Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear w i t h the
secondary shaft.
• The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler gear shaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler
gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
(cont'd)
14-37
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
P o w e r F l o w (cont'd)
In 2nd Gear and 2 Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear w i t h the
secondary shaft.
* The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler gear shaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler
gear.
* The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h In turn drives the final driven gear.
14-38
In 3rd Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
(cont'd)
14-39
Automatic Transmission
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
In 4th Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the secondary shaft 4th gear w i t h the
secondary shaft.
• The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler gear shaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler
gear.
• The secondary shaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th-5th gear.
• The countershaft 4th-5th gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector, which drives the reverse selector hub.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
14-40
In 5th Gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft 4th-5th gear
and reverse selector hub while the shift lever is in forward range; D, D3, S, 2, and 1 positions.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 4th-5th gear.
• The countershaft 4th-5th gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector, w h i c h drives the reverse selector hub.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
(cont'd)
14-41
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
R Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft reverse gear
and reverse selector hub w h i l e the shift lever is in the R position.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The rotational direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed by the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector, which drives the reverse selector hub.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
14-42
Electronic Control System
Electronic C o n t r o l
T h e e l e c t r o n i c control s y s t e m c o n s i s t s of the p o w e r t r a i n c o n t r o l
Shifting
The PCM
and
lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable
r e c e i v e s i n p u t s i g n a l s f r o m t h e s e n s o r s , s w i t c h e s , and
module
driving
(PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
u n d e r all
other control
conditions.
units, p r o c e s s e s data, and
outputs
s i g n a l s for the e n g i n e control s y s t e m a n d A / T control s y s t e m . T h e A / T control s y s t e m i n c l u d e s shift control,
l o g i c c o n t r o l , c l u t c h p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l , a n d l o c k - u p c o n t r o l . T h e PCM
grade
s w i t c h e s the shift s o l e n o i d v a l v e s a n d the
c l u t c h p r e s s u r e control s o l e n o i d v a l v e s to c o n t r o l shifting t r a n s m i s s i o n g e a r s a n d l o c k - u p t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r
A/T
clutch.
PCM
Input Shaft (Mainshaft)
S p e e d Sensor Signal .
PGM-FI Control S y s t e m
Engine R P M Signal
Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor Signal
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
Engine Coolant
Sensor Signal
A / T Control S y s t e m
Shift Solenoid Valve A
Temperature
Shift Control
|_
Grade Logic Control i
—Ascending Control j
— D e s c e n d i n g Control;
Sequential Shift
r
Control*
i
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
Shift Solenoid Valve B
Shift Solenoid Valve C
1
Shift Solenoid V a l v e D
Automatic
5-speed
and
Reverse
A / T Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve A
Clutch Pressure
Control
A / T Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve B
A / T Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve C
Steering Wheel
Upshift ( + ) Switch S i g n a l *
Steering Wheel
Downshift (—) Switch Signal*
Lock-up
ON/OFF
Lock-up Control
Lock-up
Conditions
Self-diagnosis/
Fail-safe Function
2
Vehicle Speed Signal
2nd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure S w i t c h Signal
3rd Clutch T r a n s m i s s i o n
Fluid Pressure S w i t c h Signal
Brake Pedal Position
Switch Signal
Service Check Signal
*1:
7-position
*2:
5-position
J
Communication and
Output Function
F-CA^)
Data Link Connector
Gauge Control Module
• A / T G e a r Position Indicator
• Shift Indicator*
2
Indicator
Control
Shift Lock Solenoid
Control
Shift Lock Solenoid
(cont'd)
14-43
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control S f s t e m (cont'd)
Electronic Controls Locations
STEERING WHEEL
DOWNSHIFT ( - ) SWITCH
( 5 - p o s i t i o n transmission)
STEERING WHEEL
UPSHIFT f + ) SWITCH
(5-position t r a n s m i s s i o n )
POWERTRAIN
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
CONTROL
MODULE { P C M )
P A R K P I N SWITCH
SHIFT L O C K
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
SOLENOID
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
2ND C L U T C H
TRANSMISSION
FLUID P R E S S U R E
SWITCH
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
3RD C L U T C H
TRANSMISSION
FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVED
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
14-44
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent f r o m sensors and switches, and
it actuates shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D to control shifting transmission gears.
Shift solenoid valves are a normally closed type. Shift solenoid valve opens the port of shift solenoid valve pressure
leading to shift valves while shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and closes the port w h e n shift solenoid
valve is OFF.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D and their respective gear position are shown
in the table.
Shift lever
Position
D, D3, and
Sin
automatic
shift mode
D a n d S in
sequential
shift mode
2
1
N
R
P
Gear Position
Shifting f r o m the N position
Stays in 1st
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd
Stays in 2nd
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd
Stays in 3rd
Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th
Stays in 4th
Shifting gears between 4th and 5th
Stays in 5th
2nd
1st
Neutral
Shifting f r o m the P and N positions
Stays in reverse
Reverse inhibit control
Park
A
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Shift Solenoid Valve
C
B
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
D
OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
(cont'd)
14-45
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control S f stem (cont'd)
Shift Control - Grade Logic Control
The grade logic control system has been adopted t o control shifting in the D position. To control shifting while the
vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, the PCM compares actual driving conditions w i t h memorized driving
conditions, based on the input f r o m the accelerator pedal position, sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine
coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the shift lever
position signal.
PCM
E n g i n e R P M Signal
T r a n s m i s s i o n Range
Switch Signal
Engine R P M
Control
Shift Position
Control
Fail-safe Control
Shift S o l e n o i d
Valve A
Actual Driving
Shift Position
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor
Signal
R e a d of A T F
Temperature
Comparison
with Signals
Shift Solenoid
Valve B
Shift S o l e n o i d
Valve C
Shift S o l e n o i d
Valve D
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Master Target of
Shifting Position
C o r r e c t i o n of D a t a
Selection of
Shifting m o d e
Grade Logic Control
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
Brake Pedal Position
Switch Signal
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
C a l c u l a t i o n of
gradient
C o r r e c t i o n of e n g i n e
coolant temperature
sensor signal data
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
14-46
Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in the D, D3, and S positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear, 3rd gear, and 4th gear to prevent the transmission f r o m frequently shifting'between
2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and
have more power w h e n needed.
NOTE; Shift commands stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th
and 5th gears, enable the PCM to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
100%
4TH
FLAT
ROAD MODE
GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
5TH
MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
STEEP ASCENDING MODE
HEAVY STEEP ASCENDING MODE
62 mph
(100
Vehicle speed
km/h)
Grade Logic Control; Descending Control
W h e n the PCM determines that the vehicle is going d o w n a hill in the D, D3, and S positions, the shift-up speed f r o m
4th to 5th gear, 3rd to 4th gear, and f r o m 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for
flat road driving to widen the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear engagement areas. This, in combination w i t h engine
braking f r o m the deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving w h e n the vehicle is descending. There are three
descending modes w i t h different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according
to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th or 4th gear and you are decelerating while
applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to a lower gear. When you accelerate, the
transmission will then return to a higher gear.
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift
100
Schedule
%
5TH
FLAT ROAD
C
CD
CL
o
MODE
G R A D U A L DESCENDING
50
MEDIUM DESCENDING
©
STEEP DESCENDING
62 m p h
(100 k m / h )
Vehicle
MODE
MODE
M O D E
speed
(cont'd)
14-47
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control S f stem (cont'd)
.
D-Steering Shift and Sequential Shift Modes - 5-position A u t o m a t i c Transmission
The transmission has t w o manual shift modes; the D-steering shift mode w h e n the shift lever is in the D position, and
the sequential shift mode w h e n the shift lever is in the S position. Both modes are entered by pulling the steering
wheel downshift or upshift switch while driving. The shift indicator, located in the gauge control module, displays the
selected gear number while in the manual shift modes.
STEERING WHEEL
DOWNSHIFT ( - ) SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
U P S H I F T (-f)
SWITCH
M
INDICATOR
SHIFT
INDICATOR
D-Steering Shift Mode - 5-position Automatic Transmission
W h e n y o u are driving in the D position, you can manually shift the transmission up and d o w n by pulling the steering
wheel downshift or upshift switch. W h e n you pull either steering wheel shifter switch, the transmission enters the Dsteering shift mode, and the shift indicator shows the current gear number. To shift up or d o w n , pull one of the
steering wheel shifter switches while the transmission is still in the D-steering shift mode (shift indicator on), and the
selected gear number will be displayed on the shift indicator. However, w h e n a lower or higher gear is requested
before engine speed reaches the lower or upper limit for that gear, the transmission will not shift, and the shift
indicator flashes the requested number several times before returning to the original gear. The transmission w i l l stay
in the shift mode if the steering wheel downshift switch is pulled w h e n going downhill and engine braking is being
used. The system monitors the accelerator pedal and the driving conditions, and turns the shift mode and indicator off
w h e n it senses that the driver is driving under normal conditions or w h e n the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Sequential Shift IVtade - 5-position Automatic Transmission
When you are driving in the S position, you can manually shift the transmission up and d o w n by pulling the steering
wheel downshift or up shift switch. When y o u pull either steering wheel shifter switch, the transmission enters the
sequential shift mode and the shift indicator displays " M " along w i t h the current gear number. The transmission will
no longer automatically shift and must be shifted d o w n or up (before the engine speed reaches the tachometer's red
zone) by pulling the appropriate steering wheel shifter switch the shift indicator will display the selected gear.
However, w h e n a lower or higher limit for that gear, the transmission will not shift, and the shift indicator flashes the
requested number several times before returning to the original gear. W h e n driving in 4th or 5th gear, the
transmission shifts to the lower gear if the vehicle slows d o w n to the programmed speed, or by depressing the brake
pedal. The transmission shifts d o w n to 1st gear w h e n the vehicle comes to a complete stop. The vehicle can start off in
2nd gear by pulling the steering wheel upshift switch while at a stop. The transmission stays in the sequential shift
mode until the shift lever is moved to the D position.
14-48
Clutch Pressure Control
-.
The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch pressure. W h e n shifting
between gears, the clutch pressure regulated by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C engages and
disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals f r o m the various sensors and switches, processes data, and outputs current to A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C.
PCM
PGM-FI
Control
System
Ignition t i m i n g
requirement
input Shaft
{Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
A
Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
S p e e d Sensor Signal
Actual
driving shift
position
Ji
D e c i s i o n of
shifting m o d e
Accelerator P e d a l
Position Sensor
Signal
Throttle Position
S e n s o r Signal
Master Target of
Controlling Current
Manifold Absolute
P r e s s u r e S e n s o r Signal
Current
feedback
A / T Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid
V a l v e s A , B, a n d C
®
3
w
&
2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
P r e s s u r e S w i t c h Signal
C o r r e c t i o n of
hydraulic pressure
applying timing
3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
P r e s s u r e Switch Signal
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
£L
re
or Si
C o r r e c t i o n of e n g i n e
torque signal data
meti
Engine RPM Signal
©
w
c
QQ
w
&
Correction of e n g i n e
coolant temperature
sensor data
r
C o r r e c t i o n of A T F
temperature sensor
signal data
(cont'd)
14-49
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control S f stern (cont'd)
Lock-up Control
Shift solenoid valve D controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF. The
PCM actuates shift solenoid valve D and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to start lock-up. A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A applies and regulates hydraulic pressure to the lock-up control valve to control the
amount of lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in the D or S position in sequential shift mode (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in the D3
or S position (2nd and 3rd).
PCM
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
Engine coolant
temperature control
•ftp-
Transmission Range
Switch Signal
Barometric
Pressure
Sensor
Signal
Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor Signal
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Shifting position
control
Gradient control
by magnitude
Fail-safe control
Actual
driving
shift
position
Lock-up control
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
Engine RPM Signal
• Lock-up O N / O F F
control
Correction
of ATF
temperature
sensor data
• Lock-up condition
control
Shift Solenoid
Valve D
Driving
shift
position
information
M a s t e r T a r g e t of
Controlling Current
Current feedback
14-50
A / T Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid
Valve A
PCM A / T Control S y s t e m Electrical Connections - 7-position A u t o m a t i c Transmission
POWERTRAN
I CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
IGNITION SWT
ICH
MRLY
IGP1
G
I P2
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE A
W
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE B
SCS
—npp
SHC <
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
SHD
!
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE C
——^KP
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE D
CAN H
F-CAN
TRANSCEV
I ER
CANL
ATPP
ATPR
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENOR
ATPN
ATPD
ATPD3
ATP 2-1
ATPFWD
ATPRVS
N
I PUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
EGR VALVE
POST
IO
I N SENSOR/
EGR VALVE
PG1
PG2
LG1
ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
LG2
P C M Connector Terminal Locations
7 ! j 89
>
5 16 /
^28 y^30 31
6
in A
A
10/1/1
/'23.24
/
AJ
/
A*
3 | 4 I 5
0 1112 13
8
21
17 18//
/
/
16
//
1 2 | 3 | 4 5(6) 1 7
9
1112 ( 14 [15) 17 118) 19 20 21
22 24 25 26 27; (28) 29 30
/
/
/
/
(cont'd)
14-51
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
PCM A / T Control System Electrical Connections - 5-posiitlon A u t o m a t i c Transmission
POWERTRAN
I CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
IGNITION SWT
ICH
BAT/o\|G1
BATTERY
IG1
SLS
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
(FI-MAIN)
MRLY
1
IGP1
G
I P2
SCS
_
SHA
SHB
|
1
^
—
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE C
SHC
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE A
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE B
—
SHF
I T SOLENOD
I VALVE D
_
SHD
1
SHF
IT
N
I DC
I ATOR
IEE
R
1— DD
RR
V
IV
R
1
F-CAN
TRANSCEV
IER
CAN H
CAN L
ATPP
r ATPR
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENOR
\ ATPN
\ ATPD
\ ATPS
) ATP 2-1
> ATP FWD
} ATP RVS
STEERN
I G WHEEL UPSHF
IT (+) SWT
ICH
, C19
A23
|
N
I PUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
J SUPP
STEERN
I G WHEEL DOWNSHF
IT (-) SWT
ICH
» PG1
EGR VALVE
POST
IO
I N SENSOR/
EGR VALVE
' PG2
) LG1
» LG2
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
11|
5
2 l3 I 15
4
6 | 7 |
10 / 1314 V/ /
//
/
23 24
14-52
16
| 8
9
18
20 21
28
30 31
ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
P C M A / T Control S y s t e m Input a n d
Output
PCM
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 j 5
10
/
2 3 24
6
13 14 15 16
//
2 |3 | 4 | 5
10 11 12 13
21
17 18
I 7 I 18 19
20 21
/ 18 / 30
/ 28 / 31
/I
8
B
A(31P)
/
/
V
Connector
I6 l 7
/
/ /
/
/ /
C
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20
21 22
/ / / / 5 126
/13 (8)14 (9) 1015 /
(22P)
D
1 2
16
(24P)
Terminal Locations
4
5
6
7
//
(17P)
/
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |5
11 12
14
22
E
/
/
24
(6)1
(15) 06) 17 08) 19 20
25 26
27
7
21
| 8 j 9
29 30
/
(31P)
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
Terminal
Terminal
Wire Color
Name
Description
Signal
Number
A2
A3
YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK
IGP2 (POWER
IGP1 (POWER
SOURCE)
SOURCE)
Power source for PCM
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
circuit
W i t h ignition switch OFF: A b o u t 0 V
Power source for
PCM
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h ignition switch OFF: A b o u t 0 V
circuit
A4
BLK
PG2 (POWER
GROUND)
G r o u n d circuit for the
PCM
A5
BLK
PG1 (POWER
GROUND)
G r o u n d circuit for the
PCM
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
A8
BRN/YEL
LG2 (LOGIC
GROUND)
G r o u n d circuit for the
PCM
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
A9
BRN/YEL
LG1 (LOGIC
GROUND)
G r o u n d circuit for the
PCM
A18
BLK/BLU
NC (OUTPUT
SHAFT
Detects output shaft
A20
YELVBLU
(COUNTERSHAFT)
(countershaft) speed
SPEED SENSOR)
signal
VCC2
Provide sensor
(SENSOR
A21
YEL/RED
VCC1
reference
reference
GRN/BLK
SG2 (SENSOR
GROUND)
Sensor
ground
A24
GRN/WHT
SG1 (SENSOR
GROUND)
Sensor
ground
A30
RED/GRN
MAP
(MANIFOLD
W i t h vehicle m o v i n g : A b o u t 1.5—3.5 V (pulses)
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 5 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 5 V
W i t h ignition switch OFF: A b o u t 0 V
voltage
A23
ABSOLUTE
sensor
W i t h ignition switch OFF: A b o u t 0 V
Provide sensor
(SENSOR
VOLTAGE)
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5 V
voltage
VOLTAGE)
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
L e s s t h a n 1.0 V a t a l l t i m e s
Detects M A P sensor signal
PRESSURE)
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 3 V
A t i d l e : A b o u t 1.5 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n e n g i n e s p e e d )
>CM C O N N E C T O R B ( 2 4 P )
Terminal
Wire Color
Terminal
Description
Name
Signal
Number
B12
WHT/BLK
EGRP ( E X H A U S T
GAS
Detects EGR valve
RECIRCULATION
(EGR)
sensor
VALVE
position
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : A b o u t 1.2—3.0 V
signal
POSITION
SENSOR)
B16
PNK
EGR ( E X H A U S T
RECIRCULATION
GAS
(EGR)
Drives EGR valve
W i t h EGR operating: Duty controlled
W i t h EGR not operating: A b o u t 0 V
VALVE)
(cont'd)
14-53
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control S y s t e m (cont'd)
PCM
A / T C o n t r o l S y s t e m Input a n d O u t p u t
(cont'd)
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
1
10
I
2
/
I
I
/?
23 24
A
I
3
4
66
13 14 15 16
I
/
/
T |
18
|8|9
KI2J3I4I6
/ 20 21
28s 30 31
Vm,
18
mm
B
(31P)
1 2
12
/
4
5
6
7
/
/
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20
21 2 2
C
(22P)
/
///
5
(9) 10
/13 (8)
/
14
15
/
D
(17P)
6
12
/
1
/
22
E
I
I
2
3 | 4
14
11 12
/
/
24
| 6'<6)I T i I S I 9
m a©17 (18) 19 20 21
25 26
27
(28) 29 30
/
(31P)
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (22P)
Terminal
Wire Color
Terminal
Description
Name
Signal
Number
C1
BRN/WHT
LS B (A/T C L U T C H
Drives A/T clutch
PRESSURE
control solenoid valve B
CONTROL
pressure
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): C u r r e n t c o n t r o l l e d
S O L E N O I D V A L V E B)
C2
GRN
S H C (SHIFT
SOLENOID
Drives shift solenoid valve
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n R, D ( i n 3 r d a n d 4 t h g e a r s ) , a n d
D 3 o r S (in 3 r d gear) p o s i t i o n s : B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
C
V A L V E C)
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n P, N , D ( i n 1 s t , 2 n d , a n d 5 t h
g e a r s ) , D 3 o r S (in 1st a n d 2 n d g e a r s ) , 2 , 1
positions:
About 0 V
C4
GRN/RED
SH D (SHIFT
SOLENOID
Drives shift solenoid
valve
W i t h engine running in P a n d R positions: Battery
voltage
D
V A L V E D)
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in N position: A b o u t 0 V
C5
GRN/WHT
S H B (SHIFT
SOLENOID
Drives shift solenoid valve
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n R, D ( i n 1 s t , 4 t h , a n d 5 t h g e a r s ) ,
D 3 o r S (in 1st g e a r ) , a n d 1 p o s i t i o n s : B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
B
V A L V E B)
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n P, N , D ( i n 2 n d a n d 3 r d g e a r s ) ,
D 3 o r S (in 2 n d a n d 3 r d g e a r s ) , a n d 2 p o s i t i o n s : A b o u t
OV
C6
BLU
S H A (SHIFT
SOLENOID
Drives shift solenoid valve
A
VALVE A)
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in D (in 2 n d a n d 4th gears), D 3 o r
S (in 2 n d g e a r ) , a n d 2 p o s i t i o n s : B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n P, N , D ( i n 1 s t , 3 r d , a n d 5 t h
g e a r s ) , D 3 o r S (in 1st a n d 3 r d g e a r s ) , a n d 1 p o s i t i o n s :
About 0 V
C7
BLU/WHT
LS C (A/T C L U T C H
Drives A/T clutch
PRESSURE
control solenoid valve C
CONTROL
pressure
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): C u r r e n t
controlled
S O L E N O I D V A L V E C)
C9 (7-
RED
(5-
position)
14-54
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
position)
C9
ATP D3
RED
ATPS
D3)
(TRANSMISSION
R A N G E S W I T C H S)
Detects transmission
range
In D 3 p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
switch D3 position signal
In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n D 3 : B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
Detects transmission
In S p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
range
switch S position signal
In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n S: B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (22P)
Terminal
Description
Terminal Name
Wire Color
Signal
Number
C10
BLK/RED
O P 3 S W (3RD CLUTCH
Detects 3rd clutch
TRANSMISSION)
transmission fluid
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II):
pressure
C 1 1 (7-
BRN
A T P 2-1
(TRANSMISSION
R A N G E S W I T C H 2-1)
position)
• Without 3rd clutch pressure: A b o u t 5 V
• With 3rd clutch pressure: A b o u t 0 V
switch signal
Detects transmission
range
In 2 a n d 1 p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n 2 a n d 1: A b o u t 5 V
switch 2 and 1 position
signal
C12
YEL
Detects transmission
ATPRVS
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE
range
In R p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
I n a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n R: B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
switch RVS signal
SWITCH)
C13
BLU/YEL
OP2SW (2ND
CLUTCH
switch
C14
RED/YEL
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II):
Detects 2nd clutch
transmission fluid
TRANSMISSION)
pressure
ATFT (ATF
Detects ATF temperature
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( I I ) : 0 . 2 — 4 . 8 V ( a b o u t 1.8
TEMPERATURE
sensor
operating temperature, depending on ATF
signal
RED/BLK
Vat
temperature)
SENSOR)
C15
• Without 2nd clutch pressure: A b o u t 5 V
• With 2nd clutch pressure: A b o u t 0 V
signal
LS A (A/T CLUTCH
Drives A/T clutch
PRESSURE
control solenoid valve
CONTROL
pressure
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): C u r r e n t
controlled
A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
C17
C18
YEL/GRN
BLU/YEL
ATP D
(TRANSMISSION
Detects transmission
R A N G E S W I T C H D)
switch D signal
ATP
Detects transmission
FWD
(TRANSMISSION
RANGE
switch FWD
range
In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n D: B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
range
WHT/RED
N M (INPUT
voltage
SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
C20
RED/BLK
C21
WHT
C22
BLK/BLU
In D, D 3 o r S , 2 p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n D, D 3 o r S , 2: B a t t e r y
signal
SWITCH)
C19
In D p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
SPEED
Detects input shaft
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5 V
(mainshaft) speed sensor
W i t h e n g i n e idling in N position: A b o u t 1.5—3.5 V
SENSOR)
signal
ATP N
Detects transmission
(TRANSMISSION
R A N G E SWITCH N)
switch N signal
ATP R (TRANSMISSION
Detects transmission
R A N G E S W I T C H R)
switch R signal
ATP P (TRANSMISSION
Detects transmission
R A N G E S W I T C H P)
switch P signal
(pulses)
range
In N p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n N: B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
range
In R p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
range
In P p o s i t i o n : A b o u t 0 V
I n a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n R: B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
I n a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n P: B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
(cont'd)
14-55
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description {cont'd)
Electronic Control S y s t e m (cont'd)
PCM A/T Control System Input and Output (cont'd)
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
1
10
1
2 I 3 | 4 e| 5| T |
8 | 9 /l_2l3|4|5 .
18 A 20 21
8
10 11 12 13
13 14 15 16
21
30 31
28
17 18
23 24
/
/
// / A
I
/
/
/
/
/
\e\y
16
/
/
/
B (24P)
A(31P)
1 2
/
4
5
6
7
A/ 179 1018 1911 2012 13 1421 2215
C (22P)
/ //
(8) (9) 10
13 14
15
5
/
6
12
//
D(17P)
(6)|7|
I8 I 9
1 I2 | 3 | 4 I e
11 12
14 a© a® 17 (18) 19 20 21
22
24
2 7 (283 29 30
25 26
/
/
/
/
E(31P)
P C M C O N N E C T O R D (17P)
Terminal
Wire Color
Description
Terminal Name
Signal
Number
D 9 (5-
LT G R N /
position)
RED
SDNP (STEERING
DOWNSHIFT
WHEEL
SWITCH)
Detects steering wheel
downshift switch signal
W i t h s t e e r i n g w h e e l d o w n s h i f t (—) s w i t c h p u l l e d :
About 0 V
W i t h s t e e r i n g w h e e l d o w n s h i f t (—) s w i t c h r e l e a s e d :
Battery voltage
P C M C O N N E C T O R E (31P)
Terminal
Wire Color
Description
Terminal Name
Signal
Number
E2
BRN/WHT
SLS (SHIFT LOCK
Drives shift lock solenoid
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), i n P p o s i t i o n , b r a k e p e d a l
Drives PGM-FI m a i n relay 1
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 0 V
(FI-MAIN)
W i t h ignition switch OFF: Battery voltage
SOLENOID)
E7
RED/YEL
pressed, and accelerator closed: A b o u t 0 V
M R L Y (PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY)
Power source for DTC
E9
BLK/YEL
IG1 (IGNITION
SWITCH)
Detects ignition switch
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): B a t t e r y v o l t a g e
signal
E11
WHT
CAN H (CAN
Sends and
COMMUNICATION
communication
SIGNAL
E16(5-
YEL
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 2 . 5 V ( p u l s e )
signal
HIGH)
SUPP (STEERING
WHEEL
UPSHIFT SWITCH)
position)
receive
Detects steering wheel
upshift switch signal
With steering wheel upshift ( + ) switch pulled: About
OV
With steering w h e e l upshift ( + ) switch released:
Battery voltage
E22
WHT/BLK
E24
RED
B K S W (BRAKE
POSITION
BRN
SWITCH)
Detects brake pedal
With brake pedal released: A b o u t 0 V
position switch signal
With brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
CAN L (CAN
Sends and
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): A b o u t 2 . 5 V ( p u l s e )
COMMUNICATION
communication
SIGNAL
E29
PEDAL
signal
LOW)
SCS (SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL)
receive
Detects service check signal
W i t h the service check signal shorted using HDS:
About 0 V
With the service check signal open: A b o u t 5 V —
battery voltage
14-56
Hydraulic C o n t r o l s
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. The ATF pump is driven
by splines on the end of the torque converter w h i c h is attached to the engine. Fluid f l o w s through the regulator valve
to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing pressure to each of the
clutches. Shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D are mounted on the servo body. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A, B, and C are mounted on the transmission housing.
MAIN V A L V E BODY
A / T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
(cont'd)
14-57
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, cut valve B, shift valves A, C, and D, the relief valve, the lock-up
control valve, the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the
main valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control
system.
COOLER CHECK
VALVE
Regulator Valve Body
The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
torque converter check valve, the lock-up shift valve, the 1st accumulator, and the 3rd accumulator.
LOCK-UP SHIFT
14-58
V A L V E
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure f r o m the ATF p u m p to the hydraulic control system. While
also furnishing fluid to the lubrication system and torque converter. Fluid f r o m the ATF p u m p flows through B and C.
Fluid entering f r o m B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the spring side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve returns under
spring force. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes,
and the amount of fluid f r o m C through the torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the
line pressure.
To T O R Q U E
CONVERTER
REGULATOR
To LUBRICATION and
To RELEIF VALVE
VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction,
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its m a x i m u m w h e n the stator torque reaction reaches its m a x i m u m .
REGULATOR SPRING
CAP
(cont'd)
14-59
Automatic Transmission
S f s t e m Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. The servo body contains the servo valve, shift valve B, cut valve A,
accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th, and shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D.
D
SERVO V A L V E /
SHIFT FORK S H A F T
SERVO BODY
Accumulator
The accumulators are located in the regulator valve body and servo body. The regulator valve body contains the 1st
and 3rd accumulators, and the servo body contains the 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
14-60
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF p u m p starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF f l o w i n g f r o m the ATF p u m p becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure f r o m the regulator valve enters the torque
converter through the lock-up shift valve, and it is discharged f r o m the torque converter. The torque converter check
valve prevents torque converter pressure f r o m rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The shift solenoid valve blocks line pressure f r o m the ATF
p u m p via the manual valve w h e n the shift solenoid valve is OFF. W h e n the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the
PCM, line pressure changes to shift solenoid valve pressure at the shift solenoid valve, then the shift solenoid valve
pressure flows to the shift valve. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valve moves the position of the shift
valve, and switches the port of the hydraulic circuit. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A, B, and C. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate hydraulic pressure, and apply the pressure to the
clutches to engage smoothly. The clutches receive o p t i m u m clutch pressure w h i c h is regulated by the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves for comfortable driving and shifting under all conditions.
Hydraulic Pressure at the Port for use in the hydraulic circuit
Port No.
Hydraulic Pressure
Port No.
5T
1
Line
SA
3
Line
SB
Line
3'
SC
4
Line
SD
4'
Line
10
A"
Line
20
1
Line
30
1A
Line
40
IB
Line
50
Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
1C
valve A
55
Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
3A
valve A
55'
3B
Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A
56
Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
3C
valve A
57
5A
Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A
90
Line, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
5B
valve A, or C
91
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5C
92
5D
Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A
93
Line or A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
5E
valve B
94
5F
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
95
Line, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
5G
valve A, or B
96
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
5H
97
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5J
99
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5K
X
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5L
HX
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
5M
AX
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5R
Hydraulic Pressure
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Shift solenoid valve C
Shift solenoid valve D
1st clutch
2nd clutch
3rd clutch
4th clutch
5th clutch
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
Torque converter
Torque converter
Torque converter
ATF cooler
Torque converter
Lubrication
Torque converter
Torque converter
Suction
Drain
High position drain
Air drain
(cont'd)
14-61
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
N Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift
valves are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, shift valve A stays on the right side, and cut valve A stays on the left side.
• Shift'solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and shift valve B stays on the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift valve C stays on the right side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and stops at cut valve B. Line pressure (1) also f l o w s to the shift
solenoid valves and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not
applied to the clutches.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-62
D Position: 1st gear shifting from the N position
W h e n shifting to the D position f r o m the N position, the condition of the shift solenoid valves and the shift valves
remain the same as in the N position. The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to regulate the
line pressure (1) that is allowed to f l o w through the valve and becomes A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
pressure (55). The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure f l o w s to the lock-up shift valve, shift valve B,
the manual valve, and shift valve A, and becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve C. 1st clutch pressure (10)
flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is engaged by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure mode w h e n
shifting to the D position f r o m the N position.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic c i r c u i t
(cont'd)
14-63
Automatic Transmission
S f s t e m Description (cont'd!
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
D Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B O N , and shift solenoid valves A and C remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve B
pressure (SB) is applied to the right end of shift valve B. Shift valve B is moved to the left side to uncover the line
pressure port leading to the 1st clutch, and to cover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure port.
Line pressure (1B) passed through shift valve B f l o w s to the manual valve, shift valve A, and shift valve C, and
becomes 1st clutch pressure (10). 1st clutch pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged by the
line pressure mode.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-64
D Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A O N , shift solenoid
valve B remains O N , and shift solenoid valve C remains OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is applied to the
right end of shift valve A and to the left side of cut valve A. Cut valve A is moved to the right side to release 1st clutch
pressure in line pressure mode, and shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch the line pressure (5A) port to the
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (5C) port leading to the 1st clutch. Also, shift valve A uncovers
the 2nd clutch pressure (20) port leading A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) to the 2nd clutch.
The 1st clutch and 2nd clutch are engaged by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure mode.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-65
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
D Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF, shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and shift solenoid valve C remains OFF.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and shift solenoid valve B pressure (SB) in the right end of shift valve B and in the
left end of the servo control valve is released. Cut valve B and the servo control valve are kept in the right side by line
pressure (4) even though hydraulic pressure in the left end is released. Shift valve B is moved to the right side to
switch the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (5F) port to the line pressure (5D) port leading to the
2nd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged by the line pressure
mode.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-66
D Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. Shift solenoid
valves B and C remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) in the right
end of shift valve A and in the left end of cut valve A is released. Cut valve A is kept in the right side by line pressure (4)
even though shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to the switch line
pressure (5G) port to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (5E) port leading to the 2nd clutch. Also,
shift valve A uncovers the 3rd clutch pressure (30) port leading the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
pressure (5L) to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch and 3rd clutch are engaged by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve pressure mode.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-67
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
D Position; Driving in 3rd
gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve C
pressure (SC) is applied to the right end of shift valve C and cut valve B. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to
release 2nd clutch pressure. The 3rd clutch keeps engaging w i t h the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
pressure mode.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-68
D Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear
As ihe speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON. Shift solenoid
valve B remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift solenoid
valve A pressure (SA) is applied to the right end of shift valve A and to the left end of cut valve A. Shift valve A is
moved to the left side to switch the line pressure <SU port to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure
(5K) port leading to the 3rd clutch. Also, shift valve A uncovers the 4th clutch pressure (40) port leading the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (5H) to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch and 4th clutch are engaged by the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure mode.
NOTE: When
used,
"left" or "right" indicates direction on the
hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-69
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic F l o w (cont'd)
D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B O N , and shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift solenoid valve B
pressure (SB) is applied t o the right end of shift valve B and the left end of the servo control valve. Shift valve B is
moved to the left side to release 3rd clutch pressure. The 4th clutch keeps engaging w i t h the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve B pressure mode.
NOTE; W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-70
D Position; Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. Shift solenoid
valves B and C remain ON. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) in the right
end of shift valve A is released. Cut valve A is kept in the right side by line pressure (4) even though shift solenoid
valve A pressure (SA) is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C pressure (5T) (5J) port leading to the 4th clutches. The 4th and 5th clutches are engaged by the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure mode.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-71
Automatic Transmission
S f s t e m Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
D Position: Driving in 5 t h gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve B remains ON.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) in the right end of shift valve C is
released. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to release 4th clutch pressure. The 5th clutch keeps engaging w i t h the
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure mode.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-72
2 Position (7-position Automatic Transmission)
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the position of the shift valves are as follows;
• Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift valve A is moved to the left side.
• Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and shift valve B is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift valve C is in the left side.
Line pressure (4) f r o m the manual valve becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve A, via shift valves C and B. 2nd
clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-73
Automatic Transmission
S f s t e m Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
1 Position {7-position Automatic Transmission)
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the position of the shift valves are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and shift valve B is moved to the left side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift valve C is in the right side.
Line pressure (1) f r o m the manual valve flows to cut valve B, cut valve A, shift valve B, and becomes line pressure (5A)
at the manual valve. Line pressure (5A) passes through shift valve A, flows to shift valve C, and becomes 1st clutch
pressure (10). 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-74
R Position: Shifting to the R position from the P or N position
The manual valve is moved into the R position, line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (1), (3), and (7) at the manual
valve. The PCM turns shift solenoid valve D ON, and shift solenoid valves A, B, and C OFF. Shift solenoid valve D
pressure (SD) is applied to the left end of shift valve D, and shift valve D is moved to the right side to uncover the line
pressure (3) port leading to the servo valve. Line pressure (3') f r o m shift valve D flows to the servo valve, and pushes
the servo valve to the reverse position. The PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to regulate A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55), and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55)
flows to the lock-up shift valve, shift valve B, the manual valve, the servo valve, shift valve D, and cut valve A. A/T
d u t c h pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (3C) becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at cut valve A. 5th clutch
pressure (50) is applied to the 5th clutch, and the 5th clutch is engaged w i t h the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A pressure mode.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-75
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description feoKfcl!
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
R P o s i t i o n ; Driving in reverse g e a r
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns s h i f t solenoid valves B and C ON, Shift
solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve D remains ON. Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and shift
solenoid valve B pressure (SB) is applied to the right end of shift valve B. Shift valve B is moved to the right side to
switch the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55') port to the line pressure (1B) port leading to the
5th clutch. The 5th clutch is engaged with the line pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor C o n t r o l
When the R position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at a speed over 8 mph (10 km/h), the PCM turns
shift solenoid valves A and C ON, and shift solenoid valves B and D OFF. Shift solenoid valve D is kept OFF, and shift
valve D is kept in the left side to cover the line pressure (3) port leading to the servo valve. The servo valve is kept in
the forward position. Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, shift valve A is moved to the right side and covers the port to
stop line pressure (1A) leading to the 5th clutch. The servo valve is not applied line pressure, the 5th clutch is not
applied 5th clutch pressure, as a result, power is not transmitted to the reverse direction.
NOTE; When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on
14-76
the hydraulic circuit
P Position
The manual valve is moved into the P position, line pressure ( 1 ) becomes line pressure ( 1 ) , (3), and (7) at the manual
valve. The PCM turns shift solenoid valve D O N , and shift solenoid valves A, B, and C OFF. Shift solenoid valve D
pressure (SD) is applied to the left end of shift valve D, and shift valve D is moved to the right side to uncover the line
pressure (3) port leading to the servo valve. Line pressure (3') f r o m shift valve D flows to the servo valve, and pushes
the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure ( 1 ) is intercepted at cut valve B, line pressure (1B) is intercepted
at shift valve B, and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-77
Automatic Transmission
S f stem Description (cont'd)
Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in the D position or S position in sequential shift mode
(2nd, 3rd, 4 t h , and 5 t h ) and D3 position or S position in automatic shift mode (2nd and 3rd). The pressurized fluid is
drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be
held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine
crankshaft. Together w i t h the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the t i m i n g and amount of the lock-up mechanism.
When shift solenoid valve D is turned ON by the PCM, shift solenoid valve D pressure switches the lock-up shift valve
lock-up ON and OFF. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control valve control the amount of
lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)
Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entering f r o m the chamber between the p u m p and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages w i t h the torque converter cover;
the torque converter clutch lock-up is O N , and the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine.
MAINSHAFT
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up O F F (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)
Fluid entered f r o m the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out f r o m the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
p u m p and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away f r o m the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter clutch lock-up is released; torque converter clutch lock-up is OFF.
MAINSHAFT
14-78
No Lock-up
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve D OFF. The lock-up shift valve is on the right side, and uncovers the torque
converter pressure port leading to the back of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92), regulated by the
regulator valve, flows to the lock-up shift valve and becomes torque converter pressure (94). Torque converter
pressure (94) enters into the back of the torque converter, and discharges into the circuit f r o m the front of the torque
converter. Torque converter pressure enter into back the of the torque converter and is discharged f r o m the front side;
this disengages the torque converter clutch piston and the torque converter cover. Under this condition, the torque
converter clutch is not engaged; this is the non lock-up condition.
NOTE; W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
91
(cont'd)
14-79
Automatic Transmission
S f s t e m Description (cont'd)
Lock-up S f stem (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve D ON. Shift solenoid
valve D pressure (SD) is applied to the right end of the lock-up shift valve to switch the torque converter pressure port
leading to the front of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (91) enters into the front of the torque
converter to engage the torque converter clutch piston. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A to regulate A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55), and A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A pressure (55) is applied to the lock-up control valve. Torque converter pressure (94) drained from the
back of the torque converter is applied to the right side of the lock-up control valve, and torque converter pressure (90)
is applied to the left side of the lock-up control valve. The lock-up control valve controls the amount of the lock-up by
receiving these pressures. The torque converter clutch is engaged partially when torque converter pressure (90) in the
left side of the lock-up control valve is higher, and the torque converter clutch is engaged securely according to the
amount of pressure in the right side of the lock-up control valve. Under this condition, the torque converter clutch is
engaged by pressure entering into the front side of the torque converter; this condition is-partial lock-up.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-80
Full Lock-up
. • •
••
. . . . . . .
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to increase
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55). A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55)
is applied to the lock-up control valve, and the lock-up control valve is moved t o the left side to release torque
converter back pressure (94). Torque converter pressure (91) enters into the front of the torque converter, and the
torque converter clutch piston is securely engaged w i t h the torque converter cover by torque converter pressure.
Under this condition, torque converter back pressure is released fully, causing the torque converter clutch to be fully
engaged; this condition is full lock-up.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-81
Automatic Transmission
S f s t e m Description (cont'd)
Circuit Diagram - PCM A / T Control System - 7-position Automatic Transmission
UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
C2M
IGNITION SWITCH
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
y - ' x
—Q2— WHT/GRN—fo~ T H ~ ~
WHT
J
PNK
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
14-82
|
BRN
|
WHT/RED
|
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM!
AT CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVEA
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
ATCLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVEB
ATCLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVEC
YEL/BLU
INPUTSHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
-
WHT/RED -
G101
GRN/BLK -
YEL/BLU —
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR/
EGR VALVE
"1
1
1
"1
WHT/BLK
GRN/BLK
—
PNK
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
—
Hi—^OTP—I
1
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
—UPSHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
SHIR SOLENOID VALVE D
H i
—
|
—
—
WHT -
P C M Connector Terminal Locations
2 ) 3 4 1 5
1 2
13
4
5
(cont'd)
14-83
Automatic Transmission
S y s t e m Description (cont'd)
Circuit Diagram - PCM A / T Control System - 5-position Automatic Transmission
IGNITION SWITCH
UNDER-HOOD FUSEIREIAV BOX
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
BAT
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
1 | 2 | 3 | 4
10
/
14-84
5
// //
6
13 14 15 1
2 3 24
6
9
/
/18
/
28
/
/
/
20 21
8
30 31
17
2
1
/ '// /
1 8
0 11 12 13
16
21
//
2
3
4
5
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODOLE (PCM)
OUTPUTSHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
YEL/RED
-
BLK/BLU
-
AT CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVE A
- GRN/WHT -
YEL/RED
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
AT CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVEB
—
RED/GRN
|^
AT CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVEC
J
- YEL/BLU
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
LSC^ ^C7_
GRN/WHT
G101
- WHT/RED
- GRN/BLK
- YEL/BLU
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR/
EGR VALVE
~1
—
1
- WHT/BLK
—
• GRN/BLK
—
-
>
PNK
"1
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
HCl
SHB | C 5
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
Hi.
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
ht^~
SHD
7)7
1
P C M Connector Terminal Locations
.....
1
/
22
1
6 |7
8
9
<3 1 4 5
\*
11 1 2 j / | l 4 (15) 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
24 j
25
26
27 28 29 30
/
14-
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0705: S h o r t in T r a n s m i s s i o n R a n g e
S w i t c h Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit p r o b l e m
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
• Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to the
7-position transmission.
• Information marked w i t h a double asterisk (* *)
applies to the 5-position transmission.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 6 and No. 10.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ATPP
(BLK/BLU)
G N D (BLK)
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Wire side of female terminals
2. Start the engine.
3. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop f o r at least 1 second in
each position, and monitor the OBD status for
P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu
for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for an intermittent short in the w i r e
between the transmission range switch and the
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
to step 2 and recheck. •
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-254).
Is the switch
OK ?
Y E S — W i t h the switch connector disconnected, go
to step 6.
NO—Replace the transmission range switch
(see page 14-256), then go to step 48.
14-86
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
N O — G o t o step 8.
12. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9 . J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
10.
Disconnect PCM connector C
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
(22P).
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C22 and body ground.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PCM CONNECTOR C ( 2 2 P )
1
/
/
2
9
u/
10
11
17 18 19
GND (BLK)
i
4
5
12
20
13
6
7
14 15
n 21 22ATP P (BLK/BLU)
tt
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 52.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
NO—Repair open in the wire between transmission
range switch connector terminal No. 10 and ground
(G101) (see page 22-16), or repair poor ground
(G101), then go t o step 48.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C22 and the
transmission range switch, then go to step 48.
NO—Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
14-87
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 7 and No. 10.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
16. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C21 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C ( 2 2 P )
ATP R
(WHT)
GND (BLK)
/
/
Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery
u/
i
1 2
4 5 6 7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20 n 21 22
ATP R (WHT)
voltage?
YES—Goto step 18.
Wire side of female terminals
N O — G o t o step 14.
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C21 and the
transmission range switch, then go to step 48.
N O — G o t o step 52.
14-88
18, Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 10.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
20. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP
21. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
22. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C20 and body ground.
N
(RED/BLK)
7
PCM CONNECTOR C
10
GND (BLK)
/
4 5 6 7
1 2 U
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20
21 22
ATP N (RED/BLK)
/
Wire side of female terminals
Is there about battery
(22P)
n
voltage?
Y E S — G o to step 23.
Wire side of female terminals
NO—Go to step 19.
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the w i r e
between PCM connector terminal C20 and the
transmission range switch, then go t o step 48.
N O — G o t o step 52.
(cont'd)
14-89
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting ( c o n t ' d )
23. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 8 and No. 10.
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
25. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
26. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
27. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C17 and body ground.
7
ATP D
8
10
PCM CONNECTOR C
(V)
1
/
Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery
(22P)
G N D (BLK)
(PNK)
2 u/
9 10 11
•
4
6
7
14 15
n 21 22
12 13
17 18 19 2 0
ATP D
5
(YEL/GRN)
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 28.
Wire side of female terminals
N O — G o t o step 24.
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C17 and the
transmission range switch, then go to step 48.
NO—Go to step 52.
14-90
28. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 3 and No. 10.
29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
30. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
TRANSMISSION
(BLU)
3 1 . Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
32. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C9 and body ground.
ATP S**
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9 10
5
A
PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
1
GND(BLK)
u/
i
4 5 6 7
1 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 7 18 19 20
21 22
//
Wire side of female terminals
n
k
Is there battery
ATP D3*, ATP S**
(RED)
voltage?
YES—
• 7-position transmission; Go to step 33.
• 5-position transmission: Go t o step 38.
NO—Go to step 29.
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the w i r e
between PCM connector terminal C9 and the
transmission range switch, then go t o step 48.
N O — G o t o step 52.
(cont'd)
14-91
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
33. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 9 and No. 10.
34. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
35. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A T P 2-1 (BRN)
I
36. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
37. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C11 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
[ G N D (BLK)
®
Wire side of female terminals
u/
i
1 2
4 5 6 7
/ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 1B 20 n 21 22
ATP 2-1 (BRN)
/
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 38.
Wire side of female terminals
N O — G o t o step 34.
Is there continuity
?
YES—Repair short t o body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C11 and the
transmission range switch, then go to step 48.
N O — G o t o step 52.
14-92
Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 10.
39. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
40. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
TRANSMISSION R A N G E
SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP F W D (YEL/RED)
41. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
42. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C18 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C
10
7
G N D (BLK)
1 2
Wire side of female
/
/
terminals
u/
4
5
i
6
(22P)
7
9 10 11 12 13 1 4 15
1 7 18 19 20
n 21 22
ATP F W D (BLU/YEL)
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 43.
Wire side of female
terminals
N O — G o t o step 39.
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C18 and the
transmission range switch, then go t o step 48.
N O — G o t o step 52.
(cont'd)
14-93
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
43. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 1 and No. 10.
44. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
45. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP RVS
46. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
47. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C12 and body ground.
n
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9 10
G N D
(BLK)
5
(\
1
PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
I
1
/
/
Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery
2
9
17
u/
i
4 5 6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
18 19 2 3 n 21 22
ATP RVS (YEL)
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 52.
Wire side of female terminals
N O — G o t o step 44.
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C12 and the
transmission range switch, then go t o step 48.
NO—Go t o step 52.
14-94
48. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
49. Start the engine.
50. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
51. Monitor the OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
YES—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •
NO—Check for intermittent short t o body ground in
the wire between the transmission range switch
and the PCM, then go to step 1.
52. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
53. Start the engine.
54. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
55. Monitor the OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
YES—If the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-198). •
NO—If the PCM was updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go t o step 53. If the PCM was substituted,
check for intermittent short t o body ground in the
wire between the transmission range switch and
the PCM, then go t o step 1 and recheck. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 53.
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0796: O p e n in T r a n s m i s s i o n R a n g e
Switch Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
• Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies t o the
7-position transmission.
• Information marked w i t h a double asterisk (* *)
applies t o the 5-position transmission.
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels t o
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
until the vehicle speed reaches 35 m p h (56 km/h),
then slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
until the vehicle speed reaches 35 mph (56 km/h),
then slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
11. Monitor the OBD status for P0706 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
Y E S — G o t o step 12.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
10 and recheck. B
12. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
13. Shift to the D position, and verify the ATP FWD and
ATP D inputs w i t h the HDS in the A/T data list.
Are ATP FWD and ATP
4. Monitor the OBD status for P0706 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
3 and recheck. •
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-254).
FAILED?
DON?
Y E S — G o t o step 14.
NO—Go to step 19.
14. Shift to the D3 * (S * *) position, and verify the ATP
FWD and ATP D3* (ATPS**) inputs with the HDS in
the A/T data list.
Are ATP FWD and ATP D3* (ATPS**)
Y E S — G o t o step 15.
NO—Go to step 19.
15. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is the switch
OK ?
Y E S — G o t o step7.
NO—Replace the transmission range switch
(see page 14-256), then go t o step 26.
7. Adjust the shift cable (see page 14-249).
8. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
14-96
ON?
17. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
until the vehicle speed reaches 35 mph (56 km/h),
then slow down and stop the wheels.
18. Monitor the OBD status for P0706 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
23. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 10.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
FAILED?
ATP F W D (YEL/RED)
Y E S — G o to step 19.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
17 and recheck. •
7
10
G N D (BLK)
Wire side of female
terminals
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there battery
20. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 24.
21. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
transmission range switch and PCM connector
terminal C18, then go to step 26.
24. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 8 and No. 10.
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9 10
5
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
G N D (BLK)
Wire side of female
terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A T P D (PNK)
Is there
G N D (BLK)
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 22.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
transmission range switch and ground (G101)
(see page 22-16), or repair poor ground (G101)
then go to step 26.
Wire side of female
Is there battery
terminals
voltage?
;
Y E S - G o t o step 25.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the
transmission range switch and PCM connector
terminal C17, then go t o step 26.
(cont'd)
14-97
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
25. Measure voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. 3 and No. 10.
27. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a hoist.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP 03*, ATP S**
(BLU)
1 2 3
6
7
8
4
28. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
until the vehicle speed reaches 35 m p h (56 km/h),
then slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
5
9 10
26. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
1
GND (BLK)
29. Monitor the OBD status for P0706 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu f o r a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
Wire side of female terminals
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. H
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S — G o t o step 30.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
transmission range switch and PCM connector
terminal C9, then go t o step 26.
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the transmission range switch and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
30. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
3 1 . Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a h o i s t
32. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
until the vehicle speed reaches 35 m p h (56 km/h),
then slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
33. Monitor the OBD status for P0706 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu f o r a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-198). •
NO—If the PCM was updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go t o step 3 1 . If the PCM w a s substituted,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the transmission range switch and the PCM, then
go t o step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 3 1 .
14-98
D T C P0711: Problem in A T F Temperature
S e n s o r Circuit
4. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR w i t h the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
1. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR w i t h the HDS in the
A/T data list.
Does the ATF temperature
temperature?
exceed
the ambient
YES—Record the ATF temperature. Leave the
engine off for more than 30 minutes, then go to
step 2.
air
Does the ATF temperature
the ECT
SENSOR?
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. •
NO—Replace ATF temperature sensor (see page
14-224), then go to step 5.
5. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
7. Monitor the OBD status for P0711 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
NO—Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall
speed RPM (see page 14-204) three times. G o t o
step 2 after stall speed testing.
read about the same as
PASSED?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. HI
N O — G o t o step 8.
2. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR w i t h the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature
change?
YES—Leave the engine off for more than
30 minutes, then go to step 3.
NO—Replace the ATF temperature sensor
(see page 14-224), then go to step 5.
8. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
9. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
10. Monitor the OBD status for P0711 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
3. Check the ECT SENSOR with the HDS.
Does the result indicate
Does the ECT SENSOR
read about the same as
the ambient air
temperature?
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Leave the engine off until the ECT SENSOR
reads the same as the ambient air temperature,
then go to step 4.
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-198). •
NO—If the PCM was updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go to step 9. If the PCM w a s substituted,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 9.
14-99
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0712: Short In A T F T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Circuit
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
6. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
7. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS
CONNECTOR
1. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage w i t h the
HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the ATF TEMP
less?
SENSOR
voltage
0.07 V or
ATFT
(RED/YEL)
Y E S — G o to step 2.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for an intermittent short in the ATFT
wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM.B
Wire side of female
Is there
2. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector at
the shift solenoid valve cover.
3. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage w i t h the
HDS.
Is the ATF TEMP
less?
SENSOR
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
N O — G o t o step 8.
14-100
voltage 0.07 V or
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C14 and shift
solenoid harness connector terminal No. 6, then go
to step 9.
N O — G o t o step 8.
Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector,
and check for continuity between shift solenoid
harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
SHIFT S O L E N O I D HARNESS CONNECTOR
l
1
2
5
6
1
/ /
7
9. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
10. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
11. Monitor the OBD status for P0712 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
8
ATFT (WHT)
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Check for intermittent short to body ground in
the wire between the ATF temperature sensor and
the PCM, then go t o step 1.
Terminal side of male
Is there
terminals
continuity?
12. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
YES—Replace the ATF temperature sensor
(see page 14-224), then go t o step 9.
13. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
N O — G o t o step 12.
14. Monitor the OBD status for P0712 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . •
NO—If the PCM w a s updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then g o t o step 13. If the PCM was substituted,
check for intermittent short to body ground in the
wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 13.
14-101
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0713: O p e n in ATF T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Circuit
7. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
8. R e m o v e t h e j u m p e r w i r e f r o m t h e s h i f t s o l e n o i d
harness connector.
NOTE:
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record allfreeze data a n d
9. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page
14-3).
• T h i s c o d e isc a u s e d b y a n electrical circuit problem
10. M e a s u r e v o l t a g e b e t w e e n s h i f t s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
connector terminal No.6 and body ground.
a n d c a n n o t be c a u s e d b y a m e c h a n i c a l p r o b l e m in t h e
transmission.
SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. C h e c k t h e A T F T E M P S E N S O R v o l t a g e w i t h t h e
H D S i n t h e A / T d a t a list.
Does the ATF TEMP
4.93 V?
SENSOR
voltage
exceed
1
2
5
6
/
/
7
8
ATFT (RED/YEL)
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 2.
N O — I n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e , t h e s y s t e m i s OK a t t h i s
time. C h e c k for poor c o n n e c t i o n s o r l o o s e t e r m i n a l s
at t h e A T F t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r a n d t h e P C M . •
Wire side o f female
terminals
2. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O F F .
Is there about 5 V?
3. D i s c o n n e c t t h e s h i f t s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s c o n n e c t o r .
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 11.
4.
C o n n e c t shift s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l s
N O — G o t o s t e p 16.
No. 6 and No. 7 with a j u m p e r wire.
SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
11.
T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h O F F .
12. J u m p t h e S C S l i n e w i t h t h e H D S .
/
/
1
2
5
6
7
13. D i s c o n n e c t t h e P C M c o n n e c t o r A (31P).
8
14. C o n n e c t s h i f t s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s c o n n e c t o r t e r m i n a l
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
ATFT (RED/YEL)
No. 7 and body ground with a j u m p e r wire.
JUMPER WIRE
SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
Wire side of female
terminals
5. T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
1
2
5
6
Does the ATF TEMP
4.93 V?
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 7.
N O — G o t o s t e p 17.
14-102
SENSOR
8
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
6. C h e c k t h e A T F T E M P S E N S O R v o l t a g e w i t h t h e
H D S i n t h e A / T d a t a list.
/
7
JUMPER WIRE
voltage
exceed
Wire side of female
terminals
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A23 and body ground.
PCM
CONNECTOR A
(31P)
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18. Replace the ATF temperature sensor (see page
14-224).
19. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
1 | 2 | 3 |4 | 5
10
/
23 24
SG2
13 14 15 16
n/
|I_J|
6 | 7
/
/ n/
18
28
(GRN/BLK)
/
/
8 | 9
20 21
30 31
20. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
21. Monitor the OBD status for P0713 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
Wire side of female
PASSED?
terminals
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
Is there
continuity?
N O — G o t o step 22.
Y E S — G o to step 2 2 .
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
terminal A23 and the ATF temperature sensor, then
g o t o step 19.
16. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
C14 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C
1
/
/
2 u
/
4
i
6
5
17 18 19 20 n
23. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
24. Monitor the OBD status for P0713 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
(22P)
Does the result indicate
7
Y E S — I f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-198). •
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ATFT
22. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
21 2 2
PASSED?
(RED/YEL)
Wire side of female
terminals
NO—If the PCM was updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go t o step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 23.
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Repair open in the wire between PCM
terminal C22 and the ATF temperature sensor, then
g o t o step 19.
N O - G o t o step 22.
14-103
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0716: P r o b l e m i n I n p u t S h a f t
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
NOTE;
• Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board s n a p s h o t and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A8 and body ground, and between
terminal A9 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
Check: for proper
prope input shaft (mainshaft) speed
senso r installation (see page 14-220).
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 6 | 7 |U| 8 | 9
10
18
13 14 15 16
20 21
23 24
30 31
28
3. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels t o
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a hoist.
/
4. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds. Slow d o w n
and stop the wheels.
//
n/
/
/
n/
Wire side of female
Is there
/
/
terminals
continuity?
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0716 in the DTCs/
Y E S — G o t o step 10.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
PCM and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to step 4 and recheck. •
14-104
NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals A8, A9, and ground (G101)
(see page 22-16), or repair poor ground (G101),
then go to step 33.
10. Connect PCM connector A (31P).
14. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals A20 and A9.
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector.
PCM
C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
LG1
1 | 2 | 3 |
10
/
23 24
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
4 | 5 6 | 7 |U|
15 16
18
13 14
n/
/ /
/ n/ /
28
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
8 |
20
9
21
33 31
(YEL/BLU)
Wire side of female
VCC2
(BRN/YEL)
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM connector
terminal A20, then go to step 33.
Wire side o f female
terminals
N O — G o t o step 15.
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 18.
N O — G o t o step 14.
(cont'd)
14-105
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Disconnect the PCM connector A {31P).
19. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A20 and body ground.
20. Check for continuity between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A
(31P)
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R
1 I 2 I 3 I4 I 5
10
/
23 2 4
13 14 15
n/
/
6
|7|U|8
16
18
n
28
Wire side of female
/
/
CONNECTOR
| 9
20 21
3D
31
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
NM
terminals
Wire side of female
Is there
(WHT/RED)
terminals
continuity?
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and PCM connector terminal A20 then go to step
33.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C19 and the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go t o step 33.
N O — G o t o step 36.
N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
#
14-106
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A23 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 3.
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR A ( 3 i P )
22. Connect PCM connector C (22P).
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
INPUT SHAFT
1 | 2 | 3 |4 | 5
10
6
|7|U|
/ /
n
n
/
/
/ /
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
/
13 14 15 16
23 24
C O N N E C T O R
8 | 9
18
20 21
28
30 31
1
SG2
1
(GRN/BLK)
NM
Wire side of female
Is there
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R
(WHT/RED) |
|S G 2
(GRN/BLK)
terminals
continuity?
Wire side of female
terminals
Y E S — G o to step 22.
Is there about 5 V?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM connector
terminal A23, then go to step 33.
Y E S — G o t o step 27.
N O — G o t o step 25.
(cont'd)
14-107
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C19 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 2.
28. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
S P E E D
S E N S O R
CONNECTOR
30. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals C19 and A9.
PCM
5
6
C O N N E C T O R S
7
10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20
NM
n
21 2 2
NM
1
(WHT/RED)
/
(WHT/RED)
/
Wire side of female
2 u
/
4
5
i
6
7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20
NM
n 21 2 2
(WHT/RED)
terminals
LG1
Is there
continuity?
1 | 2 | 3 |4 | 5
Y E S — G o t o step 36.
6|7|U| 8| 9
//
/ /
/
n/ / n/ /
13 14 15 16
10
2 3 24
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C19 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 33.
Wire side of female
18
20 21
28
30 31
terminals
Is the voltage 0 V or about 5 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 3 1 .
NO—Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 33.
14-108
3 1 . Shift to the P position. Start the engine, and let it
idle.
3 2 . W i t h the engine idling, measure voltage between
PCM connector terminals C19 and A9.
PCM CONNECTORS
1
/
/
2
u/
4
5
6
Does the result indicate
7
/
17 18 19 20
N M
n 21 2 2
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
(WHT/RED)
6|7
13 14 15 16
n/
/
|U| 8 | 9
A /
nA
Wire side of female
Is there 1.5-3.5
PASSED?
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 | 2 | 3 |4 | 5
23 24
34. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
(48 km/h) f o r more than 10 seconds.
35. Monitor the OBD status for P0716 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
LG1
10
33. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
18
28
/
20 21
30 31
terminals
V?
Y E S — G o to step 36.
NO—Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 33.
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
36. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
37. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
38. Monitor the OBD status for P0716 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — l f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 1 1 - 1 9 8 ) . •
NO—If the PCM w a s updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go t o step 37. If the PCM was substituted,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM, then go t o step 1 and recheck. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 37.
14-109
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting fcont'd)
D T C P0717: Problem in Input Shaft
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal
Input)
7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A8 and body ground, and between
terminal A9 and body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
2. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor installation (see page 14-220).
1|
10
/
3. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a hoist.
4. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 m p h
(48 km/h) f o r more than 10 seconds. S l o w d o w n
and stop the wheels.
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0717 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
PCM and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to step 4 and recheck. •
14-110
/
2 | 3 |
23
/
24
4 | 5 6 | 7 |U| 8 | 9
15 16 A 18
20 21
30 31
28
13 14
n/
/
n/
Wire side of female
Is there
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
/
/
terminals
continuity?
YES—Goto step 10.
NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals A8, A9, and ground (G101)
(see page 22-16), or repair poor ground (G101),
then go t o step 33.
10. Connect PCM connector A (31P).
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector.
14. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals A20 and A9.
PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (ll).
13. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
LG1
(BRN/YEL)
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 6 j T [L_l| 8 I 9
13 14 15 16
20 21
10
18
23 24
28
3D 31
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
/
/
n/ / n/
/
/
Wire side of female terminals
1
: VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM connector
terminal A20, then go t o step 33.
Wire side of female terminals
N O — G o t o step 15.
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Goto step 18.
N O — G o t o step 14.
(cont'd)
14-111
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Disconnect the PCM connector A (31P).
19. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A20 and body ground.
20. Check for continuity between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
PCM
CONNECTOR A
(31P)
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 6 | 7 |U| 8 | 9
18
20 21
10
13 14 15 16
3D 31
23 24
28
VCC2
/
/
/
n/
/ n/
Wire side of female
/
/
CONNECTOR
3
(YEL/BLU)
NM
terminals
W i r e side of female
Is there
(WHT/RED)
terminals
continuity?
Is there
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and PCM connector terminal A20, then go to step
33.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C19 and input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 33.
N O — G o t o step 36.
NO—Go to step 21.
14-112
21. C h e c k for continuity b e t w e e n P C M c o n n e c t o r
22. C o n n e c t P C M c o n n e c t o r C (22P).
terminal A 2 3 a n d input shaft (mainshaft) s p e e d
2 3 . T u r n t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II).
s e n s o r connector terminal No. 3.
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
24.
M e a s u r e voltage b e t w e e n input shaft (mainshaft)
s p e e d s e n s o r connector terminals No. 2 a n d No. 3.
CONNECTOR
1 I2I3 I4 I 5 6 |7|U|8 | 9
18
10
13 14 15 16
20 21
30 31
23 24
28
/
SG2
/
/
/
/
n
n
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R C O N N E C T O R
/
/
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
(GRN/BLK)
1
2
N M (WHT/RED) |
W i r e side o f female
Is there
3
| SG2
(GRN/BLK)
terminals
continuity?
Wire side o f female
terminals
YES—Goto step 22.
Is there about 5 V?
N O — R e p a i r o p e n in t h e w i r e b e t w e e n t h e input
shaft (mainshaft) s p e e d s e n s o r a n d P C M connector
YES—Goto step27.
terminal A 2 3 , then go to step 33.
NO—Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
14-113
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C19 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 2.
28. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
PCM
i
u/
1 2
4 5 6 7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
/ 17 18 19 20 21 22
z
30. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals C19 and A9.
MM
1
n
2
3
C O N N E C T O R S
u/
/
(WHT/RED)
/
W i r e side o f female
i
4 5 6 7
1 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20
21 22
M IV/I / \ A
NM
n
(WHT/RED)
terminals
LG1
Is there
continuity?
YES—Goto step 36.
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C19 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go t o step 33.
A
(31P)
1
10
6 | 7|U| 8 | 9
I 2 | 13
3 |4 | 5
14 15 16
18
20 21
/
23 24
n/
/ /
/ n / 28 /
Wire side of female
30 31
terminals
Is the voltage 0 V or about 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 3 1 .
NO—Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 33.
14-114
<3®
31. Shift to the P position. Start the engine, and let it
idle.
32. With the engine idling, measure voltage between
PCM connector terminals C19 and A9.
PCM CONNECTORS
1 2
4 5 6 7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18 19 20
21 22
/
/
Does the result indicate
n
1 I2I3 |4 I 5 6
13 14 15 16
10
23 24
n/
/
I
/
n/
Wire side of female
Is there 1.5-3.5
PASSED?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
MM ( W H T / R E D )
LG1
/
34. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 m p h
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
35. Monitor the OBD status f o r P0717 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
!
u/
33. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
|l l| S |
T
18
28
/
/
20 21
30 31
9
terminals
V?
YES—Go to step 36.
NO—Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 33.
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM, then g o t o step 1.
36. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
37. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 m p h
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
38. Monitor the OBD status f o r P0717 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
YES—If the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-198). •
NO—If the PCM w a s updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go to step 37. If the PCM w a s substituted,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 37.
14-115
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0718; I n p u t S h a f t ( M a i n s h a f t ) S p e e d
S e n s o r I n t e r m i t t e n t Failure
6. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
NOTE;
• Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board s n a p s h o t and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
8. Monitor the OBD status for P0718 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu f o r a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
FAILED?
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o to step 9.
2. Test-drive the vehicle f o r several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, return t o step 7 and
recheck. •
3. Monitor the OBD status for P0718 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
FAILED?
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 4.
11. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
to step 2 and recheck. •
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A8 and body ground, and between
terminal A9 and body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector
terminals
1 I
2I
10
23
4 I5
13 14 15
3 I
/24
n/
/
6 |7
/
n/
16
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
|U| 8
/
28
/
18
| 9
20
21
30 31
OK?
Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO—Repair the connector terminals, then go t o
step 6.
Wire side of female
Is there
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 13.
NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals A8, A9, and ground (G101)
(see page 22-16), or repair poor ground (G101),
then go to step 29.
14-116
13. Connect PCM connector A (31P).
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector.
18. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Check for continuity between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
16. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R CONNECTOR
(MAINSHAFT)
INPUT SHAFT
SPEED S E N S O R
CONNECTOR
NM
3
1
VCC2
(WHT/RED)
(YEL/BLU)
Wire side of female
Wire side of female
terminals
Is there
terminals
continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 17.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal C19 and the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go
to step 29.
N O — G o t o step 25.
N O — G o t o step 20.
Is there about 5 V?
(cont'd)
14-117
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Connect PCM connector C (22P).
23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C19 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 2.
22. Measure voltage between input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
PCM C O N N E C T O R C
(22P)
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R CONNECTOR
11
17
NM
18
(WHT/RED)
19
12 13 14 15
20
21 22
NM
n
terminals
Is there
NM
(WHT/RED)
(WHT/RED)
Wire side of female
Wire side of female
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R
CONNECTOR
terminals
continuity?
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Goto step32.
YES—Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor (see page 14-220), then go t o step 29.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between PCM
connector terminal C19 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 29.
N O — G o t o step 23.
14-118
25. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals A20 and A9.
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
27. Disconnect the PCM connector A (31P).
PCM CONNECTOR A ( 3 1 P )
LG1
r
28. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A20 and body ground.
(BRN/YEL]
i
1 |2|3|4 | 5 6 |7|U| 8 | 9
18
20 21
10
13 14 15 16
23 24
28
3D 31
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
/ n/ n/
/ /
Wire side of female
A
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
i
1 |2 |3 |4 | 5 6 |7 |U| 8 | 9
10
13 14 15 16
18
20 21
3D 31
23 24
28
/
n/ / n/
/
/
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
terminals
Is there about 5 V?
Wire side of female
YES—Repair open in the wire between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM connector
terminal A20, then go to step 29.
N O — G o t o step 26.
Is there
terminals
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
and PCM connector terminal A20, then go to step
29.
N O — G o t o step 32.
(cont'd)
14-119
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
29. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
30. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
3 1 . Monitor the OBD status f o r POT 18 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM, then go t o step 1.
32. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
33. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears.
34. Monitor the OBD status for P0718 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
YES—lf the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-198). •
NO—If the PCM was updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go to step 33. If the PCM was substituted,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the
PCM, then go t o step 1 and recheck. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 33.
14-120
D T C P0721: Problem i n O u t p u t S h a f t
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A8 and body g r o u n d , and between
terminal A9 and body ground.
PCM C O N N E C T O R A
(31P)
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
2. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor installation (see page 14-221).
1 | 2 | 3 |4 |
10
3. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels t o
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a hoist.
23 24
4. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
than 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0721 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
/
13 14
/
n/ / n / /
W i r e side of female
Is there
|LJ|
5 6 |T
15 16
18
/
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
28
8| 9
20 21
30 31
terminals
continuity?
YES—Goto step 10.
Does the result indicate
FAILED?
YES—Goto step 6.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
PCM and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 4 and recheck. •
NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals A8, A9, and ground (G101)
(see page 22-16), or repair a poor ground (G101),
then go t o step 33.
(cont'd)
14-121
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Connect PCM connector A (31P).
11. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector.
14. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals A21 and A9.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Measure voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground.
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
LG1
(BRN/YEL)
|l l| 8 |
1 | 2 |3 |4 | 5 6 |7
18
10
13 14 15 16
23 24
28
/
n/
/
/ n/
VCC1
9
A 20 21
A 30 c1
(YEL/RED)
Wire side of female terminals
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
Is there about 5 ¥?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and PCM
connector terminal A 2 1 , then go to step 33.
Wire side of female terminals
N O — G o t o step 15.
Is thereabouts
V?
Y E S — G o t o step 18.
N O — G o t o step 14.
14-122
15. Turn the Ignition switch OFF.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Disconnect the PCM connector A (31P).
19. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A21 and body ground.
20. Check for continuity between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
1 I 2 I 3 I4 I 5
10
/
23 24
6 |7
|U|
/ /
n/ /
/
/
n
13 14 15 16
VCC1
Wire side of female
O U T P U T SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED S E N S O R
CONNECTOR
8 | 9
18
20 21
28
30 31
(YEL/RED)
NC
terminals
Wire side of female
Is there
(BLK/BLU)
terminals
continuity?
Is there
YES—Repair short to body ground in the w i r e
between the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and PCM connector terminal A 2 1 , then go t o
step 33.
continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal A18 and output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step
33.
N O — G o t o step 36.
N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
14-123
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
2 1 . Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A24 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 3.
PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
1
2
3
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 6 | 7 |U| 8 | 9
10
13 14 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 n
28 30 31
n
/
SGI
(GRN/WHT)
//
SG1
//
(GRN/WHT)
22. Connect PCM connector A (31P).
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
24. Measure voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
/
/
1
NC ( B L K / B L U ) |
Is there continuity
| S G I (GRN/WHT)
<2>
Wire side of female terminals
?
Wire side of female terminals
YES—Go t o step 22.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and PCM
connector terminal A24, then go to step 33.
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 27.
N O — G o t o step 25.
14-124
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
26. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A18 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 2.
28. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector.
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
O U T P U T S H A F T
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
1
J2
| 3
4
I5
23
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (31P)
TIJPIT
13 14 15 16
10
NC
I
30. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals A18 and A9.
18
20 21
30 31
24
(BLK/BLU)
NC
(BLK/BLU)
LG1
1 | 2 | 3 |4 | 5
Wire side of female
terminals
23 24
n/
NC
Is there
6 I7 |U| 8 I 9
13 14 15 16
10
(BRN/YEL)
/ /
18
/ n/ /
23
20 21
30 31
(BLK/BLU)
continuity?
Wire side of female
terminals
YES—Goto step 36.
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A18 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go t o step 33.
Is the voltage 0 V or about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 3 1 .
NO—Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor, then go t o step 33.
(cont'd)
14-125
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
3 1 . Shift t o the P position. Start the engine, and let it
idle.
32. Shift t o the D position, and allow the wheels t o
rotate, measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals A18 and A9.
33. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
34. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
w i t h engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
than 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
35. Monitor the OBD status for P0721 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
PCM CONNECTOR A (31P)
Does the result indicate
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
i—
i
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I 5 6 | 7 |U| 8 | 9
10 / / 13 14 15 16 / ie / 20 21
/ 23 24
/ /
/ 2E1 / 30 31
n
NC
n
Is there 1.5-3.5
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
d
(BLK/BLU)
Wire side of female
PASSED?
terminals
V?
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
the PCM, then go to step 1.
36. Update the PCM if it does not have latest software
(see page 14-7), or substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 14-8).
Y E S — G o t o step 36.
37. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
w i t h the engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
than 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
NO—Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 33.
38. Monitor the OBD status for P0721 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate
PASSED?
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-198).•
NO—If the PCM was updated and screen indicates
FAILED, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
14-8), then go to step 37. If the PCM was substituted,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at
the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
the PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 37.
14-126
D T C P0722: P r o b l e m i n O u t p u t Shaft
( C o u n t e r s h a f t ) S p e e d S e n s o r Circuit (No
Signal Input)
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A8 and body g r o u n d , and between
terminal A9 and body g r o u n d .
PCM C O N N E C T O R A
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
2. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor installation (see page 14-221).
1 |
YES—Goto step 6.
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
6 |7 |U| 8 | 9
18
20 21
30 31
28
Wire side of female
Is there
FAILED?
| 3 |4 | 5
/23 /24 13 14 15 16 /
/
n/ / n /
4. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
w i t h engine speed 2,000 rpm or hi